US20130058228A1 - Network virtualization apparatus and method - Google Patents
Network virtualization apparatus and method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20130058228A1 US20130058228A1 US13/177,533 US201113177533A US2013058228A1 US 20130058228 A1 US20130058228 A1 US 20130058228A1 US 201113177533 A US201113177533 A US 201113177533A US 2013058228 A1 US2013058228 A1 US 2013058228A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- nib
- data
- network
- logical
- switching elements
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0893—Assignment of logical groups to network elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0895—Configuration of virtualised networks or elements, e.g. virtualised network function or OpenFlow elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F15/00—Digital computers in general; Data processing equipment in general
- G06F15/16—Combinations of two or more digital computers each having at least an arithmetic unit, a program unit and a register, e.g. for a simultaneous processing of several programs
- G06F15/163—Interprocessor communication
- G06F15/173—Interprocessor communication using an interconnection network, e.g. matrix, shuffle, pyramid, star, snowflake
- G06F15/17306—Intercommunication techniques
- G06F15/17312—Routing techniques specific to parallel machines, e.g. wormhole, store and forward, shortest path problem congestion
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/46—Interconnection of networks
- H04L12/4633—Interconnection of networks using encapsulation techniques, e.g. tunneling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0803—Configuration setting
- H04L41/0813—Configuration setting characterised by the conditions triggering a change of settings
- H04L41/0816—Configuration setting characterised by the conditions triggering a change of settings the condition being an adaptation, e.g. in response to network events
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/085—Retrieval of network configuration; Tracking network configuration history
- H04L41/0853—Retrieval of network configuration; Tracking network configuration history by actively collecting configuration information or by backing up configuration information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0896—Bandwidth or capacity management, i.e. automatically increasing or decreasing capacities
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/12—Discovery or management of network topologies
- H04L41/122—Discovery or management of network topologies of virtualised topologies, e.g. software-defined networks [SDN] or network function virtualisation [NFV]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
- H04L45/02—Topology update or discovery
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
- H04L45/02—Topology update or discovery
- H04L45/036—Updating the topology between route computation elements, e.g. between OpenFlow controllers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
- H04L45/58—Association of routers
- H04L45/586—Association of routers of virtual routers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
- H04L45/76—Routing in software-defined topologies, e.g. routing between virtual machines
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L47/00—Traffic control in data switching networks
- H04L47/70—Admission control; Resource allocation
- H04L47/78—Architectures of resource allocation
- H04L47/783—Distributed allocation of resources, e.g. bandwidth brokers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/15—Interconnection of switching modules
- H04L49/1515—Non-blocking multistage, e.g. Clos
- H04L49/1546—Non-blocking multistage, e.g. Clos using pipelined operation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/30—Peripheral units, e.g. input or output ports
- H04L49/3063—Pipelined operation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L49/00—Packet switching elements
- H04L49/70—Virtual switches
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L61/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for addressing or naming
- H04L61/50—Address allocation
- H04L61/5007—Internet protocol [IP] addresses
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F11/00—Error detection; Error correction; Monitoring
- G06F11/07—Responding to the occurrence of a fault, e.g. fault tolerance
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L2101/00—Indexing scheme associated with group H04L61/00
- H04L2101/60—Types of network addresses
- H04L2101/618—Details of network addresses
- H04L2101/622—Layer-2 addresses, e.g. medium access control [MAC] addresses
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0894—Policy-based network configuration management
Definitions
- Networks have traditionally been managed through low-level configuration of individual components. Network configurations often depend on the underlying network: for example, blocking a user's access with an access control list (“ACL”) entry requires knowing the user's current IP address. More complicated tasks require more extensive network knowledge: forcing guest users' port 80 traffic to traverse an HTTP proxy requires knowing the current network topology and the location of each guest. This process is of increased difficulty where the network switching elements are shared across multiple users.
- ACL access control list
- SDN Software-Defined Networking
- a network controller running on one or more servers in a network, controls, maintains, and implements control logic that governs the forwarding behavior of shared network switching elements on a per user basis. Making network management decisions often requires knowledge of the network state.
- the network controller creates and maintains a view of the network state and provides an application programming interface upon which management applications may access a view of the network state.
- Some embodiments of the invention provide a system that allows several different logical data path sets to be specified for several different users through one or more shared network infrastructure switching elements (referred to as “switching elements” below).
- the system includes a set of software tools that allows the system to accept logical data path sets from users and to configure the switching elements to implement these logical data path sets. These software tools allow the system to virtualize control of the shared switching elements and the network that is defined by the connections between these shared switching elements, in a manner that prevents the different users from viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets (i.e., each other's switching logic) while sharing the same switching elements.
- one of the software tools that allows the system to virtualize control of a set of switching elements is an intermediate data storage structure that (1) stores the state of the network, (2) receives and records modifications to different parts of the network from different users, and (3), in some embodiments, provides different views of the state of the network to different users.
- the intermediate data storage structure is a network information base (NIB) data structure that stores the state of the network that is defined by one or more switching elements. The system uses this NIB data structure as an intermediate storage structure for reading the state of the network and writing modifications to the state of the network.
- NIB network information base
- the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set.
- the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB.
- the system has (1) a network operating system (NOS) to create and maintain the NIB storage structure, and (2) one or more applications that run on top of the NOS to specify logic for reading values from and writing values to the NIB.
- NOS network operating system
- the NOS of some embodiments also propagates the modification to the switching element.
- the system of different embodiments uses the NIB differently to virtualize access to the shared switching elements and network.
- the system provides different views of the NIB to different users in order to ensure that different users do not have direct view and control over each other's switching logic.
- the NIB is a hierarchical data structure that represents different attributes of different switching elements as elements (e.g., different nodes) in a hierarchy.
- the NIB in some of these embodiments is a multi-layer hierarchical data structure, with each layer having a hierarchical structure and one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on each layer linked to one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on another layer.
- the lowest layer elements correspond to the actual switching elements and their attributes, while each of the higher layer elements serve as abstractions of the actual switching elements and their attributes. As further described below, some of these higher layer elements are used in some embodiments to show different abstract switching elements and/or switching element attributes to different users in a virtualized control system.
- the definition of different NIB elements at different hierarchical levels in the NIB and the definition of the links between these elements are used by the developers of the applications that run on top of the NOS in order to define the operations of these applications. For instance, in some embodiments, the developer of an application running on top of the NOS uses these definitions to enumerate how the application is to map the logical data path sets of the user to the physical switching elements of the control system. Under this approach, the developer would have to enumerate all different scenarios that the control system may encounter as well as the mapping operation of the application for each scenario.
- This type of network virtualization (in which different views of the NIB are provided to different users) is referred to below as Type I network virtualization.
- Type II network virtualization Another type of network virtualization, which is referred to below as Type II network virtualization, does not require the application developers to have intimate knowledge of the NIB elements and the links (if any) in the NIB between these elements. Instead, this type of virtualization allows the application to simply provide user specified logical switching element attributes in the form of one or more tables, which are then mapped to NIB records by a table mapping engine.
- the Type II virtualized system of some embodiments accepts the logical switching element configurations (e.g., access control list table configurations, L2 table configurations, L3 table configurations, etc.) that the user defines without referencing any operational state of the switching elements in a particular network configuration. It then maps the logical switching element configurations to the switching element configurations stored in the NIB.
- the system of some embodiments uses a database table mapping engine to map input tables, which are created from (1) logical switching configuration attributes, and (2) a set of properties associated with switching elements used by the system, to output tables. The content of these output tables are then transferred to the NIB elements.
- the system uses a variation of the datalog database language, called nLog, to create the table mapping engine that maps input tables containing logical data path data and switching element attributes to the output tables.
- nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events.
- nLog provides a limited subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules.
- nLog virtualization engine also provides feedback (e.g., from one or more of the output tables or from NIB records that are updated to reflect values stored in the output tables) to the user in order to provide the user with state information about the logical data path set that he or she created. In this manner, the updates that the user gets are expressed in terms of the logical space that the user understand and not in terms of the underlying switching element states, which the user does not understand.
- nLog serves as a significant distinction between Type I virtualized control systems and Type II virtualized control systems, even for Type II systems that store user specified logical data path sets in the NIB. This is because nLog provides a machine-generated rules engine that addresses the mapping between the logical and physical domains in a more robust, comprehensive manner than the hand-coded approach used for Type I virtualized control systems.
- the application developers need to have a detailed understanding of the NIB structure and need to use this detailed understanding to write code that addresses all possible conditions that the control system would encounter at runtime.
- Type II control systems the application developers only need to produce applications that express the user-specified logical data path sets in terms of one or more tables, which are then mapped in an automated manner to output tables and later transferred from the output tables to the NIB.
- This approach allows the Type II virtualized systems not to maintain the data regarding the logical data path sets in the NIB.
- some embodiments maintain this data in the NIB in order to distribute this data among other NOS instances, as further described below.
- the applications that run on top of a NOS instance can perform several different sets of operations in several different embodiments of the invention.
- Examples of such operations include providing an interface to a user to access NIB data regarding the user's switching configuration, providing different layered NIB views to different users, providing control logic for modifying the provided NIB data, providing logic for propagating received modifications to the NIB, etc.
- the system embeds some or all such operations in the NOS instead of including them in an application operating on top of the NOS.
- the system separates some or all of these operations into different subsets of operations and then has two or more applications that operate above the NOS perform the different subsets of operations.
- One such system runs two applications on top of the NOS, a control application and a virtualization application.
- the control application allows a user to specify and populate logical data path sets, while the virtualization application implements the specified logical data path sets by mapping the logical data path set to the physical switching infrastructure.
- the virtualization application translates control application input into records that are written into the NIB, and from the NIB these records are then subsequently transferred to the switching infrastructure through the operation of the NOS.
- the NIB stores both the logical data path set input received through the control application and the NIB records that are produced by the virtualization application.
- control application can receive switching infrastructure data from the NIB.
- control application may modify record(s) associated with one or more logical data path sets (LDPS). Any such modified LDPS record would then be translated to one or more physical switching infrastructure records by the virtualization application, which might then be transferred to the physical switching infrastructure by the NOS.
- LDPS logical data path sets
- the NIB stores data regarding each switching element within the network infrastructure of a system, while in other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about only switching elements at the edge of a network infrastructure.
- edge switching elements are switching elements that have direct connections with the computing devices of the users, while non-edge switching elements only connect to edge switching elements and other non-edge switch elements.
- the system of some embodiments only controls edge switches (i.e., only maintains data in the NIB regarding edge switches) for several reasons.
- Controlling edge switches provides the system with a sufficient mechanism for maintaining isolation between computing devices, which is needed, as opposed to maintaining isolation between all switch elements, which is not needed.
- the interior switches forward data packets between the switching elements.
- the edge switches forward data packets between computing devices and other network elements (e.g., other switching elements).
- the system can maintain user isolation simply by controlling the edge switching elements because the edge switching elements are the last switches in line to forward packets to hosts.
- Controlling only edge switches also allows the system to be deployed independent of concerns about the hardware vendor of the non-edge switches. Deploying at the edge allows the edge switches to treat the internal nodes of the network as simply a collection of elements that moves packets without considering the hardware makeup of these internal nodes. Also, controlling only edge switches makes distributing switching logic computationally easier. Controlling only edge switches also enables non-disruptive deployment of the system. Edge switching solutions can be added as top of rack switches without disrupting the configuration of the non-edge switches.
- the network control system of some embodiments also utilizes and controls non-edge switches that are inserted in the switch network hierarchy to simplify and/or facilitate the operation of the controlled edge switches.
- the control system requires the switches that it controls to be interconnected in a hierarchical switching architecture that has several edge switches as the leaf nodes and one or more non-edge switches as the non-leaf nodes.
- each edge switch connects to one or more of the non-leaf switches, and uses such non-leaf switches to facilitate its communication with other edge switches.
- Examples of functions that such non-leaf switches provide to facilitate such communications between edge switches include (1) routing of a packet with an unknown destination address (e.g., unknown MAC address) to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can route this packet to the appropriate edge switch, (2) routing a multicast or broadcast packet to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can convert this packet to a series of unicast packets to the desired destinations, (3) bridging remote managed networks that are separated by one or more networks, and (4) bridging a managed network with an unmanaged network.
- an unknown destination address e.g., unknown MAC address
- Some embodiments employ one level of non-leaf (non-edge) switches that connect to edge switches and in some cases to other non-leaf switches.
- Other embodiments employ multiple levels of non-leaf switches, with each level of non-leaf switch after the first level serving as a mechanism to facilitate communication between lower level non-leaf switches and leaf switches.
- the non-leaf switches are software switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch.
- the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor. Irrespective of the manner by which the leaf and non-leaf switches are implemented, the NIB of the control system of some embodiments stores switching state information regarding the leaf and non-leaf switches.
- edge switches and non-edge switches may be referred to as managed switches. This is because these switches are managed by the network control system (as opposed to unmanaged switches, which are not managed by the network control system, in the network) in order to implement logical data path sets through the managed switches.
- the virtualized network-control system of some embodiments also stores other storage structures to store data regarding the switching elements of the network.
- These other storage structures are secondary storage structures that supplement the storage functions of the NIB, which is the primary storage structure of the system while the system operates.
- the primary purpose for one or more of the secondary storage structures is to back up the data in the NIB.
- one or more of the secondary storage structures serve a purpose other than backing up the data in the NIB (e.g., for storing data that are not in the NIB).
- the NIB is stored in system memory (e.g., RAM) while the system operates. This allows for fast access of the NIB records.
- system memory e.g., RAM
- one or more of the secondary storage structures are stored on disks, or other non-volatile memories, which are slower to access. Such non-volatile disks or other non-volatile memories, however, improve the resiliency of the system as they allow the data to be stored in a persistent manner.
- the system of some embodiments uses multiple types of storages in its pool of secondary storage structures. These different types of structures store different types of data, store data in different manners, and provide different query interfaces that handle different types of queries.
- the system uses a persistent transactional database (PTD) and a hash table structure.
- the PTD in some embodiments is a database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory.
- the PTD is a commonly available database, such as MySQL or SQLite.
- the PTD of some embodiments can handle complex transactional queries. As a transactional database, the PTD can undo a series of earlier query operations that it has performed as part of a transaction when one of the subsequent query operations of the transaction fails.
- some embodiments define a transactional guard processing (TGP) layer before the PTD in order to allow the PTD to execute conditional sets of database transactions.
- TGP transactional guard processing
- the TGP layer allows the PTD to avoid unnecessary later database operations when conditions of earlier operations are not met.
- the PTD in some embodiments stores the exact replica of the data that is stored in the NIB, while in other embodiments it stores only a subset of the data that is stored in the NIB. In some embodiments, some or all of the data in the NIB is stored in the PTD in order to ensure that the NIB data will not be lost in the event of a crash of the NOS or the NIB.
- the hash table of some embodiments is not stored on a disk or other non-volatile memory. Instead, it is a storage structure that is stored in volatile system memory when the system is running. When the system is powered down, the content of the hash table is stored on a disk or any other non-volatile memory.
- the hash table uses hashed indices that allow it to retrieve records in response to queries. This structure combined with the hash table's placement in the system's volatile memory allows the table to be accessed very quickly. To facilitate this quick access, a simplified query interface is used in some embodiments. For instance, in some embodiments, the hash table has just two queries, a Put query for writing values to the table and a Get query for retrieving values from the table.
- the system of some embodiments uses the hash table to store data that the NOS needs to retrieve very quickly. Examples of such data include network entity status, statistics, state, uptime, link arrangement, and packet handling information. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the NOS uses the hash tables as a cache to store information that is repeatedly queried, such as flow entries that will be written to multiple nodes.
- Some embodiments further improve the resiliency of the control system by having multiple instances of NOS running on one or more computers, with each instance of NOS containing one or more of the secondary storage structures described above.
- Each instance in some embodiments not only includes a NOS instance, but also includes a virtualization application instance and/or a control application instance.
- the control and/or virtualization applications partition the workload between the different instances in order to reduce each instance's control and/or virtualization workload.
- the multiple instances of NOS communicate the information stored in their secondary storage layers to enable each instance of NOS to cover for the others in the event of a NOS instance failing.
- some embodiments use the secondary storage layer (i.e., one or more of the secondary storages) as a channel for communicating between the different instances.
- the distributed, multi-instance control system of some embodiments maintains the same switch element data records in the NIB of each instance, while in other embodiments, the system allows NIBs of different instances to store different sets of switch element data records.
- Some embodiments that allow different instances to store different portions of the NIB divide the NIB into N mutually exclusive portions and store each NIB portion in one NIB of one of N controller instances, where N is an integer value greater than 1.
- Other embodiments divide the NIB into N portions and store different NIB portions in different controller instances, while allowing some or all of the portions to partially (but not completely) overlap with the other NIB portions.
- the hash tables in the distributed control system of some embodiments form a distributed hash table (DHT), with each hash table serving as a DHT instance.
- DHT distributed hash table
- the DHT instances of all controller instances collectively store one set of records that is indexed based on hashed indices for quick access. These records are distributed across the different controller instances to minimize the size of the records within each instance and to allow for the size of the DHT to be increased by adding other DHT instances.
- each DHT record is not stored in each controller instance. In fact, in some embodiments, each DHT record is stored in at most one controller instance.
- some embodiments allow one DHT record to be stored in more than one controller instance, so that in case one instance fails, the DHT records of that failed instance can be accessed from other instances.
- Some embodiments do not allow for replication of records across different DHT instances or allow only a small amount of such records to be replicated because the system of these embodiments stores in the DHT only the type of data that can be quickly re-generated.
- the distributed control system of some embodiments replicates each NIB record in the secondary storage layer (e.g., in each PTD instance and/or in the DHT) in order to maintain the records in the NIB in a persistent manner. For instance, in some embodiments, all the NIB records are stored in the PTD storage layer. In other embodiments, only a portion of the NIB data is replicated in the PTD storage layer. For instance, some embodiments store a subset of the NIB records in another one of the secondary storage records, such as the DHT.
- the system improves its overall resiliency by guarding against the loss of data due to the failure of any NOS or secondary storage structure instance.
- the portion of NIB data that is replicated in the PTD (which is all of the NIB data in some embodiments or part of the NIB data in other embodiments) is replicated in the NIBs and PTDs of all controller instances, in order to protect against failures of individual controller instances (e.g., of an entire controller instance or a portion of the controller instance).
- each of the storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different distribution technique to improve the resiliency of a multiple NOS instance system. For instance, as mentioned above, the system of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance. In some embodiments, the system distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small. This approach also allows the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances, and this in turn allows the system to be more scalable.
- the distributed system of some embodiments uses coordination managers (CM) in the controller instances to coordinate activities between the different controllers. Examples of such activities include writing to the NIB, writing to the PTD, writing to the DHT, controlling the switching elements, facilitating intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances, etc.
- CM coordination managers
- the distributed control system of some embodiments designates one controller instance within the system as the master of any particular NIB portion (e.g., as the master of a logical data path set) and one controller instance within the system as the master of any given switching element. Even with one master controller, a different controller instance can request changes to different NIB portions and/or to different switching elements controlled by the master. If allowed, the master instance then effectuates this change and writes to the desired NIB portion and/or switching element. Otherwise, the master rejects the request.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a virtualized network system of some embodiments.
- FIG. 2 illustrates an example of switch controller functionality of the network operating system (NOS) of some embodiments.
- NOS network operating system
- FIG. 3 illustrates an example of displaying different network information base (NIB) views to different users.
- NBI network information base
- FIG. 4 illustrates a virtualized system that employs control and virtualization applications.
- FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a virtualized system of some embodiments.
- FIG. 6 illustrates the switch infrastructure of a multi-tenant server hosting system in some embodiments.
- FIG. 7 illustrates a virtualized network control system that manages edge switches.
- FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a virtualized system that employs secondary storage structures that supplement the NIB's storage operations.
- FIG. 9 illustrates a multi-instance, distributed network control system of some embodiments.
- FIG. 10 illustrates an approach of maintaining an entire global NIB data structure in each NOS instance.
- FIG. 11 illustrates an alternative approach of dividing the global NIB into two separate portions, and storing each of these portions in a different NOS instance.
- FIG. 12 illustrates another alternative approach of dividing the global NIB into two separate portions having overlapping portions.
- FIG. 13 illustrates an example of specifying a master controller instance for a switch in a distributed system.
- FIG. 14 illustrates a particular distributed network control system of some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 15 conceptually illustrates a single NOS instance of some embodiments.
- FIG. 16 illustrates propagation of instructions to control a managed switch through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments.
- FIG. 17 illustrates propagation of instructions to control several managed switches through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a conceptual process that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs to convert logical data to physical data.
- FIG. 19 illustrates a virtualization application of some embodiments.
- FIG. 20 illustrates input and output tables of some embodiments.
- FIG. 21 illustrates a development process that some embodiments employ to develop the rules engine of the control application.
- FIG. 22 illustrates that the rules engine of some embodiments implements partitioned management of logical data path sets (LDPS′).
- LDPS′ logical data path sets
- FIG. 23 illustrates a conceptual process that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs each time a record in a RE input table changes.
- FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a set of join operations.
- FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a set of join operations failing when they relate to a LDPS that does not relate to an input table event that has occurred.
- FIG. 26 illustrates an example of reducing workloads on nLog instances.
- FIG. 27 illustrates a virtualization application of some embodiments.
- FIG. 28 illustrates a conceptual process that the control application of some embodiments performs to convert logical control plane data to logical forwarding data.
- FIG. 29 illustrates a control application of some embodiments.
- FIG. 30 illustrates the control and virtualization applications of some embodiments.
- FIG. 31 illustrates an integrated control/virtualization application of some embodiments.
- FIG. 32 conceptually illustrates an electronic system with which some embodiments of the invention are implemented.
- Some embodiments of the invention provide a method that allows several different logical data path sets to be specified for several different users through one or more shared switching elements without allowing the different users to control or even view each other's switching logic.
- the method provides a set of software tools that allows the system to accept logical data path sets from users and to configure the switching elements to implement these logical data path sets. These software tools allow the method to virtualize control of the shared switching elements and the network that is defined by the connections between these shared switching elements, in a manner that prevents the different users from viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets while sharing the same switching elements.
- one of the software tools that the method provides that allows it to virtualize control of a set of switching elements (i.e., to enable the method to allow several users to share the same switching elements without viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets) is an intermediate data storage structure that (1) stores the state of the network, (2) receives modifications to different parts of the network from different users, and (3), in some embodiments, provide different views of the state of the network to different users.
- the intermediate data storage structure is a network information base (NIB) data structure that stores the state of the network that is defined by one or more switching elements.
- the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set.
- the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB.
- the method uses the NIB data structure to read the state of the network and to write modifications to the state of the network.
- the data structure is modified in order to effectuate a change in the switching logic of a switching element, the method propagates the modification to the switching element.
- the method is employed by a virtualized network control system that (1) allows user to specify different logical data path sets, (2) maps these logical data path sets to a set of switching elements managed by the control system.
- the network infrastructure switching elements includes virtual or physical network switches, software switches (e.g., Open vSwitch), routers, and/or other switching devices, as well as any other network elements (such as load balancers, etc.) that establish connections between these switches, routers, and/or other switching devices.
- Such switching elements e.g., physical switching elements, such as physical switches or routers
- Software switches are switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch.
- the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor
- Switching elements are referred to below as managed switching elements or managed forwarding elements as they are managed by the network control system in order to implement the logical data path sets.
- the control system manages these switching elements by pushing physical control plane data to them, as further described below.
- Switching elements generally receive data (e.g., a data packet) and perform one or more processing operations on the data, such as dropping a received data packet, passing a packet that is received from one source device to another destination device, processing the packet and then passing it a destination device, etc.
- the physical control plane data that is pushed to a switching element is converted by the switching element (e.g., by a general purpose processor of the switching element) to physical forwarding plane data that specify how the switching element (e.g., how a specialized switching circuit of the switching element) processes data packets that it receives.
- the switching element e.g., by a general purpose processor of the switching element
- physical forwarding plane data that specify how the switching element (e.g., how a specialized switching circuit of the switching element) processes data packets that it receives.
- the virtualized control system of some embodiments includes (1) a network operating system (NOS) that creates and maintains the NIB storage structure, and (2) one or more applications that run on top of the NOS to specify control logic for reading values from and writing values to the NIB.
- NOS network operating system
- the NIB of some of these embodiments serves as a communication channel between the different controller instances and, in some embodiments, a communication channel between different processing layers of a controller instance.
- Section II describes the software architecture of a NOS instance.
- Section III further describes the control data pipeline of some embodiments of the invention.
- Section IV next describes how some embodiments perform the virtualization operations that map user specified input to data tuples in the NIB.
- Section V describes operations the control application of some embodiments performs.
- Section VI describes the computer systems and processes used to implement some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a virtualized network system 100 of some embodiments of the invention.
- This system allows multiple users to create and control multiple different sets of logical data paths on a shared set of network infrastructure switching elements (e.g., switches, virtual switches, software switches, etc.).
- network infrastructure switching elements e.g., switches, virtual switches, software switches, etc.
- the system does not allow the user to have direct access to another user's set of logical data paths in order to view or modify the other user's switching logic.
- the system does allow different users to pass packets through their virtualized switching logic to each other if the users desire such communication.
- the system 100 includes one or more switching elements 105 , a network operating system 110 , a network information base 115 , and one or more applications 120 .
- the switching elements include N switching devices (where N is a number equal to 1 or greater) that form the network infrastructure switching elements of the system 100 .
- the network infrastructure switching elements includes virtual or physical network switches, software switches (e.g., Open vSwitch), routers, and/or other switching devices, as well as any other network elements (such as load balancers, etc.) that establish connections between these switches, routers, and/or other switching devices. All such network infrastructure switching elements are referred to below as switching elements or forwarding elements.
- the virtual or physical switching devices 105 typically include control switching logic 125 and forwarding switching logic 130 .
- a switch's control logic 125 specifies (1) the rules that are to be applied to incoming packets, (2) the packets that will be discarded, and (3) the packet processing methods that will be applied to incoming packets.
- the virtual or physical switching elements 105 use the control logic 125 to populate tables governing the forwarding logic 130 .
- the forwarding logic 130 performs lookup operations on incoming packets and forwards the incoming packets to destination addresses.
- the system 100 includes one or more applications 120 through which switching logic (i.e., sets of logical data paths) is specified for one or more users (e.g., by one or more administrators or users).
- the network operating system (NOS) 110 serves as a communication interface between (1) the switching elements 105 that perform the physical switching for any one user, and (2) the applications 120 that are used to specify switching logic for the users. In this manner, the application logic determines the desired network behavior while the NOS merely provides the primitives needed to access the appropriate network state.
- the NOS 110 provides a set of Application Programming Interfaces (API) that provides the applications 120 programmatic access to the network switching elements 105 (e.g., access to read and write the configuration of network switching elements).
- this API set is data-centric and is designed around a view of the switching infrastructure, allowing control applications to read and write state to any element in the network.
- the NOS 110 needs to be able to control the switching elements 105 itself.
- the NOS uses different techniques in different embodiments to control the switching elements.
- the NOS can specify both control and forwarding switching logic 125 and 130 of the switching elements.
- the NOS 110 controls only the control switching logic 125 of the switching elements, as shown in FIG. 1 .
- the NOS 110 manages the control switching logic 125 of a switching element through a commonly known switch-access interface that specifies a set of APIs for allowing an external application (such as a network operating system) to control the control plane functionality of a switching element.
- OpenFlow Enabling Innovation in Campus Networks (which can be retrieved from http://www.openflowswitch.org//documents/openflow-wp-latest.pdf), and Pettit, J. (2010). Virtual Switching in an Era of Advanced Edges (which can be retrieved from http://openvswitch.org/papers/dccaves2010.pdf).
- FIG. 1 conceptually illustrates the use of switch-access APIs through the depiction of halos 135 around the control switching logic 125 .
- the NOS can read and write entries in the control plane flow tables.
- the NOS′ connectivity to the switching elements' control plane resources e.g., the control plane tables
- the NOS′ connectivity to the switching elements' control plane resources is implemented in-band (i.e., with the network traffic controlled by NOS) in some embodiments, while it is implemented out-of-band (i.e., over a separate physical network) in other embodiments.
- NOS network traffic controlled by NOS
- the NOS of some embodiments uses the Open Virtual Switch protocol to create one or more control tables within the control plane of a switch element.
- the control plane is typically created and executed by a general purpose CPU of the switching element.
- the system then writes flow entries to the control table(s) using the OpenFlow protocol.
- the general purpose CPU of the physical switching element uses its internal logic to convert entries written to the control table(s) to populate one or more forwarding tables in the forwarding plane of the switch element.
- the forwarding tables are created and executed typically by a specialized switching chip of the switching element. Through its execution of the flow entries within the forwarding tables, the switching chip of the switching element can process and route packets of data that it receives.
- the NOS also creates the network information base (NIB) 115 .
- the NIB is a data structure in which the NOS stores a copy of the switch-element states tracked by NOS.
- the NIB of some embodiments is a graph of all physical or virtual switch elements and their interconnections within a physical network topology and their forwarding tables. For instance, in some embodiments, each switching element within the network infrastructure is represented by one or more data objects in the NIB. However, in other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about only some of the switching elements. For example, as further described below, the NIB in some embodiments only keeps track of switching elements at the edge of a network infrastructure.
- the NIB stores state information about edge switching elements in a network as well as some non-edge switching elements in the network that facilitate communication between the edge switching elements. In some embodiments, the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set. In these embodiments, the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB.
- the NIB 115 is the heart of the NOS control model in the virtualized network system 100 .
- applications control the network by reading from and writing to the NIB.
- the application control logic can (1) read the current state associated with network entity objects in the NIB, (2) alter the network state by operating on these objects, and (3) register for notifications of state changes to these objects.
- the application 120 when an application 120 needs to modify a record in a table (e.g., a control plane flow table) of a switching element 105 , the application 120 first uses the NOS′ APIs to write to one or more objects in the NIB that represent the table in the NIB. The NOS then acting as the switching element's controller propagates this change to the switching element's table.
- FIG. 2 presents one example that illustrates this switch controller functionality of the NOS 110 .
- this figure illustrates in four stages the modification of a record (e.g., a flow table record) in a switch 205 by an application 215 and a NOS 210 .
- the switch 205 has two switch logic records 230 and 235 .
- a NIB 240 stores two records 220 and 225 that correspond to the two switch logic records 230 and 235 of the switch.
- the application uses the NOS′ APIs to write three new values d, e, and f in the record 220 of the NIB to replace three previous values a, b, and c.
- the NOS uses the set of switch-access APIs to write a new set of values into the switch.
- the NIB performs a translation operation that modifies the format of the records before writing these records into the NIB. These operations are pictorially illustrated in FIG. 2 by showing the values d,e,f translated into d′,e′,f′, and the writing of these new values into the switch 205 .
- one or more sets of values are kept identically in the NIB and the switching element, which thereby causes the NOS 210 to write the NIB values directly to the switch 205 unchanged.
- the NOS′ translation operation might modify the set of values in the NIB (e.g., the values d,e,f) into a different set of values with fewer values (e.g., values x and y, where x and y might be a subset of d, e, and f, or completely different) or additional values (e.g., the w,x,y,z, where w, x, y, and z might be a super set of all or some of d, e, and f, or completely different).
- the NOS in these embodiments would then write this modified set of values (e.g., values x and y, or values w, x, y and z into the switching element).
- the fourth stage finally shows the switch 205 after the old values a, b, and c have been replaced in the switch control record 230 with the values d′, e′, and f′.
- the NOS of some embodiments propagates NIB records to the switches as modified versions of the records were written to the NIB.
- the NOS applies processing (e.g., data transformation) to the NIB records before the NOS propagates the NIB records to the switches, and such processing changes the format, content and quantity of data written to the switches.
- the virtualized system 100 of FIG. 1 provides different views of the NIB to different users in order (1) to ensure that different users do not have direct view and control over each other's switching logic and (2) to provide each user with a view of the switching logic at an abstraction level that is desired by the user.
- the NIB is a hierarchical data structure that represents different attributes of different switching elements as elements (e.g., different nodes) in a hierarchy.
- the NIB in some of these embodiments is a multi-layer hierarchical data structure, with each layer having a hierarchical structure and one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on each layer linked to one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on another layer.
- the lowest layer elements correspond to the actual switching elements and their attributes, while each of the higher layer elements serves as abstractions of the actual switching elements and their attributes.
- some of these higher layer elements are used in some embodiments to show different abstract switching elements and/or switching element attributes to different users in a virtualized control system.
- the NOS of some embodiments generates the multi-layer, hierarchical NIB data structure, and the NOS or an application that runs on top of the NOS shows different users different views of different parts of the hierarchical levels and/or layers, in order to provide the different users with virtualized access to the shared switching elements and network.
- FIG. 3 illustrates an example of displaying different NIB views to different users.
- this figure illustrates a virtualized switching system 300 that includes several switching elements that are shared by two users.
- the system 300 is similar to the system 100 of FIG. 1 , except that the system 300 is shown to include four switching elements 105 a - 105 d and one application 120 , as opposed to the more general case of N switching elements 105 and M (where M is a number greater than or equal to 1) applications in FIG. 1 .
- the number of switching elements and the use of one application are purely exemplary. Other embodiments might use more or fewer switching elements and applications. For instance, instead of having the two users interface with the same application, other embodiments provide two applications to interface with the two users.
- the NIB 115 stores sets of data records for each of the switching elements 105 a - 105 d .
- a system administrator can access these four sets of data through an application 120 that interfaces with the NOS.
- other users that are not system administrators do not have access to all of the four sets of records in the NIB, because some switch logic records in the NIB might relate to the logical switching configuration of other users.
- FIG. 3 illustrates this limited view by showing the application 120 providing a first layered NIB view 345 to a first user 355 and a second layered NIB view 350 to a second user 360 .
- the first layered NIB view 345 shows the first user data records regarding the configuration of the shared switching elements 105 a - 105 d for implementing the first user's switching logic and the state of this configuration.
- the second layered NIB view 350 shows the second user data records regarding the configuration of the shared switching elements 105 a - 105 d for implementing the second user's switching logic and the state of this configuration. In viewing their own logical switching configuration, neither user can view the other user's logical switching configuration.
- each user's NIB view is a higher level NIB view that represents an abstraction of the lowest level NIB view that correlates to the actual network infrastructure that is formed by the switching elements 105 a - 105 d .
- the first user's layered NIB view 345 shows two switches that implement the first user's logical switching configuration
- the second user's layered NIB view 350 shows one switch that implements the second user's logical switching configuration. This could be the case even if either user's switching configuration uses all four switching elements 105 a - 105 d .
- the first user perceives that his computing devices are interconnected by two switching elements, while the second user perceives that her computing devices are interconnected by one switching element.
- the first layered NIB view is a reflection of a first set of data records 365 that the application 120 allows the first user to access from the NIB
- the second layered NIB view is a representation of a second set of data records 370 that the application 120 allows the second user to access from the NIB.
- the application 120 retrieves the two sets of data records 365 and 370 from the NIB and maintains these records locally, as shown in FIG. 3 . In other embodiments, however, the application does not maintain these two sets of data records locally. Instead, in these other embodiments, the application simply provides the users with an interface to access the limited set of first and second data records from the NIB 115 .
- the system 300 does not provide switching element abstractions in the higher layered NIB views 345 and 350 that it provides to the users. Rather, it simply provides views to the limited first and second set of data records 365 and 370 from the NIB.
- the application 120 serves as an interface through which each user can view and modify the user's logical switching configuration, without being able to view or modify the other user's logical switching configuration.
- the application 120 propagates to the NIB 115 changes that a user makes to the logical switching configuration view that the user receives from the application.
- the propagation of these changes entails the transferring, and in some cases of some embodiments, the transformation, of the high level data entered by a user for a higher level NIB view to lower level data that is to be written to lower level NIB data that is stored by the NOS.
- the application 120 can perform several different sets of operations in several different embodiments of the invention, as discussed above. Examples of such operations include providing an interface to a user to access NIB data regarding the user's logical switching configuration, providing different layered NIB views to different users, providing control logic for modifying the provided NIB data, providing logic for propagating received modifications to the NIB structure stored by the NOS, etc.
- FIG. 4 illustrates a virtualized system that employs several such applications. Specifically, this figure illustrates a virtualized system 400 that is similar to the virtualized system 300 of FIG. 3 , except that the operations of the application 120 in the system 400 have been divided into two sets of operations, one that is performed by a control application 420 and one that is performed by a virtualization application 425 .
- the virtualization application 425 interfaces with the NOS 110 to provide different views of different NIB records to different users through the control application 420 .
- the control application 420 also provides the control logic for allowing a user to specify different operations with respect to the limited NIB records/views provided by the virtualization application. Examples of such operations can be read operations from the NIB or write operations to the NIB.
- the virtualization application then translates these operations into operations that access the NIB. In translating these operations, the virtualization application in some embodiments also transfers and/or transforms the data that are expressed in terms of the higher level NIB records/views to data that are expressed in terms of lower level NIB records.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users
- the system 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users
- the system 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users
- the system 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users
- the system 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users
- the system 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users.
- FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being
- One type of virtualization application exposes the definition of different elements at different hierarchical levels in the NIB and the definition of the links between these elements to the control applications that run on top of the NOS and the virtualization application in order to allow the control application to define its operations by reference to these definitions. For instance, in some embodiments, the developer of the control application running on top of the virtualization application uses these definitions to enumerate how the application is to map the logical data path sets of the user to the physical switching elements of the control system. Under this approach, the developer would have to enumerate all different scenarios that the control system may encounter and the mapping operation of the application for each scenario.
- This type of virtualization is referred to below as Type I network virtualization.
- Type II network virtualization Another type of network virtualization, which is referred to below as Type II network virtualization, does not require the application developers to have intimate knowledge of the NIB elements and the links in the NIB between these elements. Instead, this type of virtualization allows the application to simply provide user specified switching element attributes in the form of one or more tables, which are then mapped to NIB records by a table mapping engine.
- the Type II virtualized system of some embodiments accepts switching element configurations (e.g., access control list table configurations, L2 table configurations, L3 table configurations, etc.) that the user defines without referencing any operational state of the switching elements in a particular network configuration. It then maps the user-specified switching element configurations to the switching element configurations stored in the NIB.
- switching element configurations e.g., access control list table configurations, L2 table configurations, L3 table configurations, etc.
- FIG. 5 illustrates an example of such a Type II virtualized system.
- the virtualized system 500 in this example is shown to include one NOS 110 and four switching elements 105 a - 105 d .
- the system 500 includes a control application 520 and a virtualization application 525 that run on top of the NOS 110 .
- the control application 520 allows a user to specify and populate logical data path sets, while the virtualization application 525 implements the specified logical data path sets by mapping the logical data path set to the physical switching infrastructure.
- control application 520 allows (1) a user to specify abstract switching element configurations, which the virtualization application 525 then maps to the data records in the NIB, and (2) the user to view the state of the abstract switching element configurations.
- the control application 520 uses a network template library 530 to allow a user to specify a set of logical data paths by specifying one or more switch element attributes (i.e., one or more switch element configurations).
- the network template library includes several types of tables that a switching element may include.
- the user has interfaced with the control application 520 to specify an L2 table 535 , an L3 table 540 , and an access control list (ACL) table 545 .
- ACL access control list
- These three tables specify a logical data path set 550 for the user.
- the user simply specifies desired switch configuration records for one or more abstract, logical switching elements.
- the user of the system 500 does not have any understanding of the switching elements 105 a - 105 d employed by the system or any data regarding these switching elements from the NIB 115 .
- the only switch-element specific data that the user of the system 500 receives is the data from the network template library, which specifies the types of network elements that the user can define in the abstract, which the system can then process.
- the switch-element abstractions provided by the library 530 are generic switch tables and do not relate to any specific switching element table, component and/or architecture.
- the control application 520 enables the user to create generic switch configurations for a generic set of one or more tables. Accordingly, the abstraction level of the switch-element attributes that the control application 520 allows the user to create is different in different embodiments.
- the virtualization application 525 performs a mapping operation that maps the specified switch-element attributes (e.g., the specific or generic switch table records) to records in the NIB.
- the virtualization application translates control application input into one or more NIB records 585 .
- the virtualization application then writes the resulting NIB records 585 to the NIB through the API set provided by NOS. From the NIB, these records are then subsequently transferred to the switching infrastructure through the operation of the NOS.
- the NIB stores both the logical data path set input received through the control application as well as the NIB records that are produced by the virtualization application.
- control application can receive switching infrastructure data from the NIB.
- control application may modify record(s) associated with one or more logical data path sets (LDPS). Any such modified LDPS record would then be translated to one or more physical switching infrastructure records by the virtualization application, which might then be transferred to the physical switching infrastructure by the NOS.
- LDPS logical data path sets
- the virtualization application uses a database table mapping engine to map input tables to output tables. These input tables are created from (1) the control-application specified input tables, and (2) a set of properties associated with switching elements used by the system. The content of these output tables are then transferred to the NIB elements.
- nLog uses a variation of the datalog database language to allow application developers to create the table mapping engine for the virtualization application, and thereby to specify the manner by which the virtualization application maps logical data path sets to the controlled physical switching infrastructure.
- This variation of the datalog database language is referred to below as nLog.
- nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events.
- nLog provides a limited subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules.
- nLog The declaratory rules and operations that are specified through nLog are then compiled into a much larger set of rules by an nLog compiler.
- this compiler translates each rule that is meant to address an event into several sets of database join operations.
- Collectively the larger set of rules forms the table mapping, rules engine that is referred to below as the nLog engine.
- the nLog mapping techniques of some embodiments is further described below.
- the nLog virtualization engine provides feedback (e.g., from one or more of the output tables or from NIB records that are updated to reflect values stored in the output tables) to the user in order to provide the user with state information about the logical data path set that he or she created.
- feedback e.g., from one or more of the output tables or from NIB records that are updated to reflect values stored in the output tables
- the updates that the user gets are expressed in terms of the logical space that the user understands and not in terms of the underlying switching element states, which is the user does not understand.
- nLog serves as a significant distinction between Type I virtualized control systems and Type II virtualized control systems, even for Type II systems that store user specified logical data path sets in the NIB. This is because nLog provides a machine-generated rules engine that addresses the mapping between the logical and physical domains in a more robust, comprehensive manner than the hand-coded approach used for Type I virtualized control systems.
- the application developers need to have a detailed understanding of the NIB structure and need to use this detailed understanding to write code that addresses all possible conditions that the control system would encounter at runtime.
- Type II control systems the application developers only need to produce applications that express the user-specified logical data path sets in terms of one or more tables, which are then automatically mapped to output tables whose content are in turn transferred to the NIB.
- This approach allows the Type II virtualized systems not to maintain the data regarding the logical data path sets in the NIB.
- some embodiments maintain this data in the NIB in order to distribute this data among other NOS instances, as further described below.
- FIGS. 6 and 7 illustrate an example that differentiates the two differing approaches.
- FIG. 6 illustrates the switch infrastructure of a multi-tenant server hosting system.
- six switching elements are employed to interconnect six computing devices of two users A and B.
- switches 605 - 620 are edge switches that have direct connections with the computing devices 635 - 660 of the users A and B, while two of the switches 625 and 630 are interior switches (i.e., non-edge switches) that interconnect the edge switches and connect to each other.
- FIG. 7 illustrates a virtualized network control system 700 that manages the edge switches 605 - 620 .
- the system 700 includes a NOS 110 that creates and maintains a NIB 115 , which contains data records regarding only the four edge switching elements 605 - 620 .
- the applications 705 running on top of the NOS 110 allow the users A and B to modify their switch element configurations for the edge switches that they use. The NOS then propagates these modifications if needed to the edge switching elements.
- FIG. 7 illustrates the NOS modifying users A and B records in switches 605 and 620 , but only updating user A records in switch element 610 and only user B records in switch element 615 .
- the system of some embodiments only controls edge switches (i.e., only maintains data in the NIB regarding edge switches) for several reasons. Controlling edge switches provides the system with a sufficient mechanism for maintaining isolation between computing devices, which is needed, as opposed to maintaining isolation between all switch elements, which is not needed.
- the interior switches forward data packets between switching elements.
- the edge switches forward data packets between computing devices and other network elements (e.g., other switching elements).
- the system can maintain user isolation simply by controlling the edge switch because the edge switch is the last switch in line to forward packets to a host.
- Controlling only edge switches also allows the system to be deployed independent of concerns about the hardware vendor of the non-edge switches, because deploying at the edge allows the edge switches to treat the internal nodes of the network as simply a collection of elements that moves packets without considering the hardware makeup of these internal nodes. Also, controlling only edge switches makes distributing switching logic computationally easier. Controlling only edge switches also enables non-disruptive deployment of the system because edge-switching solutions can be added as top of rack switches without disrupting the configuration of the non-edge switches.
- the network control system of some embodiments also utilizes and controls non-edge switches that are inserted in the switch network hierarchy to simplify and/or facilitate the operation of the controlled edge switches.
- the control system requires the switches that it controls to be interconnected in a hierarchical switching architecture that has several edge switches as the leaf nodes and one or more non-edge switches as the non-leaf nodes.
- each edge switch connects to one or more of the non-leaf switches, and uses such non-leaf switches to facilitate its communication with other edge switches.
- Examples of functions that a non-leaf switch of some embodiments may provide to facilitate such communications between edge switch include (1) routing of a packet with an unknown destination address (e.g., unknown MAC address) to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can route this packet to the appropriate edge switch, (2) routing a multicast or broadcast packet to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can convert this packet to a series of unicast packets to the desired destinations, (3) bridging remote managed networks that are separated by one or more networks, and (4) bridging a managed network with an unmanaged network.
- an unknown destination address e.g., unknown MAC address
- Some embodiments employ one level of non-leaf (non-edge) switches that connect to edge switches and in some cases to other non-leaf switches.
- Other embodiments employ multiple levels of non-leaf switches, with each level of non-leaf switch after the first level serving as a mechanism to facilitate communication between lower level non-leaf switches and leaf switches.
- the non-leaf switches are software switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch.
- the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor. Irrespective of the manner by which the leaf and non-leaf switches are implemented, the NIB of the control system of some embodiments stores switching state information regarding the leaf and non-leaf switches.
- edge switches and non-edge switches may be referred to as managed switches. This is because these switches are managed by the network control system (as opposed to unmanaged switches, which are not managed by the network control system, in the network) in order to implement logical data path sets through the managed switches.
- the virtualized network-control system of some embodiments also stores other storage structures to store data regarding the switching elements of the network.
- These other storage structures are secondary storage structures that supplement the storage functions of the NIB, which is the primary storage structure of the system while the system operates.
- the primary purpose for one or more of the secondary storage structures is to back up the data in the NIB.
- one or more of the secondary storage structures serves a purpose other than backing up the data in the NIB (e.g., for storing data that are not in the NIB).
- the NIB is stored in system memory (e.g., RAM) while the system operates. This allows for the fast access of the NIB records.
- system memory e.g., RAM
- one or more of the secondary storage structures are stored on disk or other non-volatile memories that are slower to access. Such non-volatile disk or other storages, however, improve the resiliency of the system as they allow the data to be stored in a persistent manner.
- FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a virtualized system 800 that employs secondary storage structures that supplement the NIB's storage operations.
- This system is similar to the systems 400 and 500 of FIGS. 4 and 5 , except that it also includes secondary storage structures 805 .
- these structures include a persistent transactional database (PTD) 810 , a persistent non-transactional database (PNTD) 815 , and a hash table 820 .
- PTD persistent transactional database
- PNTD persistent non-transactional database
- FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a virtualized system 800 that employs secondary storage structures that supplement the NIB's storage operations.
- This system is similar to the systems 400 and 500 of FIGS. 4 and 5 , except that it also includes secondary storage structures 805 .
- these structures include a persistent transactional database (PTD) 810 , a persistent non-transactional database (PNTD) 815 , and a hash table 820 .
- PTD persistent transactional database
- the PTD 810 is a database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory.
- the PTD is a commonly available database, such as MySQL or SQLite.
- the PTD of some embodiments can handle complex transactional queries. As a transactional database, the PTD can undo a series of prior query operations that it has performed as part of a transaction when one of the subsequent query operations of the transaction fails.
- some embodiments define a transactional guard processing (TGP) layer before the PTD in order to allow the PTD to execute conditional sets of database transactions.
- TGP transactional guard processing
- the TGP layer allows the PTD to avoid unnecessary later database operations when conditions of earlier operations are not met.
- the PTD in some embodiments stores the exact replica of the data that are stored in the NIB, while in other embodiments it stores only a subset of the data that are stored in the NIB. Some or all of the data in the NIB are stored in the PTD in order to ensure that the NIB data will not be lost in the event of a crash of the NOS or the NIB.
- the PNTD 815 is another persistent database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory. Some embodiments use this database to store data (e.g., statistics, computations, etc.) regarding one or more switch element attributes or operations. For instance, this database is used in some embodiment to store the number of packets routed through a particular port of a particular switching element. Other examples of types of data stored in the database 815 include error messages, log files, warning messages, and billing data. Also, in some embodiments, the PNTD stores the results of operations performed by the application(s) 830 running on top of the NOS, while the PTD and hash table store only values generated by the NOS.
- data e.g., statistics, computations, etc.
- this database is used in some embodiment to store the number of packets routed through a particular port of a particular switching element.
- Other examples of types of data stored in the database 815 include error messages, log files, warning messages, and billing data.
- the PNTD stores the results of operations performed by the application(
- the PNTD in some embodiments has a database query manager that can process database queries, but as it is not a transactional database, this query manager cannot handle complex conditional transactional queries.
- accesses to the PNTD are faster than accesses to the PTD but slower than accesses to the hash table 820 .
- the hash table 820 is not a database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory. Instead, it is a storage structure that is stored in volatile system memory (e.g., RAM). It uses hashing techniques that use hashed indices to quickly identify records that are stored in the table. This structure combined with the hash table's placement in the system memory allows this table to be accessed very quickly. To facilitate this quick access, a simplified query interface is used in some embodiments. For instance, in some embodiments, the hash table has just two queries: a Put query for writing values to the table and a Get query for retrieving values from the table. Some embodiments use the hash table to store data that change quickly.
- the NOS uses the hash tables as a cache to store information that is repeatedly queried for, such as flow entries that will be written to multiple nodes.
- Some embodiments employ a hash structure in the NIB in order to quickly access records in the NIB. Accordingly, in some of these embodiments, the hash table 820 is part of the NIB data structure.
- the PTD and the PNTD improve the resiliency of the NOS system by preserving network data on hard disks. If a NOS system fails, network configuration data will be preserved on disk in the PTD and log file information will be preserved on disk in the PNTD.
- Some embodiments further improve the resiliency of the control system by having multiple instances of NOS running on one or more computers, with each instance of NOS containing one or more of the secondary storage structures described above.
- the control applications in some embodiments partition the workload between the different instances in order to reduce each instance's workload.
- the multiple instances of NOS communicate the information stored in their storage layers to enable each instance of NOS to cover for the others in the event of a NOS instance failing.
- FIG. 9 illustrates a multi-instance, distributed network control system 900 of some embodiments.
- This distributed system controls multiple switching elements 990 with three instances 905 , 910 , and 915 .
- the distributed system 900 allows different controller instances to control the operations of the same switch or of different switches.
- each instance includes a NOS 925 , a virtualization application 930 , one or more control applications 935 , and a coordination manager (CM) 920 .
- CM coordination manager
- each NOS in the system 900 is shown to include a NIB 940 and three secondary storage structures, i.e., a PTD 945 , a distributed hash table (DHT) instance 950 , and a persistent non-transaction database (PNTD) 955 .
- Other embodiments may not tightly couple the NIB and/or each of the secondary storage structures within the NOS.
- each of the three secondary storage structures i.e., the PTD, DHT instance, and PNTD
- one NOS instance 905 may have all three data structures whereas another NOS instance may only have the DHT instance.
- the system 900 maintains the same switch element data records in the NIB of each instance, while in other embodiments, the system 900 allows NIBs of different instances to store different sets of switch element data records.
- FIGS. 10-12 illustrate three different approaches that different embodiments employ to maintain the NIB records. In each of these three examples, two instances 1005 and 1010 are used to manage several switching elements having numerous attributes that are stored collectively in the NIB instances. This collection of the switch element data in the NIB instances is referred to as the global NIB data structure 1015 in FIGS. 10-12 .
- FIG. 10 illustrates the approach of maintaining the entire global NIB data structure 1015 in each NOS instance 1005 and 1010 .
- FIG. 11 illustrates an alternative approach of dividing the global NIB 1015 into two separate portions 1020 and 1025 , and storing each of these portions in a different NOS instance (e.g., storing portion 1020 in controller instance 1005 while storing portion 1025 in controller instance 1010 ).
- FIG. 12 illustrates yet another alternative approach.
- the global NIB 1015 is divided into two separate, but overlapping portions 1030 and 1035 , which are then stored separately by the two different instances (with instance 1005 storing portion 1030 and instance 1010 storing portion 1035 ).
- one controller instance is allowed to query another controller instance to obtain a NIB record.
- Other systems of such embodiments do not allow one controller instance to query another controller instance for a portion of the NIB data that is not maintained by the controller itself.
- Still others allow such queries to be made, but allow restrictions to be specified that would restrict access to some or all portions of the NIB.
- the system 900 of some embodiments also replicates each NIB record in each instance in the PTD 945 of that instance in order to maintain the records of the NIB in a persistent manner. Also, in some embodiments, the system 900 replicates each NIB record in the PTDs of all the controller instances 905 , 910 , or 915 , in order to protect against failures of individual controller instances (e.g., of an entire controller instance or a portion of the controller instance). Other embodiments, however, do not replicate each NIB record in each PTD and/or do not replicate the PTD records across all the PTDs.
- some embodiments only replicate a part but not all of the NIB data records of one controller instance in the PTD storage layer of that controller instance, and then replicate only this replicated portion of the NIB in all of the NIBs and PTDs of all other controller instances. Some embodiments also store a subset of the NIB records in another one of the secondary storage records, such as the DHT instance 950 .
- the DHT instances (DHTI) 950 of all controller instances collectively store one set of records that are indexed based on hashed indices for quick access. These records are distributed across the different controller instances to minimize the size of the records within each instance and to allow the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances.
- one DHT record is not stored in each controller instance.
- each DHT record is stored in at most one controller instance.
- some embodiments allow one DHT record to be stored in more than one controller instance, so that in case one DHT record is no longer accessible because of one instance failure, that DHT record can be accessed from another instance.
- Some embodiments store in the DHT only the type of data that can be quickly re-generated, and therefore do not allow for replication of records across different DHT instances or allow only a small amount of such records to be replicated.
- the PNTD 955 is another distributed data structure of the system 900 of some embodiments.
- each instance's PNTD stores the records generated by the NOS 925 or applications 930 or 935 of that instance or another instance.
- Each instance's PNTD records can be locally accessed or remotely accessed by other controller instances whenever the controller instances need these records.
- This distributed nature of the PNTD allows the PNTD to be scalable as additional controller instances are added to the control system 900 . In other words, addition of other controller instances increases the overall size of the PNTD storage layer.
- the PNTD in some embodiments is replicated partially across different instances. In other embodiments, the PNTD is replicated fully across different instances. Also, in some embodiments, the PNTD 955 within each instance is accessible only by the application(s) that run on top of the NOS of that instance. In other embodiments, the NOS can also access (e.g., read and/or write) to the PNTD 955 . In yet other embodiments, the PNTD 955 of one instance is only accessible by the NOS of that instance.
- each of the three storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different distribution technique to improve the resiliency of a multiple NOS instance system.
- the system 900 of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance.
- the system 900 distributes the PNTD with overlapping distributions of data across the NOS instances to reduce the damage of a failure.
- the system 900 in some embodiments also distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small and to allow the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances.
- the system 900 uses the CMs 920 .
- the CM 920 in each instance allows the instance to coordinate certain activities with the other instances.
- Different embodiments use the CM to coordinate the different sets of activities between the instances. Examples of such activities include writing to the NIB, writing to the PTD, writing to the DHT, controlling the switching elements, facilitating intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances, etc.
- different controller instances of the system 900 can control the operations of the same switching elements or of different switching elements. By distributing the control of these operations over several instances, the system can more easily scale up to handle additional switching elements. Specifically, the system can distribute the management of different switching elements and/or different portions of the NIB to different NOS instances in order to enjoy the benefit of efficiencies that can be realized by using multiple NOS instances. In such a distributed system, each NOS instance can have a reduced number of switches or reduce portion of the NIB under management, thereby reducing the number of computations each controller needs to perform to distribute flow entries across the switches and/or to manage the NIB. In other embodiments, the use of multiple NOS instances enables the creation of a scale-out network management system. The computation of how best to distribute network flow tables in large networks is a CPU intensive task. By splitting the processing over NOS instances, the system 900 can use a set of more numerous but less powerful computer systems to create a scale-out network management system capable of handling large networks.
- the system 900 of some embodiments designates one controller instance (e.g., 905 ) within the system 900 as the master of any particular NIB portion and/or any given switching element (e.g., 990 c ).
- different controller instance e.g., 910 and 915
- the master e.g., 905
- the master e.g., 905
- FIG. 13 illustrates an example of specifying a master controller instance for a switch in a distributed system 1300 that is similar to the system 900 of FIG. 9 .
- two controllers 1305 and 1310 control three switching elements S 1 , S 2 and S 3 , for two different users A and B.
- the two users specify two different sets of logical data paths 1325 and 1330 , which are translated into numerous records that are identically stored in two NIBs 1355 and 1360 of the two controller instances 1305 and 1310 by NOS instances 1345 and 1350 of the controllers.
- both control applications 1315 and 1320 of both controllers 1305 and 1310 can modify records of the switching element S 2 for both users A and B, but only controller 1305 is the master of this switching element.
- This example illustrates two different scenarios.
- the first scenario involves the controller 1305 updating the record S 2 b 1 in switching element S 2 for the user B.
- the second scenario involves the controller 1305 updating the records S 2 a 1 in switching element S 2 after the control application 1320 updates a NIB record S 2 a 1 for switching element S 2 and user A in NIB 1360 .
- this update is routed from NIB 1360 of the controller 1310 to the NIB 1355 of the controller 1305 , and subsequently routed to switching element S 2 .
- the system 1300 uses the secondary storage structures (not shown) of the controller instances 1305 and 1310 . More generally, the distributed control system of some embodiments uses the secondary storage structures as communication channels between the different controller instances. Because of the differing properties of the secondary storage structures, these structures provide the controller instances with different mechanisms for communicating with each other. For instance, in some embodiments, different DHT instances can be different, and each DHT instance is used as a bulletin board for one or more instances to store data so that they or other instances can retrieve this data later.
- the PTDs are replicated across all instances, and some or all of the NIB changes are pushed from one controller instance to another through the PTD storage layer. Accordingly, in the example illustrated in FIG. 13 , the change to the NIB 1360 could be replicated to the PTD of the controller 1310 , and from there it could be replicated in the PTD of the controller 1305 and the NIB 1355 .
- the system 1300 of some embodiments uses other techniques to change the record S 2 a 1 in the switch S 2 in response to the request from control application 1320 .
- the NOS 1350 of the controller 1310 in some embodiments sends an update command to the NOS 1345 of the controller 1305 (with the requisite NIB update parameters that identify the record and one or more new values for the record) to direct the NOS 1345 to modify the record in the NIB 1355 or in the switch S 2 .
- the NOS 1345 would make the changes to the NIB 1355 and the switch S 2 (if such a change is allowed).
- the controller instance 1310 would change the corresponding record in its NIB 1360 once it receives notification (from controller 1305 or through another notification mechanism) that the record in the NIB 1355 and/or switch S 2 has changed.
- controller instances designate one controller instance as a master of a portion of the NIB, in addition to designating a controller instance as a master of a switching element.
- different controller instances can be masters of a switch and a corresponding record for that switch in the NIB, while other embodiments require the controller instance to be master of the switch and all records for that switch in the NIB.
- FIG. 13 illustrates a case where the controller instance 1310 is the master of the NIB record S 2 a 1 , while the controller instance 1305 is the master for the switch S 2 . If a controller instance other than the controller instance 1305 and 1310 was the master of the NIB record S 2 a 1 , then the request for the NIB record modification from the control application 1320 would have had to be propagated to this other controller instance.
- This other controller instance would then modify the NIB record and this modification would then cause the NIB 1355 , the NIB 1360 and the switch S 2 to update their records once the controller instances 1305 and 1310 are notified of this modification through any number of mechanisms that would propagate this modification to the controller instances 1305 and 1310 .
- the controller instance 1305 might be the master of the NIB record S 2 a 1 , or the controller instance might be the master of switch S 2 and all the records of its NIB.
- the request for the NIB record modification from the control application 1320 would have to be propagated to the controller instance 1305 , which would then modify the records in the NIB 1355 and the switch S 2 .
- the NIB 1360 would modify its record S 2 a 1 once the controller instance 1310 is notified of this modification through any number of mechanisms that would propagate this modification to the controller instance 1310 .
- controller instances employ different techniques to facilitate communication between different controller instances.
- different embodiments implement the controller instances differently.
- the stack of the control application(s) e.g., 935 or 1315 in FIGS. 9 and 13
- the virtualization application e.g., 930 or 1335
- the NOS e.g., 925 or 1345
- the stack of the control application(s) e.g., 935 or 1315 in FIGS. 9 and 13
- the virtualization application e.g., 930 or 1335
- NOS e.g., 925 or 1345
- a controller instance can also have its stack of components divided amongst several computers.
- control application e.g., 935 or 1315
- virtualization application e.g., 930 or 1335
- NOS e.g., 925 or 1350
- FIG. 14 illustrates a particular distributed network control system 1400 of some embodiments of the invention.
- this control system 1400 is similar to the control system 900 of FIG. 9 .
- it uses several different controller instances to control the operations of the same switching elements or of different switching elements.
- three instances 1405 , 1410 and 1415 are illustrated.
- the control system 1400 can have any number of controller instances.
- each controller instance includes a NOS 1425 , a virtualization application 1430 , one or more control applications 1435 , and a coordination manager (CM) 1420 .
- Each NOS in the system 1400 includes a NIB 1440 and at least two secondary storage structures, e.g., a distributed hash table (DHT) 1450 and a PNTD 1455 .
- DHT distributed hash table
- control system 1400 has several additional and/or different features than the control system 900 . These features include a NIB notification module 1470 , NIB transfer modules 1475 , a CM interface 1460 , PTD triggers 1480 , DHT triggers 1485 , and master/slave PTDs 1445 / 1447 .
- the notification module 1470 in each controller instance allows applications (e.g., a control application) that run on top of the NOS to register for callbacks when changes occur within the NIB.
- This module in some embodiments has two components, which include a notification processor and a notification registry.
- the notification registry stores the list of applications that need to be notified for each NIB record that the module 1470 tracks, while the notification processor reviews the registry and processes the notifications upon detecting a change in a NIB record that it tracks.
- the notification module as well as its notification registry and notification processor are a conceptual representation of the NIB-application layer notification components of some embodiments, as the system of these embodiments provides a separate notification function and registry within each NIB object that can be tracked by the application layer.
- the transfer modules 1475 include one or more modules that allow data to be exchanged between the NIB 1440 on one hand, and the PTD or DHT storage layers in each controller instance on the other hand.
- the transfer modules 1475 include an import module for importing changes from the PTD/DHT storage layers into the NIB, and an export module for exporting changes in the NIB to the PTD/DHT storage layers.
- the control system 1400 only has PTDs in some of the NOS instances, and of these PTDs, one of them serves as master PTD 1445 , while the rest serve as slave PTDs 1447 .
- NIB changes within a controller instance that has a slave PTD are first propagated to the master PTD 1445 , which then direct the controller instance's slave PTD to record the NIB change.
- the master PTD 1445 similarly receives NIB changes from controller instances that do not have either master or slave PTDs.
- the coordination manager 1420 includes the CM interface 1460 to facilitate communication between the NIB storage layer and the PTD storage layer.
- the CM interface also maintains the PTD trigger list 1480 , which identifies the modules of the system 1400 to callback whenever the CM interface 1460 is notified of a PTD record change.
- a similar trigger list 1485 for handling DHT callbacks is maintained by the DHT instance 1450 .
- the CM 1420 also has a DHT range identifier (not shown) that allows the DHT instances of different controller instances to store different DHT records in different DHT instances.
- the PNTD is not placed underneath the NIB storage layer. This placement is to signify that the PNTD in the control system 1400 does not exchange data directly with the NIB storage layer, but rather is accessible solely by the application(s) (e.g., the control application) running on top of the NOS 1425 as well as other applications of other controller instances. This placement is in contrast to the placement of the PTD storage layer 1445 / 1447 and DHT storage layers 1450 , which are shown to be underneath the NIB storage layer because the PTD and DHT are not directly accessible by the application(s) running on top of the NOS 1425 . Rather, in the control system 1400 , data are exchanged between the NIB storage layer and the PTD/DHT storage layers of the same or different instances.
- the control system 1400 uses the PTD, DHT and PNTD storage layers to facilitate communication between the different controller instances.
- each of the three storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different storage and distribution technique to improve the resiliency of the distributed, multi-instance system 1400 .
- the system 1400 of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance.
- the system 1400 in some embodiments distributes the PNTD with partial overlapping distributions of data across the NOS instances to reduce the damage of a failure.
- system 1400 in some embodiments distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small. Also, using this approach, allows the system to increase the size of the DHT by adding additional DHT instances in order to make the system more scalable.
- this system provides great flexibility to specify the configurations for the components of the system in order to customize its storage and data distribution scheme to achieve the best tradeoff of scalability and speed on one hand, and reliability and consistency on the other hand.
- Attributes of the storage structures that affect scalability, speed, reliability and consistency considerations include the speed of the storage (e.g., RAM versus disk access speed), the reliability of the storage (e.g., persistent non-volatile storage of disk versus volatile storage of RAM), the query interface of the storage (e.g., simple Put/Get query interface of DHT versus more robust transactional database queries of PTD in some embodiments), and the number of points of failures in the system (e.g., a single point of failure for a DHT record versus multiple points of failure for a PTD record in some embodiments).
- speed of the storage e.g., RAM versus disk access speed
- the reliability of the storage e.g., persistent non-volatile storage of disk versus volatile storage of RAM
- the query interface of the storage e.g., simple Put/Get query interface of DHT versus more robust transactional database queries of PTD in some embodiments
- the number of points of failures in the system e.g., a
- the system can be configured (1) on how to distribute the data records between the NIB and the secondary storage structures within one instance (e.g., which secondary storage should store which NIB record), (2) on how to distribute the data records between the NIBs of different instances (e.g., which NIB records should be replicated across different controller instances), (3) on how to distribute the data records between the secondary storage structures within one instance (e.g., which secondary storage records contain which records), (4) on how to distribute the data records between the secondary storage structures of different instances (e.g., which secondary storage records are replicated across different controller instances), (5) on how to distribute secondary storage instances across controller instances (e.g., whether to put a PTD, a DHT, or a Stats database instances within each controller or whether to put different subset of these storages within different instances), and (6) on how to replicate data records in the distributed secondary storage structures (e.g., whether to replicated PTD fully across all instances, whether to replicate some or all DHT records across more than one instance
- the system also allows the coordination between the different controller instances as to the master control over different switching elements or different portions of the NIB to be configured differently.
- some or all of these configurations can be specified by applications (e.g., a control application or a virtualization application) that run on top of the NOS.
- the CMs facilitate intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances.
- the CMs implement the intra-controller communication through the secondary storage layers described above.
- a controller instance in the control system may fail due to any number of reasons. (e.g., hardware failure, software failure, network failure, etc.). Different embodiments may use different techniques for determining whether a controller instance has failed.
- Paxos protocol is used to determine whether a controller instance in the control system has failed. While some of these embodiments may use Apache Zookeeper to implement the Paxos protocols, other embodiments may implement Paxos protocol in other ways.
- Some embodiments of the CM 1420 may utilize defined timeouts to determine whether a controller instance has failed. For instance, if a CM of a controller instance does not respond to a communication (e.g., sent from another CM of another controller instance in the control system) within an amount of time (i.e., a defined timeout amount), the non-responsive controller instance is determined to have failed. Other techniques may be utilized to determine whether a controller instance has failed in other embodiments.
- CM 1420 make such determination by performing a master election process that elects a master controller instance (e.g., for partitioning management of logical data path sets and/or partitioning management of switching elements).
- the CM 1420 of some embodiments may perform a master election process for electing a new master controller instance for both the logical data path sets and the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master.
- the CM 1420 of other embodiments may perform (1) a master election process for electing a new master controller instance for the logical data path sets of which the failed controller instance was a master and (2) another master election process for electing a new master controller instance for the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master.
- the CM 1420 may determine two different controller instances as new controller instances: one for the logical data path sets of which the failed controller instance was a master and another for the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master.
- the master election process is further for partitioning management of logical data path sets and/or management of switching elements when a controller instance is added to the control system.
- some embodiments of the CM 1420 perform the master election process when the control system 1400 detects a change in membership of the controller instances in the control system 1400 .
- the CM 1420 may perform the master election process to redistribute a portion of the management of the logical data path sets and/or the management of the switching elements from the existing controller instances to the new controller instance when the control system 1400 detects that a new network controller has been added to the control system 1400 .
- redistribution of a portion of the management of the logical data path sets and/or the management of the switching elements from the existing controller instances to the new controller instance does not occur when the control system 1400 detects that a new network controller has been added to the control system 1400 .
- the control system 1400 in these embodiments assigns unassigned logical data path sets and/or switching elements (e.g., new logical data path sets and/or switching elements or logical data path sets and/or switching elements from a failed network controller) to the new controller instance when the control system 1400 detects the unassigned logical data path sets and/or switching elements.
- FIG. 15 conceptually illustrates a single NOS instance 1500 of some embodiments.
- This instance can be used as a single NOS instance in the distributed control system 1400 that employs multiple NOS instances in multiple controller instances. Alternatively, with slight modifications, this instance can be used as a single NOS instance in a centralized control system that utilizes only a single controller instance with a single NOS instance.
- the NOS instance 1500 supports a wide range of control scenarios. For instance, in some embodiments, this instance allows an application running on top of it (e.g., a control or virtualization application) to customize the NIB data model and have control over the placement and consistency of each element of the network infrastructure.
- an application running on top of it e.g., a control or virtualization application
- the NOS instance 1500 provides multiple methods for applications to gain access to network entities. For instance, in some embodiments, it maintains an index of all of its entities based on the entity identifier, allowing for direct querying of a specific entity.
- the NOS instance of some embodiments also supports registration for notifications on state changes or the addition/deletion of an entity.
- the applications may further extend the querying capabilities by listening for notifications of entity arrival and maintaining their own indices.
- the control for a typical application is fairly straightforward.
- It can register to be notified on some state change (e.g., the addition of new switches and ports), and once notified, it can manipulate the network state by modifying the NIB data tuple(s) (e.g., key-value pairs) of the affected entities.
- some state change e.g., the addition of new switches and ports
- NIB data tuple(s) e.g., key-value pairs
- the NOS 1500 includes an application interface 1505 , a notification processor 1510 , a notification registry 1515 , a NIB 1520 , a hash table 1524 , a NOS controller 1522 , a switch controller 1525 , transfer modules 1530 , a CM 1535 , a PTD 1540 , a CM interface 1542 , a PNTD 1545 , a DHT instance 1550 , switch interface 1555 , and NIB request list 1560 .
- the application interface 1505 is a conceptual illustration of the interface between the NOS and the applications (e.g., control and virtualization applications) that can run on top of the NOS.
- the interface 1505 includes the NOS APIs that the applications (e.g., control or virtualization application) running on top of the NOS use to communicate with the NOS.
- these communications include registrations for receiving notifications of certain changes in the NIB 1520 , queries to read certain NIB attributes, queries to write to certain NIB attributes, requests to create or destroy NIB entities, instructions for configuring the NOS instance (e.g., instructions regarding how to import or export state), requests to import or export entities on demand, and requests to synchronize NIB entities with switching elements or other NOS instances.
- the switch interface 1555 is a conceptual illustration of the interface between the NOS and the switching elements that run below the NOS instance 1500 .
- the NOS accesses the switching elements by using the OpenFlow or OVS APIs provided by the switching elements.
- the switch interface 1555 includes the set of APIs provided by the OpenFlow and/or OVS protocols.
- the NIB 1520 is the data storage structure that stores data regarding the switching elements that the NOS instance 1500 is controlling. In some embodiments, the NIB just stores data attributes regarding these switching elements, while in other embodiments, the NIB also stores data attributes for the logical data path sets defined by the user. Also, in some embodiments, the NIB is a hierarchical object data structure (such as the ones described above) in which some or all of the NIB objects not only include data attributes (e.g., data tuples regarding the switching elements) but also include functions to perform certain functionalities of the NIB. For these embodiments, one or more of the NOS functionalities that are shown in modular form in FIG. 15 are conceptual representations of the functions performed by the NIB objects.
- the hash table 1524 is a table that stores a hash value for each NIB object and a reference to each NIB object. Specifically, each time an object is created in the NIB, the object's identifier is hashed to generate a hash value, and this hash value is stored in the hash table along with a reference (e.g., a pointer) to the object.
- the hash table 1524 is used to quickly access an object in the NIB each time a data attribute or function of the object is requested (e.g., by an application or secondary storage).
- the NIB Upon receiving such requests, the NIB hashes the identifier of the requested object to generate a hash value, and then uses that hash value to quickly identify in the hash table a reference to the object in the NIB.
- a request for a NIB object might not provide the identity of the NIB object but instead might be based on non-entity name keys (e.g., might be a request for all entities that have a particular port).
- the NIB includes an iterator that iterates through all entities looking for the key specified in the request.
- the notification processor 1510 interacts with the application interface 1505 to receive NIB notification registrations from applications running on top of the NOS and other modules of the NOS (e.g., such as an export module within the transfer modules 1530 ). Upon receiving these registrations, the notification processor 1510 stores notification requests in the notification registry 1515 that identifies each requesting party and the NIB data tuple(s) that the requesting party is tracking.
- the system of some embodiments embeds in each NIB object a function for handling notification registrations for changes in the value(s) of that NIB object.
- the notification processor 1510 is a conceptual illustration of the amalgamation of all the NIB object notification functions. Other embodiments, however, do not provide notification functions in some or all of the NIB objects. The NOS of some of these embodiments therefore provides an actual separate module to serve as the notification processor for some or all of the NIB objects.
- the notification registry for such NIB objects are typically kept with the objects themselves. Accordingly, for some of these embodiments, the notification registry 1515 is a conceptual illustration of the amalgamation of the different sets of registered requestors maintained by the NIB objects. Alternatively, when some or all of the NIB objects do not have notification functions and notification services are needed for these objects, some embodiments use a separate notification registry 1515 for the notification processor 1510 to use to keep track of the notification requests for such objects.
- the notification process serves as only one manner for accessing the data in the NIB.
- Other mechanisms are needed in some embodiments for accessing the NIB.
- the secondary storage structures e.g., the PTD 1540 and the DHT instance 1550
- the NOS 1500 uses the transfer modules 1530 to exchange data between the NIB and the secondary storage structure.
- the transfer modules include a NIB import module and a NIB export module. These two modules in some embodiments are configured through the NOS controller 1522 , which processes configuration instructions that it receives through the interfaces 1505 from the applications above the NOS.
- the NOS controller 1522 also performs several other operations. As with the notification processor, some or all of the operations performed by the NOS controller are performed by one or more functions of NIB objects, in some of the embodiments that implement one or more of the NOS 1500 operations through the NIB object functions. Accordingly, for these embodiments, the NOS controller 1522 is a conceptual amalgamation of several NOS operations, some of which are performed by NIB object functions.
- the NOS controller 1522 of some embodiments handles some of the other types of requests directed at the NOS instance 1500 .
- Examples of such other requests include queries to read certain NIB attributes, queries to write to certain NIB attributes, requests to create or destroy NIB entities, requests to import or export entities on demand, and requests to synchronize NIB entities with switching elements or other NOS instances.
- the NOS controller stores requests to change the NIB on the NIB request list 1560 .
- the NIB request list in some embodiments is a conceptual representation of a set of distributed requests that are stored in a distributed manner with the objects in the NIB.
- the request list is a separate list maintained by the NOS 1500 .
- the system of some of these embodiments that maintains the request list as a separate list stores this list in the NIB in order to allow for its replication across the different controller instances through the PTD storage layer and/or the DHT storage layer. This replication allows the distributed controller instances to process in a uniform manner a request that is received from an application operating on one of the controller instances.
- Synchronization requests are used to maintain consistency in NIB data in some embodiments that employ multiple NIB instances in a distributed control system.
- the NIB of some embodiments provides a mechanism to request and release exclusive access to the NIB data structure of the local instance.
- an application running on top of the NOS instance(s) is only assured that no other thread is updating the NIB within the same controller instance.
- the application therefore needs to implement mechanisms external to the NIB to coordinate an effort with other controller instances to control access to the NIB. In some embodiments, this coordination is static and requires control logic involvement during failure conditions.
- all NIB operations are asynchronous, meaning that updating a network entity only guarantees that the update will eventually be pushed to the corresponding switching element and/or other NOS instances. While this has the potential to simplify the application logic and make multiple modifications more efficient, often it is useful to know when an update has successfully completed. For instance, to minimize disruption to network traffic, the application logic of some embodiments requires the updating of forwarding state on multiple switches to happen in a particular order (to minimize, for example, packet drops). For this purpose, the API of some embodiments provides the synchronization request primitive that calls back one or more applications running on top of the NOS once the state has been pushed for an entity.
- control application of some embodiments will then inspect the content of the NIB and determine whether its state is still as originally intended. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the control application can simply rely on NIB notifications to react to failures in modifications as they would react to any other network state changes.
- the NOS controller 1522 is also responsible for pushing the changes in its corresponding NIB to switching elements for which the NOS 1500 is the master. To facilitate writing such data to the switching element, the NOS controller 1522 uses the switch controller 1525 . It also uses the switch controller 1525 to read values from a switching element. To access a switching element, the switch controller 1525 uses the switch interface 1555 , which as mentioned above uses OpenFlow or OVS, or other known set of APIs in some embodiments.
- the PTD and DHT storage structures 1540 and 1550 of FIG. 15 interface with the NIB and not the application layer.
- some embodiments only limit PTD and DHT layers to communicate between the NIB layer and these two storage layers, and to communicate between the PTD/DHT storages of one instance and PTD/DHT storages of other instances.
- Other embodiments allow the application layer (e.g., the control application) within one instance to access the PTD and DHT storages directly or through the transfer modules 1530 .
- PTD and DHT access handles e.g., APIs to DHT, PTD or CM interface
- PTD layer e.g., the CM interface 1542
- DHT layers e.g., the PTD and DHT storage layers
- the PTD 1540 and DHT instance 1550 have corresponding lists of triggers that are respectively maintained in the CM interface 1542 and the DHT instance 1550 .
- the PNTD 1545 of FIG. 15 does not interface with the NIB 1520 . Instead, it interfaces with the application layer through the application interface 1505 . Through this interface, the applications running on top of the NOS can store data in and retrieve data from the PNTD. Also, applications of other controller instances can access the PNTD 1545 , as shown in FIG. 15 .
- FIG. 16 further elaborates on the propagation of the instructions to control a managed switch through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments of the invention.
- This figure illustrates a control data pipeline 1600 that translates and propagates control plane data through three processing layers of the same or different controller instances to a managed switch 1625 .
- These three layers are the control application 1605 , the virtualization application 1610 , and the NOS 1615 . In some embodiments, these three layers are in the same controller instance. However, other arrangements of these layers exist in other embodiments.
- control and virtualization applications 1605 and 1610 and the NIB that initially stores the output of the virtualization application 1610 are in the same controller instance, but the functionality to propagate the generated physical control plane data reside in a NOS of another controller instance (not shown).
- the physical control plane data is transferred from the initial NIB to the NIB of a NOS of the other controller instance, before this other NOS pushes the control plane data to the managed switch.
- the control application 1605 in some embodiments has two logical planes 1630 and 1635 that can be used to express the input and output to this application.
- the first logical plane 1630 is a logical control plane that includes a collection of higher-level constructs that allow the control application and its users to specify one or more logical data path sets within the logical control plane for one or more users.
- the second logical plane 1635 in some embodiments is the logical forwarding plane, which represents the logical data path sets of the users in a format that can be processed by the virtualization application 1610 .
- the two logical planes 1630 and 1635 are virtualization space analogs of the control and forwarding planes 1655 and 1660 that are typically can be found in a typical managed switch 1625 , as shown in FIG. 16 .
- the control application 1605 defines and exposes the logical control plane constructs with which the application itself or users of the application define different logical data path sets within the logical control plane.
- the logical control plane data 1630 includes logical ACL data, etc. Some of this data (e.g., logical ACL data) can be specified by the user, while other such data (e.g., the logical L2 or L3 records) are generated by the control application and may not be specified by the user.
- the control application 1605 generates and/or specifies such data in response to certain changes to the NIB (which indicate changes to the managed switches and the managed data path sets) that the control application 1605 detects.
- the logical control plane data (i.e., the LDPS data that is expressed in terms of the control plane constructs) can be initially specified without consideration of current operational data from the managed switches and without consideration of the manner by which this control plane data will be translated to physical control plane data.
- the logical control plane data might specify control data for one logical switch that connects five computers, even though this control plane data might later be translated to physical control data for three managed switches that implement the desired switching between the five computers.
- the control application includes a set of modules for converting any logical data path set within the logical control plane to a logical data path set in the logical forwarding plane 1635 .
- the control application 1605 uses the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion.
- the control application's use of the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion is further described below and is also further described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Network Control Apparatus and Method”, filed concurrently with this application, with the Attorney Docket Number NCRA.P0022, which is incorporated by reference in this application.
- the control application also includes a set of modules for pushing the LDPS from the logical forwarding plane 1635 of the control application 1605 to a logical forwarding plane 1640 of the virtualization application 1610 .
- the logical forwarding plane 1640 includes one or more logical data path sets of one or more users.
- the logical forwarding plane 1640 in some embodiments includes logical forwarding data for one or more logical data path sets of one or more users. Some of this data is pushed to the logical forwarding plane 1640 by the control application, while other such data are pushed to the logical forwarding plane by the virtualization application detecting events in the NIB 1620 as further described below for some embodiments.
- the virtualization application 1610 includes the physical control plane 1645 .
- the physical control plane 1645 includes one or more physical control path sets of one or more users.
- the virtualization application includes a set of modules for converting any LDPS within the logical forwarding plane 1640 to a physical control data path set in the physical control plane 1645 .
- the virtualization application 1610 uses the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion.
- the virtualization application also includes a set of modules (not shown) for pushing the physical control plane data from the physical control plane 1645 of the virtualization application 1610 into the NIB 1620 of the NOS 1615 .
- the physical control plane data is later pushed into the managed switch 1625 , as shown in FIG. 16 .
- the physical control plane data in some instances of some embodiments is pushed to the managed switch by the NOS of the same controller instance that has the control application 1605 and virtualization application 1610 , but in other instance is pushed to the managed switch by the NOS of another controller instance (not shown).
- the managed switch 1625 then converts this physical control plane data to physical forwarding plane data that specifies the forwarding behavior of the managed switch.
- the physical control plane data that is propagated to the managed switch 1650 allows this switch to perform the logical data processing on data packets that it processes in order to effectuate the processing of the logical data path sets specified by the control application.
- physical control planes include control plane data for operating in the physical domain and control plane data for operating in the logical domain.
- the physical control planes of these embodiments include control plane data for processing network data (e.g., packets) through managed switches to implement physical switching and control plane data for processing network data through managed switches in order to implement the logical switching. In this manner, the physical control plane facilitates implementing logical switches across managed switches.
- control and virtualization applications 1605 and 1610 In addition to pushing physical control plane data to the NIB 1620 , the control and virtualization applications 1605 and 1610 also store logical control plane data and logical forwarding plane data in the NIB. These embodiments store such data in the NIB for a variety of reasons. For instance, in some embodiments, the NIB 1620 serves as a medium for communications between different controller instances, and the storage of such data in the NOB facilitates the relaying of such data across different controller instances.
- FIG. 16 illustrates the control data pipeline 1600 through three processing layers of the same or different controller instances to a managed switch 1625 .
- the control data pipeline 1600 may have two processing layers instead of three with the upper layer being a single application that performs the functionalities of both the control application 1605 and the virtual application 1610 .
- the dashed box encompassing the two applications indicates that a single virtualization application (also called network hypervisor) may replace these two applications 1605 and 1610 in some embodiments.
- the control application 1605 would form the front end of this network hypervisor, and would create and populate the logical data path sets.
- the virtualization application 1610 in these embodiments would form the back end of the network hypervisor, and would convert the logical data path sets to physical data path sets that are defined in the physical control plane.
- FIG. 17 illustrates another perspective on the operation of the control, virtualization, and NOS applications of some embodiments.
- the perspective provided in this figure is meant to emphasize that one or more controller instances can execute these applications in a distributed manner in parallel.
- this figure replaces the control application 1605 , the virtualization application 1610 , and the NOS 1615 of FIG. 16 , with a control layer 1705 , a virtualization layer 1710 , and a NOS layer 1715 .
- Each of these layers represents one or more applications that can be executing in parallel on one or more controller instances.
- Collectively these three layers represent a control system that can be operated as a single controller instance, or can be operated in a distributed manner by several controller instances.
- FIG. 17 also provides an example of logical data path sets that are created by the control applications of some embodiments, and the mapping of the created logical data path sets to the resources of the managed switches.
- the logical data path sets are several logical switches 1770 that are specified by the control application layer 1705 .
- a logical switch in some embodiments is a simulated/conceptual switch that is defined (e.g., by a user) to conceptually describe a set of switching behaviors for a switch.
- the control system of some embodiments (such as the system illustrated in FIG. 17 ) implements this logical switch across one or more physical switches, which as mentioned above may be hardware switches, software switches, or virtual switches defined on top of other switches.
- Each logical switch has two logical planes 1730 and 1735 that can be used to express the input and output to the logical switch.
- the logical plane 1730 is a logical control plane (denoted by “LCP” in the figure) that includes a collection of higher-level constructs that allow the control application layer and its user to specify one or more logical data path sets within the logical control plane for the user.
- the second logical plane 1735 in some embodiments is the logical forwarding plane (denoted by “LFP” in the figure), which represents the logical data path sets of the user in a format that can be processed by the virtualization application layer 1710 . Because of these two logical planes 1730 and 1735 , the logical switches appear as virtualization space analogs of the control and forwarding planes 1755 and 1760 that typically can be found in managed switches, as shown in FIG. 17 .
- the logical switches 1770 can be implemented in three managed switches 1725 .
- the number of logical switches 1770 may be less or more than three. That is, the number of logical switches 1770 in some embodiments does not have to match to the number of managed switches that implement the logical switches.
- the virtualization application layer 1710 converts the logical forwarding plane data of the logical switches into physical control plane data, and the NOS layer 1715 pushes this data to the managed switches 1725 .
- the pushed physical control plane data allows the managed switches to perform physical switching operations in both the physical and logical data processing domains.
- the virtualization application of some embodiments specifies the manner by which different LDPS′ of different users of a network control system can be implemented by the switching elements managed by the network control system.
- the virtualization application specifies the implementation of the LDPS′ within the managed switching element infrastructure by performing conversion operations. These conversion operations convert the LDPS′ data records (also called data tuples below) to the control data records (e.g., physical control plane data) that are initially stored within the managed switching elements and then used by the switching elements to produce forwarding plane data (e.g., flow entries) for defining forwarding behaviors of the switches.
- conversion operations convert the LDPS′ data records (also called data tuples below) to the control data records (e.g., physical control plane data) that are initially stored within the managed switching elements and then used by the switching elements to produce forwarding plane data (e.g., flow entries) for defining forwarding behaviors of the switches.
- the conversion operations also produce other data (e.g., in tables) that specify network constructs (e.g., tunnels, queues, queue collections, etc.) that should be defined within and between the managed switching elements.
- network constructs e.g., tunnels, queues, queue collections, etc.
- the network constructs also include managed software switching elements that are dynamically deployed or pre-configured managed software switching elements that are dynamically added to the set of managed switching elements.
- FIG. 18 conceptually illustrates an example of such conversion operations that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs.
- This figure conceptually illustrates a process 1800 that the virtualization application performs to generate data tuples based on input event data.
- the process 1800 initially receives (at 1805 ) data regarding an input event.
- the input event data may be logical forwarding plane data that the control application generates in some embodiments from the logical control plane data.
- the input event data in some embodiments may also be physical forwarding plane data or physical control plane data received from the NIB.
- the process 1800 receives the physical forwarding data from a NIB monitor that monitors the NIB to detect a change in the NIB that reflects a change in one or more managed switching elements.
- the process 1800 then performs a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the virtualization application is responsible for the input event data.
- a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the virtualization application is responsible for the input event data.
- several instances of the virtualization application may operate in parallel to control multiple sets of logical data paths in some embodiments.
- each virtualization application uses the filtering operation to filter out input data that does not relate to the virtualization application's logical data path set.
- the virtualization application of some embodiments includes a filter module.
- This module in some embodiments is a standalone module, while in other embodiments it is implemented by a table mapping engine (e.g., implemented by the join operations performed by the table mapping engine) that maps records between input tables and output tables of the virtualization application, as further described below.
- the process determines whether the filtering operation has filtered out the received input event data.
- the filtering operation filters out the input event data in some embodiments when the input event data does not fall within one of the logical data path sets that are the responsibility of the virtualization application.
- the process determines (at 1815 ) that the filtering operation has filtered out the input event the process ends. Otherwise, the process 1800 transitions to 1820 .
- a converter of the virtualization application generates one or more sets of data tuples based on the received input event data.
- the converter is a table mapping engine that performs a series of table mapping operations on the input event data to map the input event data to other data tuples.
- this table mapping engine also performs the filtering operation in some embodiments.
- One example of such a table mapping engine is an nLog table-mapping engine which will be described bellow.
- the data tuples that the process 1800 generates may include data (e.g., physical control plane data) that the process has to push down to the NIB. Accordingly, at 1825 , the process publishes to the NIB any data tuples that it has generated if such publication is necessary. After 1825 , the process ends.
- data e.g., physical control plane data
- the virtualization application in some embodiments performs its mapping operations by using the nLog table mapping engine, which, as described above, is a variation of the datalog table mapping technique.
- Datalog is used in the field of database management to map one set of tables to another set of tables. Datalog is not a suitable tool for performing table mapping operations in a virtualization application of a network control system as its current implementations are often slow.
- the nLog engine of some embodiments is custom designed to operate quickly so that it can perform the real time mapping of the LDPS data tuples to the data tuples of the managed switching elements. This custom design is based on several custom design choices.
- some embodiments compile the nLog table mapping engine from a set of high level declaratory rules that are expressed by an application developer (e.g., by a developer of a control application).
- an application developer e.g., by a developer of a control application.
- one custom design choice that is made for the nLog engine is to allow the application developer to use only the AND operator to express the declaratory rules.
- these embodiments ensure that the resulting rules of the nLog engine are expressed in terms of AND operations that are faster to execute at run time.
- Join operations are common database operations for creating association between records of different tables.
- the nLog engine limits its join operations to inner join operations (also called as internal join operations) because performing outer join operations (also called as external join operations) can be time consuming and therefore impractical for real time operation of the engine.
- nLog engine is implemented as a distributed table mapping engine that is executed by several different virtualization applications.
- Some embodiments implement the nLog engine in a distributed manner by partitioning management of logical data path sets.
- Each logical data path set includes logical data paths that are specified for a single user of the control system. Partitioning management of the logical data path sets involves specifying for each particular logical data path set only one controller instance as the instance responsible for specifying the NIB records associated with that particular logical data path set.
- one controller instance can be the master for NIB records relating to two of the logical data path sets while the other controller instance can be the master for the NIB records for the other three logical data path sets.
- Partitioning management of logical data path sets ensures that conflicting values for the same logical data path sets are not written to the NIB by two different controller instances, and thereby alleviates the applications running on top of NOS from guarding against the writing of such conflicting values.
- Partitioning management of the LDPS′ also assigns in some embodiments the table mapping operations for each LDPS to the nLog engine of the controller instance responsible for the LDPS.
- the distribution of the nLog table mapping operations across several nLog instances reduces the load on each nLog instance and thereby increases the speed by which each nLog instance can complete its mapping operations. Also, this distribution reduces the memory size requirement on each machine that executes a controller instance.
- some embodiments partition the nLog table mapping operations across the different instances by designating the first join operation that is performed by each nLog instance to be based on the LDPS parameter. This designation ensures that each nLog instance's join operations fail and terminate immediately when the instance has started a set of join operations that relate to a LDPS that is not managed by the nLog instance.
- Sub-section A initially describes the software architecture of the virtualization application of some embodiments.
- Sub-section B then describes further the parallel, distributed management of the LDPS.
- Sub-section C next describes one manner for designing the nLog mapping engine.
- Sub-section D then describes the nLog engine's table mapping operations in response to an external event from the NIB or an internal event that is generated by the nLog engine.
- sub-section E provides code-based examples that describe how a portion of the nLog engine is specified and how this portion later operates to perform its mapping operations.
- FIG. 19 illustrates a virtualization application 1900 of some embodiments of the invention.
- This application 1900 is used in some embodiments as the virtualization application 1430 of FIG. 14 .
- the virtualization application 1900 uses an nLog table mapping engine to map input tables that contain LDPS data tuples to data tuples for defining managed switching elements, attributes of the managed switching elements, and flow entries for the managed switching elements.
- This application resides between a control application 1905 that generates LDPS data tuples, and a NOS 1965 that contains a NIB 1960 that stores the data tuples generated by the nLog table mapping engine. More specifically, the control application 1905 allows different users to define different logical data path sets (LDPS), which specify the desired switching configurations of the users.
- LDPS logical data path sets
- the control application 1905 also reacts to changes in the NIB to modify the LDPS′.
- the virtualization application 1900 through its mapping operations converts each of the LDPS of each user into a set of data tuples to populate the NIB.
- the virtualization application then populates the NIB 1960 through the NIB Publisher 1955 with the generated sets of data tuples.
- the NOS 1965 subsequently propagates the NIB data tuples for a particular user to the switching element(s)
- the NOS completes the deployment of the user's switching configuration to one or more switching elements.
- the virtualization application is executed on the same machine with the control application and the NOS. However, the virtual application, the control application, and the NOS do not have to run on the same machine in other embodiments. That is, one of these applications or each of these applications may run on a different computer.
- the virtualization application 1900 includes a set of rule-engine input tables 1910 , a set of function and constant tables 1915 , a query manager 1920 , a rules engine 1925 , a set of rule-engine output tables 1945 , a NIB monitor 1950 , a NIB publisher 1955 , and a compiler 1935 .
- the compiler 1935 is one component of the application that operates at a different instance in time than the application's other components. The compiler operates when a developer needs to specify the rules engine for a particular control application and/or virtualized environment, whereas the rest of the application's modules operate at run time when the application interfaces with the control application and the NOS to deploy and monitor logical data path sets specified by one or more users.
- the compiler 1935 takes a relatively small set (e.g., few hundred lines) of declarative instructions 1940 that are specified in a declarative language and converts these into a large set (e.g., thousands of lines) of code that specify the operation of the rules engine 1925 , which performs the application's table mapping as further described below.
- the compiler greatly simplifies the virtualization application developer's process of defining and updating the virtualization application. This is because the compiler allows the developer to use a high level programming language that allows a compact definition of the virtualization application's complex mapping operation and to subsequently update this mapping operation in response to any number of changes (e.g., changes in the networking functions supported by the virtualization application, changes to desired behavior of the virtualization application, etc.).
- the rule-engine (RE) input tables 1910 include tables with logical data and/or switching configurations (e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.) specified by the user and/or the virtualization application. They also include in some embodiments tables that contain physical data (i.e., non-logical data) from the switching elements managed by the virtualized control system. In some embodiments, such physical data includes data regarding the managed switching elements (e.g., physical control plane data) and other data regarding network configuration employed by the virtualized control system to deploy the different LDPS′ of the different users.
- logical data and/or switching configurations e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.
- the RE input tables 1910 are partially populated by the LDPS data (e.g., by logical forwarding plane data) provided by the control application 1905 .
- the control application generates part of the LDPS data based on user input regarding the logical data path sets. It also generates part of the LDPS data by monitoring the NIB to identify changes in the managed switching element infrastructure that would require modification to the LDPS data.
- the control application's generation of LDPS data based on the monitoring of the NIB is further described below and further described in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- the NIB monitor 1950 partially populates the RE input tables 1910 with some or all of the data that the NIB monitor collects from the NIB 1960 . The operation of the NIB monitor will be further described below.
- the virtualization application 1900 includes other miscellaneous tables 1915 that the rules engine 1925 uses to gather inputs for its table mapping operations.
- These tables 1915 include constant tables that store defined values for constants that the rules engine 1925 needs to perform its table mapping operations.
- constant tables 1915 may include a constant “zero” that is defined as the value 0, a constant “dispatch_port_no” as the value 4000, a constant “broadcast_MAC_addr” as the value 0xFF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
- a dispatch port in some embodiments is a port that specifies that the managed switch should reprocess the packet based on another flow entry. Examples of such dispatch ports are provided in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.”)
- the rules engine 1925 references constants
- the corresponding value defined for the constants are actually retrieved and used.
- the values defined for constants in the constant table 1915 may be modified and/or updated. In this manner, the constant table 1915 provides the ability to modify the value defined for constants that the rules engine 1925 references without the need to rewrite or recompile code that specifies the operation of the rules engine 1925 .
- the tables 1915 further include function tables that store functions that the rules engine 1925 needs to use to calculate values needed to populate the output tables 1945 .
- One example of such a function is a hash function that the rules engine uses to compute hash values for distributing DHT operations as well as load balancing traffic between lower level switches and higher level switches in a hierarchical switching architecture.
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ entitled “Method and Apparatus for Using a Network Information Base to Control a Plurality of Shared Network Infrastructure Switching Elements,” and filed concurrently with the present application with the attorney docket number NCRA.P0010, describes the use of hash tables for distributing DHT operations, while the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- the rules engine 1925 performs table mapping operations that specify one manner for implementing the LDPS′ within the managed switching element infrastructure. Whenever one of the RE input tables is modified, the rules engine performs a set of table mapping operations that may result in the modification of one or more data tuples in one or more RE output tables. The modification of the output table data tuples, in turn, may cause the NIB to be modified in order to establish and/or modify the implementation of a particular user's LDPS in the managed switching element infrastructure.
- the rules engine 1925 includes an event processor 1922 , several query plans 1927 , and a table processor 1930 .
- each query plan is a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a modification to one of the RE input table. Such a modification is referred to below as an input table event.
- each query plan is generated by the compiler 1935 from one declaratory rule in the set of declarations 1940 .
- the query plans are defined by using the nLog declaratory language.
- the compiler 1935 does not just statically generate query plans but rather dynamically generates query plans based on performance data it gathers.
- the compiler 1935 in these embodiments generates an initial set of query plans and let the rules engine operate with the initial set of query plans.
- the virtualization application gathers the performance data or receives performance feedbacks (e.g., from the rules engine). Based on this data, the compiler is modified so that the virtualization application or a user of this application can have the modified compiler modify the query plans while the rules engine is not operating or during the operation of the rules engine.
- the order of the join operations in a query plan may result in different execution times depending on the number of tables the rules engine has to select to perform each join operation.
- the compiler in these embodiments can be re-specified in order to re-order the join operations in a particular query plan when a certain order of the join operations in the particular query plan has resulted in a long execution time to perform the join operations.
- the event processor 1922 of the rules engine 1925 detects the occurrence of each input table event.
- the event processor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of an input table event differently.
- the event processor registers for callbacks with the RE input tables for notification of changes to the records of the RE input tables.
- the event processor 1922 detects an input table event when it receives notification from a RE input table that one of its records has changed.
- the event processor 1922 (1) selects the appropriate query plan for the detected table event, and (2) directs the table processor 1930 to execute the query plan.
- the table processor 1930 in some embodiments performs the join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 1910 and 1915 .
- the table processor 1930 of some embodiments then (1) performs a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writes the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 1945 .
- the RE output tables 1945 store both logical and physical network element data attributes.
- the tables 1945 are called RE output tables as they store the output of the table mapping operations of the rules engine 1925 .
- the RE output tables can be grouped in several different categories. For instance, in some embodiments, these tables can be RE input tables and/or virtualization-application (VA) output tables.
- a table is a RE input table when a change in the table causes the rules engine to detect an input event that requires the execution of a query plan.
- a RE output table 1945 can also be a RE input table 1910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan after it is modified by the rules engine. Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by the control application 1905 or the NIB monitor 1950 .
- a table is a virtualization-application output table when a change in the table causes the NIB publisher 1955 to publish a change to the NIB 1960 , as further described below.
- a table in the RE output tables 1945 can be a RE input table 1910 , a VA output table 2005 , or both a RE input table 1910 and a VA output table 2005 .
- the NIB publisher 1955 detects changes to the VA output tables 2005 of the RE output tables 1945 .
- the NIB publisher of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a VA output table event differently.
- the NIB publisher registers for callbacks with the VA output tables for notification of changes to the records of the VA output tables.
- the NIB publisher 1955 detects an output table event when it receives notification from a VA output table that one of its records has changed.
- the NIB publisher 1955 takes each modified data tuple in the modified VA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple into the NIB 1960 through the APIs provided by the NOS 1965 .
- the NOS 1965 propagates, if needed, a NIB data tuple that was modified because of the propagated VA output table data tuple to one or more of the managed switching elements. In doing this, the NOS completes the deployment of the LDPS (e.g., one or more logical switching configurations) to one or more managed switching elements as specified by the NIB records.
- the NIB 1960 in some embodiments stores both logical and physical network element attributes that are identical or derived from the logical and physical network element data attributes in the output tables 1945 . In other embodiments, however, the NIB only stores physical network element attributes that are identical or derived from the physical network element data attributes in the output tables 1945 .
- the NIB monitor 1950 interfaces with the NIB 1960 to receive notifications regarding changes to the NIB.
- the NIB monitor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a change in the NIB differently.
- the NIB monitor registers for callbacks with the NIB for notification of changes to one or more records in the NIB.
- the NIB monitor 1950 detects NIB change event when it receives notification from the NIB that one of its records has changed.
- the NIB monitor 1950 may modify one or more RE input tables 1910 , which, in turn, may cause one or more RE input table event to occur that then initiates the execution of one or more query plans by the rules engine.
- the NIB monitor writes some or all of the information that it receives from the NIB into the input tables 1910 , so that the state and configuration of the managed switching elements can be accounted for while generating the NIB data tuples through the mapping operations.
- the NIB monitor 1950 may update the input table records 1910 so that the generated NIB data tuples can be updated to reflect the modified switching configuration or underlying switching element state.
- the NIB monitor 1950 is a collection of input objects (or functions) associated with the RE input tables. Each input object in some embodiments is associated with one RE input table and is responsible for modifying its associated input table in response to a change in the NIB. Each input object in some embodiments registers with one or more NIB objects for callback notifications upon the occurrence of changes to the NIB object(s).
- the NIB publisher 1955 is a collection of output objects (or functions) associated with the VA output tables. Each output object in some embodiments is associated with one VA output table and is responsible for propagating changes in its associated output table to the NIB.
- the NIB monitor is a conceptual representation of the input and output objects that register with the NIB for callbacks.
- the query manager 1920 interfaces with the control application 1905 to receive queries regarding LDPS data. As shown in FIG. 19 , the manager 1920 of some embodiments also interfaces with the NIB 1960 in order to query the NIB to provide the control application state information regarding the network elements in the LDPS′ for the different user. In other embodiments, however, the query manager 1920 queries the output tables 1945 to obtain LDPS data for the control application.
- the virtualization application 1900 uses a variation of the datalog database language, called nLog, to create the table mapping engine that maps input tables containing logical data path data and switching element attributes to the output tables.
- nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events.
- nLog provides a smaller subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules.
- nLog engine The declaratory rules and operations that are specified through nLog are then compiled into a much larger set of rules by an nLog compiler. In some embodiments, this compiler translates each rule that is meant to respond to an event into several sets of database join operations. Collectively the larger set of rules forms the table mapping, rules engine that is referred to below as the nLog engine.
- FIG. 21 illustrates a development process 2100 that some embodiments employ to develop the rules engine 1925 of the virtualization application 1900 .
- this process uses a declaration toolkit 2105 and a compiler 2110 .
- the toolkit 2105 allows a developer (e.g., a developer of a control application 1905 that operates on top of the virtualization application 1900 ) to specify different sets of rules to perform different operations upon occurrence of different sets of conditions.
- FIG. 21 One example 2115 of such a rule is illustrated in FIG. 21 .
- This example is a multi-conditional rule that specifies that an Action X has to be taken if four conditions A, B, C, and D are true.
- the expression of each condition as true in this example is not meant to convey that all embodiments express each condition for each rule as True or False.
- this expression is meant to convey the concept of the existence of a condition, which may or may not be true.
- a in this example is the value of a parameter Z, and the condition is true when Z has a value A.
- a multi-conditional rule in some embodiments specifies the taking of an action when certain conditions in the network are met. Examples of such actions include creation or deletion of new packet flow entries, creation or deletion of new network constructs, modification to use of existing network constructs, etc. In the virtualization application 1900 these actions are often implemented by the rules engine 1925 by creating, deleting, or modifying records in the output tables, which are then propagated to the NIB by the NIB publisher 1955 .
- the multi-conditional rule 2115 uses only the AND operator to express the rule. In other words, each of the conditions A, B, C and D has to be true before the Action X is to be taken.
- the declaration toolkit 2105 only allows the developers to utilize the AND operator because excluding the other operators (such as ORs, XORs, etc.) that are allowed by datalog allows nLog to operate faster than datalog.
- the compiler 2110 converts each rule specified by the declaration toolkit 2105 into a query plan 2120 of the rules engine.
- FIG. 21 illustrates the creation of three query plans 2120 a - 2120 c for three rules 2115 a - 2115 c .
- Each query plan includes one or more sets of join operations.
- Each set of join operations specifies one or more join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a particular event in a particular RE input table, where the particular event might correspond to the addition, deletion or modification of an entry in the particular RE input table.
- the compiler 2110 converts each multi-conditional rule into several sets of join operations, with each set of join operations being specified for execution upon the detection of the occurrence of one of the conditions.
- the event for which the set of join operations is specified is one of the conditions of the multi-conditional rule.
- the compiler in these embodiments specifies multiple sets of join operations to address the occurrence of each of the conditions.
- FIG. 21 illustrates this conversion of a multi-conditional rule into several sets of join operations. Specifically, it illustrates the conversion of the four-condition rule 2115 into the query plan 2120 a , which has four sets of join operations.
- one join-operation set 2125 is to be performed when condition A occurs
- one join-operation set 2130 is to be performed when condition B occurs
- one join-operation set 2135 is to be performed when condition C occurs
- one join-operation set 2140 is to be performed when condition D occurs.
- These four sets of operations collectively represent the query plan 2120 a that the rules engine 1925 performs upon the occurrence of a RE input table event relating to any of the parameters A, B, C, or D.
- the input table event relates to one of these parameters (e.g., parameter B) but one of the other parameters (e.g., parameters A, C, and D) is not true, then the set of join operations fails and no output table is modified.
- the set of join operations does not fail and an output table is modified to perform the action X.
- these join operations are internal join operations.
- each set of join operations terminates with a select command that selects entries in the record(s) resulting from the set of join operations to output to one or more output tables.
- partition management of logical data path sets by assigning the management of each logical data path set to one controller instance.
- This partition management of the LDPS is also referred to as serialization of management of the LDPS.
- the rules engine 1925 of some embodiments implements this partitioned management of the LDPS by having a join to the LDPS entry be the first join in each set of join operations that is not triggered by an event in a LDPS input table.
- FIG. 22 illustrates one such approach. Specifically, for the same four-condition rule 2115 a illustrated in FIG. 21 , it generates a different query plan 2220 a .
- This query plan is part of three query plans 2220 a - 2220 c that this figure shows the compiler 2210 generating for the three rules 2115 a - 2115 c specified through the declaration toolkit 2105 .
- the query plan 2220 a Like the query plan 2120 a that has four sets of join operations 2125 , 2130 , 2135 and 2140 for the four-condition rule 2115 a , the query plan 2220 a also has four sets of join operations 2230 , 2235 , 2240 and 2245 for this rule 2115 a.
- the four sets of join operations 2230 , 2235 , 2240 and 2245 are operational sets that are each to be performed upon the occurrence of one of the conditions A, B, C, and D.
- the first join operations in each of these four sets 2230 , 2235 , 2240 and 2245 is a join with the LDPS table managed by the virtualization application instance. Accordingly, even when the input table event relates to one of these four parameters (e.g., parameter B) and all of the other parameters (e.g., parameters A, C, and D) are true, the set of join operations may fail if the event has occurred for a LDPS that is not managed by this virtualization application instance.
- the set of join operations does not fail and an output table is modified to perform the desire action only when (1) the input table event relates to one of these four parameters (e.g., parameter B), all of the other parameters (e.g., parameters A, C, and D) are true, and (3) the event relates to a LDPS that is managed by this virtualization application instance.
- Sub-section D below further describes how the insertion of the join operation to the LDPS table allows the virtualization application to partition management of the LDPS′.
- FIG. 23 conceptually illustrates a process 2300 that the virtualization application 1900 performs in some embodiments each time a record in a RE input table changes.
- This change may be a change made through the control application 1905 .
- it may be a change that is made by the NIB monitor 1950 after it receives from the NIB a notification regarding a change in the NIB.
- the change to the RE input table record can entail the addition, deletion or modification of the record.
- the process 2300 initially detects (at 2305 ) a change in a RE input table 1910 .
- the event processor 1922 is the module that detects this change.
- the process 2300 identifies the query plan associated with the detected RE input table event.
- each query plan in some embodiments specifies a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of an input table event.
- the event processor 1922 is also the module that performs this operation (i.e., is the module that identifies the query plan).
- the process 2300 executes the query plan for the detected input table event.
- the event processor 1922 directs the table processor 1930 to execute the query plan.
- the table processor 1930 in some embodiments performs the set of join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 1910 and 1915 .
- FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a set of join operations 2405 .
- This set of join operations is performed when an event is detected with respect to record 2410 of an input table 2415 .
- the join operations in this set specify that the modified record 2410 in table 2415 should be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2420 .
- This joined record should then be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2425 , and this resulting joined record should finally be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2430 .
- Two records in two tables “match” when values of a common key (e.g., a primary key and a foreign key) that the two tables share are the same, in some embodiments.
- a common key e.g., a primary key and a foreign key
- the records 2410 and 2435 in tables 2415 and 2420 match because the values C in these records match.
- the records 2435 and 2440 in tables 2420 and 2425 match because the values F in these records match.
- the records 2440 and 2445 in tables 2425 and 2430 match because the values R in these records match.
- the joining of the records 2410 , 2435 , 2440 , and 2445 results in the combined record 2450 .
- the result of a join operation between two tables e.g., tables 2415 and 2420
- the result of a join operation between two tables may be multiple records.
- a record is produced as the result of the set of join operations
- the set of join operations in some cases might result in a null record.
- a null record results when the set of join operations terminates on the first join because the detected event relates to a LDPS not managed by a particular instance of the virtualization application.
- the process determines whether the query plan has failed (e.g., whether the set of join operations resulted in a null record). If so, the process ends.
- the operation 2320 is implicitly performed by the table processor when it terminates its operations upon the failure of one of the join operations.
- the process 2300 determines (at 2320 ) that the query plan has not failed, it stores (at 2325 ) the output resulting from the execution of the query plan in one or more of the output tables.
- the table processor 1930 performs this operation by (1) performing a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writing the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 1945 .
- FIG. 24 illustrates an example of this selection operation. Specifically, it illustrates the selection of values B, F, P and S from the combined record 2450 and the writing of these values into a record 2465 of an output table 2460 .
- the RE output tables can be categorized in some embodiments as (1) a RE input table only, (2) a VA output table only, or (3) both a RE input table and a VA output table.
- the process 2300 publishes (at 2330 ) the changes to this output table to the NIB.
- the NIB publisher 1955 detects changes to the VA output tables 2005 of the RE output tables 1945 , and in response, it propagates the modified data tuple in the modified VA output table into the NIB 1960 through the APIs provided by the NOS 1965 .
- the NOS 1965 propagates, if needed, a NIB data tuple that was modified because on the propagated VA output table data tuple to one or more of the managed switching elements. In doing this, the NOS completes the deployment of the LDPS (e.g., one or more logical switching configurations) to one or more managed switching elements as specified by the NIB records.
- the LDPS e.g., one or more logical switching configurations
- a RE output table 1945 can also be a RE input table 1910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan after it is modified by the rules engine.
- Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by the control application 1905 or the NIB monitor 1950 .
- the process determines (at 2330 ) that an internal input event was created, it returns to 2310 to perform operations 2310 - 2335 for this new internal input event.
- the process terminates when it determines (at 2335 ) that the execution of the query plan at 2335 did not result in an internal input event.
- process 2300 is a conceptual representation of the operations used to map a change in one or more input tables to one or more output tables.
- the specific operations of process 2300 may not be performed in the exact order shown and described.
- the specific operations may not be performed in one continuous series of operations, and different specific operations may be performed in different embodiments.
- the process 2300 in some embodiments batches up a set of changes in RE input tables 1910 and identifies (at 2310 ) a query plan associated with the set of detected RE input table events.
- the process in these embodiments executes (at 2320 ) the query plan for the whole set of the RE input table events rather than for a single RE input table event.
- Batching up the RE input table events in some embodiments results in better performance of the table mapping operations. For example, batching the RE input table events improves performance because it reduces the number of instance that the process 2300 will produce additional RE input table events that would cause it to start another iteration of itself.
- some embodiments implement the nLog engine as a distributed table mapping engine that is executed by different virtualization applications of different controller instances.
- some embodiments partition the management of the logical data path sets by specifying for each particular logical data path set only one controller instance as the instance responsible for specifying the NIB records associated with that particular logical data path set. Partitioning the management of the LDPS′ also assigns in some embodiments the table mapping operations for each LDPS to the nLog engine of the controller instance responsible for the LDPS.
- some embodiments partition the nLog table mapping operations across the different instances by designating the first join operation that is performed by each nLog instance to be based on the LDPS parameter. This designation ensures that each nLog instance's join operations fail and terminate immediately when the instance has started a set of join operations that relate to a LDPS that is not managed by the nLog instance.
- FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a set of join operations failing when they relate to a LDPS that does not relate to an input table event that has occurred.
- this figure illustrates four query plans 2505 , 2510 , 2515 and 2520 of a rules engine 2525 of a particular virtualization application instance 2530 .
- Two of these query plans 2510 and 2515 specify two sets of join operations that should be performed upon occurrence of input table events B and W respectively, while two of the query plans 2505 and 2520 specify two sets of join operations that should be performed upon occurrence of input table event A.
- the two query plans 2510 and 2515 are not executed because an input table event A has occurred for a LDPS 2 and these two plans are not associated with such an event. Instead, the two query plans 2505 and 2520 are executed because they are associated with the input table event A that has occurred. As shown in this figure, the occurrence of this event results in two sets of join operations being performed to execute the two query plans 2505 and 2520 .
- the first set of join operations 2540 for the query plan 2505 fails because the query plan 2505 is specified for a LDPS 1 , which is a LDPS not managed by the virtualization application instance 2530 .
- This set of join operations fails on the first join operation 2535 because it is a join with the LDPS table, which for the virtualization application instance 2530 does not contain a record for the LDPS 1 .
- the remaining join operations (not shown) of the query plan 2540 will still be performed and fail. In other embodiments, the remaining join operations of the query plan 2540 will not be performed as shown.
- the second set of join operations 2545 does not fail, however, because it is for the LDPS 2 , which is a LDPS managed by the virtualization application instance 2530 and therefore has a record in the LDPS table of this application instance.
- This set of join operations has four stages that each performs one join operation. Also, as shown in FIG. 25 , the set of join operations terminates with a selection operation that selects a portion of the combined record produced through the join operations.
- FIG. 26 illustrates an example that describes this reduction in workload. Specifically, it illustrates an example where two controller instances 2605 and 2610 are responsible for the virtualization application functionality of two different LDPS′ A and B for different tenants A and B of a multi-tenant computing environment.
- the two controller instances manage two sets of managed switches 2615 and 2620 .
- Each of the two sets of managed switches manages a set of machines 2625 or 2630 , which may be host machines running on dedicated machines, or may be virtual machines running on shared machines.
- the first stage 2601 shows that no machines have been deployed in the managed system for either tenant A or tenant B.
- the second stage 2602 shows the computing environment with several machines that have been deployed for tenant A in the two sets of machines 2625 and 2630 . It also shows the VA output table 2640 of the virtualization application of the controller instance 2605 with flow entries for the LDPS A that were specified by this instance's virtualization application.
- the second stage further shows the NIB 2645 of the controller instance 2605 containing the flow entries for the LDPS A. At this stage, the NIB 2645 also contains LDPS data relating to LDPS A in some embodiments, but this data is not shown in FIG. 26 .
- the third stage 2603 in FIG. 26 shows that the flow entries for the LDPS A have migrated to the NIB 2655 of the controller instance 2610 .
- This migration occurs because of the NIB replication across the controller instances.
- this replication causes LDPS data relating to LDPS A to be copied to the NIB 2655 .
- the third stage 2603 further shows the computing environment with several machines that have been deployed for tenant B in the two sets of machines 2625 and 2630 . It also shows the VA output table 2650 of the virtualization application of the controller instance 2610 with flow entries for the LDPS B that were specified by this instance's virtualization application.
- the third stage further shows the NIB 2655 of the controller instance 2610 containing the flow entries for the LDPS B.
- the NIB 2655 also contains LDPS data relating to LDPS B in some embodiments, but this data is not shown in FIG. 26 .
- the fourth stage 2604 shows that the flow entries for the LDPS B have migrated to the NIB 2645 of the controller instance 2605 .
- This migration occurs because of the NIB replication across the controller instances.
- This replication also causes LDPS data relating to LDPS B to be copied to the NIB 2645 .
- the NIBs 2645 and 2655 have LDPS data relating to both LDPS A and LDPS B.
- the VA output tables of one controller instance do not store flow entries for the LDPS of another controller instance. That is, in this example, the VA output tables 2640 of controller instance A do not store the flow entries for the LDPS B and the VA output tables 2650 of controller instance B do not store the flow entries for the LDPS A.
- This depiction is meant to illustrate that some embodiments partition the storage of the logical state data across several controller instances. This allows these embodiments to keep the size of tables (e.g., the input or output tables) small in order to increase the speed by which each nLog instance can complete its mapping operations as described above.
- tables e.g., the input or output tables
- each controller instance in some embodiments only store or practically only store logical state data for only the LDPS′ for which the controller instance is responsible
- the NIB for each controller instance in some of these embodiments contains all or practically all of the logical state data (e.g., except some logical port statistics that are stored in the DHTs of controller instances that are not replicated across) for all LDPS of all controller instances.
- other embodiments will partition the logical state data for the LDPS's across the NIBs of different controller instances.
- FIG. 27 illustrates additional details regarding the operation of the NIB monitor 1950 of the virtualization application 1900 of some embodiments of the invention. For simplicity of discussion, FIG. 27 does not illustrate the control application 1905 , the query manager 1920 , the miscellaneous tables 1915 , the declarative rules 1940 , the complier 1935 , and the inner makeups of the rules engine 1925 .
- the NIB monitor 1950 interfaces with the NIB 1960 to receive notifications regarding changes to the NIB 1960 .
- the NIB monitor 1950 may modify one or more RE input tables 1910 when it receives a record change notification from the NIB.
- the rules engine 1925 then performs a series of mapping operations to map the modified RE input tables to the RE output tables 1945 , which may include RE input tables 1910 , VA output tables 2005 of FIG. 20 and tables that serve as both RE input tables and VA output tables.
- the NIB monitor 1950 of some embodiments may also modify one or more VA output tables when it receives a NIB change notification. That is, the NIB monitor in these embodiments directly modifies the VA output tables for some NIB change notifications, such as notification relating to some of the changes to the state and configuration of the managed switching elements. By directly writing such data to the VA output tables, the NIB 1960 keeps the VA output tables updated with the current state and configuration of the managed switching elements.
- FIG. 27 conceptually illustrates that some of the VA output tables 1945 conceptually include two representations 2710 and 2715 of the state and configuration of the managed switching elements.
- the first representation 2710 in some embodiments includes data that specify the desired state and configuration of the managed switching elements, while the second representation 2715 includes data specifying the current state and configuration of the managed switches.
- the data of the first representation 2710 is the result of table mapping operations performed by the rules engine 1925 .
- the data of the first representation 2710 is physical control plane data produced by the rules engine 1925 based on changes in logical forwarding data stored in the RE input tables 1910 .
- the data of the second representation 2715 is retrieved from the NIB 1960 . This data is also physical control plane data in some embodiments.
- the data of the first representation and the data of the second representation do not always match because, for example, a failure of a managed switching element that is reflected in the second representation may not have been reflected in the first representation yet.
- the virtualization application 1900 conceptually includes a difference assessor 2705 .
- the difference assessor 2705 detects a change in the first representation 2710 or in the second representation 2715 .
- a change in the first representation may occur when the rules engine 1925 puts the result of its mapping operations in the VA output tables 2005 of FIG. 20 .
- a change in the second representation may occur when the NIB updates the VA output tables 2005 when it is notified of a change in the NIB.
- the difference assessor 2705 Upon detecting a change in the VA output tables, the difference assessor 2705 in some embodiments examines both the first representation 2710 and the second representation 2715 to find out the difference, if any, between these two representations.
- the difference assessor 2705 takes no further action because the current state and configuration of the managed switching elements are already what they should be.
- the different assessor 2705 may have the NIB publisher 1955 publish the difference (e.g., data tuples) to the NIB 1960 .
- the difference will be propagated to the managed switching elements by the NOS 1965 and the state and configuration of the managed switching elements will be the state and configuration specified by the first representation 2710 .
- the difference assessor when the difference assessor detects a difference between the two representations, the difference assessor in some embodiments may call the input tables of the control or virtualization application to initiate additional table mapping operations to reconcile the difference between the desired and current values.
- the NIB monitor will end up updating the input tables based on the changes in the NIB at the same time it updates the output tables and these will trigger the nLog operations that might update the output table.
- the virtualization application 1900 does not store the desired and current representations 2710 and 2715 of the physical control plane data, and does not use a difference assessor 2705 to assess whether two corresponding representations are identical. Instead, the virtualization application 1900 stores each set of physical control plane data in a format that identifies differences between the desired data value and the current data value. When the difference between the desired and current values is significant, the virtualization application 1900 of some embodiments may have the NIB publisher push a data tuple change to the NIB, or may call the input tables of the control or virtualization application to initiate additional table mapping operations to reconcile the difference between the desired and current values.
- the switching elements managed by the virtualization application include a pool node.
- a pool node and other network constructs associated with the pool node are described in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.”
- the pool node has a root bridge and a patch bridge.
- the pool node shuts down for some reason (e.g., by hardware or software failure) and the two bridges of the pool node get shut down together with the pool node. This results in an update in the NIB 1960 which will indicate the pool node and its bridges being down.
- the NIB monitor 1950 in this example is then notified of this update in the NIB and subsequently writes information to both the RE input tables 1910 and the VA output tables (specifically, the second representation 2715 ).
- the rules engine 1925 performs mapping operations upon detecting the change in the RE input tables 1910 but the mapping result (i.e., the first representation 2710 ) in this example will not change the desired data value regarding the pool node and its bridges. That is, the desired data value would still indicate that the pool node and the two bridges should exist in the configuration of the system.
- the second representation 2715 would also indicate the presence of the pool node and its bridges in the configuration.
- the NOS 1965 then restarts the pool node but the root bridge and the patch bridge do not come back up in this example.
- the NIB 1960 will indicate that the pool node is back up and the NIB monitor 1950 updates the RE input tables 1910 and the second representation 2715 of the VA output tables accordingly.
- the rules engine 1925 performs mapping operations on the RE input tables 1910 but the resulting desired data value would still not change because there was no change as to the existence of the pool node in the configuration of the system. However, the current data value in the second representation 2715 would indicate at this point that the pool node has come back up but not the bridges.
- the difference assessor 2705 detects the changes in the first and second representations and compares the desired and current data values regarding the pool node and its bridges.
- the difference assessor 2705 determines the difference, which is the existence of the two bridges in the pool node.
- the difference assessor 2705 notifies the NIB publisher 1955 of this difference.
- the NIB publisher 1955 publishes this difference in the NIB 1960 .
- the NOS 1965 propagates this information to the pool node so that the pool node creates the root and patch bridges in it.
- nLog in some embodiments is a variation of the datalog database language for declaring logic that controls how the virtualization application 1900 will map input tables to the output tables by performing mapping operations on the information contained in the input tables.
- the input tables contain information comprising logical data path sets and switching element attributes.
- the output tables contain physical control plane data.
- declaring logic for governing how a control application requires extensive use cases and conditions in C++ or an equivalent programmatic language.
- the nLog language expresses the same control logic as a programming language such as C++, but in high-level declarations that are easily modified and extended.
- the nLog declarations are compiled into a code in a programming language for use by a run time process by the nLog compiler.
- nLog is a variation of the Datalog language selected for its speed and applicability to distributing logical data path sets.
- the Datalog language is a query and rule language for deductive databases.
- the Datalog language is stated using rule declarations.
- nLog uses the “JOIN”, “SELECT”, and “AND” operators from Datalog.
- “JOIN” performs an inner join of tables on a specified join-predicate.
- Inner join creates a new result table by combining column values of two tables based on the specified join-predicate.
- Inner join compares each row of the joined tables to find all pairs of rows that satisfy the join-predicate. When the join-predicate is satisfied, column values for each matched pair of rows of the joined table are combined into a result row.
- SELECT returns column or row entries from tables based on a specified result set.
- AND returns true where all inputs to the “AND” function are true.
- This set of operators is sufficient to implement the distribution of logical data path sets of some embodiments of the invention.
- Other operators such as the “XOR” and “OR” operators, are not used for some embodiments of nLog because (1) their implementation may complicate the development of the nLog compiler, (2) their function can be emulated using only the “AND” operator, and/or (3) their performance is less than that of the “JOIN”, “SELECT”, and “AND” operators.
- nLog uses the syntactic structure of Datalog rule declarations.
- nLog rule declarations are of the form “ ⁇ head>:- ⁇ body1>, ⁇ body2>.”
- the rule declaration “ ⁇ head>:- ⁇ body1>, ⁇ body2>” can be understood as “ ⁇ head> if it is known that ⁇ body1> and ⁇ body2>.”
- the “:-” symbol demarcates the head from the body of a rule declaration.
- the text prior to the “:-” symbol is the head of a rule declaration.
- the text following the “:-” symbol is the body of a rule declaration.
- the head of the rule declaration receives parameters and defines the action the rules engine will take when the conditions specified in the body clauses of the rule declaration are satisfied.
- clauses ⁇ body1> and ⁇ body2> comprised the body of the rule declaration.
- a rule declaration may have more than one body clause.
- clauses in the body portion of a rule declaration are not used to create, modify, or destroy network constructs. Rather, in some embodiments, clauses in the body portion of a rule declaration are used as conditions for performing the action of the head portion of a rule declaration.
- the head and body clauses of rule declarations can accept parameters. Parameters are inputs to the actions contained in either the head or the body clauses of rules declarations. For example, the parameters of a rule declaration that creates a new network construct typically indicate the location and identity of the new network construct to be created. Parameters will be described in more detail in the example rule declaration described below.
- nLog rule declaration In order to illustrate the structure of an nLog rule declaration of some embodiments of the invention, an example nLog rule declaration will be discussed in detail. This rule declaration will be referred to as the “pool_node” rule declaration.
- pool_node(zone_id, phys_chassis_id) - log_zone(_, zone_id, _), stt_connector(zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _), phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(phys_chassis_id), phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id);
- STT stands for stateless transport layer tunneling.
- Tunneling is encapsulating messages formatted in one communication protocol (i.e., messages having a header of one protocol) with a header of another communication protocol. The messages are encapsulated at one end of a communication link that uses the latter protocol and de-capsulated at another end of the communication link.
- This form of tunnel is described in U.S. Provisional Patent Applications 61/471,897, 61/479,680, and 61/501,433.
- the “pool_node” rule declaration specifies when the rules engine of a virtualization application should create a pool node.
- a rules engine can support multiple rule declarations indicating when to create a pool node, but this discussion will be limited to this specific example.
- the “pool_node” rule declaration can be understood as: “create a pool node in this zone and this chassis if it is known that this chassis in this zone supports STT connectors, has forwarding enabled, is in a valid logical zone, and is connected.”
- a pool node is a hierarchical switching structure that assists managed switching elements in forwarding packets.
- a zone is a logical zone containing logical switches, pool nodes, managed switching elements, and extenders.
- An extender is a hierarchical switching structure that assists pool nodes in forwarding packets to remote locations or unmanaged switching elements.
- a chassis is a node, an x86 box, a hypervisor, a pool node, or an extender.
- a node is switch that can forward packets.
- a pool node, a zone, an extender, a chassis, and a node are described in detail in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.”
- the head of the “pool_node” rule declaration above reads “pool_node(zone_id, phys_chassis_id)”.
- the head of the declaration is the action preceding the “:-” symbol.
- the head indicates that this rule, if it is known that all the clauses of the body are true, will call for the creation of a pool node.
- the head contains the parameters “zone_id” and “phys_chassis_id”.
- “Zone_id” corresponds to the logical zone of the pool node that will be created if the conditions of the body of the rule declaration are satisfied.
- “Chassis_id” corresponds to the machine that will host the pool node that will be created if the conditions of the body of the rule declaration are satisfied.
- the parameters for the head and the parameters for the body clauses are the same.
- the “zone_id” parameter in the “pool_node” action in the head of the rule declaration is the same “zone_id” in the “stt_connector” clause in the body of the rule declaration.
- the body of the “pool_node” declaration above is all the clauses following the “:-” symbol.
- the “pool_node” declaration above contains four clauses: “log_zone”, “stt_connector”, “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled”, and “phys_chassis_connected”.
- the body clause “log_zone(_, zone_id, _)” tests whether the zone indicated by “zone_id” is a valid logical zone.
- the underscores before and after “zone_id,” indicate masked parameters that are not relevant to the “pool_node” declaration.
- the body clause “stt_connector(zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)” tests whether the zone indicated by “zone_id” and the physical chassis indicated by “phys_chassis_id” supports STT tunnels.
- nLog rule declarations 1940 are compiled into C++ code using the nLog compiler 1935 .
- the nLog compiler 1935 produces C++ code that may be executed by the rules engine 1925 .
- the rules engine 1925 executes C++ code to map input tables containing logical data path sets and switching element attributes to the output tables containing physical control plane data by performing mapping operations on logical data path sets. Compilation of rule declarations by the nLog compiler takes place at developer time. Execution of compiled rule declarations by the rules engine takes place at run time when the network controller instance is managing the managed switching elements.
- the nLog compiler reduces the complexity of writing code to define how the rules engine 1925 will distribute logical data path sets by allowing the distribution logic to be declared in the higher-level nLog language instead of C++.
- four sets of rule declarations of the form ⁇ head>:- ⁇ body1>, ⁇ body2>, ⁇ body3>, ⁇ body4> can produce hundreds of lines (e.g., 700 lines) of C++ code once compiled.
- Each ⁇ bodyX> clause is compiled into a query plan defining how the rules engine will handle an event associated with the body clause.
- the “pool_node” rule declaration above will compile into four query plans, one query plan for each clause in the body of the “pool_node” rule declaration.
- Each body clause action will serve as an event that is associated with one of the compiled query plans.
- a query plan defines the operations the rules engine will perform when the rules engine detects an event associated with the query plan.
- the rules engine queries the input tables 1910 based on the query plan or query plans associated with the received event.
- events are network occurrences that have a corresponding query plan in the rules engine in some embodiments. Events indicate that one of the body clauses of the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled is true. Examples of events include a dispatch port being enabled, a physical chassis being connected to the network, or STT tunnel being enabled on a chassis. When such an event occurs, the rules engine computes how logical data path sets and switching element attributes in the input tables will be distributed as physical control plane data in the output tables.
- One event may trigger multiple query plans compiled from multiple rule declarations.
- the “dispatch_port_req” rule declaration includes a body clause “phys_chassis_connected” and the “pool_node” rule declaration includes a body clause “phys_chassis_connected”. If a rules engine contains the compiled query plans for both the “dispatch_port_req” and “pool_node” rule declarations, and if the rules engine receives an event associated with “phys_chassis_connected”, then the rules engine will execute the query plans for “phys_chassis_connected” compiled from both the “dispatch_port_req” and “pool_node” rule declarations.
- a query plan consists of N ⁇ 1 JOIN operations and one SELECTION operation, where N is equal to the number of body clauses in the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled. If a rules engine receives an event associated with a query plan, the query plan will join the input tables 1910 of the N ⁇ 1 body clauses of the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled. Then the query plan will select the head action parameters from the joined tables. If the JOIN operations pass an AND test, and the SELECTION operation yields valid values, then the rules engine will execute the head action.
- the query plans compiled from the “pool_node” rule declaration above will now be discussed as a specific example of a set of query plans.
- the rules engine has the query plans compiled from the “pool_node” rule declaration.
- the “pool_node” rule declaration will compile to four query plans. Each of the four query plans consists of three JOIN operations and one SELECTION operation. If the rules engine receives an event corresponding to “log_zone (_, zone_id, _)”, “stt_connector (zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)”, “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled (phys_chassis_id)”, or “phys_chassis_connected (phys_chassis_id)”, then the rules engine will run the associated query plan. A “log_zone (_, zone_id, _)” event occurs when a logical zone is instantiated.
- An “stt_connector (zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)” event occurs when STT tunneling is enabled on a physical chassis for a specific zone.
- a “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled (phys_chassis_id)” event occurs when a physical chassis enables forwarding.
- a “phys_chassis_connected (phys_chassis_id)” event occurs when a physical chassis is connected to the network.
- the first three operators are JOIN operations on various columns and indices.
- the fourth operator is a SELECTION operation.
- the first JOIN operator joins columns [0,0] on the index “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(0)”.
- the second JOIN operator joins columns [1,0] on the index “stt_connector(1)”.
- the third JOIN operator joins columns [1,1] on the index “log_zone(1)”.
- the SELECTION operator selects columns [01],[1,0] on no index.
- This query plan will be executed in the rules engine of the virtualization application processes notification from a network operating system. During execution the rules engine will access the input tables 1910 to retrieve the information necessary to perform the JOIN and SELECTION operations as described above.
- the execution process begins when the event processor 1922 receives notification of a physical chassis being connected. Upon notification of a physical chassis being connected, the event processor 1922 looks up the query plans 1927 associated with a physical chassis being connected. In some embodiments, multiple query plans may exist for a single event and those multiple query plans would all be executed. In this case, only a single query plan “phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id)” will be found. The event processor 1922 then executes the query plan.
- the process begins with appending JOIN operators and SELECT operators to a runner object. This can be seen in the code above where the code has 3 “append_operator(runner, JOIN,” blocks followed by a “append_operator(runner,SELECTION” block.
- the event processor 1922 executes each operation in the order in which it was appended to the runner object.
- the JOIN operations will perform inner join operations on the input tables 1910 associated with the body clauses on predicates based on the values shown in each “append_operator(runner, JOIN,” code block.
- the SELECTION operator will select on columns to retrieve a result set, if any, based on the values shown in the “append_operator(runner,SELECTION” code block.
- the event processor 1922 sends the runner object to the table processor 1930 to execute the operations appended to the runner object.
- the JOIN and SELECTION operations take place on data tuples in the input tables 1910 , and in some embodiments, on function and constant tables 1915 that are not contained in the input tables 1910 . If the JOIN and SELECTION operations are successful, then the table processor 1930 will return a “phys_chassis_id” and a “zone_id” to the event processor 1922 to be used in creating a new pool node. If any of the JOIN and SELECTION operations fail, then a NULL result will be returned in all parameters and the operations terminated in some embodiments. A NULL result in any parameter will result in a failure of the query plan. Upon successful return of parameters “phys_chassis_id” and “zone_id”, the event processor 1922 will submit the parameters to the input tables 1910 as output entries.
- input tables 1910 contain information that the rules engine maps to the output tables as physical control plane data.
- the information contained in the input tables 1910 includes: logical data path sets, data corresponding to external events, and supplemental network data used by the rules engine during computation of the distribution of logical data path sets.
- the input tables 1910 receive notifications from the network operating system regarding state changes in the network.
- the input tables 1910 also translate those notifications from the network operating system into data tuples and events to be used by the rules engine to compute how to distribute input table information across the output tables.
- input tables 1910 share a basic set of methods and attributes.
- the basic set of attributes includes: an entity input table, an export interface, and an export registry for the export interface.
- the basic set of methods includes: methods for accessing the export registry through the export interface, input table instantiation functions, and registration and un-registration methods for the namesake entity of the input table class.
- the physical forwarding engine input table class has methods for registering and un-registering physical forwarding engines.
- input tables 1910 are programmatic objects stored as a database in computer memory that correspond to types of logical and physical network elements.
- Examples of input table classes include: physical forwarding engine input tables, logical forwarding engine input tables, logical port input tables, and physical port input tables.
- the physical forwarding engine input table class stores data tuples regarding physical forwarding engines that the rules engine uses in performing mapping operations.
- physical forwarding engine input tables store data tuples corresponding to physical switches, software switches, and virtual switches.
- the physical forwarding engine input table class contains the following member classes: entity input table and forwarding engine export interface.
- entity input table and forwarding engine export interface contains the following attributes: a name, an export registry for the export interface, and a network ID.
- the entity input table receives entity data from the NIB and uses the export interface to load the export registry with data received from the NIB through the NIB monitor 1950 .
- the entity input table also alerts the rules engine of changes to the data tuples in the input tables 1910 .
- the export registry contains data tuples to be used by the rules engine.
- the entity input table is defined as an attribute of the class PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable:
- PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable public EntityInputTable, public ForwardingEngineExportInterface ⁇ public:PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable( const std::string& name, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* fe_reg, const NetworkId& physical_network); void start( ); ...
- the entity input table is implemented in physical_forwarding_engine_input_table.cc:
- PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable : PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable( const std::string& name, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* fe_registry, const NetworkId& physical_network) : EntityInputTable(name), fe_registry_(fe_registry), physical_network_id_(physical_network) ⁇ ⁇ ...
- the entity input table receives notifications and data tuples from the NIB monitor 1950 .
- the entity input table uses the export interface to load the export registry with data tuples received from the NIB monitor as shown above. For example, if the NIB monitor 1950 sends a notification that a forwarding engine has a new port, then the entity input table will use the “PortAdd” export interface method to add a port to the export registry.
- the export interface defines the methods of changing the values of the data in the export registry. These methods include: register forwarding engine, un-register forwarding engine, change in connection state of forwarding engine, data path change, address add, address remove, port add, port remove, forwarding table add, forwarding table remove, forwarding engine bind, forwarding engine unbind, transmit buffer, transmit packet, receive buffer, and receive packet.
- the export registry contains the data associated with the export interface.
- the forwarding engine input table class further includes functions to instantiate a physical forwarding input table object's export registry, start a physical forwarding input table object, register a forwarding engine, and unregister a forwarding engine.
- the entity input table after the entity input table has used the export interface to load the export registry with a new port, the entity input table notifies the rules engine of the new port.
- the rules engine handles this notification by looking up a query plan to handle a “PortAdd” event. If a rule declaration has been compiled into a query plan to handle “PortAdd”, then the rules engine will execute the associated query plan or plans. However, in some embodiments, not all changes to the input table export registry will have an associated query plan in the rules engine. For example, if the rules engine developer did not provide a rule declaration for handling “PortAdd”, then the rules engine would not respond to notification of a “PortAdd” event.
- the output tables 1945 store data tuples to be distributed across the NIB.
- the output tables 1945 also reconcile differences between the output tables 1945 and the NIB by re-pushing state information to the NIB when the NIB does not match data in the output tables 1945 . For example, if a pool node creation was pushed to the NIB by the output tables 1945 , and the pool node creation failed, then the output tables 1945 would push the pool node creation again.
- the output tables 1945 also register the input tables 1910 and the output tables 1945 for notification of state changes in the NIB.
- the physical forwarding engine output table class stores data tuples regarding physical forwarding engines to be distributed across the NIB.
- the physical forwarding engine output table class “PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable” can export data tuples for the following forwarding engines: forwarding engine chassis, forwarding nodes, and forwarding engines.
- the physical forwarding engine output table class contains the following member classes: external output table (“public ExternalOutputTable”), chassis export interface (“public ChassisExportInterface”), node export interface (“public NodeExportInterface”), Forwarding Engine export interface (“ForwardingEngineExportInterface”), and attribute reference manager (“AttributeRefManager”).
- the physical forwarding engine output table class contains the following attributes: table name (“table_name”), engine name (“engine_name”), NIB (“NIB* nib”), chassis export registry (“ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry”), node export registry (“NodeExportRegistry* node_registry”), Forwarding Engine export registry (“ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry”), network ID (“const NetworkId& physical_network”), controller ID (“const UUID& controller_id”), and an OpenFlow configuration exporter to Open Virtual Switch databases (“OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter”).
- PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable public ExternalOutputTable ⁇ EntityId, ForwardingEngine>, public ChassisExportInterface, public NodeExportInterface, public ForwardingEngineExportInterface, public AttributeRefManager ⁇ ForwardingEngine> ⁇ public: PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable(const std::string& table_name, const std::string& engine_name, NIB* nib, ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry, NodeExportRegistry* node_registry, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry, const NetworkId& physical_network, const UUID& controller_id, OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter); void start( );
- the attributes of the physical forwarding engine output table class define a physical forwarding engine output table object.
- the physical forwarding engine output table object pushes state changes to objects in the NIB according to the output of the rules engine.
- the physical forwarding engine output table object is further for monitoring the NIB for inconsistencies with the output of the rules engine.
- the attributes that define a physical forwarding engine output table object can be seen above below “PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable”.
- the table name (“table_name”) defines the name of the object in order to identify the table.
- the engine name (“engine_name”) defines which physical forwarding engine in the output table object is to be populated by the object.
- the NIB pointer (“NIB* nib”) defines what NIB the object will export data tuples to. In some embodiments, there are multiple NIBs.
- the export registry pointers are pointers to registry objects to the NIB identified by the NIB pointer.
- the pointers serve as a means to pass NIB state data back to the physical forwarding engine output table object.
- the physical forwarding engine output table object will push the output of the rules engine down to the NIB to correct the inconsistency.
- the physical forwarding engine output table object is notified of changes to NIB state using events as described above. In this manner, the physical forwarding engine output table object enforces the physical network configuration defined by the output of the rules engine.
- the chassis export registry pointer (“ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains data tuples for physical chassis. In some embodiments, changes in the operational status of a chassis constitute an event for the chassis export registry.
- the node export registry pointer (“NodeExportRegistry* node_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains data tuples for nodes.
- the Forwarding Engine export registry pointer (“ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains the data tuples the object stores for forwarding engines. In some embodiments, changes in the state of the forwarding engines constitute events for the Forwarding Engine export registry.
- the network ID (“const NetworkId& physical_network”) defines the identity of a group of physical network items in the NIB that is relevant to the physical forwarding engine output table object.
- the group of items relevant to the physical forwarding engine output table object is the entirety of the physical forwarding elements of the network.
- the NIB stores network IDs that identify groups of logical forwarding elements.
- the controller ID (“const UUID& controller_id”) defines what controller instance the object is exporting from. In some embodiments, controller instances are grouped into clusters to pool processing power. In those embodiments, the controller ID identifies which controller in the controller cluster has made changes to NIB data.
- the OpenFlow configuration exporter pointer (“OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter”) points to the OVS database exporter object in the NIB that the exports NIB state data to network elements.
- the object's member classes serve as the object's means of receiving information from the NIB, storing the information in the object's registries, and sending data tuples to the output tables.
- the attribute reference manager (“AttributeRefManager”) receives information from the NIB and writes data tuples to the export registries using the export interfaces.
- the export interfaces (“ChassisExportInterface”, “NodeExportInterface”, and “ForwardingEngineExportInterface”) provide interfaces to allow the registries to be written to by the attribute reference manager.
- the external output table (“ExternalOutputTable”) sends data tuples to the output tables from the export registries using the exporter handle described above.
- the export interfaces are shown in this code sample:
- the export interfaces types include a physical forwarding chassis interface, a physical forwarding nodes interface, and a Forwarding Engine interface.
- the physical forwarding chassis interface consists of functions for changing the state of forwarding chassis in the output tables.
- the physical forwarding nodes interface consists of functions for changing the state of physical forwarding nodes in the output tables.
- physical forwarding chassis and physical forwarding nodes include: x86 boxes, hypervisor boxes, hosts, pool nodes, extenders, and transport nodes.
- the Forwarding Engine interface consists of functions for changing the state of forwarding engines in the output tables.
- forwarding engines i.e., forwarding elements
- forwarding engines include: physical switches, software switches, and virtual switches.
- the export interfaces provide a means of setting export registry data.
- the export interfaces support methods such as “register”, “unregister”, “AddressAdd” and “NameChange”. After data tuples are added to the export registries through the export interfaces, the external output table brings in said data tuples.
- the external output table's implementation can be seen in this code snippet:
- Tuple key (const Tuple& tuple); key_type create(const Tuple& value, bool& error); key_type modify(const key_type& id, const Tuple& value, bool& error); bool destroy(const key_type& id); void check_validity(const key_type& id);
- the external output table entries can be created, modified, destroyed, or checked the validity of.
- the output tables receive information from the NIB through the attribute reference manager.
- the attribute reference manager stores that information as data tuples in the export registries using the export interfaces, and the data tuples from the NIB is pushed to the external output table.
- control application converts control data records (also called data tuples) to forwarding plane data records (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) by performing conversion operations.
- control application populates the logical data path tables (e.g., the logical forwarding tables) that are created by the virtualization application with logical data path sets.
- FIG. 28 conceptually illustrates an example of such conversion operations that an instance of a control application of some embodiments performs.
- This figure conceptually illustrates a process 2800 that the control application performs to generate logical forwarding plane data based on input event data that specifies the logical control plane data.
- the generated logical forwarding plane data is transmitted to the virtualization application, which subsequently generate physical control plane data from the logical forwarding plane data.
- the physical control plane data is propagated to the managed switching elements, which in turn will produce forwarding plane data (e.g., flow entries) for defining forwarding behaviors of the switches.
- forwarding plane data e.g., flow entries
- the process 2800 initially receives (at 2805 ) data regarding an input event.
- the input event data may be logical data supplied by the user in some embodiments. As described in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Network Control Apparatus and Method,” some embodiments provide the user with an interface that the user can use to specify input event data.
- An example of user-supplied data could be logical control plane data including access control list data for a logical switch that the user manages.
- the input event data may also be logical forwarding plane data that the control application generates in some embodiments from the logical control plane data.
- the input event data in some embodiments may also be physical forwarding plane data or physical control plane data received from the NIB.
- the process 2800 receives the physical forwarding data from a NIB monitor that monitors the NIB to detect a change in the NIB that reflects a change in one or more managed switching elements.
- the process 2800 then performs a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the control application is responsible for the input event data.
- a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the control application is responsible for the input event data.
- several instances of the control application may operate in parallel to control multiple sets of logical data paths in some embodiments.
- each control application uses the filtering operation to filter out input data that does not relate to the control application's logical data path set.
- the control application of some embodiments includes a filter module.
- This module in some embodiments is a standalone module, while in other embodiments it is implemented by a table mapping engine (e.g., implemented by the join operations performed by the table mapping engine) that maps records between input tables and output tables of the virtualization application, as further described below.
- the process determines whether the filtering operation has filtered out the input event data.
- the filtering operation filters out the input event data in some embodiments when the input event data does not fall within one of the logical data path sets that are the responsibility of the control application.
- the process ends. Otherwise, the process 2800 transitions to 2820 .
- a converter of the virtualization application generates one or more sets of data tuples based on the received input event data.
- the converter is a table mapping engine that performs a series of table mapping operations on the input event data to map the input event data to other data tuples.
- this table mapping engine also performs the filtering operation in some embodiments.
- One example of such a table mapping engine is an nLog table-mapping engine which will be described bellow.
- the data tuples that the process 2800 generates may include data (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) that the process has to push down to the NIB. Accordingly, at 2825 , the process publishes to the NIB any data tuples that it has generated if such publication is necessary. After 2825 , the process ends.
- data e.g., logical forwarding plane data
- FIG. 29 illustrates a control application 2900 of some embodiments of the invention.
- This application 2900 uses an nLog table mapping engine to map input tables that contain input data tuples to LDPS data tuples.
- This application resides on top of a virtualization application 2905 that receives the LDPS data tuples from the control application 2900 .
- the virtualization application 2905 maps the LDPS data tuples to data tuples for defining managed switching elements, attributes of the managed switching elements, and flow entries for the managed switching elements.
- the virtual application 2905 resides on top of a NOS 2965 that contains a NIB 2960 that stores the data tuples generated by the virtualization application 2905 .
- control application 2900 allows different users to define different logical data path sets (LDPS), which specify the desired switching configurations of the users.
- the control application 2900 also reacts to changes in the NIB to modify the LDPS′.
- the virtualization application 2905 through its mapping operations converts each of the LDPS of each user into a set of data tuples to populate to the NIB.
- the virtualization application 2905 then populates the NIB 2960 with the generated sets of data tuples.
- NOS 2965 subsequently propagates the NIB data tuples for a particular user to the switching element(s)
- the NOS completes the deployment of the user's switching configuration to one or more switching elements.
- control application is executed on the same machine with the virtualization application and the NOS.
- control application, the virtualization application, and the NOS do not have to run on the same machine in other embodiments. That is, one of these applications or each of these applications may run on a different computer.
- the control application 2900 includes a set of rule-engine input tables 2910 , a set of function and constant tables 2915 , a query manager 2920 , a rules engine 2925 , a set of rule-engine output tables 2945 , a NIB monitor 2950 , a publisher 2955 , and a compiler 2935 .
- the compiler 2935 is one component of the application that operates at a different instance in time than the application's other components. The compiler operates when a developer needs to specify the rules engine for a particular control application and/or virtualized environment, whereas the rest of the application's modules operate at run time when the application interfaces with the control application and the NOS to deploy and monitor logical data path sets specified by one or more users.
- the compiler 2935 takes a relatively small set (e.g., few hundred lines) of declarative instructions 2940 that are specified in a declarative language and converts these into a large set (e.g., thousands of lines) of code that specify the operation of the rules engine 2925 , which performs the application's table mapping.
- the compiler greatly simplifies the control application developer's process of defining and updating the control application. This is because the compiler allows the developer to use a high level programming language that allows a compact definition of the control application's complex mapping operation and to subsequently update this mapping operation in response to any number of changes (e.g., changes in the logical networking functions supported by the control application, changes to desired behavior of the control application, etc.).
- the rule-engine (RE) input tables 2910 include tables with logical data and/or switching configurations (e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.) specified by the user and/or the control application. They also include in some embodiments tables that contain physical data (i.e., non-logical data) from the switching elements managed by the virtualized control system. In some embodiments, such physical data includes data regarding the managed switching elements (e.g., physical control plane data) and other data regarding network configuration employed by the virtualized control system to deploy the different LDPS′ of the different users.
- logical data and/or switching configurations e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.
- the RE input tables 2910 are partially populated by the LDPS data (e.g., logical control plane data) provided by the user. It also generates part of the LDPS data (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) and physical (i.e., non-logical) data (e.g., physical control plane data) by monitoring the NIB to identify changes in the managed switching element infrastructure that would require modification to the LDPS data and/or the physical data.
- LDPS data e.g., logical control plane data
- physical (i.e., non-logical) data e.g., physical control plane data
- control application 2900 includes other miscellaneous tables 2915 that the rules engine 2925 uses to gather inputs for its table mapping operations.
- These tables 2915 include constant tables that store defined values for constants that the rules engine 2925 needs to perform its table mapping operations.
- the rules engine 2925 references constants
- the corresponding value defined for the constants are actually retrieved and used.
- the values defined for constants in the constant table 2915 may be modified and/or updated.
- the constant table 2915 provides the ability to modify the value defined for constants that the rules engine 2925 references without the need to rewrite or recompile code that specifies the operation of the rules engine 2925 .
- the tables 2915 further include function tables that store functions that the rules engine 2925 needs to use to calculate values needed to populate the output tables 2945 .
- One example of such a function is a hash function that the rules engine uses to compute hash values for distributing distributed hash table (DHT) operations as well as load balancing traffic between lower level switches and higher level switches in a hierarchical switching architecture.
- DHT distributed hash table
- the rules engine 2925 performs table mapping operations that specify one manner for converting any logical data path set within the logical control plane to a logical data path set in the logical forwarding plane. Whenever one of the rule-engine (RE) input tables is modified, the rules engine performs a set of table mapping operations that may result in the modification of one or more data tuples in one or more RE output tables. The modification of the output table data tuples, in turn, through the virtualization application 2905 , may cause the NIB to be modified in order to establish and/or modify the implementation of a particular user's LDPS in the managed switching element infrastructure.
- RE rule-engine
- the rules engine 2925 includes an event processor 2922 , several query plans 2927 , and a table processor 2930 .
- Each query plan is a set of rules that specify a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a modification to one of the RE input table. Such a modification is referred to below as an input table event.
- each query plan is generated by the compiler 2935 from one declaratory rule in the set of declarations 2940 .
- the query plans are defined by using the nLog declaratory language.
- the compiler 2935 does not just statically generate query plans but rather dynamically generates query plans based on performance data it gathers.
- the complier 2935 in these embodiments generates an initial set of query plans and let the rules engine operate with the initial set of query plans.
- the control application gathers the performance data or receives performance feedbacks (e.g., from the rules engine). Based on this data, the compiler is modified so that the control application or a user of this application can have the modified compiler modify the query plans while the rules engine is not operating or during the operation of the rules engine.
- the order of the join operations in a query plan may result in different execution times depending on the number of tables the rules engine has to select to perform each join operation.
- the compiler in these embodiments can be re-specified in order to re-order the join operations in a particular query plan when a certain order of the join operations in the particular query plan has resulted in a long execution time to perform the join operations.
- the event processor 2922 of the rules engine 2925 detects the occurrence of each input table event.
- the event processor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of an input table event differently.
- the event processor registers for callbacks with the RE input tables for notification of changes to the records of the RE input tables.
- the event processor 2922 detects an input table event when it receives notification from a RE input table that one of its records has changed.
- the event processor 2922 In response to a detected input table event, the event processor 2922 (1) selects the appropriate query plan for the detected table event, and (2) directs the table processor 2930 to execute the query plan.
- the table processor 2930 In some embodiments performs the join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 2910 and 2915 .
- the table processor 2930 of some embodiments then (1) performs a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writes the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 2945 .
- the RE output tables 2945 store both logical and physical network element data attributes.
- the tables 2945 are called RE output tables as they store the output of the table mapping operations of the rules engine 2925 .
- the RE output tables can be grouped in several different categories. For instance, in some embodiments, these tables can be RE input tables and/or control-application (CA) output tables.
- a table is a RE input table when a change in the table causes the rules engine to detect an input event that requires the execution of a query plan.
- a RE output table 2945 can also be a RE input table 2910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan. Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by the control application 2900 or the NIB monitor 2950 .
- a table is a control-application output table when a change in the table causes the publisher 2955 to publish a change to the virtualization application 2905 and/or to the NIB, as further described below.
- a table in the RE output tables 2945 can be a RE input table, a CA output table, or both a RE input table and a CA output table.
- the publisher 2955 detects changes to the CA output tables of the RE output tables 2945 .
- the publisher of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a CA output table event differently.
- the publisher registers for callbacks with the CA output tables for notification of changes to the records of the CA output tables.
- the publisher 2955 detects an output table event when it receives notification from a CA output table that one of its records has changed.
- the publisher 2955 takes some or all of modified data tuples in the modified CA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple(s) to the input tables (not shown) of the virtualization application 2905 .
- the virtualization application 2905 pulls the data tuples from the CA output tables 2945 into the input tables of the virtualization application.
- the publisher 2955 publishes changes to the modified CA output tables to the NIB, and the virtualization application 2905 retrieves these changes from the NIB and based on them, modifies its input tables.
- the CA output tables 2945 of the control application 2900 and the input tables of the virtualization 2905 may be identical.
- the control and virtualization applications use one set of tables, so that the CA output tables are essentially VA input tables.
- the publisher 2955 in some embodiments takes some or all of modified data tuples in the modified CA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple into the NIB 2960 through the APIs provided by the NOS 2965 . Also, the publisher may push down logical data (e.g., logical control plane data, logical forwarding plane data, etc.) processed and maintained by the control application 2900 to the NIB 2960 . This is because, in some embodiments, the NIB 2960 serves as a medium for all communications between the control application, the virtualization application, and the NOS of different controller instances as described above.
- logical data e.g., logical control plane data, logical forwarding plane data, etc.
- the NIB 2960 in some embodiments stores both logical and physical network element attributes that are identical or derived by the virtualization application 2905 from the logical and physical network element data attributes in the output tables 2945 . In other embodiments, however, the NIB only stores physical network element attributes that are identical or derived by the virtualization application 2905 from the physical network element data attributes in the output tables 2945 .
- the NIB monitor 2950 interfaces with the NIB 2960 to receive notifications regarding changes to the NIB.
- the NIB monitor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a change in the NIB differently.
- the NIB monitor registers for callbacks with the NIB for notification of changes to one or more records in the NIB.
- the NIB monitor 2950 detects NIB change event when it receives notification from the NIB that one of its records has changed.
- the NIB monitor 2950 may modify one or more RE input tables 2910 , which, in turn, may cause one or more RE input table event to occur that then initiates the execution of one or more query plans by the rules engine.
- the NIB monitor writes some or all of the information that it receives from the NIB into the input tables 2910 , so that the state and configuration of the managed switching elements can be accounted for while generating the NIB data tuples through the mapping operations.
- the NIB monitor 2950 may update the input table records 2910 so that the generated NIB data tuples can be updated to reflect the modified switching configuration or underlying switching element state.
- the NIB monitor 2950 is a collection of input objects (or functions) associated with the RE input tables. Each input object in some embodiments is associated with one RE input table and is responsible for modifying its associated RE input table in response to a change in the NIB. Each input object in some embodiments registers with one or more NIB objects for callback notifications upon the occurrence of changes to the NIB object(s).
- the publisher 2955 is a collection of output objects (or functions) associated with the CA output tables. Each output object in some embodiments is associated with one CA output table and is responsible for propagating changes in its associated output table to the virtualization application 2905 .
- the NIB monitor is a conceptual representation of the input and output objects that register with the NIB for callbacks.
- the query manager 2920 interfaces with the control application 2900 to receive queries regarding LDPS data. As shown in FIG. 29 , the query manager 2920 of some embodiments also interfaces with the NIB 2960 in order to query the NIB to provide the control application state information regarding the network elements in the LDPS′ for the different user. In other embodiments, however, the query manager 2920 queries the output tables 2945 to obtain LDPS data for the control application.
- FIG. 30 illustrates a simplified view of the table mapping operations of the control and virtualization applications of some embodiments of the invention.
- the control application 3005 maps logical control plane data to logical forwarding plane data, which the virtualization application 3010 then maps to physical control plane data.
- the bottom half of this figure illustrates the table mapping operations of the control application and the virtualization application.
- control application's input tables 3015 store logical control plane (LCP) data, logical forwarding plane (LFP) data and physical control plane (PCP) data, as the collection of all these data along with data in the constant and function tables (not shown) is used by the control application's nLog engine 3020 in some embodiments to generate logical forwarding plane data from the input logical control plane data.
- LCP logical control plane
- LFP logical forwarding plane
- PCP physical control plane
- This figure further shows the NIB publisher 3030 receiving some or all of the input table records and publishing these records to the NIB 3040 .
- the NIB monitor 3050 receives NIB change notifications (e.g., notifications of managed switch changes detected by the NOS or notification of NIB changes pushed by the other controller instances) in some embodiments and in response to such notifications it may update input and output tables 3015 and 3025 of the control application.
- the NIB monitor 3050 may write LCP, LFP, or PCP data to the input tables 3015 in response to NIB modification notifications.
- the bottom half of FIG. 30 also illustrates the table mapping operations of the virtualization application 3010 .
- the virtualization application's input tables 3055 store logical forwarding plane data and physical control plane data, as the collection of all these data along with data in the constant and function tables (not shown) is used by the virtualization application's nLog engine 3060 in some embodiments to generate physical control plane data from the input logical forwarding plane data.
- This figure further shows the NIB publisher 3070 receiving some or all of the input table records and publishing these records to the NIB 3040 .
- the NIB monitor 3075 receives NIB change notifications in some embodiments and in response to such notifications it may update input and output tables 3055 and 3065 of the virtualization application. In some embodiments, the NIB monitor 3075 may write LFP or PCP data to the input tables 3055 in response to NIB modification notifications.
- some of the logical or physical data that a NIB monitor pushes to the input tables of the control or virtualization application relates to data that is generated by other controller instances and passed to the NIB monitor's particular NIB (e.g., through the secondary storage layer).
- the logical data regarding logical constructs that relates to multiple LDPS′ might change, and the NIB monitor may write this change to the input tables.
- Another example of such logical data that is produced by another controller instance in a multi controller instance environment occurs when a user provides logical control plane data for a LDPS on a first controller instance that is not responsible for the LDPS.
- This change requests is added to the NIB request list (such as the NIB request list 1560 described above by reference to FIG. 15 ) of the first controller instance.
- This request list is then propagated across the NIBs of other controller instances by replication processes described above.
- the NOS of a second controller instance which is the master of the LDPS, eventually makes the change to the NIB of the second controller instance based on the propagated request list.
- the NIB monitor of the second controller instance then writes the change to the one of the application's input tables (e.g., the control application's input table). Accordingly, in such cases, the logical data that the NIB monitor writes to the input tables in some cases may originate from the NIB of another controller instance.
- control application 3005 and the virtualization application 3010 are two separate applications that operate on the same machine or different machines in some embodiments. Other embodiments, however, implement these two applications as two modules of one integrated application, with the control application module 3005 generating LDPS in the logical forwarding plane and the virtualization application generating physical data path sets in the physical control plane.
- FIG. 31 illustrates an example of such an integrated application 3105 .
- This application 3105 uses an nLog table mapping engine 3110 to map data from an input set of tables 3115 to an output set of tables 3120 , which like the above described embodiments, may include one or more tables in the input set of tables.
- the input set of tables in this integrated application may include LCP data that need to be mapped to LFP data, or it may include LFP data that need to be mapped to PCP data.
- a NIB publisher 3125 publishes input table records and output table records to the NIB 3135 .
- a NIB monitor 3130 then receives notification of changes from the NIB 3135 (e.g., managed switch changes detected by the NOS or NIB changes pushed by the other controller instances), and for some notifications (e.g., those relating to the LDPS′ for which the application is the master), pushes changes to the input and/or tables 3115 and 3120 .
- Computer readable storage medium also referred to as computer readable medium.
- processing unit(s) e.g., one or more processors, cores of processors, or other processing units
- processing unit(s) e.g., one or more processors, cores of processors, or other processing units
- Examples of computer readable media include, but are not limited to, CD-ROMs, flash drives, RAM chips, hard drives, EPROMs, etc.
- the computer readable media does not include carrier waves and electronic signals passing wirelessly or over wired connections.
- the term “software” is meant to include firmware residing in read-only memory or applications stored in magnetic storage, which can be read into memory for processing by a processor.
- multiple software inventions can be implemented as sub-parts of a larger program while remaining distinct software inventions.
- multiple software inventions can also be implemented as separate programs.
- any combination of separate programs that together implement a software invention described here is within the scope of the invention.
- the software programs when installed to operate on one or more electronic systems, define one or more specific machine implementations that execute and perform the operations of the software programs.
- FIG. 32 conceptually illustrates an electronic system 3200 with which some embodiments of the invention are implemented.
- the electronic system 3200 can be used to execute any of the control, virtualization, or operating system applications described above.
- the electronic system 3200 may be a computer (e.g., a desktop computer, personal computer, tablet computer, server computer, mainframe, a blade computer etc.), phone, PDA, or any other sort of electronic device.
- Such an electronic system includes various types of computer readable media and interfaces for various other types of computer readable media.
- Electronic system 3200 includes a bus 3205 , processing unit(s) 3210 , a system memory 3225 , a read-only memory 3230 , a permanent storage device 3235 , input devices 3240 , and output devices 3245 .
- the bus 3205 collectively represents all system, peripheral, and chipset buses that communicatively connect the numerous internal devices of the electronic system 3200 .
- the bus 3205 communicatively connects the processing unit(s) 3210 with the read-only memory 3230 , the system memory 3225 , and the permanent storage device 3235 .
- the processing unit(s) 3210 retrieve instructions to execute and data to process in order to execute the processes of the invention.
- the processing unit(s) may be a single processor or a multi-core processor in different embodiments.
- the read-only-memory (ROM) 3230 stores static data and instructions that are needed by the processing unit(s) 3210 and other modules of the electronic system.
- the permanent storage device 3235 is a read-and-write memory device. This device is a non-volatile memory unit that stores instructions and data even when the electronic system 3200 is off. Some embodiments of the invention use a mass-storage device (such as a magnetic or optical disk and its corresponding disk drive) as the permanent storage device 3235 .
- the system memory 3225 is a read-and-write memory device. However, unlike storage device 3235 , the system memory is a volatile read-and-write memory, such a random access memory.
- the system memory stores some of the instructions and data that the processor needs at runtime.
- the invention's processes are stored in the system memory 3225 , the permanent storage device 3235 , and/or the read-only memory 3230 .
- the various memory units include instructions for implementing the processes in accordance with some embodiments. From these various memory units, the processing unit(s) 3210 retrieve instructions to execute and data to process in order to execute the processes of some embodiments.
- the bus 3205 also connects to the input and output devices 3240 and 3245 .
- the input devices enable the user to communicate information and select commands to the electronic system.
- the input devices 3240 include alphanumeric keyboards and pointing devices (also called “cursor control devices”).
- the output devices 3245 display images generated by the electronic system.
- the output devices include printers and display devices, such as cathode ray tubes (CRT) or liquid crystal displays (LCD). Some embodiments include devices such as a touchscreen that function as both input and output devices.
- bus 3205 also couples electronic system 3200 to a network 3265 through a network adapter (not shown).
- the computer can be a part of a network of computers (such as a local area network (“LAN”), a wide area network (“WAN”), or an Intranet, or a network of networks, such as the Internet. Any or all components of electronic system 3200 may be used in conjunction with the invention.
- Some embodiments include electronic components, such as microprocessors, storage and memory that store computer program instructions in a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (alternatively referred to as computer-readable storage media, machine-readable media, or machine-readable storage media).
- computer-readable media include RAM, ROM, read-only compact discs (CD-ROM), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), read-only digital versatile discs (e.g., DVD-ROM, dual-layer DVD-ROM), a variety of recordable/rewritable DVDs (e.g., DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, etc.), flash memory (e.g., SD cards, mini-SD cards, micro-SD cards, etc.), magnetic and/or solid state hard drives, read-only and recordable Blu-Ray® discs, ultra density optical discs, any other optical or magnetic media, and floppy disks.
- CD-ROM compact discs
- CD-R recordable compact discs
- the computer-readable media may store a computer program that is executable by at least one processing unit and includes sets of instructions for performing various operations.
- Examples of computer programs or computer code include machine code, such as is produced by a compiler, and files including higher-level code that are executed by a computer, an electronic component, or a microprocessor using an interpreter.
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- integrated circuits execute instructions that are stored on the circuit itself.
- the terms “computer”, “server”, “processor”, and “memory” all refer to electronic or other technological devices. These terms exclude people or groups of people.
- display or displaying means displaying on an electronic device.
- the terms “computer readable medium,” “computer readable media,” and “machine readable medium” are entirely restricted to tangible, physical objects that store information in a form that is readable by a computer. These terms exclude any wireless signals, wired download signals, and any other ephemeral signals.
- FIGS. 18 , 23 and 28 conceptually illustrate processes.
- the specific operations of these processes may not be performed in the exact order shown and described.
- the specific operations may not be performed in one continuous series of operations, and different specific operations may be performed in different embodiments.
- the process could be implemented using several sub-processes, or as part of a larger macro process.
- a user provides logical data path sets in terms of logical control plane data.
- a user may provide logical data path sets in terms of logical forwarding plane data.
- controller instance provides physical control plane data to a switching element in order to manage the switching element.
- the controller instance may provide the switching element with physical forwarding plane data.
- the NIB would store physical forwarding plane data and the virtualization application would generate such data.
- a user specifies one or more logic switches.
- the user can provide physical switch configurations along with such logic switch configurations.
- controller instances are described that in some embodiments are individually formed by several application layers that execute on one computing device, one of ordinary skill will realize that such instances are formed by dedicated computing devices or other machines in some embodiments that perform one or more layers of their operations.
- a logical data path set is associated with one user.
- a user may be associated with one or more sets of logical data paths in some embodiments. That is, the relationship between a logical data path set is not always a one-to-one relationship as a user may be associated with multiple logical data path sets.
- the invention is not to be limited by the foregoing illustrative details.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Computing Systems (AREA)
- Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
- Information Retrieval, Db Structures And Fs Structures Therefor (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application claims benefit to U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/361,912, filed on Jul. 6, 2010; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/361,913, filed on Jul. 6, 2010; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/429,753, filed on Jan. 4, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/429,754, filed on Jan. 4, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/466,453, filed on Mar. 22, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/482,205, filed on May 3, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/482,615, filed on May 4, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/482,616, filed on May 4, 2011; U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/501,743, filed on Jun. 27, 2011; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/501,785, filed on Jun. 28, 2011. These provisional applications are incorporated herein by reference.
- Many current enterprises have large and sophisticated networks comprising switches, hubs, routers, servers, workstations and other networked devices, which support a variety of connections, applications and systems. The increased sophistication of computer networking, including virtual machine migration, dynamic workloads, multi-tenancy, and customer specific quality of service and security configurations require a better paradigm for network control. Networks have traditionally been managed through low-level configuration of individual components. Network configurations often depend on the underlying network: for example, blocking a user's access with an access control list (“ACL”) entry requires knowing the user's current IP address. More complicated tasks require more extensive network knowledge: forcing guest users' port 80 traffic to traverse an HTTP proxy requires knowing the current network topology and the location of each guest. This process is of increased difficulty where the network switching elements are shared across multiple users.
- In response, there is a growing movement, driven by both industry and academia, towards a new network control paradigm called Software-Defined Networking (SDN). In the SDN paradigm, a network controller, running on one or more servers in a network, controls, maintains, and implements control logic that governs the forwarding behavior of shared network switching elements on a per user basis. Making network management decisions often requires knowledge of the network state. To facilitate management decision-making, the network controller creates and maintains a view of the network state and provides an application programming interface upon which management applications may access a view of the network state.
- Three of the many challenges of large networks (including datacenters and the enterprise) are scalability, mobility, and multi-tenancy and often the approaches taken to address one hamper the other. For instance, one can easily provide network mobility for virtual machines (VMs) within an L2 domain, but L2 domains cannot scale to large sizes. Also, retaining tenant isolation greatly complicates mobility. Despite the high-level interest in SDN, no existing products have been able to satisfy all of these requirements.
- Some embodiments of the invention provide a system that allows several different logical data path sets to be specified for several different users through one or more shared network infrastructure switching elements (referred to as “switching elements” below). In some embodiments, the system includes a set of software tools that allows the system to accept logical data path sets from users and to configure the switching elements to implement these logical data path sets. These software tools allow the system to virtualize control of the shared switching elements and the network that is defined by the connections between these shared switching elements, in a manner that prevents the different users from viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets (i.e., each other's switching logic) while sharing the same switching elements.
- In some embodiments, one of the software tools that allows the system to virtualize control of a set of switching elements (i.e., to allow several users to share the same switching elements without viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets) is an intermediate data storage structure that (1) stores the state of the network, (2) receives and records modifications to different parts of the network from different users, and (3), in some embodiments, provides different views of the state of the network to different users. For instance, in some embodiments, the intermediate data storage structure is a network information base (NIB) data structure that stores the state of the network that is defined by one or more switching elements. The system uses this NIB data structure as an intermediate storage structure for reading the state of the network and writing modifications to the state of the network. In some embodiments, the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set. In these embodiments, the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB.
- In some embodiments, the system has (1) a network operating system (NOS) to create and maintain the NIB storage structure, and (2) one or more applications that run on top of the NOS to specify logic for reading values from and writing values to the NIB. When the NIB is modified in order to effectuate a change in the switching logic of a switching element, the NOS of some embodiments also propagates the modification to the switching element.
- The system of different embodiments uses the NIB differently to virtualize access to the shared switching elements and network. In some embodiments, the system provides different views of the NIB to different users in order to ensure that different users do not have direct view and control over each other's switching logic. For instance, in some embodiments, the NIB is a hierarchical data structure that represents different attributes of different switching elements as elements (e.g., different nodes) in a hierarchy. The NIB in some of these embodiments is a multi-layer hierarchical data structure, with each layer having a hierarchical structure and one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on each layer linked to one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on another layer. In some embodiments, the lowest layer elements correspond to the actual switching elements and their attributes, while each of the higher layer elements serve as abstractions of the actual switching elements and their attributes. As further described below, some of these higher layer elements are used in some embodiments to show different abstract switching elements and/or switching element attributes to different users in a virtualized control system.
- In some embodiments, the definition of different NIB elements at different hierarchical levels in the NIB and the definition of the links between these elements are used by the developers of the applications that run on top of the NOS in order to define the operations of these applications. For instance, in some embodiments, the developer of an application running on top of the NOS uses these definitions to enumerate how the application is to map the logical data path sets of the user to the physical switching elements of the control system. Under this approach, the developer would have to enumerate all different scenarios that the control system may encounter as well as the mapping operation of the application for each scenario. This type of network virtualization (in which different views of the NIB are provided to different users) is referred to below as Type I network virtualization.
- Another type of network virtualization, which is referred to below as Type II network virtualization, does not require the application developers to have intimate knowledge of the NIB elements and the links (if any) in the NIB between these elements. Instead, this type of virtualization allows the application to simply provide user specified logical switching element attributes in the form of one or more tables, which are then mapped to NIB records by a table mapping engine. In other words, the Type II virtualized system of some embodiments accepts the logical switching element configurations (e.g., access control list table configurations, L2 table configurations, L3 table configurations, etc.) that the user defines without referencing any operational state of the switching elements in a particular network configuration. It then maps the logical switching element configurations to the switching element configurations stored in the NIB.
- To perform this mapping, the system of some embodiments uses a database table mapping engine to map input tables, which are created from (1) logical switching configuration attributes, and (2) a set of properties associated with switching elements used by the system, to output tables. The content of these output tables are then transferred to the NIB elements. In some embodiments, the system uses a variation of the datalog database language, called nLog, to create the table mapping engine that maps input tables containing logical data path data and switching element attributes to the output tables. Like datalog, nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events. In some embodiments, nLog provides a limited subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules.
- The declaratory rules and operations that are specified through nLog are then compiled into a much larger set of rules by an nLog compiler. In some embodiments, this compiler translates each rule that is meant to address an event into several sets of database join operations. Collectively the larger set of rules forms the table mapping, rules engine that is referred to below as the nLog engine. In some embodiments, the nLog virtualization engine also provides feedback (e.g., from one or more of the output tables or from NIB records that are updated to reflect values stored in the output tables) to the user in order to provide the user with state information about the logical data path set that he or she created. In this manner, the updates that the user gets are expressed in terms of the logical space that the user understand and not in terms of the underlying switching element states, which the user does not understand.
- The use of nLog serves as a significant distinction between Type I virtualized control systems and Type II virtualized control systems, even for Type II systems that store user specified logical data path sets in the NIB. This is because nLog provides a machine-generated rules engine that addresses the mapping between the logical and physical domains in a more robust, comprehensive manner than the hand-coded approach used for Type I virtualized control systems. In the Type I control systems, the application developers need to have a detailed understanding of the NIB structure and need to use this detailed understanding to write code that addresses all possible conditions that the control system would encounter at runtime. On the other hand, in Type II control systems, the application developers only need to produce applications that express the user-specified logical data path sets in terms of one or more tables, which are then mapped in an automated manner to output tables and later transferred from the output tables to the NIB. This approach allows the Type II virtualized systems not to maintain the data regarding the logical data path sets in the NIB. However, some embodiments maintain this data in the NIB in order to distribute this data among other NOS instances, as further described below.
- As apparent from the above discussion, the applications that run on top of a NOS instance can perform several different sets of operations in several different embodiments of the invention. Examples of such operations include providing an interface to a user to access NIB data regarding the user's switching configuration, providing different layered NIB views to different users, providing control logic for modifying the provided NIB data, providing logic for propagating received modifications to the NIB, etc.
- In some embodiments, the system embeds some or all such operations in the NOS instead of including them in an application operating on top of the NOS. Alternatively, in other embodiments, the system separates some or all of these operations into different subsets of operations and then has two or more applications that operate above the NOS perform the different subsets of operations. One such system runs two applications on top of the NOS, a control application and a virtualization application. In some embodiments, the control application allows a user to specify and populate logical data path sets, while the virtualization application implements the specified logical data path sets by mapping the logical data path set to the physical switching infrastructure. In some embodiments, the virtualization application translates control application input into records that are written into the NIB, and from the NIB these records are then subsequently transferred to the switching infrastructure through the operation of the NOS. In some embodiments, the NIB stores both the logical data path set input received through the control application and the NIB records that are produced by the virtualization application.
- In some embodiments, the control application can receive switching infrastructure data from the NIB. In response to this data, the control application may modify record(s) associated with one or more logical data path sets (LDPS). Any such modified LDPS record would then be translated to one or more physical switching infrastructure records by the virtualization application, which might then be transferred to the physical switching infrastructure by the NOS.
- In some embodiments, the NIB stores data regarding each switching element within the network infrastructure of a system, while in other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about only switching elements at the edge of a network infrastructure. In some embodiments, edge switching elements are switching elements that have direct connections with the computing devices of the users, while non-edge switching elements only connect to edge switching elements and other non-edge switch elements.
- The system of some embodiments only controls edge switches (i.e., only maintains data in the NIB regarding edge switches) for several reasons. Controlling edge switches provides the system with a sufficient mechanism for maintaining isolation between computing devices, which is needed, as opposed to maintaining isolation between all switch elements, which is not needed. The interior switches forward data packets between the switching elements. The edge switches forward data packets between computing devices and other network elements (e.g., other switching elements). Thus, the system can maintain user isolation simply by controlling the edge switching elements because the edge switching elements are the last switches in line to forward packets to hosts.
- Controlling only edge switches also allows the system to be deployed independent of concerns about the hardware vendor of the non-edge switches. Deploying at the edge allows the edge switches to treat the internal nodes of the network as simply a collection of elements that moves packets without considering the hardware makeup of these internal nodes. Also, controlling only edge switches makes distributing switching logic computationally easier. Controlling only edge switches also enables non-disruptive deployment of the system. Edge switching solutions can be added as top of rack switches without disrupting the configuration of the non-edge switches.
- In addition to controlling edge switches, the network control system of some embodiments also utilizes and controls non-edge switches that are inserted in the switch network hierarchy to simplify and/or facilitate the operation of the controlled edge switches. For instance, in some embodiments, the control system requires the switches that it controls to be interconnected in a hierarchical switching architecture that has several edge switches as the leaf nodes and one or more non-edge switches as the non-leaf nodes. In some such embodiments, each edge switch connects to one or more of the non-leaf switches, and uses such non-leaf switches to facilitate its communication with other edge switches. Examples of functions that such non-leaf switches provide to facilitate such communications between edge switches in some embodiments include (1) routing of a packet with an unknown destination address (e.g., unknown MAC address) to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can route this packet to the appropriate edge switch, (2) routing a multicast or broadcast packet to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can convert this packet to a series of unicast packets to the desired destinations, (3) bridging remote managed networks that are separated by one or more networks, and (4) bridging a managed network with an unmanaged network.
- Some embodiments employ one level of non-leaf (non-edge) switches that connect to edge switches and in some cases to other non-leaf switches. Other embodiments, on the other hand, employ multiple levels of non-leaf switches, with each level of non-leaf switch after the first level serving as a mechanism to facilitate communication between lower level non-leaf switches and leaf switches. In some embodiments, the non-leaf switches are software switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch. In some embodiments, the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor. Irrespective of the manner by which the leaf and non-leaf switches are implemented, the NIB of the control system of some embodiments stores switching state information regarding the leaf and non-leaf switches.
- The above discussion relates to the control of edge switches and non-edge switches by a network control system of some embodiments. In some embodiments, edge switches and non-edge switches (leaf and non-leaf nodes) may be referred to as managed switches. This is because these switches are managed by the network control system (as opposed to unmanaged switches, which are not managed by the network control system, in the network) in order to implement logical data path sets through the managed switches.
- In addition to using the NIB to store switching-element data, the virtualized network-control system of some embodiments also stores other storage structures to store data regarding the switching elements of the network. These other storage structures are secondary storage structures that supplement the storage functions of the NIB, which is the primary storage structure of the system while the system operates. In some embodiments, the primary purpose for one or more of the secondary storage structures is to back up the data in the NIB. In these or other embodiments, one or more of the secondary storage structures serve a purpose other than backing up the data in the NIB (e.g., for storing data that are not in the NIB).
- In some embodiments, the NIB is stored in system memory (e.g., RAM) while the system operates. This allows for fast access of the NIB records. In some embodiments, one or more of the secondary storage structures, on the other hand, are stored on disks, or other non-volatile memories, which are slower to access. Such non-volatile disks or other non-volatile memories, however, improve the resiliency of the system as they allow the data to be stored in a persistent manner.
- The system of some embodiments uses multiple types of storages in its pool of secondary storage structures. These different types of structures store different types of data, store data in different manners, and provide different query interfaces that handle different types of queries. For instance, in some embodiments, the system uses a persistent transactional database (PTD) and a hash table structure. The PTD in some embodiments is a database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory. In some embodiments, the PTD is a commonly available database, such as MySQL or SQLite. The PTD of some embodiments can handle complex transactional queries. As a transactional database, the PTD can undo a series of earlier query operations that it has performed as part of a transaction when one of the subsequent query operations of the transaction fails.
- Moreover, some embodiments define a transactional guard processing (TGP) layer before the PTD in order to allow the PTD to execute conditional sets of database transactions. The TGP layer allows the PTD to avoid unnecessary later database operations when conditions of earlier operations are not met. The PTD in some embodiments stores the exact replica of the data that is stored in the NIB, while in other embodiments it stores only a subset of the data that is stored in the NIB. In some embodiments, some or all of the data in the NIB is stored in the PTD in order to ensure that the NIB data will not be lost in the event of a crash of the NOS or the NIB.
- While the system is running, the hash table of some embodiments is not stored on a disk or other non-volatile memory. Instead, it is a storage structure that is stored in volatile system memory when the system is running. When the system is powered down, the content of the hash table is stored on a disk or any other non-volatile memory. The hash table uses hashed indices that allow it to retrieve records in response to queries. This structure combined with the hash table's placement in the system's volatile memory allows the table to be accessed very quickly. To facilitate this quick access, a simplified query interface is used in some embodiments. For instance, in some embodiments, the hash table has just two queries, a Put query for writing values to the table and a Get query for retrieving values from the table. The system of some embodiments uses the hash table to store data that the NOS needs to retrieve very quickly. Examples of such data include network entity status, statistics, state, uptime, link arrangement, and packet handling information. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the NOS uses the hash tables as a cache to store information that is repeatedly queried, such as flow entries that will be written to multiple nodes.
- Using a single NOS instance to control a network can lead to scaling and reliability issues. As the number of network elements increases, the processing power and/or memory capacity that are required by those elements will saturate a single node. Some embodiments further improve the resiliency of the control system by having multiple instances of NOS running on one or more computers, with each instance of NOS containing one or more of the secondary storage structures described above. Each instance in some embodiments not only includes a NOS instance, but also includes a virtualization application instance and/or a control application instance. In some of these embodiments, the control and/or virtualization applications partition the workload between the different instances in order to reduce each instance's control and/or virtualization workload. Also, in some embodiments, the multiple instances of NOS communicate the information stored in their secondary storage layers to enable each instance of NOS to cover for the others in the event of a NOS instance failing. Moreover, some embodiments use the secondary storage layer (i.e., one or more of the secondary storages) as a channel for communicating between the different instances.
- The distributed, multi-instance control system of some embodiments maintains the same switch element data records in the NIB of each instance, while in other embodiments, the system allows NIBs of different instances to store different sets of switch element data records. Some embodiments that allow different instances to store different portions of the NIB, divide the NIB into N mutually exclusive portions and store each NIB portion in one NIB of one of N controller instances, where N is an integer value greater than 1. Other embodiments divide the NIB into N portions and store different NIB portions in different controller instances, while allowing some or all of the portions to partially (but not completely) overlap with the other NIB portions.
- The hash tables in the distributed control system of some embodiments form a distributed hash table (DHT), with each hash table serving as a DHT instance. In some embodiments, the DHT instances of all controller instances collectively store one set of records that is indexed based on hashed indices for quick access. These records are distributed across the different controller instances to minimize the size of the records within each instance and to allow for the size of the DHT to be increased by adding other DHT instances. According to this scheme, each DHT record is not stored in each controller instance. In fact, in some embodiments, each DHT record is stored in at most one controller instance. To improve the system's resiliency, some embodiments, however, allow one DHT record to be stored in more than one controller instance, so that in case one instance fails, the DHT records of that failed instance can be accessed from other instances. Some embodiments do not allow for replication of records across different DHT instances or allow only a small amount of such records to be replicated because the system of these embodiments stores in the DHT only the type of data that can be quickly re-generated.
- The distributed control system of some embodiments replicates each NIB record in the secondary storage layer (e.g., in each PTD instance and/or in the DHT) in order to maintain the records in the NIB in a persistent manner. For instance, in some embodiments, all the NIB records are stored in the PTD storage layer. In other embodiments, only a portion of the NIB data is replicated in the PTD storage layer. For instance, some embodiments store a subset of the NIB records in another one of the secondary storage records, such as the DHT.
- By allowing different NOS instances to store the same or overlapping NIB records, and/or secondary storage structure records, the system improves its overall resiliency by guarding against the loss of data due to the failure of any NOS or secondary storage structure instance. For instance, in some embodiments, the portion of NIB data that is replicated in the PTD (which is all of the NIB data in some embodiments or part of the NIB data in other embodiments) is replicated in the NIBs and PTDs of all controller instances, in order to protect against failures of individual controller instances (e.g., of an entire controller instance or a portion of the controller instance).
- In some embodiments, each of the storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different distribution technique to improve the resiliency of a multiple NOS instance system. For instance, as mentioned above, the system of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance. In some embodiments, the system distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small. This approach also allows the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances, and this in turn allows the system to be more scalable.
- For some or all of the communications between the distributed instances, the distributed system of some embodiments uses coordination managers (CM) in the controller instances to coordinate activities between the different controllers. Examples of such activities include writing to the NIB, writing to the PTD, writing to the DHT, controlling the switching elements, facilitating intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances, etc.
- To distribute the workload and to avoid conflicting operations from different controller instances, the distributed control system of some embodiments designates one controller instance within the system as the master of any particular NIB portion (e.g., as the master of a logical data path set) and one controller instance within the system as the master of any given switching element. Even with one master controller, a different controller instance can request changes to different NIB portions and/or to different switching elements controlled by the master. If allowed, the master instance then effectuates this change and writes to the desired NIB portion and/or switching element. Otherwise, the master rejects the request.
- The preceding Summary is intended to serve as a brief introduction to some embodiments of the invention. It is not meant to be an introduction or overview of all inventive subject matter disclosed in this document. The Detailed Description that follows and the Drawings that are referred to in the Detailed Description will further describe the embodiments described in the Summary as well as other embodiments. Accordingly, to understand all the embodiments described by this document, a full review of the Summary, Detailed Description and the Drawings is needed. Moreover, the claimed subject matters are not to be limited by the illustrative details in the Summary, Detailed Description and the Drawing, but rather are to be defined by the appended claims, because the claimed subject matters can be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the spirit of the subject matters.
- The novel features of the invention are set forth in the appended claims. However, for purposes of explanation, several embodiments of the invention are set forth in the following figures.
-
FIG. 1 illustrates a virtualized network system of some embodiments. -
FIG. 2 illustrates an example of switch controller functionality of the network operating system (NOS) of some embodiments. -
FIG. 3 illustrates an example of displaying different network information base (NIB) views to different users. -
FIG. 4 illustrates a virtualized system that employs control and virtualization applications. -
FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a virtualized system of some embodiments. -
FIG. 6 illustrates the switch infrastructure of a multi-tenant server hosting system in some embodiments. -
FIG. 7 illustrates a virtualized network control system that manages edge switches. -
FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a virtualized system that employs secondary storage structures that supplement the NIB's storage operations. -
FIG. 9 illustrates a multi-instance, distributed network control system of some embodiments. -
FIG. 10 illustrates an approach of maintaining an entire global NIB data structure in each NOS instance. -
FIG. 11 illustrates an alternative approach of dividing the global NIB into two separate portions, and storing each of these portions in a different NOS instance. -
FIG. 12 illustrates another alternative approach of dividing the global NIB into two separate portions having overlapping portions. -
FIG. 13 illustrates an example of specifying a master controller instance for a switch in a distributed system. -
FIG. 14 illustrates a particular distributed network control system of some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 15 conceptually illustrates a single NOS instance of some embodiments. -
FIG. 16 illustrates propagation of instructions to control a managed switch through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments. -
FIG. 17 illustrates propagation of instructions to control several managed switches through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments. -
FIG. 18 illustrates a conceptual process that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs to convert logical data to physical data. -
FIG. 19 illustrates a virtualization application of some embodiments. -
FIG. 20 illustrates input and output tables of some embodiments. -
FIG. 21 illustrates a development process that some embodiments employ to develop the rules engine of the control application. -
FIG. 22 illustrates that the rules engine of some embodiments implements partitioned management of logical data path sets (LDPS′). -
FIG. 23 illustrates a conceptual process that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs each time a record in a RE input table changes. -
FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a set of join operations. -
FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a set of join operations failing when they relate to a LDPS that does not relate to an input table event that has occurred. -
FIG. 26 illustrates an example of reducing workloads on nLog instances. -
FIG. 27 illustrates a virtualization application of some embodiments. -
FIG. 28 illustrates a conceptual process that the control application of some embodiments performs to convert logical control plane data to logical forwarding data. -
FIG. 29 illustrates a control application of some embodiments. -
FIG. 30 illustrates the control and virtualization applications of some embodiments. -
FIG. 31 illustrates an integrated control/virtualization application of some embodiments. -
FIG. 32 conceptually illustrates an electronic system with which some embodiments of the invention are implemented. - In the following detailed description of the invention, numerous details, examples, and embodiments of the invention are set forth and described. However, it will be clear and apparent to one skilled in the art that the invention is not limited to the embodiments set forth and that the invention may be practiced without some of the specific details and examples discussed.
- Some embodiments of the invention provide a method that allows several different logical data path sets to be specified for several different users through one or more shared switching elements without allowing the different users to control or even view each other's switching logic. In some embodiments, the method provides a set of software tools that allows the system to accept logical data path sets from users and to configure the switching elements to implement these logical data path sets. These software tools allow the method to virtualize control of the shared switching elements and the network that is defined by the connections between these shared switching elements, in a manner that prevents the different users from viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets while sharing the same switching elements.
- In some embodiments, one of the software tools that the method provides that allows it to virtualize control of a set of switching elements (i.e., to enable the method to allow several users to share the same switching elements without viewing or controlling each other's logical data path sets) is an intermediate data storage structure that (1) stores the state of the network, (2) receives modifications to different parts of the network from different users, and (3), in some embodiments, provide different views of the state of the network to different users. For instance, in some embodiments, the intermediate data storage structure is a network information base (NIB) data structure that stores the state of the network that is defined by one or more switching elements. In some embodiments, the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set. In these embodiments, the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB.
- The method uses the NIB data structure to read the state of the network and to write modifications to the state of the network. When the data structure is modified in order to effectuate a change in the switching logic of a switching element, the method propagates the modification to the switching element.
- In some embodiments, the method is employed by a virtualized network control system that (1) allows user to specify different logical data path sets, (2) maps these logical data path sets to a set of switching elements managed by the control system. In some embodiments, the network infrastructure switching elements includes virtual or physical network switches, software switches (e.g., Open vSwitch), routers, and/or other switching devices, as well as any other network elements (such as load balancers, etc.) that establish connections between these switches, routers, and/or other switching devices. Such switching elements (e.g., physical switching elements, such as physical switches or routers) are implemented as software switches in some embodiments. Software switches are switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch. In some embodiments, the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor
- These switches are referred to below as managed switching elements or managed forwarding elements as they are managed by the network control system in order to implement the logical data path sets. In some embodiments described below, the control system manages these switching elements by pushing physical control plane data to them, as further described below. Switching elements generally receive data (e.g., a data packet) and perform one or more processing operations on the data, such as dropping a received data packet, passing a packet that is received from one source device to another destination device, processing the packet and then passing it a destination device, etc. In some embodiments, the physical control plane data that is pushed to a switching element is converted by the switching element (e.g., by a general purpose processor of the switching element) to physical forwarding plane data that specify how the switching element (e.g., how a specialized switching circuit of the switching element) processes data packets that it receives.
- The virtualized control system of some embodiments includes (1) a network operating system (NOS) that creates and maintains the NIB storage structure, and (2) one or more applications that run on top of the NOS to specify control logic for reading values from and writing values to the NIB. The NIB of some of these embodiments serves as a communication channel between the different controller instances and, in some embodiments, a communication channel between different processing layers of a controller instance.
- Several examples of such systems are described below in Section I. Section II then describes the software architecture of a NOS instance. Section III further describes the control data pipeline of some embodiments of the invention. Section IV next describes how some embodiments perform the virtualization operations that map user specified input to data tuples in the NIB. Then, Section V describes operations the control application of some embodiments performs. Finally, Section VI describes the computer systems and processes used to implement some embodiments of the invention.
-
FIG. 1 illustrates avirtualized network system 100 of some embodiments of the invention. This system allows multiple users to create and control multiple different sets of logical data paths on a shared set of network infrastructure switching elements (e.g., switches, virtual switches, software switches, etc.). In allowing a user to create and control the user's set of logical data paths (i.e., the user's switching logic), the system does not allow the user to have direct access to another user's set of logical data paths in order to view or modify the other user's switching logic. However, the system does allow different users to pass packets through their virtualized switching logic to each other if the users desire such communication. - As shown in
FIG. 1 , thesystem 100 includes one ormore switching elements 105, anetwork operating system 110, anetwork information base 115, and one ormore applications 120. The switching elements include N switching devices (where N is a number equal to 1 or greater) that form the network infrastructure switching elements of thesystem 100. In some embodiments, the network infrastructure switching elements includes virtual or physical network switches, software switches (e.g., Open vSwitch), routers, and/or other switching devices, as well as any other network elements (such as load balancers, etc.) that establish connections between these switches, routers, and/or other switching devices. All such network infrastructure switching elements are referred to below as switching elements or forwarding elements. - The virtual or
physical switching devices 105 typically includecontrol switching logic 125 and forwardingswitching logic 130. In some embodiments, a switch'scontrol logic 125 specifies (1) the rules that are to be applied to incoming packets, (2) the packets that will be discarded, and (3) the packet processing methods that will be applied to incoming packets. The virtual orphysical switching elements 105 use thecontrol logic 125 to populate tables governing the forwardinglogic 130. The forwardinglogic 130 performs lookup operations on incoming packets and forwards the incoming packets to destination addresses. - As further shown in
FIG. 1 , thesystem 100 includes one ormore applications 120 through which switching logic (i.e., sets of logical data paths) is specified for one or more users (e.g., by one or more administrators or users). The network operating system (NOS) 110 serves as a communication interface between (1) theswitching elements 105 that perform the physical switching for any one user, and (2) theapplications 120 that are used to specify switching logic for the users. In this manner, the application logic determines the desired network behavior while the NOS merely provides the primitives needed to access the appropriate network state. In some embodiments, theNOS 110 provides a set of Application Programming Interfaces (API) that provides theapplications 120 programmatic access to the network switching elements 105 (e.g., access to read and write the configuration of network switching elements). In some embodiments, this API set is data-centric and is designed around a view of the switching infrastructure, allowing control applications to read and write state to any element in the network. - To provide the
applications 120 programmatic access to the switching elements, theNOS 110 needs to be able to control the switchingelements 105 itself. The NOS uses different techniques in different embodiments to control the switching elements. In some embodiments, the NOS can specify both control and forwardingswitching logic NOS 110 controls only thecontrol switching logic 125 of the switching elements, as shown inFIG. 1 . In some of these embodiments, theNOS 110 manages thecontrol switching logic 125 of a switching element through a commonly known switch-access interface that specifies a set of APIs for allowing an external application (such as a network operating system) to control the control plane functionality of a switching element. Two examples of such known switch-access interfaces are the OpenFlow interface and the Open Virtual Switch interface, which are respectively described in the following two papers: McKeown, N. (2008). OpenFlow: Enabling Innovation in Campus Networks (which can be retrieved from http://www.openflowswitch.org//documents/openflow-wp-latest.pdf), and Pettit, J. (2010). Virtual Switching in an Era of Advanced Edges (which can be retrieved from http://openvswitch.org/papers/dccaves2010.pdf). These two papers are incorporated herein by reference. -
FIG. 1 conceptually illustrates the use of switch-access APIs through the depiction ofhalos 135 around thecontrol switching logic 125. Through these APIs, the NOS can read and write entries in the control plane flow tables. The NOS′ connectivity to the switching elements' control plane resources (e.g., the control plane tables) is implemented in-band (i.e., with the network traffic controlled by NOS) in some embodiments, while it is implemented out-of-band (i.e., over a separate physical network) in other embodiments. There are only minimal requirements for the chosen mechanism beyond convergence on failure and basic connectivity to the NOS, and thus, when using a separate network, standard IGP protocols such as IS-IS or OSPF are sufficient. - In order to define the
control switching logic 125 for physical switching elements, the NOS of some embodiments uses the Open Virtual Switch protocol to create one or more control tables within the control plane of a switch element. The control plane is typically created and executed by a general purpose CPU of the switching element. Once the system has created the control table(s), the system then writes flow entries to the control table(s) using the OpenFlow protocol. The general purpose CPU of the physical switching element uses its internal logic to convert entries written to the control table(s) to populate one or more forwarding tables in the forwarding plane of the switch element. The forwarding tables are created and executed typically by a specialized switching chip of the switching element. Through its execution of the flow entries within the forwarding tables, the switching chip of the switching element can process and route packets of data that it receives. - To enable the programmatic access of the
applications 120 to the switchingelements 105, the NOS also creates the network information base (NIB) 115. The NIB is a data structure in which the NOS stores a copy of the switch-element states tracked by NOS. The NIB of some embodiments is a graph of all physical or virtual switch elements and their interconnections within a physical network topology and their forwarding tables. For instance, in some embodiments, each switching element within the network infrastructure is represented by one or more data objects in the NIB. However, in other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about only some of the switching elements. For example, as further described below, the NIB in some embodiments only keeps track of switching elements at the edge of a network infrastructure. In yet other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about edge switching elements in a network as well as some non-edge switching elements in the network that facilitate communication between the edge switching elements. In some embodiments, the NIB also stores the logical configuration and the logical state for each user specified logical data path set. In these embodiments, the information in the NIB that represents the state of the actual switching elements accounts for only a subset of the total information stored in the NIB. - In some embodiments, the
NIB 115 is the heart of the NOS control model in thevirtualized network system 100. Under one approach, applications control the network by reading from and writing to the NIB. Specifically, in some embodiments, the application control logic can (1) read the current state associated with network entity objects in the NIB, (2) alter the network state by operating on these objects, and (3) register for notifications of state changes to these objects. Under this model, when anapplication 120 needs to modify a record in a table (e.g., a control plane flow table) of aswitching element 105, theapplication 120 first uses the NOS′ APIs to write to one or more objects in the NIB that represent the table in the NIB. The NOS then acting as the switching element's controller propagates this change to the switching element's table. -
FIG. 2 presents one example that illustrates this switch controller functionality of theNOS 110. In particular, this figure illustrates in four stages the modification of a record (e.g., a flow table record) in aswitch 205 by anapplication 215 and aNOS 210. In this example, theswitch 205 has twoswitch logic records FIG. 2 , aNIB 240 stores tworecords switch logic records record 220 of the NIB to replace three previous values a, b, and c. - Next, in the third stage, the NOS uses the set of switch-access APIs to write a new set of values into the switch. In some embodiments, the NIB performs a translation operation that modifies the format of the records before writing these records into the NIB. These operations are pictorially illustrated in
FIG. 2 by showing the values d,e,f translated into d′,e′,f′, and the writing of these new values into theswitch 205. Alternatively, in some embodiments, one or more sets of values are kept identically in the NIB and the switching element, which thereby causes theNOS 210 to write the NIB values directly to theswitch 205 unchanged. - In yet other embodiments, the NOS′ translation operation might modify the set of values in the NIB (e.g., the values d,e,f) into a different set of values with fewer values (e.g., values x and y, where x and y might be a subset of d, e, and f, or completely different) or additional values (e.g., the w,x,y,z, where w, x, y, and z might be a super set of all or some of d, e, and f, or completely different). The NOS in these embodiments would then write this modified set of values (e.g., values x and y, or values w, x, y and z into the switching element).
- The fourth stage finally shows the
switch 205 after the old values a, b, and c have been replaced in theswitch control record 230 with the values d′, e′, and f′. Again, in the example shown inFIG. 2 , the NOS of some embodiments propagates NIB records to the switches as modified versions of the records were written to the NIB. In other embodiments, the NOS applies processing (e.g., data transformation) to the NIB records before the NOS propagates the NIB records to the switches, and such processing changes the format, content and quantity of data written to the switches. - A. Different NIB Views
- In some embodiments, the
virtualized system 100 ofFIG. 1 provides different views of the NIB to different users in order (1) to ensure that different users do not have direct view and control over each other's switching logic and (2) to provide each user with a view of the switching logic at an abstraction level that is desired by the user. For instance, in some embodiments, the NIB is a hierarchical data structure that represents different attributes of different switching elements as elements (e.g., different nodes) in a hierarchy. The NIB in some of these embodiments is a multi-layer hierarchical data structure, with each layer having a hierarchical structure and one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on each layer linked to one or more elements (e.g., nodes) on another layer. In some embodiments, the lowest layer elements correspond to the actual switching elements and their attributes, while each of the higher layer elements serves as abstractions of the actual switching elements and their attributes. As further described below, some of these higher layer elements are used in some embodiments to show different abstract switching elements and/or switching element attributes to different users in a virtualized control system. In other words, the NOS of some embodiments generates the multi-layer, hierarchical NIB data structure, and the NOS or an application that runs on top of the NOS shows different users different views of different parts of the hierarchical levels and/or layers, in order to provide the different users with virtualized access to the shared switching elements and network. -
FIG. 3 illustrates an example of displaying different NIB views to different users. Specifically, this figure illustrates avirtualized switching system 300 that includes several switching elements that are shared by two users. Thesystem 300 is similar to thesystem 100 ofFIG. 1 , except that thesystem 300 is shown to include four switchingelements 105 a-105 d and oneapplication 120, as opposed to the more general case ofN switching elements 105 and M (where M is a number greater than or equal to 1) applications inFIG. 1 . The number of switching elements and the use of one application are purely exemplary. Other embodiments might use more or fewer switching elements and applications. For instance, instead of having the two users interface with the same application, other embodiments provide two applications to interface with the two users. - In
system 300, theNIB 115 stores sets of data records for each of the switchingelements 105 a-105 d. In some embodiments, a system administrator can access these four sets of data through anapplication 120 that interfaces with the NOS. However, other users that are not system administrators do not have access to all of the four sets of records in the NIB, because some switch logic records in the NIB might relate to the logical switching configuration of other users. - Instead, each non system-administrator user can only view and modify the switching element records in the NIB that relate to the logical switching configuration of the user.
FIG. 3 illustrates this limited view by showing theapplication 120 providing a firstlayered NIB view 345 to afirst user 355 and a secondlayered NIB view 350 to asecond user 360. The firstlayered NIB view 345 shows the first user data records regarding the configuration of the shared switchingelements 105 a-105 d for implementing the first user's switching logic and the state of this configuration. The secondlayered NIB view 350 shows the second user data records regarding the configuration of the shared switchingelements 105 a-105 d for implementing the second user's switching logic and the state of this configuration. In viewing their own logical switching configuration, neither user can view the other user's logical switching configuration. - In some embodiments, each user's NIB view is a higher level NIB view that represents an abstraction of the lowest level NIB view that correlates to the actual network infrastructure that is formed by the switching
elements 105 a-105 d. For instance, as shown inFIG. 3 , the first user's layeredNIB view 345 shows two switches that implement the first user's logical switching configuration, while the second user's layeredNIB view 350 shows one switch that implements the second user's logical switching configuration. This could be the case even if either user's switching configuration uses all four switchingelements 105 a-105 d. However, under this approach, the first user perceives that his computing devices are interconnected by two switching elements, while the second user perceives that her computing devices are interconnected by one switching element. - The first layered NIB view is a reflection of a first set of
data records 365 that theapplication 120 allows the first user to access from the NIB, while the second layered NIB view is a representation of a second set ofdata records 370 that theapplication 120 allows the second user to access from the NIB. In some embodiments, theapplication 120 retrieves the two sets ofdata records FIG. 3 . In other embodiments, however, the application does not maintain these two sets of data records locally. Instead, in these other embodiments, the application simply provides the users with an interface to access the limited set of first and second data records from theNIB 115. Also, in other embodiments, thesystem 300 does not provide switching element abstractions in the higher layered NIB views 345 and 350 that it provides to the users. Rather, it simply provides views to the limited first and second set ofdata records - Irrespective of whether the application maintains a local copy of the first and second data records or whether the application only provides the switching element abstractions in its higher layered NIB views, the
application 120 serves as an interface through which each user can view and modify the user's logical switching configuration, without being able to view or modify the other user's logical switching configuration. Through the set of APIs provided by theNOS 110, theapplication 120 propagates to theNIB 115 changes that a user makes to the logical switching configuration view that the user receives from the application. The propagation of these changes entails the transferring, and in some cases of some embodiments, the transformation, of the high level data entered by a user for a higher level NIB view to lower level data that is to be written to lower level NIB data that is stored by the NOS. - In the
system 300 ofFIG. 3 , theapplication 120 can perform several different sets of operations in several different embodiments of the invention, as discussed above. Examples of such operations include providing an interface to a user to access NIB data regarding the user's logical switching configuration, providing different layered NIB views to different users, providing control logic for modifying the provided NIB data, providing logic for propagating received modifications to the NIB structure stored by the NOS, etc. - The system of some embodiments embeds all such operations in the
NOS 110 instead of in theapplication 120 operating on top of the NOS. Alternatively, in other embodiments the system separates these operations into several applications that operate above the NOS.FIG. 4 illustrates a virtualized system that employs several such applications. Specifically, this figure illustrates avirtualized system 400 that is similar to thevirtualized system 300 ofFIG. 3 , except that the operations of theapplication 120 in thesystem 400 have been divided into two sets of operations, one that is performed by acontrol application 420 and one that is performed by avirtualization application 425. - In some embodiments, the
virtualization application 425 interfaces with theNOS 110 to provide different views of different NIB records to different users through thecontrol application 420. Thecontrol application 420 also provides the control logic for allowing a user to specify different operations with respect to the limited NIB records/views provided by the virtualization application. Examples of such operations can be read operations from the NIB or write operations to the NIB. The virtualization application then translates these operations into operations that access the NIB. In translating these operations, the virtualization application in some embodiments also transfers and/or transforms the data that are expressed in terms of the higher level NIB records/views to data that are expressed in terms of lower level NIB records. - Even though
FIG. 4 shows just one control application and one virtualization application being used for the two users, thesystem 400 in other embodiments employs two control applications and/or two virtualization applications for the two different users. Similarly, even though several of the above-described figures show one or more applications operating on a single NOS instance, other embodiments provide several different NOS instances on top of each of which, one or more applications can execute. Several such embodiments will be further described below. - B. Type I Versus Type II Virtualized System
- Different embodiments of the invention use different types of virtualization applications. One type of virtualization application exposes the definition of different elements at different hierarchical levels in the NIB and the definition of the links between these elements to the control applications that run on top of the NOS and the virtualization application in order to allow the control application to define its operations by reference to these definitions. For instance, in some embodiments, the developer of the control application running on top of the virtualization application uses these definitions to enumerate how the application is to map the logical data path sets of the user to the physical switching elements of the control system. Under this approach, the developer would have to enumerate all different scenarios that the control system may encounter and the mapping operation of the application for each scenario. This type of virtualization is referred to below as Type I network virtualization.
- Another type of network virtualization, which is referred to below as Type II network virtualization, does not require the application developers to have intimate knowledge of the NIB elements and the links in the NIB between these elements. Instead, this type of virtualization allows the application to simply provide user specified switching element attributes in the form of one or more tables, which are then mapped to NIB records by a table mapping engine. In other words, the Type II virtualized system of some embodiments accepts switching element configurations (e.g., access control list table configurations, L2 table configurations, L3 table configurations, etc.) that the user defines without referencing any operational state of the switching elements in a particular network configuration. It then maps the user-specified switching element configurations to the switching element configurations stored in the NIB.
-
FIG. 5 illustrates an example of such a Type II virtualized system. Like thevirtualized system 300 ofFIG. 3 and thevirtualized system 400 ofFIG. 4 , thevirtualized system 500 in this example is shown to include oneNOS 110 and four switchingelements 105 a-105 d. Also, like thevirtualized system 400, thesystem 500 includes acontrol application 520 and avirtualization application 525 that run on top of theNOS 110. In some embodiments, thecontrol application 520 allows a user to specify and populate logical data path sets, while thevirtualization application 525 implements the specified logical data path sets by mapping the logical data path set to the physical switching infrastructure. - More specifically, the
control application 520 allows (1) a user to specify abstract switching element configurations, which thevirtualization application 525 then maps to the data records in the NIB, and (2) the user to view the state of the abstract switching element configurations. In some embodiments, thecontrol application 520 uses anetwork template library 530 to allow a user to specify a set of logical data paths by specifying one or more switch element attributes (i.e., one or more switch element configurations). In the example shown inFIG. 5 , the network template library includes several types of tables that a switching element may include. In this example, the user has interfaced with thecontrol application 520 to specify an L2 table 535, an L3 table 540, and an access control list (ACL) table 545. These three tables specify a logical data path set 550 for the user. In specifying these tables, the user simply specifies desired switch configuration records for one or more abstract, logical switching elements. When specifying these records, the user of thesystem 500 does not have any understanding of the switchingelements 105 a-105 d employed by the system or any data regarding these switching elements from theNIB 115. The only switch-element specific data that the user of thesystem 500 receives is the data from the network template library, which specifies the types of network elements that the user can define in the abstract, which the system can then process. - While the example in
FIG. 5 shows the user specifying ACL table, one of ordinary skill in the art will realize that the system of some embodiments does not provide such specific switch table attributes in thelibrary 530. For instance, in some embodiments, the switch-element abstractions provided by thelibrary 530 are generic switch tables and do not relate to any specific switching element table, component and/or architecture. In these embodiments, thecontrol application 520 enables the user to create generic switch configurations for a generic set of one or more tables. Accordingly, the abstraction level of the switch-element attributes that thecontrol application 520 allows the user to create is different in different embodiments. - Irrespective of the abstraction level of the switch-element attributes produced through the control logic application, the
virtualization application 525 performs a mapping operation that maps the specified switch-element attributes (e.g., the specific or generic switch table records) to records in the NIB. In some embodiments, the virtualization application translates control application input into one or more NIB records 585. The virtualization application then writes the resultingNIB records 585 to the NIB through the API set provided by NOS. From the NIB, these records are then subsequently transferred to the switching infrastructure through the operation of the NOS. In some embodiments, the NIB stores both the logical data path set input received through the control application as well as the NIB records that are produced by the virtualization application. - In some embodiments, the control application can receive switching infrastructure data from the NIB. In response to this data, the control application may modify record(s) associated with one or more logical data path sets (LDPS). Any such modified LDPS record would then be translated to one or more physical switching infrastructure records by the virtualization application, which might then be transferred to the physical switching infrastructure by the NOS.
- To map the control application input to physical switching infrastructure attributes for storage in the NIB, the virtualization application of some embodiments uses a database table mapping engine to map input tables to output tables. These input tables are created from (1) the control-application specified input tables, and (2) a set of properties associated with switching elements used by the system. The content of these output tables are then transferred to the NIB elements.
- Some embodiments use a variation of the datalog database language to allow application developers to create the table mapping engine for the virtualization application, and thereby to specify the manner by which the virtualization application maps logical data path sets to the controlled physical switching infrastructure. This variation of the datalog database language is referred to below as nLog. Like datalog, nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events. In some embodiments, nLog provides a limited subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules.
- The declaratory rules and operations that are specified through nLog are then compiled into a much larger set of rules by an nLog compiler. In some embodiments, this compiler translates each rule that is meant to address an event into several sets of database join operations. Collectively the larger set of rules forms the table mapping, rules engine that is referred to below as the nLog engine. The nLog mapping techniques of some embodiments is further described below.
- In some embodiments, the nLog virtualization engine provides feedback (e.g., from one or more of the output tables or from NIB records that are updated to reflect values stored in the output tables) to the user in order to provide the user with state information about the logical data path set that he or she created. In this manner, the updates that the user gets are expressed in terms of the logical space that the user understands and not in terms of the underlying switching element states, which is the user does not understand.
- The use of nLog serves as a significant distinction between Type I virtualized control systems and Type II virtualized control systems, even for Type II systems that store user specified logical data path sets in the NIB. This is because nLog provides a machine-generated rules engine that addresses the mapping between the logical and physical domains in a more robust, comprehensive manner than the hand-coded approach used for Type I virtualized control systems. In the Type I control systems, the application developers need to have a detailed understanding of the NIB structure and need to use this detailed understanding to write code that addresses all possible conditions that the control system would encounter at runtime. On the other hand, in Type II control systems, the application developers only need to produce applications that express the user-specified logical data path sets in terms of one or more tables, which are then automatically mapped to output tables whose content are in turn transferred to the NIB. This approach allows the Type II virtualized systems not to maintain the data regarding the logical data path sets in the NIB. However, some embodiments maintain this data in the NIB in order to distribute this data among other NOS instances, as further described below.
- C. Edge and Non-Edge Switch Controls
- As mentioned above, the NIB in some embodiments stores data regarding each switching element within the network infrastructure of a system, while in other embodiments, the NIB stores state information about only switching elements at the edge of a network infrastructure.
FIGS. 6 and 7 illustrate an example that differentiates the two differing approaches. Specifically,FIG. 6 illustrates the switch infrastructure of a multi-tenant server hosting system. In this system, six switching elements are employed to interconnect six computing devices of two users A and B. Four of these switches 605-620 are edge switches that have direct connections with the computing devices 635-660 of the users A and B, while two of theswitches -
FIG. 7 illustrates a virtualizednetwork control system 700 that manages the edge switches 605-620. As shown in this figure, thesystem 700 includes aNOS 110 that creates and maintains aNIB 115, which contains data records regarding only the four edge switching elements 605-620. In addition, theapplications 705 running on top of theNOS 110 allow the users A and B to modify their switch element configurations for the edge switches that they use. The NOS then propagates these modifications if needed to the edge switching elements. Specifically, in this example, twoedge switches edge switch 610 is only used by thecomputing device 645 of the user A andedge switch 615 is only used by thecomputing device 650 of the user B. Accordingly,FIG. 7 illustrates the NOS modifying users A and B records inswitches switch element 610 and only user B records inswitch element 615. - The system of some embodiments only controls edge switches (i.e., only maintains data in the NIB regarding edge switches) for several reasons. Controlling edge switches provides the system with a sufficient mechanism for maintaining isolation between computing devices, which is needed, as opposed to maintaining isolation between all switch elements, which is not needed. The interior switches forward data packets between switching elements. The edge switches forward data packets between computing devices and other network elements (e.g., other switching elements). Thus, the system can maintain user isolation simply by controlling the edge switch because the edge switch is the last switch in line to forward packets to a host.
- Controlling only edge switches also allows the system to be deployed independent of concerns about the hardware vendor of the non-edge switches, because deploying at the edge allows the edge switches to treat the internal nodes of the network as simply a collection of elements that moves packets without considering the hardware makeup of these internal nodes. Also, controlling only edge switches makes distributing switching logic computationally easier. Controlling only edge switches also enables non-disruptive deployment of the system because edge-switching solutions can be added as top of rack switches without disrupting the configuration of the non-edge switches.
- In addition to controlling edge switches, the network control system of some embodiments also utilizes and controls non-edge switches that are inserted in the switch network hierarchy to simplify and/or facilitate the operation of the controlled edge switches. For instance, in some embodiments, the control system requires the switches that it controls to be interconnected in a hierarchical switching architecture that has several edge switches as the leaf nodes and one or more non-edge switches as the non-leaf nodes. In some such embodiments, each edge switch connects to one or more of the non-leaf switches, and uses such non-leaf switches to facilitate its communication with other edge switches. Examples of functions that a non-leaf switch of some embodiments may provide to facilitate such communications between edge switch in some embodiments include (1) routing of a packet with an unknown destination address (e.g., unknown MAC address) to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can route this packet to the appropriate edge switch, (2) routing a multicast or broadcast packet to the non-leaf switch so that this switch can convert this packet to a series of unicast packets to the desired destinations, (3) bridging remote managed networks that are separated by one or more networks, and (4) bridging a managed network with an unmanaged network.
- Some embodiments employ one level of non-leaf (non-edge) switches that connect to edge switches and in some cases to other non-leaf switches. Other embodiments, on the other hand, employ multiple levels of non-leaf switches, with each level of non-leaf switch after the first level serving as a mechanism to facilitate communication between lower level non-leaf switches and leaf switches. In some embodiments, the non-leaf switches are software switches that are implemented by storing the switching tables in the memory of a standalone computer instead of an off the shelf switch. In some embodiments, the standalone computer may also be executing in some cases a hypervisor and one or more virtual machines on top of that hypervisor. Irrespective of the manner by which the leaf and non-leaf switches are implemented, the NIB of the control system of some embodiments stores switching state information regarding the leaf and non-leaf switches.
- The above discussion relates to the control of edge switches and non-edge switches by a network control system of some embodiments. In some embodiments, edge switches and non-edge switches (leaf and non-leaf nodes) may be referred to as managed switches. This is because these switches are managed by the network control system (as opposed to unmanaged switches, which are not managed by the network control system, in the network) in order to implement logical data path sets through the managed switches.
- D. Secondary Storage Structure
- In addition to using the NIB to store switching-element data, the virtualized network-control system of some embodiments also stores other storage structures to store data regarding the switching elements of the network. These other storage structures are secondary storage structures that supplement the storage functions of the NIB, which is the primary storage structure of the system while the system operates. In some embodiments, the primary purpose for one or more of the secondary storage structures is to back up the data in the NIB. In these or other embodiments, one or more of the secondary storage structures serves a purpose other than backing up the data in the NIB (e.g., for storing data that are not in the NIB).
- In some embodiments, the NIB is stored in system memory (e.g., RAM) while the system operates. This allows for the fast access of the NIB records. In some embodiments, one or more of the secondary storage structures, on the other hand, are stored on disk or other non-volatile memories that are slower to access. Such non-volatile disk or other storages, however, improve the resiliency of the system as they allow the data to be stored in a persistent manner.
-
FIG. 8 illustrates an example of avirtualized system 800 that employs secondary storage structures that supplement the NIB's storage operations. This system is similar to thesystems FIGS. 4 and 5 , except that it also includessecondary storage structures 805. In this example, these structures include a persistent transactional database (PTD) 810, a persistent non-transactional database (PNTD) 815, and a hash table 820. In some embodiments, these three types of secondary storage structures store different types of data, store data in different manners, and/or provide different query interfaces that handle different types of queries. - In some embodiments, the
PTD 810 is a database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory. In some embodiments, the PTD is a commonly available database, such as MySQL or SQLite. The PTD of some embodiments can handle complex transactional queries. As a transactional database, the PTD can undo a series of prior query operations that it has performed as part of a transaction when one of the subsequent query operations of the transaction fails. Moreover, some embodiments define a transactional guard processing (TGP) layer before the PTD in order to allow the PTD to execute conditional sets of database transactions. The TGP layer allows the PTD to avoid unnecessary later database operations when conditions of earlier operations are not met. - The PTD in some embodiments stores the exact replica of the data that are stored in the NIB, while in other embodiments it stores only a subset of the data that are stored in the NIB. Some or all of the data in the NIB are stored in the PTD in order to ensure that the NIB data will not be lost in the event of a crash of the NOS or the NIB.
- The
PNTD 815 is another persistent database that is stored on disk or other non-volatile memory. Some embodiments use this database to store data (e.g., statistics, computations, etc.) regarding one or more switch element attributes or operations. For instance, this database is used in some embodiment to store the number of packets routed through a particular port of a particular switching element. Other examples of types of data stored in thedatabase 815 include error messages, log files, warning messages, and billing data. Also, in some embodiments, the PNTD stores the results of operations performed by the application(s) 830 running on top of the NOS, while the PTD and hash table store only values generated by the NOS. - The PNTD in some embodiments has a database query manager that can process database queries, but as it is not a transactional database, this query manager cannot handle complex conditional transactional queries. In some embodiments, accesses to the PNTD are faster than accesses to the PTD but slower than accesses to the hash table 820.
- Unlike the
databases - The PTD and the PNTD improve the resiliency of the NOS system by preserving network data on hard disks. If a NOS system fails, network configuration data will be preserved on disk in the PTD and log file information will be preserved on disk in the PNTD.
- E. Multi-Instance Control System
- Using a single NOS instance to control a network can lead to scaling and reliability issues. As the number of network elements increases, the processing power and/or memory capacity that are required by those elements will saturate a single node. Some embodiments further improve the resiliency of the control system by having multiple instances of NOS running on one or more computers, with each instance of NOS containing one or more of the secondary storage structures described above. The control applications in some embodiments partition the workload between the different instances in order to reduce each instance's workload. Also, in some embodiments, the multiple instances of NOS communicate the information stored in their storage layers to enable each instance of NOS to cover for the others in the event of a NOS instance failing.
-
FIG. 9 illustrates a multi-instance, distributednetwork control system 900 of some embodiments. This distributed system controls multiple switchingelements 990 with threeinstances system 900 allows different controller instances to control the operations of the same switch or of different switches. - As shown in
FIG. 9 , each instance includes aNOS 925, avirtualization application 930, one ormore control applications 935, and a coordination manager (CM) 920. For the embodiments illustrated in this figure, each NOS in thesystem 900 is shown to include aNIB 940 and three secondary storage structures, i.e., aPTD 945, a distributed hash table (DHT)instance 950, and a persistent non-transaction database (PNTD) 955. Other embodiments may not tightly couple the NIB and/or each of the secondary storage structures within the NOS. Also, other embodiments might not include each of the three secondary storage structures (i.e., the PTD, DHT instance, and PNTD) in eachinstance NOS instance 905 may have all three data structures whereas another NOS instance may only have the DHT instance. - In some embodiments, the
system 900 maintains the same switch element data records in the NIB of each instance, while in other embodiments, thesystem 900 allows NIBs of different instances to store different sets of switch element data records.FIGS. 10-12 illustrate three different approaches that different embodiments employ to maintain the NIB records. In each of these three examples, twoinstances NIB data structure 1015 inFIGS. 10-12 . -
FIG. 10 illustrates the approach of maintaining the entire globalNIB data structure 1015 in eachNOS instance FIG. 11 illustrates an alternative approach of dividing theglobal NIB 1015 into twoseparate portions portion 1020 incontroller instance 1005 while storingportion 1025 in controller instance 1010).FIG. 12 illustrates yet another alternative approach. In this example, theglobal NIB 1015 is divided into two separate, but overlappingportions instance 1005storing portion 1030 andinstance 1010 storing portion 1035). In the systems of some embodiments that store different portions of the NIB in different instances, one controller instance is allowed to query another controller instance to obtain a NIB record. Other systems of such embodiments, however, do not allow one controller instance to query another controller instance for a portion of the NIB data that is not maintained by the controller itself. Still others allow such queries to be made, but allow restrictions to be specified that would restrict access to some or all portions of the NIB. - The
system 900 of some embodiments also replicates each NIB record in each instance in thePTD 945 of that instance in order to maintain the records of the NIB in a persistent manner. Also, in some embodiments, thesystem 900 replicates each NIB record in the PTDs of all thecontroller instances DHT instance 950. - In some embodiments, the DHT instances (DHTI) 950 of all controller instances collectively store one set of records that are indexed based on hashed indices for quick access. These records are distributed across the different controller instances to minimize the size of the records within each instance and to allow the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances. According to this scheme, one DHT record is not stored in each controller instance. In fact, in some embodiments, each DHT record is stored in at most one controller instance. To improve the system's resiliency, some embodiments, however, allow one DHT record to be stored in more than one controller instance, so that in case one DHT record is no longer accessible because of one instance failure, that DHT record can be accessed from another instance. Some embodiments store in the DHT only the type of data that can be quickly re-generated, and therefore do not allow for replication of records across different DHT instances or allow only a small amount of such records to be replicated.
- The
PNTD 955 is another distributed data structure of thesystem 900 of some embodiments. For example, in some embodiments, each instance's PNTD stores the records generated by theNOS 925 orapplications control system 900. In other words, addition of other controller instances increases the overall size of the PNTD storage layer. - The PNTD in some embodiments is replicated partially across different instances. In other embodiments, the PNTD is replicated fully across different instances. Also, in some embodiments, the
PNTD 955 within each instance is accessible only by the application(s) that run on top of the NOS of that instance. In other embodiments, the NOS can also access (e.g., read and/or write) to thePNTD 955. In yet other embodiments, thePNTD 955 of one instance is only accessible by the NOS of that instance. - By allowing different NOS instances to store the same or overlapping NIB records, and/or secondary storage structure records, the system improves its overall resiliency by guarding against the loss of data due to the failure of any NOS or secondary storage structure instance. In some embodiments, each of the three storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different distribution technique to improve the resiliency of a multiple NOS instance system. For instance, as mentioned above, the
system 900 of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance. In some embodiments, thesystem 900 distributes the PNTD with overlapping distributions of data across the NOS instances to reduce the damage of a failure. Thesystem 900 in some embodiments also distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small and to allow the size of the DHT to be increased by adding additional DHT instances. - For some or all of the communications between the distributed instances, the
system 900 uses theCMs 920. TheCM 920 in each instance allows the instance to coordinate certain activities with the other instances. Different embodiments use the CM to coordinate the different sets of activities between the instances. Examples of such activities include writing to the NIB, writing to the PTD, writing to the DHT, controlling the switching elements, facilitating intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances, etc. - As mentioned above, different controller instances of the
system 900 can control the operations of the same switching elements or of different switching elements. By distributing the control of these operations over several instances, the system can more easily scale up to handle additional switching elements. Specifically, the system can distribute the management of different switching elements and/or different portions of the NIB to different NOS instances in order to enjoy the benefit of efficiencies that can be realized by using multiple NOS instances. In such a distributed system, each NOS instance can have a reduced number of switches or reduce portion of the NIB under management, thereby reducing the number of computations each controller needs to perform to distribute flow entries across the switches and/or to manage the NIB. In other embodiments, the use of multiple NOS instances enables the creation of a scale-out network management system. The computation of how best to distribute network flow tables in large networks is a CPU intensive task. By splitting the processing over NOS instances, thesystem 900 can use a set of more numerous but less powerful computer systems to create a scale-out network management system capable of handling large networks. - To distribute the workload and to avoid conflicting operations from different controller instances, the
system 900 of some embodiments designates one controller instance (e.g., 905) within thesystem 900 as the master of any particular NIB portion and/or any given switching element (e.g., 990 c). Even with one master controller, different controller instance (e.g., 910 and 915) can request changes to different NIB portions and/or to different switching elements (e.g., 990 c) controlled by the master (e.g., 905). If allowed, the master instance then effectuates this change and writes to the desired NIB portion and/or switching element. Otherwise, the master rejects the request. -
FIG. 13 illustrates an example of specifying a master controller instance for a switch in a distributedsystem 1300 that is similar to thesystem 900 ofFIG. 9 . In this example, twocontrollers control applications logical data paths NIBs controller instances NOS instances - In the example illustrated in
FIG. 13 , bothcontrol applications controllers controller 1305 is the master of this switching element. This example illustrates two different scenarios. The first scenario involves thecontroller 1305 updating therecord S2 b 1 in switching element S2 for the user B. The second scenario involves thecontroller 1305 updating the records S2 a 1 in switching element S2 after thecontrol application 1320 updates a NIB record S2 a 1 for switching element S2 and user A inNIB 1360. In the example illustrated inFIG. 13 , this update is routed fromNIB 1360 of thecontroller 1310 to theNIB 1355 of thecontroller 1305, and subsequently routed to switching element S2. - Different embodiments use different techniques to propagate changes to the
NIB 1360 ofcontroller instance 1310 to theNIB 1355 of thecontroller instance 1305. For instance, to propagate changes, thesystem 1300 in some embodiments uses the secondary storage structures (not shown) of thecontroller instances FIG. 13 , the change to theNIB 1360 could be replicated to the PTD of thecontroller 1310, and from there it could be replicated in the PTD of thecontroller 1305 and theNIB 1355. - Instead of propagating the NIB changes through the secondary storages, the
system 1300 of some embodiments uses other techniques to change the record S2 a 1 in the switch S2 in response to the request fromcontrol application 1320. For instance, to propagate this update, theNOS 1350 of thecontroller 1310 in some embodiments sends an update command to theNOS 1345 of the controller 1305 (with the requisite NIB update parameters that identify the record and one or more new values for the record) to direct theNOS 1345 to modify the record in theNIB 1355 or in the switch S2. In response, theNOS 1345 would make the changes to theNIB 1355 and the switch S2 (if such a change is allowed). After this change, thecontroller instance 1310 would change the corresponding record in itsNIB 1360 once it receives notification (fromcontroller 1305 or through another notification mechanism) that the record in theNIB 1355 and/or switch S2 has changed. - Other variations to the sequence of operations shown in
FIG. 13 could exist because some embodiments designate one controller instance as a master of a portion of the NIB, in addition to designating a controller instance as a master of a switching element. In some embodiments, different controller instances can be masters of a switch and a corresponding record for that switch in the NIB, while other embodiments require the controller instance to be master of the switch and all records for that switch in the NIB. - In the embodiments where the
system 1300 allows for the designation of masters for switching elements and NIB records, the example illustrated inFIG. 13 illustrates a case where thecontroller instance 1310 is the master of the NIB record S2 a 1, while thecontroller instance 1305 is the master for the switch S2. If a controller instance other than thecontroller instance control application 1320 would have had to be propagated to this other controller instance. This other controller instance would then modify the NIB record and this modification would then cause theNIB 1355, theNIB 1360 and the switch S2 to update their records once thecontroller instances controller instances - In other embodiments, the
controller instance 1305 might be the master of the NIB record S2 a 1, or the controller instance might be the master of switch S2 and all the records of its NIB. In these embodiments, the request for the NIB record modification from thecontrol application 1320 would have to be propagated to thecontroller instance 1305, which would then modify the records in theNIB 1355 and the switch S2. Once this modification is made, theNIB 1360 would modify its record S2 a 1 once thecontroller instance 1310 is notified of this modification through any number of mechanisms that would propagate this modification to thecontroller instance 1310. - As mentioned above, different embodiments employ different techniques to facilitate communication between different controller instances. In addition, different embodiments implement the controller instances differently. For instance, in some embodiments, the stack of the control application(s) (e.g., 935 or 1315 in
FIGS. 9 and 13 ), the virtualization application (e.g., 930 or 1335), and the NOS (e.g., 925 or 1345) is installed and runs on a single computer. Also, in some embodiments, multiple controller instances can be installed and run in parallel on a single computer. In some embodiments, a controller instance can also have its stack of components divided amongst several computers. For example, within one instance, the control application (e.g., 935 or 1315) can be on a first physical or virtual computer, the virtualization application (e.g., 930 or 1335) can be on a second physical or virtual computer, and the NOS (e.g., 925 or 1350) can be on a third physical or virtual computer. -
FIG. 14 illustrates a particular distributednetwork control system 1400 of some embodiments of the invention. In several manners, thiscontrol system 1400 is similar to thecontrol system 900 ofFIG. 9 . For instance, it uses several different controller instances to control the operations of the same switching elements or of different switching elements. In the example illustrated inFIG. 14 , threeinstances control system 1400 can have any number of controller instances. - Also, like the
control system 900, each controller instance includes aNOS 1425, avirtualization application 1430, one ormore control applications 1435, and a coordination manager (CM) 1420. Each NOS in thesystem 1400 includes aNIB 1440 and at least two secondary storage structures, e.g., a distributed hash table (DHT) 1450 and aPNTD 1455. - However, as illustrated in
FIG. 14 , thecontrol system 1400 has several additional and/or different features than thecontrol system 900. These features include aNIB notification module 1470,NIB transfer modules 1475, aCM interface 1460, PTD triggers 1480, DHT triggers 1485, and master/slave PTDs 1445/1447. - In some embodiments, the
notification module 1470 in each controller instance allows applications (e.g., a control application) that run on top of the NOS to register for callbacks when changes occur within the NIB. This module in some embodiments has two components, which include a notification processor and a notification registry. The notification registry stores the list of applications that need to be notified for each NIB record that themodule 1470 tracks, while the notification processor reviews the registry and processes the notifications upon detecting a change in a NIB record that it tracks. The notification module as well as its notification registry and notification processor are a conceptual representation of the NIB-application layer notification components of some embodiments, as the system of these embodiments provides a separate notification function and registry within each NIB object that can be tracked by the application layer. - The
transfer modules 1475 include one or more modules that allow data to be exchanged between theNIB 1440 on one hand, and the PTD or DHT storage layers in each controller instance on the other hand. In some embodiments, thetransfer modules 1475 include an import module for importing changes from the PTD/DHT storage layers into the NIB, and an export module for exporting changes in the NIB to the PTD/DHT storage layers. - Unlike the
control system 900 that has the same type of PTD in each instance, thecontrol system 1400 only has PTDs in some of the NOS instances, and of these PTDs, one of them serves asmaster PTD 1445, while the rest serve asslave PTDs 1447. In some embodiments, NIB changes within a controller instance that has a slave PTD are first propagated to themaster PTD 1445, which then direct the controller instance's slave PTD to record the NIB change. Themaster PTD 1445 similarly receives NIB changes from controller instances that do not have either master or slave PTDs. - In the
control system 1400, thecoordination manager 1420 includes theCM interface 1460 to facilitate communication between the NIB storage layer and the PTD storage layer. The CM interface also maintains thePTD trigger list 1480, which identifies the modules of thesystem 1400 to callback whenever theCM interface 1460 is notified of a PTD record change. Asimilar trigger list 1485 for handling DHT callbacks is maintained by theDHT instance 1450. TheCM 1420 also has a DHT range identifier (not shown) that allows the DHT instances of different controller instances to store different DHT records in different DHT instances. - Also, in the
control system 1400, the PNTD is not placed underneath the NIB storage layer. This placement is to signify that the PNTD in thecontrol system 1400 does not exchange data directly with the NIB storage layer, but rather is accessible solely by the application(s) (e.g., the control application) running on top of theNOS 1425 as well as other applications of other controller instances. This placement is in contrast to the placement of thePTD storage layer 1445/1447 andDHT storage layers 1450, which are shown to be underneath the NIB storage layer because the PTD and DHT are not directly accessible by the application(s) running on top of theNOS 1425. Rather, in thecontrol system 1400, data are exchanged between the NIB storage layer and the PTD/DHT storage layers of the same or different instances. - The
control system 1400 uses the PTD, DHT and PNTD storage layers to facilitate communication between the different controller instances. In some embodiments, each of the three storages of the secondary storage layer uses a different storage and distribution technique to improve the resiliency of the distributed,multi-instance system 1400. For instance, thesystem 1400 of some embodiments replicates the PTD across NOS instances so that every NOS has a full copy of the PTD to enable a failed NOS instance to quickly reload its PTD from another instance. On the other hand, thesystem 1400 in some embodiments distributes the PNTD with partial overlapping distributions of data across the NOS instances to reduce the damage of a failure. Similarly, thesystem 1400 in some embodiments distributes the DHT fully or with minimal overlap across multiple controller instances in order to maintain the DHT instance within each instance small. Also, using this approach, allows the system to increase the size of the DHT by adding additional DHT instances in order to make the system more scalable. - One of the advantages of this system is that it can be configured in any number of ways. In some embodiments, this system provides great flexibility to specify the configurations for the components of the system in order to customize its storage and data distribution scheme to achieve the best tradeoff of scalability and speed on one hand, and reliability and consistency on the other hand. Attributes of the storage structures that affect scalability, speed, reliability and consistency considerations include the speed of the storage (e.g., RAM versus disk access speed), the reliability of the storage (e.g., persistent non-volatile storage of disk versus volatile storage of RAM), the query interface of the storage (e.g., simple Put/Get query interface of DHT versus more robust transactional database queries of PTD in some embodiments), and the number of points of failures in the system (e.g., a single point of failure for a DHT record versus multiple points of failure for a PTD record in some embodiments).
- Through the configurations of its components, the system can be configured (1) on how to distribute the data records between the NIB and the secondary storage structures within one instance (e.g., which secondary storage should store which NIB record), (2) on how to distribute the data records between the NIBs of different instances (e.g., which NIB records should be replicated across different controller instances), (3) on how to distribute the data records between the secondary storage structures within one instance (e.g., which secondary storage records contain which records), (4) on how to distribute the data records between the secondary storage structures of different instances (e.g., which secondary storage records are replicated across different controller instances), (5) on how to distribute secondary storage instances across controller instances (e.g., whether to put a PTD, a DHT, or a Stats database instances within each controller or whether to put different subset of these storages within different instances), and (6) on how to replicate data records in the distributed secondary storage structures (e.g., whether to replicated PTD fully across all instances, whether to replicate some or all DHT records across more than one instance, etc.). The system also allows the coordination between the different controller instances as to the master control over different switching elements or different portions of the NIB to be configured differently. In some embodiments, some or all of these configurations can be specified by applications (e.g., a control application or a virtualization application) that run on top of the NOS.
- In some embodiments, as noted above, the CMs facilitate intra-controller communication related to fault tolerance of controller instances. For instance, the CMs implement the intra-controller communication through the secondary storage layers described above. A controller instance in the control system may fail due to any number of reasons. (e.g., hardware failure, software failure, network failure, etc.). Different embodiments may use different techniques for determining whether a controller instance has failed. In some embodiments, Paxos protocol is used to determine whether a controller instance in the control system has failed. While some of these embodiments may use Apache Zookeeper to implement the Paxos protocols, other embodiments may implement Paxos protocol in other ways.
- Some embodiments of the
CM 1420 may utilize defined timeouts to determine whether a controller instance has failed. For instance, if a CM of a controller instance does not respond to a communication (e.g., sent from another CM of another controller instance in the control system) within an amount of time (i.e., a defined timeout amount), the non-responsive controller instance is determined to have failed. Other techniques may be utilized to determine whether a controller instance has failed in other embodiments. - When a master controller instance fails, a new master for the logical data path sets and the switching elements needs to be determined. Some embodiments of the
CM 1420 make such determination by performing a master election process that elects a master controller instance (e.g., for partitioning management of logical data path sets and/or partitioning management of switching elements). TheCM 1420 of some embodiments may perform a master election process for electing a new master controller instance for both the logical data path sets and the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master. However, theCM 1420 of other embodiments may perform (1) a master election process for electing a new master controller instance for the logical data path sets of which the failed controller instance was a master and (2) another master election process for electing a new master controller instance for the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master. In these cases, theCM 1420 may determine two different controller instances as new controller instances: one for the logical data path sets of which the failed controller instance was a master and another for the switching elements of which the failed controller instance was a master. - In some embodiments, the master election process is further for partitioning management of logical data path sets and/or management of switching elements when a controller instance is added to the control system. In particular, some embodiments of the
CM 1420 perform the master election process when thecontrol system 1400 detects a change in membership of the controller instances in thecontrol system 1400. For instance, theCM 1420 may perform the master election process to redistribute a portion of the management of the logical data path sets and/or the management of the switching elements from the existing controller instances to the new controller instance when thecontrol system 1400 detects that a new network controller has been added to thecontrol system 1400. However, in other embodiments, redistribution of a portion of the management of the logical data path sets and/or the management of the switching elements from the existing controller instances to the new controller instance does not occur when thecontrol system 1400 detects that a new network controller has been added to thecontrol system 1400. Instead, thecontrol system 1400 in these embodiments assigns unassigned logical data path sets and/or switching elements (e.g., new logical data path sets and/or switching elements or logical data path sets and/or switching elements from a failed network controller) to the new controller instance when thecontrol system 1400 detects the unassigned logical data path sets and/or switching elements. -
FIG. 15 conceptually illustrates asingle NOS instance 1500 of some embodiments. This instance can be used as a single NOS instance in the distributedcontrol system 1400 that employs multiple NOS instances in multiple controller instances. Alternatively, with slight modifications, this instance can be used as a single NOS instance in a centralized control system that utilizes only a single controller instance with a single NOS instance. TheNOS instance 1500 supports a wide range of control scenarios. For instance, in some embodiments, this instance allows an application running on top of it (e.g., a control or virtualization application) to customize the NIB data model and have control over the placement and consistency of each element of the network infrastructure. - Also, in some embodiments, the
NOS instance 1500 provides multiple methods for applications to gain access to network entities. For instance, in some embodiments, it maintains an index of all of its entities based on the entity identifier, allowing for direct querying of a specific entity. The NOS instance of some embodiments also supports registration for notifications on state changes or the addition/deletion of an entity. In some embodiments, the applications may further extend the querying capabilities by listening for notifications of entity arrival and maintaining their own indices. In some embodiments, the control for a typical application is fairly straightforward. It can register to be notified on some state change (e.g., the addition of new switches and ports), and once notified, it can manipulate the network state by modifying the NIB data tuple(s) (e.g., key-value pairs) of the affected entities. - As shown in
FIG. 15 , theNOS 1500 includes anapplication interface 1505, anotification processor 1510, anotification registry 1515, aNIB 1520, a hash table 1524, aNOS controller 1522, aswitch controller 1525,transfer modules 1530, aCM 1535, aPTD 1540, aCM interface 1542, aPNTD 1545, aDHT instance 1550,switch interface 1555, andNIB request list 1560. - The
application interface 1505 is a conceptual illustration of the interface between the NOS and the applications (e.g., control and virtualization applications) that can run on top of the NOS. Theinterface 1505 includes the NOS APIs that the applications (e.g., control or virtualization application) running on top of the NOS use to communicate with the NOS. In some embodiments, these communications include registrations for receiving notifications of certain changes in theNIB 1520, queries to read certain NIB attributes, queries to write to certain NIB attributes, requests to create or destroy NIB entities, instructions for configuring the NOS instance (e.g., instructions regarding how to import or export state), requests to import or export entities on demand, and requests to synchronize NIB entities with switching elements or other NOS instances. - The
switch interface 1555 is a conceptual illustration of the interface between the NOS and the switching elements that run below theNOS instance 1500. In some embodiments, the NOS accesses the switching elements by using the OpenFlow or OVS APIs provided by the switching elements. Accordingly, in some embodiments, theswitch interface 1555 includes the set of APIs provided by the OpenFlow and/or OVS protocols. - The
NIB 1520 is the data storage structure that stores data regarding the switching elements that theNOS instance 1500 is controlling. In some embodiments, the NIB just stores data attributes regarding these switching elements, while in other embodiments, the NIB also stores data attributes for the logical data path sets defined by the user. Also, in some embodiments, the NIB is a hierarchical object data structure (such as the ones described above) in which some or all of the NIB objects not only include data attributes (e.g., data tuples regarding the switching elements) but also include functions to perform certain functionalities of the NIB. For these embodiments, one or more of the NOS functionalities that are shown in modular form inFIG. 15 are conceptual representations of the functions performed by the NIB objects. - The hash table 1524 is a table that stores a hash value for each NIB object and a reference to each NIB object. Specifically, each time an object is created in the NIB, the object's identifier is hashed to generate a hash value, and this hash value is stored in the hash table along with a reference (e.g., a pointer) to the object. The hash table 1524 is used to quickly access an object in the NIB each time a data attribute or function of the object is requested (e.g., by an application or secondary storage). Upon receiving such requests, the NIB hashes the identifier of the requested object to generate a hash value, and then uses that hash value to quickly identify in the hash table a reference to the object in the NIB. In some cases, a request for a NIB object might not provide the identity of the NIB object but instead might be based on non-entity name keys (e.g., might be a request for all entities that have a particular port). For these cases, the NIB includes an iterator that iterates through all entities looking for the key specified in the request.
- The
notification processor 1510 interacts with theapplication interface 1505 to receive NIB notification registrations from applications running on top of the NOS and other modules of the NOS (e.g., such as an export module within the transfer modules 1530). Upon receiving these registrations, thenotification processor 1510 stores notification requests in thenotification registry 1515 that identifies each requesting party and the NIB data tuple(s) that the requesting party is tracking. - As mentioned above, the system of some embodiments embeds in each NIB object a function for handling notification registrations for changes in the value(s) of that NIB object. For these embodiments, the
notification processor 1510 is a conceptual illustration of the amalgamation of all the NIB object notification functions. Other embodiments, however, do not provide notification functions in some or all of the NIB objects. The NOS of some of these embodiments therefore provides an actual separate module to serve as the notification processor for some or all of the NIB objects. - When some or all of the NIB objects have notification functions in some embodiments, the notification registry for such NIB objects are typically kept with the objects themselves. Accordingly, for some of these embodiments, the
notification registry 1515 is a conceptual illustration of the amalgamation of the different sets of registered requestors maintained by the NIB objects. Alternatively, when some or all of the NIB objects do not have notification functions and notification services are needed for these objects, some embodiments use aseparate notification registry 1515 for thenotification processor 1510 to use to keep track of the notification requests for such objects. - The notification process serves as only one manner for accessing the data in the NIB. Other mechanisms are needed in some embodiments for accessing the NIB. For instance, the secondary storage structures (e.g., the
PTD 1540 and the DHT instance 1550) also need to be able to import data from and export data to the NIB. For these operations, theNOS 1500 uses thetransfer modules 1530 to exchange data between the NIB and the secondary storage structure. - In some embodiments, the transfer modules include a NIB import module and a NIB export module. These two modules in some embodiments are configured through the
NOS controller 1522, which processes configuration instructions that it receives through theinterfaces 1505 from the applications above the NOS. TheNOS controller 1522 also performs several other operations. As with the notification processor, some or all of the operations performed by the NOS controller are performed by one or more functions of NIB objects, in some of the embodiments that implement one or more of theNOS 1500 operations through the NIB object functions. Accordingly, for these embodiments, theNOS controller 1522 is a conceptual amalgamation of several NOS operations, some of which are performed by NIB object functions. - Other than configuration requests, the
NOS controller 1522 of some embodiments handles some of the other types of requests directed at theNOS instance 1500. Examples of such other requests include queries to read certain NIB attributes, queries to write to certain NIB attributes, requests to create or destroy NIB entities, requests to import or export entities on demand, and requests to synchronize NIB entities with switching elements or other NOS instances. - In some embodiments, the NOS controller stores requests to change the NIB on the
NIB request list 1560. Like the notification registry, the NIB request list in some embodiments is a conceptual representation of a set of distributed requests that are stored in a distributed manner with the objects in the NIB. Alternatively, for embodiments in which some or all of the NIB objects do not maintain their modification requests locally, the request list is a separate list maintained by theNOS 1500. The system of some of these embodiments that maintains the request list as a separate list, stores this list in the NIB in order to allow for its replication across the different controller instances through the PTD storage layer and/or the DHT storage layer. This replication allows the distributed controller instances to process in a uniform manner a request that is received from an application operating on one of the controller instances. - Synchronization requests are used to maintain consistency in NIB data in some embodiments that employ multiple NIB instances in a distributed control system. For instance, the NIB of some embodiments provides a mechanism to request and release exclusive access to the NIB data structure of the local instance. As such, an application running on top of the NOS instance(s) is only assured that no other thread is updating the NIB within the same controller instance. The application therefore needs to implement mechanisms external to the NIB to coordinate an effort with other controller instances to control access to the NIB. In some embodiments, this coordination is static and requires control logic involvement during failure conditions.
- Also, in some embodiments, all NIB operations are asynchronous, meaning that updating a network entity only guarantees that the update will eventually be pushed to the corresponding switching element and/or other NOS instances. While this has the potential to simplify the application logic and make multiple modifications more efficient, often it is useful to know when an update has successfully completed. For instance, to minimize disruption to network traffic, the application logic of some embodiments requires the updating of forwarding state on multiple switches to happen in a particular order (to minimize, for example, packet drops). For this purpose, the API of some embodiments provides the synchronization request primitive that calls back one or more applications running on top of the NOS once the state has been pushed for an entity. After receiving the callback, the control application of some embodiments will then inspect the content of the NIB and determine whether its state is still as originally intended. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the control application can simply rely on NIB notifications to react to failures in modifications as they would react to any other network state changes.
- The
NOS controller 1522 is also responsible for pushing the changes in its corresponding NIB to switching elements for which theNOS 1500 is the master. To facilitate writing such data to the switching element, theNOS controller 1522 uses theswitch controller 1525. It also uses theswitch controller 1525 to read values from a switching element. To access a switching element, theswitch controller 1525 uses theswitch interface 1555, which as mentioned above uses OpenFlow or OVS, or other known set of APIs in some embodiments. - Like the PTD and
DHT storage structures control system 1400 ofFIG. 14 , the PTD andDHT storage structures FIG. 15 interface with the NIB and not the application layer. In other words, some embodiments only limit PTD and DHT layers to communicate between the NIB layer and these two storage layers, and to communicate between the PTD/DHT storages of one instance and PTD/DHT storages of other instances. Other embodiments, however, allow the application layer (e.g., the control application) within one instance to access the PTD and DHT storages directly or through thetransfer modules 1530. These embodiments might provide PTD and DHT access handles (e.g., APIs to DHT, PTD or CM interface) as part of theapplication interface 1505, or might provide handles to the transfer modules that interact with the PTD layer (e.g., the CM interface 1542) and DHT layers, so that the applications can directly interact with the PTD and DHT storage layers. - Also, like
structures PTD 1540 andDHT instance 1550 have corresponding lists of triggers that are respectively maintained in theCM interface 1542 and theDHT instance 1550. Also, like thePNTD 1455 of thecontrol system 1400, thePNTD 1545 ofFIG. 15 does not interface with theNIB 1520. Instead, it interfaces with the application layer through theapplication interface 1505. Through this interface, the applications running on top of the NOS can store data in and retrieve data from the PNTD. Also, applications of other controller instances can access thePNTD 1545, as shown inFIG. 15 . -
FIG. 16 further elaborates on the propagation of the instructions to control a managed switch through the various processing layers of the controller instances of some embodiments of the invention. This figure illustrates acontrol data pipeline 1600 that translates and propagates control plane data through three processing layers of the same or different controller instances to a managedswitch 1625. These three layers are thecontrol application 1605, thevirtualization application 1610, and theNOS 1615. In some embodiments, these three layers are in the same controller instance. However, other arrangements of these layers exist in other embodiments. For instance, in other embodiments, only the control andvirtualization applications virtualization application 1610 are in the same controller instance, but the functionality to propagate the generated physical control plane data reside in a NOS of another controller instance (not shown). In these other embodiments, the physical control plane data is transferred from the initial NIB to the NIB of a NOS of the other controller instance, before this other NOS pushes the control plane data to the managed switch. - As shown in
FIG. 16 , thecontrol application 1605 in some embodiments has twological planes logical plane 1630 is a logical control plane that includes a collection of higher-level constructs that allow the control application and its users to specify one or more logical data path sets within the logical control plane for one or more users. The secondlogical plane 1635 in some embodiments is the logical forwarding plane, which represents the logical data path sets of the users in a format that can be processed by thevirtualization application 1610. In this manner, the twological planes planes switch 1625, as shown inFIG. 16 . - In some embodiments, the
control application 1605 defines and exposes the logical control plane constructs with which the application itself or users of the application define different logical data path sets within the logical control plane. For instance, in some embodiments, the logicalcontrol plane data 1630 includes logical ACL data, etc. Some of this data (e.g., logical ACL data) can be specified by the user, while other such data (e.g., the logical L2 or L3 records) are generated by the control application and may not be specified by the user. In some embodiments, thecontrol application 1605 generates and/or specifies such data in response to certain changes to the NIB (which indicate changes to the managed switches and the managed data path sets) that thecontrol application 1605 detects. - In some embodiments, the logical control plane data (i.e., the LDPS data that is expressed in terms of the control plane constructs) can be initially specified without consideration of current operational data from the managed switches and without consideration of the manner by which this control plane data will be translated to physical control plane data. For instance, the logical control plane data might specify control data for one logical switch that connects five computers, even though this control plane data might later be translated to physical control data for three managed switches that implement the desired switching between the five computers.
- The control application includes a set of modules for converting any logical data path set within the logical control plane to a logical data path set in the
logical forwarding plane 1635. In some embodiments, thecontrol application 1605 uses the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion. The control application's use of the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion is further described below and is also further described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Network Control Apparatus and Method”, filed concurrently with this application, with the Attorney Docket Number NCRA.P0022, which is incorporated by reference in this application. The control application also includes a set of modules for pushing the LDPS from thelogical forwarding plane 1635 of thecontrol application 1605 to alogical forwarding plane 1640 of thevirtualization application 1610. - The
logical forwarding plane 1640 includes one or more logical data path sets of one or more users. Thelogical forwarding plane 1640 in some embodiments includes logical forwarding data for one or more logical data path sets of one or more users. Some of this data is pushed to thelogical forwarding plane 1640 by the control application, while other such data are pushed to the logical forwarding plane by the virtualization application detecting events in theNIB 1620 as further described below for some embodiments. - In addition to the
logical forwarding plane 1640, thevirtualization application 1610 includes thephysical control plane 1645. Thephysical control plane 1645 includes one or more physical control path sets of one or more users. The virtualization application includes a set of modules for converting any LDPS within thelogical forwarding plane 1640 to a physical control data path set in thephysical control plane 1645. In some embodiments, thevirtualization application 1610 uses the nLog table mapping engine to perform this conversion. The virtualization application also includes a set of modules (not shown) for pushing the physical control plane data from thephysical control plane 1645 of thevirtualization application 1610 into theNIB 1620 of theNOS 1615. - From the NIB, the physical control plane data is later pushed into the managed
switch 1625, as shown inFIG. 16 . As mentioned above, the physical control plane data in some instances of some embodiments is pushed to the managed switch by the NOS of the same controller instance that has thecontrol application 1605 andvirtualization application 1610, but in other instance is pushed to the managed switch by the NOS of another controller instance (not shown). The managedswitch 1625 then converts this physical control plane data to physical forwarding plane data that specifies the forwarding behavior of the managed switch. - In some embodiments, the physical control plane data that is propagated to the managed switch 1650 allows this switch to perform the logical data processing on data packets that it processes in order to effectuate the processing of the logical data path sets specified by the control application. In some such embodiments, physical control planes include control plane data for operating in the physical domain and control plane data for operating in the logical domain. In other words, the physical control planes of these embodiments include control plane data for processing network data (e.g., packets) through managed switches to implement physical switching and control plane data for processing network data through managed switches in order to implement the logical switching. In this manner, the physical control plane facilitates implementing logical switches across managed switches. The use of the propagated physical control plane to implement logical data processing in the managed switches is further described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture,” filed concurrently herewith, with Attorney Docket No. NCRA.P0035. This patent application is incorporated by reference in this application.
- In addition to pushing physical control plane data to the
NIB 1620, the control andvirtualization applications NIB 1620 serves as a medium for communications between different controller instances, and the storage of such data in the NOB facilitates the relaying of such data across different controller instances. -
FIG. 16 illustrates thecontrol data pipeline 1600 through three processing layers of the same or different controller instances to a managedswitch 1625. However, in some embodiments, thecontrol data pipeline 1600 may have two processing layers instead of three with the upper layer being a single application that performs the functionalities of both thecontrol application 1605 and thevirtual application 1610. The dashed box encompassing the two applications indicates that a single virtualization application (also called network hypervisor) may replace these twoapplications control application 1605 would form the front end of this network hypervisor, and would create and populate the logical data path sets. Thevirtualization application 1610 in these embodiments would form the back end of the network hypervisor, and would convert the logical data path sets to physical data path sets that are defined in the physical control plane. -
FIG. 17 illustrates another perspective on the operation of the control, virtualization, and NOS applications of some embodiments. The perspective provided in this figure is meant to emphasize that one or more controller instances can execute these applications in a distributed manner in parallel. Specifically, this figure replaces thecontrol application 1605, thevirtualization application 1610, and theNOS 1615 ofFIG. 16 , with acontrol layer 1705, avirtualization layer 1710, and aNOS layer 1715. Each of these layers represents one or more applications that can be executing in parallel on one or more controller instances. Collectively these three layers represent a control system that can be operated as a single controller instance, or can be operated in a distributed manner by several controller instances. -
FIG. 17 also provides an example of logical data path sets that are created by the control applications of some embodiments, and the mapping of the created logical data path sets to the resources of the managed switches. In this example, the logical data path sets are severallogical switches 1770 that are specified by thecontrol application layer 1705. A logical switch in some embodiments is a simulated/conceptual switch that is defined (e.g., by a user) to conceptually describe a set of switching behaviors for a switch. The control system of some embodiments (such as the system illustrated inFIG. 17 ) implements this logical switch across one or more physical switches, which as mentioned above may be hardware switches, software switches, or virtual switches defined on top of other switches. - Each logical switch has two
logical planes logical plane 1730 is a logical control plane (denoted by “LCP” in the figure) that includes a collection of higher-level constructs that allow the control application layer and its user to specify one or more logical data path sets within the logical control plane for the user. The secondlogical plane 1735 in some embodiments is the logical forwarding plane (denoted by “LFP” in the figure), which represents the logical data path sets of the user in a format that can be processed by thevirtualization application layer 1710. Because of these twological planes planes FIG. 17 . - This figure then illustrates that through the
virtualization application layer 1710 and theNOS layer 1715, thelogical switches 1770 can be implemented in three managedswitches 1725. The number oflogical switches 1770 may be less or more than three. That is, the number oflogical switches 1770 in some embodiments does not have to match to the number of managed switches that implement the logical switches. To implement thelogical switches 1770 in the three managed switches, thevirtualization application layer 1710 converts the logical forwarding plane data of the logical switches into physical control plane data, and theNOS layer 1715 pushes this data to the managed switches 1725. As mentioned above, the pushed physical control plane data allows the managed switches to perform physical switching operations in both the physical and logical data processing domains. - As mentioned above, the virtualization application of some embodiments specifies the manner by which different LDPS′ of different users of a network control system can be implemented by the switching elements managed by the network control system. In some embodiments, the virtualization application specifies the implementation of the LDPS′ within the managed switching element infrastructure by performing conversion operations. These conversion operations convert the LDPS′ data records (also called data tuples below) to the control data records (e.g., physical control plane data) that are initially stored within the managed switching elements and then used by the switching elements to produce forwarding plane data (e.g., flow entries) for defining forwarding behaviors of the switches. The conversion operations also produce other data (e.g., in tables) that specify network constructs (e.g., tunnels, queues, queue collections, etc.) that should be defined within and between the managed switching elements. As described in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture,” the network constructs also include managed software switching elements that are dynamically deployed or pre-configured managed software switching elements that are dynamically added to the set of managed switching elements.
-
FIG. 18 conceptually illustrates an example of such conversion operations that the virtualization application of some embodiments performs. This figure conceptually illustrates aprocess 1800 that the virtualization application performs to generate data tuples based on input event data. As shown inFIG. 18 , theprocess 1800 initially receives (at 1805) data regarding an input event. The input event data may be logical forwarding plane data that the control application generates in some embodiments from the logical control plane data. The input event data in some embodiments may also be physical forwarding plane data or physical control plane data received from the NIB. In some embodiments, theprocess 1800 receives the physical forwarding data from a NIB monitor that monitors the NIB to detect a change in the NIB that reflects a change in one or more managed switching elements. - At 1810, the
process 1800 then performs a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the virtualization application is responsible for the input event data. As described above, several instances of the virtualization application may operate in parallel to control multiple sets of logical data paths in some embodiments. In these embodiments, each virtualization application uses the filtering operation to filter out input data that does not relate to the virtualization application's logical data path set. To perform this filtering operation, the virtualization application of some embodiments includes a filter module. This module in some embodiments is a standalone module, while in other embodiments it is implemented by a table mapping engine (e.g., implemented by the join operations performed by the table mapping engine) that maps records between input tables and output tables of the virtualization application, as further described below. - Next, at 1815, the process determines whether the filtering operation has filtered out the received input event data. The filtering operation filters out the input event data in some embodiments when the input event data does not fall within one of the logical data path sets that are the responsibility of the virtualization application. When the process determines (at 1815) that the filtering operation has filtered out the input event the process ends. Otherwise, the
process 1800 transitions to 1820. - At 1820, a converter of the virtualization application generates one or more sets of data tuples based on the received input event data. In some embodiments, the converter is a table mapping engine that performs a series of table mapping operations on the input event data to map the input event data to other data tuples. As mentioned above, this table mapping engine also performs the filtering operation in some embodiments. One example of such a table mapping engine is an nLog table-mapping engine which will be described bellow.
- In some embodiments, the data tuples that the
process 1800 generates may include data (e.g., physical control plane data) that the process has to push down to the NIB. Accordingly, at 1825, the process publishes to the NIB any data tuples that it has generated if such publication is necessary. After 1825, the process ends. - The virtualization application in some embodiments performs its mapping operations by using the nLog table mapping engine, which, as described above, is a variation of the datalog table mapping technique. Datalog is used in the field of database management to map one set of tables to another set of tables. Datalog is not a suitable tool for performing table mapping operations in a virtualization application of a network control system as its current implementations are often slow. Accordingly, the nLog engine of some embodiments is custom designed to operate quickly so that it can perform the real time mapping of the LDPS data tuples to the data tuples of the managed switching elements. This custom design is based on several custom design choices. For instance, some embodiments compile the nLog table mapping engine from a set of high level declaratory rules that are expressed by an application developer (e.g., by a developer of a control application). In some of these embodiments, one custom design choice that is made for the nLog engine is to allow the application developer to use only the AND operator to express the declaratory rules. By preventing the developer from using other operators (such as ORs, XORs, etc.), these embodiments ensure that the resulting rules of the nLog engine are expressed in terms of AND operations that are faster to execute at run time.
- Another custom design choice relates to the join operations performed by the nLog engine. Join operations are common database operations for creating association between records of different tables. In some embodiments, the nLog engine limits its join operations to inner join operations (also called as internal join operations) because performing outer join operations (also called as external join operations) can be time consuming and therefore impractical for real time operation of the engine.
- Yet another custom design choice is to implement the nLog engine as a distributed table mapping engine that is executed by several different virtualization applications. Some embodiments implement the nLog engine in a distributed manner by partitioning management of logical data path sets. Each logical data path set includes logical data paths that are specified for a single user of the control system. Partitioning management of the logical data path sets involves specifying for each particular logical data path set only one controller instance as the instance responsible for specifying the NIB records associated with that particular logical data path set. For instance, when the control system uses three switching elements to specify five logical data path sets for five different users with two different controller instances, one controller instance can be the master for NIB records relating to two of the logical data path sets while the other controller instance can be the master for the NIB records for the other three logical data path sets. Partitioning management of logical data path sets ensures that conflicting values for the same logical data path sets are not written to the NIB by two different controller instances, and thereby alleviates the applications running on top of NOS from guarding against the writing of such conflicting values.
- Partitioning management of the LDPS′ also assigns in some embodiments the table mapping operations for each LDPS to the nLog engine of the controller instance responsible for the LDPS. The distribution of the nLog table mapping operations across several nLog instances reduces the load on each nLog instance and thereby increases the speed by which each nLog instance can complete its mapping operations. Also, this distribution reduces the memory size requirement on each machine that executes a controller instance. As further described below, some embodiments partition the nLog table mapping operations across the different instances by designating the first join operation that is performed by each nLog instance to be based on the LDPS parameter. This designation ensures that each nLog instance's join operations fail and terminate immediately when the instance has started a set of join operations that relate to a LDPS that is not managed by the nLog instance.
- A more detailed example of the nLog mapping engine and the virtualization application is described in sub-sections A-E below. Sub-section A initially describes the software architecture of the virtualization application of some embodiments. Sub-section B then describes further the parallel, distributed management of the LDPS. Sub-section C next describes one manner for designing the nLog mapping engine. Sub-section D then describes the nLog engine's table mapping operations in response to an external event from the NIB or an internal event that is generated by the nLog engine. Lastly, sub-section E provides code-based examples that describe how a portion of the nLog engine is specified and how this portion later operates to perform its mapping operations.
- A. Architecture
-
FIG. 19 illustrates avirtualization application 1900 of some embodiments of the invention. Thisapplication 1900 is used in some embodiments as thevirtualization application 1430 ofFIG. 14 . Thevirtualization application 1900 uses an nLog table mapping engine to map input tables that contain LDPS data tuples to data tuples for defining managed switching elements, attributes of the managed switching elements, and flow entries for the managed switching elements. This application resides between acontrol application 1905 that generates LDPS data tuples, and aNOS 1965 that contains aNIB 1960 that stores the data tuples generated by the nLog table mapping engine. More specifically, thecontrol application 1905 allows different users to define different logical data path sets (LDPS), which specify the desired switching configurations of the users. Thecontrol application 1905 also reacts to changes in the NIB to modify the LDPS′. Thevirtualization application 1900 through its mapping operations converts each of the LDPS of each user into a set of data tuples to populate the NIB. The virtualization application then populates theNIB 1960 through theNIB Publisher 1955 with the generated sets of data tuples. When theNOS 1965 subsequently propagates the NIB data tuples for a particular user to the switching element(s), the NOS completes the deployment of the user's switching configuration to one or more switching elements. In some embodiments, the virtualization application is executed on the same machine with the control application and the NOS. However, the virtual application, the control application, and the NOS do not have to run on the same machine in other embodiments. That is, one of these applications or each of these applications may run on a different computer. - As shown in
FIG. 19 , thevirtualization application 1900 includes a set of rule-engine input tables 1910, a set of function and constant tables 1915, aquery manager 1920, arules engine 1925, a set of rule-engine output tables 1945, aNIB monitor 1950, aNIB publisher 1955, and acompiler 1935. Thecompiler 1935 is one component of the application that operates at a different instance in time than the application's other components. The compiler operates when a developer needs to specify the rules engine for a particular control application and/or virtualized environment, whereas the rest of the application's modules operate at run time when the application interfaces with the control application and the NOS to deploy and monitor logical data path sets specified by one or more users. - In some embodiments, the
compiler 1935 takes a relatively small set (e.g., few hundred lines) ofdeclarative instructions 1940 that are specified in a declarative language and converts these into a large set (e.g., thousands of lines) of code that specify the operation of therules engine 1925, which performs the application's table mapping as further described below. As such, the compiler greatly simplifies the virtualization application developer's process of defining and updating the virtualization application. This is because the compiler allows the developer to use a high level programming language that allows a compact definition of the virtualization application's complex mapping operation and to subsequently update this mapping operation in response to any number of changes (e.g., changes in the networking functions supported by the virtualization application, changes to desired behavior of the virtualization application, etc.). - In some embodiments, the rule-engine (RE) input tables 1910 include tables with logical data and/or switching configurations (e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.) specified by the user and/or the virtualization application. They also include in some embodiments tables that contain physical data (i.e., non-logical data) from the switching elements managed by the virtualized control system. In some embodiments, such physical data includes data regarding the managed switching elements (e.g., physical control plane data) and other data regarding network configuration employed by the virtualized control system to deploy the different LDPS′ of the different users.
- The RE input tables 1910 are partially populated by the LDPS data (e.g., by logical forwarding plane data) provided by the
control application 1905. The control application generates part of the LDPS data based on user input regarding the logical data path sets. It also generates part of the LDPS data by monitoring the NIB to identify changes in the managed switching element infrastructure that would require modification to the LDPS data. The control application's generation of LDPS data based on the monitoring of the NIB is further described below and further described in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Network Control Apparatus and Method.” In addition to thecontrol application 1905, the NIB monitor 1950 partially populates the RE input tables 1910 with some or all of the data that the NIB monitor collects from theNIB 1960. The operation of the NIB monitor will be further described below. - In addition to the RE input tables 1910, the
virtualization application 1900 includes other miscellaneous tables 1915 that therules engine 1925 uses to gather inputs for its table mapping operations. These tables 1915 include constant tables that store defined values for constants that therules engine 1925 needs to perform its table mapping operations. For instance, constant tables 1915 may include a constant “zero” that is defined as the value 0, a constant “dispatch_port_no” as the value 4000, a constant “broadcast_MAC_addr” as the value 0xFF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF. (A dispatch port in some embodiments is a port that specifies that the managed switch should reprocess the packet based on another flow entry. Examples of such dispatch ports are provided in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.”) - When the
rules engine 1925 references constants, the corresponding value defined for the constants are actually retrieved and used. In addition, the values defined for constants in the constant table 1915 may be modified and/or updated. In this manner, the constant table 1915 provides the ability to modify the value defined for constants that therules engine 1925 references without the need to rewrite or recompile code that specifies the operation of therules engine 1925. - The tables 1915 further include function tables that store functions that the
rules engine 1925 needs to use to calculate values needed to populate the output tables 1945. One example of such a function is a hash function that the rules engine uses to compute hash values for distributing DHT operations as well as load balancing traffic between lower level switches and higher level switches in a hierarchical switching architecture. U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Using a Network Information Base to Control a Plurality of Shared Network Infrastructure Switching Elements,” and filed concurrently with the present application with the attorney docket number NCRA.P0010, describes the use of hash tables for distributing DHT operations, while the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture,” describes the use of hash tables to load balance traffic in a hierarchical switching architecture. U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Using a Network Information Base to Control a Plurality of Shared Network Infrastructure Switching Elements,” and filed concurrently with the present application with the attorney docket number NCRA.P0010 is incorporated herein by reference. U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Using a Network Information Base to Control a Plurality of Shared Network Infrastructure Switching Elements,” also described the above-mentioned request list processing, which allows one control instance to request modifications to a LDPS managed by another controller instance. - The
rules engine 1925 performs table mapping operations that specify one manner for implementing the LDPS′ within the managed switching element infrastructure. Whenever one of the RE input tables is modified, the rules engine performs a set of table mapping operations that may result in the modification of one or more data tuples in one or more RE output tables. The modification of the output table data tuples, in turn, may cause the NIB to be modified in order to establish and/or modify the implementation of a particular user's LDPS in the managed switching element infrastructure. - As shown in
FIG. 19 , therules engine 1925 includes anevent processor 1922, several query plans 1927, and atable processor 1930. In some embodiments, each query plan is a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a modification to one of the RE input table. Such a modification is referred to below as an input table event. As further described below, each query plan is generated by thecompiler 1935 from one declaratory rule in the set ofdeclarations 1940. In some embodiments, the query plans are defined by using the nLog declaratory language. - In some embodiments, the
compiler 1935 does not just statically generate query plans but rather dynamically generates query plans based on performance data it gathers. Thecompiler 1935 in these embodiments generates an initial set of query plans and let the rules engine operate with the initial set of query plans. The virtualization application gathers the performance data or receives performance feedbacks (e.g., from the rules engine). Based on this data, the compiler is modified so that the virtualization application or a user of this application can have the modified compiler modify the query plans while the rules engine is not operating or during the operation of the rules engine. - For instance, the order of the join operations in a query plan may result in different execution times depending on the number of tables the rules engine has to select to perform each join operation. The compiler in these embodiments can be re-specified in order to re-order the join operations in a particular query plan when a certain order of the join operations in the particular query plan has resulted in a long execution time to perform the join operations.
- The
event processor 1922 of therules engine 1925 detects the occurrence of each input table event. The event processor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of an input table event differently. In some embodiments, the event processor registers for callbacks with the RE input tables for notification of changes to the records of the RE input tables. In such embodiments, theevent processor 1922 detects an input table event when it receives notification from a RE input table that one of its records has changed. - In response to a detected input table event, the event processor 1922 (1) selects the appropriate query plan for the detected table event, and (2) directs the
table processor 1930 to execute the query plan. To execute the query plan, thetable processor 1930 in some embodiments performs the join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 1910 and 1915. Thetable processor 1930 of some embodiments then (1) performs a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writes the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 1945. - In some embodiments, the RE output tables 1945 store both logical and physical network element data attributes. The tables 1945 are called RE output tables as they store the output of the table mapping operations of the
rules engine 1925. In some embodiments, the RE output tables can be grouped in several different categories. For instance, in some embodiments, these tables can be RE input tables and/or virtualization-application (VA) output tables. A table is a RE input table when a change in the table causes the rules engine to detect an input event that requires the execution of a query plan. A RE output table 1945 can also be a RE input table 1910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan after it is modified by the rules engine. Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by thecontrol application 1905 or theNIB monitor 1950. - A table is a virtualization-application output table when a change in the table causes the
NIB publisher 1955 to publish a change to theNIB 1960, as further described below. As shown inFIG. 20 , a table in the RE output tables 1945 can be a RE input table 1910, a VA output table 2005, or both a RE input table 1910 and a VA output table 2005. - The
NIB publisher 1955 detects changes to the VA output tables 2005 of the RE output tables 1945. The NIB publisher of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a VA output table event differently. In some embodiments, the NIB publisher registers for callbacks with the VA output tables for notification of changes to the records of the VA output tables. In such embodiments, theNIB publisher 1955 detects an output table event when it receives notification from a VA output table that one of its records has changed. - In response to a detected output table event, the
NIB publisher 1955 takes each modified data tuple in the modified VA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple into theNIB 1960 through the APIs provided by theNOS 1965. After a new data tuple is propagated to the NIB by theNIB publisher 1955, theNOS 1965 propagates, if needed, a NIB data tuple that was modified because of the propagated VA output table data tuple to one or more of the managed switching elements. In doing this, the NOS completes the deployment of the LDPS (e.g., one or more logical switching configurations) to one or more managed switching elements as specified by the NIB records. - As the VA output tables store both logical and physical network element data attributes in some embodiments, the
NIB 1960 in some embodiments stores both logical and physical network element attributes that are identical or derived from the logical and physical network element data attributes in the output tables 1945. In other embodiments, however, the NIB only stores physical network element attributes that are identical or derived from the physical network element data attributes in the output tables 1945. - The NIB monitor 1950 interfaces with the
NIB 1960 to receive notifications regarding changes to the NIB. The NIB monitor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a change in the NIB differently. In some embodiments, the NIB monitor registers for callbacks with the NIB for notification of changes to one or more records in the NIB. In such embodiments, the NIB monitor 1950 detects NIB change event when it receives notification from the NIB that one of its records has changed. In response to a detected NIB change event, the NIB monitor 1950 may modify one or more RE input tables 1910, which, in turn, may cause one or more RE input table event to occur that then initiates the execution of one or more query plans by the rules engine. In other words, the NIB monitor writes some or all of the information that it receives from the NIB into the input tables 1910, so that the state and configuration of the managed switching elements can be accounted for while generating the NIB data tuples through the mapping operations. Each time the managed switching configuration or underlying managed switching element state changes, the NIB monitor 1950 may update theinput table records 1910 so that the generated NIB data tuples can be updated to reflect the modified switching configuration or underlying switching element state. - In some embodiments, the NIB monitor 1950 is a collection of input objects (or functions) associated with the RE input tables. Each input object in some embodiments is associated with one RE input table and is responsible for modifying its associated input table in response to a change in the NIB. Each input object in some embodiments registers with one or more NIB objects for callback notifications upon the occurrence of changes to the NIB object(s). Similarly, in some embodiments, the
NIB publisher 1955 is a collection of output objects (or functions) associated with the VA output tables. Each output object in some embodiments is associated with one VA output table and is responsible for propagating changes in its associated output table to the NIB. As such, in some embodiments, the NIB monitor is a conceptual representation of the input and output objects that register with the NIB for callbacks. - The
query manager 1920 interfaces with thecontrol application 1905 to receive queries regarding LDPS data. As shown inFIG. 19 , themanager 1920 of some embodiments also interfaces with theNIB 1960 in order to query the NIB to provide the control application state information regarding the network elements in the LDPS′ for the different user. In other embodiments, however, thequery manager 1920 queries the output tables 1945 to obtain LDPS data for the control application. - B. Designing the nLog Table Mapping Engine
- In some embodiments, the
virtualization application 1900 uses a variation of the datalog database language, called nLog, to create the table mapping engine that maps input tables containing logical data path data and switching element attributes to the output tables. Like datalog, nLog provides a few declaratory rules and operators that allow a developer to specify different operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of different events. In some embodiments, nLog provides a smaller subset of the operators that are provided by datalog in order to increase the operational speed of nLog. For instance, in some embodiments, nLog only allows the AND operator to be used in any of the declaratory rules. - The declaratory rules and operations that are specified through nLog are then compiled into a much larger set of rules by an nLog compiler. In some embodiments, this compiler translates each rule that is meant to respond to an event into several sets of database join operations. Collectively the larger set of rules forms the table mapping, rules engine that is referred to below as the nLog engine.
-
FIG. 21 illustrates adevelopment process 2100 that some embodiments employ to develop therules engine 1925 of thevirtualization application 1900. As shown in this figure, this process uses adeclaration toolkit 2105 and acompiler 2110. Thetoolkit 2105 allows a developer (e.g., a developer of acontrol application 1905 that operates on top of the virtualization application 1900) to specify different sets of rules to perform different operations upon occurrence of different sets of conditions. - One example 2115 of such a rule is illustrated in
FIG. 21 . This example is a multi-conditional rule that specifies that an Action X has to be taken if four conditions A, B, C, and D are true. The expression of each condition as true in this example is not meant to convey that all embodiments express each condition for each rule as True or False. For some embodiments, this expression is meant to convey the concept of the existence of a condition, which may or may not be true. For example, in some such embodiments, the condition “A=True” might be expressed as “Is variable Z=A?” In other words, A in this example is the value of a parameter Z, and the condition is true when Z has a value A. - Irrespective of how the conditions are expressed, a multi-conditional rule in some embodiments specifies the taking of an action when certain conditions in the network are met. Examples of such actions include creation or deletion of new packet flow entries, creation or deletion of new network constructs, modification to use of existing network constructs, etc. In the
virtualization application 1900 these actions are often implemented by therules engine 1925 by creating, deleting, or modifying records in the output tables, which are then propagated to the NIB by theNIB publisher 1955. - As shown in
FIG. 21 , the multi-conditional rule 2115 uses only the AND operator to express the rule. In other words, each of the conditions A, B, C and D has to be true before the Action X is to be taken. In some embodiments, thedeclaration toolkit 2105 only allows the developers to utilize the AND operator because excluding the other operators (such as ORs, XORs, etc.) that are allowed by datalog allows nLog to operate faster than datalog. - The
compiler 2110 converts each rule specified by thedeclaration toolkit 2105 into a query plan 2120 of the rules engine.FIG. 21 illustrates the creation of three query plans 2120 a-2120 c for three rules 2115 a-2115 c. Each query plan includes one or more sets of join operations. Each set of join operations specifies one or more join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a particular event in a particular RE input table, where the particular event might correspond to the addition, deletion or modification of an entry in the particular RE input table. - In some embodiments, the
compiler 2110 converts each multi-conditional rule into several sets of join operations, with each set of join operations being specified for execution upon the detection of the occurrence of one of the conditions. Under this approach, the event for which the set of join operations is specified is one of the conditions of the multi-conditional rule. Given that the multi-conditional rule has multiple conditions, the compiler in these embodiments specifies multiple sets of join operations to address the occurrence of each of the conditions. -
FIG. 21 illustrates this conversion of a multi-conditional rule into several sets of join operations. Specifically, it illustrates the conversion of the four-condition rule 2115 into thequery plan 2120 a, which has four sets of join operations. In this example, one join-operation set 2125 is to be performed when condition A occurs, one join-operation set 2130 is to be performed when condition B occurs, one join-operation set 2135 is to be performed when condition C occurs, and one join-operation set 2140 is to be performed when condition D occurs. - These four sets of operations collectively represent the
query plan 2120 a that therules engine 1925 performs upon the occurrence of a RE input table event relating to any of the parameters A, B, C, or D. When the input table event relates to one of these parameters (e.g., parameter B) but one of the other parameters (e.g., parameters A, C, and D) is not true, then the set of join operations fails and no output table is modified. But, when the input table event relates to one of these parameters (e.g., parameter B) and all of the other parameters (e.g., parameters A, C, and D) are true, then the set of join operations does not fail and an output table is modified to perform the action X. In some embodiments, these join operations are internal join operations. In the example illustrated inFIG. 21 , each set of join operations terminates with a select command that selects entries in the record(s) resulting from the set of join operations to output to one or more output tables. - To implement the nLog engine in a distributed manner, some embodiments partition management of logical data path sets by assigning the management of each logical data path set to one controller instance. This partition management of the LDPS is also referred to as serialization of management of the LDPS. The
rules engine 1925 of some embodiments implements this partitioned management of the LDPS by having a join to the LDPS entry be the first join in each set of join operations that is not triggered by an event in a LDPS input table. -
FIG. 22 illustrates one such approach. Specifically, for the same four-condition rule 2115 a illustrated inFIG. 21 , it generates adifferent query plan 2220 a. This query plan is part of three query plans 2220 a-2220 c that this figure shows thecompiler 2210 generating for the three rules 2115 a-2115 c specified through thedeclaration toolkit 2105. Like thequery plan 2120 a that has four sets ofjoin operations condition rule 2115 a, thequery plan 2220 a also has four sets ofjoin operations rule 2115 a. - The four sets of
join operations sets - C. Table Mapping Operations Upon Occurrence of Event
-
FIG. 23 conceptually illustrates aprocess 2300 that thevirtualization application 1900 performs in some embodiments each time a record in a RE input table changes. This change may be a change made through thecontrol application 1905. Alternatively, it may be a change that is made by the NIB monitor 1950 after it receives from the NIB a notification regarding a change in the NIB. The change to the RE input table record can entail the addition, deletion or modification of the record. - As shown in
FIG. 23 , theprocess 2300 initially detects (at 2305) a change in a RE input table 1910. In some embodiments, theevent processor 1922 is the module that detects this change. Next, at 2310, theprocess 2300 identifies the query plan associated with the detected RE input table event. As mentioned above, each query plan in some embodiments specifies a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of an input table event. In some embodiments, theevent processor 1922 is also the module that performs this operation (i.e., is the module that identifies the query plan). - At 2315, the
process 2300 executes the query plan for the detected input table event. In some embodiments, theevent processor 1922 directs thetable processor 1930 to execute the query plan. To execute a query plan that is specified in terms of a set of join operations, thetable processor 1930 in some embodiments performs the set of join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 1910 and 1915. -
FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a set ofjoin operations 2405. This set of join operations is performed when an event is detected with respect torecord 2410 of an input table 2415. The join operations in this set specify that the modifiedrecord 2410 in table 2415 should be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2420. This joined record should then be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2425, and this resulting joined record should finally be joined with the matching record(s) in table 2430. - Two records in two tables “match” when values of a common key (e.g., a primary key and a foreign key) that the two tables share are the same, in some embodiments. In the example in
FIG. 24 , therecords records records records record 2450. In the example shown inFIG. 24 , the result of a join operation between two tables (e.g., tables 2415 and 2420) is a single record (e.g., ABCDFGH). However, in some cases, the result of a join operation between two tables may be multiple records. - Even though in the example illustrated in
FIG. 24 a record is produced as the result of the set of join operations, the set of join operations in some cases might result in a null record. For instance, as further described in sub-section D below, a null record results when the set of join operations terminates on the first join because the detected event relates to a LDPS not managed by a particular instance of the virtualization application. Accordingly, at 2320, the process determines whether the query plan has failed (e.g., whether the set of join operations resulted in a null record). If so, the process ends. In some embodiments, theoperation 2320 is implicitly performed by the table processor when it terminates its operations upon the failure of one of the join operations. - When the
process 2300 determines (at 2320) that the query plan has not failed, it stores (at 2325) the output resulting from the execution of the query plan in one or more of the output tables. In some embodiments, thetable processor 1930 performs this operation by (1) performing a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writing the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 1945.FIG. 24 illustrates an example of this selection operation. Specifically, it illustrates the selection of values B, F, P and S from the combinedrecord 2450 and the writing of these values into arecord 2465 of an output table 2460. - As mentioned above, the RE output tables can be categorized in some embodiments as (1) a RE input table only, (2) a VA output table only, or (3) both a RE input table and a VA output table. When the execution of the query plan results in the modification a VA output table, the
process 2300 publishes (at 2330) the changes to this output table to the NIB. In some embodiments, theNIB publisher 1955 detects changes to the VA output tables 2005 of the RE output tables 1945, and in response, it propagates the modified data tuple in the modified VA output table into theNIB 1960 through the APIs provided by theNOS 1965. After a new data tuple is propagated to the NIB by the NIB monitor, theNOS 1965 propagates, if needed, a NIB data tuple that was modified because on the propagated VA output table data tuple to one or more of the managed switching elements. In doing this, the NOS completes the deployment of the LDPS (e.g., one or more logical switching configurations) to one or more managed switching elements as specified by the NIB records. - At 2335, the process determines whether the execution of the query plan resulted in the modification of the RE input table. This operation is implicitly performed in some embodiments when the
event processor 1922 determines that the output table that was modified previously at 2325 modified a RE input table. As mentioned above, a RE output table 1945 can also be a RE input table 1910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan after it is modified by the rules engine. Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by thecontrol application 1905 or theNIB monitor 1950. When the process determines (at 2330) that an internal input event was created, it returns to 2310 to perform operations 2310-2335 for this new internal input event. The process terminates when it determines (at 2335) that the execution of the query plan at 2335 did not result in an internal input event. - One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that
process 2300 is a conceptual representation of the operations used to map a change in one or more input tables to one or more output tables. The specific operations ofprocess 2300 may not be performed in the exact order shown and described. The specific operations may not be performed in one continuous series of operations, and different specific operations may be performed in different embodiments. For instance, theprocess 2300 in some embodiments batches up a set of changes in RE input tables 1910 and identifies (at 2310) a query plan associated with the set of detected RE input table events. The process in these embodiments executes (at 2320) the query plan for the whole set of the RE input table events rather than for a single RE input table event. Batching up the RE input table events in some embodiments results in better performance of the table mapping operations. For example, batching the RE input table events improves performance because it reduces the number of instance that theprocess 2300 will produce additional RE input table events that would cause it to start another iteration of itself. - D. Parallel, Distributed Management of LDPS′
- As mentioned above, some embodiments implement the nLog engine as a distributed table mapping engine that is executed by different virtualization applications of different controller instances. To implement the nLog engine in a distributed manner, some embodiments partition the management of the logical data path sets by specifying for each particular logical data path set only one controller instance as the instance responsible for specifying the NIB records associated with that particular logical data path set. Partitioning the management of the LDPS′ also assigns in some embodiments the table mapping operations for each LDPS to the nLog engine of the controller instance responsible for the LDPS.
- As described above by reference to
FIG. 20 , some embodiments partition the nLog table mapping operations across the different instances by designating the first join operation that is performed by each nLog instance to be based on the LDPS parameter. This designation ensures that each nLog instance's join operations fail and terminate immediately when the instance has started a set of join operations that relate to a LDPS that is not managed by the nLog instance. -
FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a set of join operations failing when they relate to a LDPS that does not relate to an input table event that has occurred. Specifically, this figure illustrates fourquery plans rules engine 2525 of a particularvirtualization application instance 2530. Two of these query plans 2510 and 2515 specify two sets of join operations that should be performed upon occurrence of input table events B and W respectively, while two of the query plans 2505 and 2520 specify two sets of join operations that should be performed upon occurrence of input table event A. - In the example illustrated in
FIG. 25 , the twoquery plans LDPS 2 and these two plans are not associated with such an event. Instead, the twoquery plans query plans join operations 2540 for thequery plan 2505 fails because thequery plan 2505 is specified for aLDPS 1, which is a LDPS not managed by thevirtualization application instance 2530. This set of join operations fails on thefirst join operation 2535 because it is a join with the LDPS table, which for thevirtualization application instance 2530 does not contain a record for theLDPS 1. In some embodiments, even though thefirst join operation 2535 has failed, the remaining join operations (not shown) of thequery plan 2540 will still be performed and fail. In other embodiments, the remaining join operations of thequery plan 2540 will not be performed as shown. - The second set of
join operations 2545 does not fail, however, because it is for theLDPS 2, which is a LDPS managed by thevirtualization application instance 2530 and therefore has a record in the LDPS table of this application instance. This set of join operations has four stages that each performs one join operation. Also, as shown inFIG. 25 , the set of join operations terminates with a selection operation that selects a portion of the combined record produced through the join operations. - The distribution of the nLog table mapping operations across several nLog instances reduces the load on each nLog instance and thereby increases the speed by which each nLog instance can complete its mapping operations.
FIG. 26 illustrates an example that describes this reduction in workload. Specifically, it illustrates an example where twocontroller instances switches machines - In four stages, this figure illustrates the results of the table mapping operations that are performed by the virtualization applications of these two different controller instances. The
first stage 2601 shows that no machines have been deployed in the managed system for either tenant A or tenant B. Thesecond stage 2602 shows the computing environment with several machines that have been deployed for tenant A in the two sets ofmachines controller instance 2605 with flow entries for the LDPS A that were specified by this instance's virtualization application. The second stage further shows theNIB 2645 of thecontroller instance 2605 containing the flow entries for the LDPS A. At this stage, theNIB 2645 also contains LDPS data relating to LDPS A in some embodiments, but this data is not shown inFIG. 26 . - The
third stage 2603 inFIG. 26 shows that the flow entries for the LDPS A have migrated to theNIB 2655 of thecontroller instance 2610. This migration occurs because of the NIB replication across the controller instances. Also, this replication causes LDPS data relating to LDPS A to be copied to theNIB 2655. Thethird stage 2603 further shows the computing environment with several machines that have been deployed for tenant B in the two sets ofmachines controller instance 2610 with flow entries for the LDPS B that were specified by this instance's virtualization application. The third stage further shows theNIB 2655 of thecontroller instance 2610 containing the flow entries for the LDPS B. At this stage, theNIB 2655 also contains LDPS data relating to LDPS B in some embodiments, but this data is not shown inFIG. 26 . - The
fourth stage 2604 shows that the flow entries for the LDPS B have migrated to theNIB 2645 of thecontroller instance 2605. This migration occurs because of the NIB replication across the controller instances. This replication also causes LDPS data relating to LDPS B to be copied to theNIB 2645. As shown at thestage 2604, theNIBs - While the input and output tables of each controller instance in some embodiments only store or practically only store logical state data for only the LDPS′ for which the controller instance is responsible, the NIB for each controller instance in some of these embodiments contains all or practically all of the logical state data (e.g., except some logical port statistics that are stored in the DHTs of controller instances that are not replicated across) for all LDPS of all controller instances. However, other embodiments will partition the logical state data for the LDPS's across the NIBs of different controller instances.
- E. NIB Monitor
-
FIG. 27 illustrates additional details regarding the operation of the NIB monitor 1950 of thevirtualization application 1900 of some embodiments of the invention. For simplicity of discussion,FIG. 27 does not illustrate thecontrol application 1905, thequery manager 1920, the miscellaneous tables 1915, thedeclarative rules 1940, thecomplier 1935, and the inner makeups of therules engine 1925. - As described above, the NIB monitor 1950 interfaces with the
NIB 1960 to receive notifications regarding changes to theNIB 1960. In the examples described above, the NIB monitor 1950 may modify one or more RE input tables 1910 when it receives a record change notification from the NIB. Therules engine 1925 then performs a series of mapping operations to map the modified RE input tables to the RE output tables 1945, which may include RE input tables 1910, VA output tables 2005 ofFIG. 20 and tables that serve as both RE input tables and VA output tables. - In addition to modifying the RE input tables 1910, the NIB monitor 1950 of some embodiments may also modify one or more VA output tables when it receives a NIB change notification. That is, the NIB monitor in these embodiments directly modifies the VA output tables for some NIB change notifications, such as notification relating to some of the changes to the state and configuration of the managed switching elements. By directly writing such data to the VA output tables, the
NIB 1960 keeps the VA output tables updated with the current state and configuration of the managed switching elements. -
FIG. 27 conceptually illustrates that some of the VA output tables 1945 conceptually include tworepresentations first representation 2710 in some embodiments includes data that specify the desired state and configuration of the managed switching elements, while thesecond representation 2715 includes data specifying the current state and configuration of the managed switches. The data of thefirst representation 2710 is the result of table mapping operations performed by therules engine 1925. Thus, in some embodiments, the data of thefirst representation 2710 is physical control plane data produced by therules engine 1925 based on changes in logical forwarding data stored in the RE input tables 1910. On the other hand, the data of thesecond representation 2715 is retrieved from theNIB 1960. This data is also physical control plane data in some embodiments. The data of the first representation and the data of the second representation do not always match because, for example, a failure of a managed switching element that is reflected in the second representation may not have been reflected in the first representation yet. - As shown, the
virtualization application 1900 conceptually includes adifference assessor 2705. Thedifference assessor 2705 detects a change in thefirst representation 2710 or in thesecond representation 2715. A change in the first representation may occur when therules engine 1925 puts the result of its mapping operations in the VA output tables 2005 ofFIG. 20 . A change in the second representation may occur when the NIB updates the VA output tables 2005 when it is notified of a change in the NIB. Upon detecting a change in the VA output tables, thedifference assessor 2705 in some embodiments examines both thefirst representation 2710 and thesecond representation 2715 to find out the difference, if any, between these two representations. - When there is no difference between these two representations, the
difference assessor 2705 takes no further action because the current state and configuration of the managed switching elements are already what they should be. However, when there is a difference, thedifferent assessor 2705 may have theNIB publisher 1955 publish the difference (e.g., data tuples) to theNIB 1960. When the NIB publisher published the difference to theNIB 1960, the difference will be propagated to the managed switching elements by theNOS 1965 and the state and configuration of the managed switching elements will be the state and configuration specified by thefirst representation 2710. Also, when the difference assessor detects a difference between the two representations, the difference assessor in some embodiments may call the input tables of the control or virtualization application to initiate additional table mapping operations to reconcile the difference between the desired and current values. Alternatively, in other embodiments, the NIB monitor will end up updating the input tables based on the changes in the NIB at the same time it updates the output tables and these will trigger the nLog operations that might update the output table. - In some embodiments, the
virtualization application 1900 does not store the desired andcurrent representations difference assessor 2705 to assess whether two corresponding representations are identical. Instead, thevirtualization application 1900 stores each set of physical control plane data in a format that identifies differences between the desired data value and the current data value. When the difference between the desired and current values is significant, thevirtualization application 1900 of some embodiments may have the NIB publisher push a data tuple change to the NIB, or may call the input tables of the control or virtualization application to initiate additional table mapping operations to reconcile the difference between the desired and current values. - The operation of the
virtualization application 1900 will now be described with an example network event (i.e., a change in the network switching elements). In this example, the switching elements managed by the virtualization application include a pool node. A pool node and other network constructs associated with the pool node are described in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.” The pool node has a root bridge and a patch bridge. The pool node shuts down for some reason (e.g., by hardware or software failure) and the two bridges of the pool node get shut down together with the pool node. This results in an update in theNIB 1960 which will indicate the pool node and its bridges being down. The NIB monitor 1950 in this example is then notified of this update in the NIB and subsequently writes information to both the RE input tables 1910 and the VA output tables (specifically, the second representation 2715). Therules engine 1925 performs mapping operations upon detecting the change in the RE input tables 1910 but the mapping result (i.e., the first representation 2710) in this example will not change the desired data value regarding the pool node and its bridges. That is, the desired data value would still indicate that the pool node and the two bridges should exist in the configuration of the system. Thesecond representation 2715 would also indicate the presence of the pool node and its bridges in the configuration. - The
NOS 1965 then restarts the pool node but the root bridge and the patch bridge do not come back up in this example. TheNIB 1960 will indicate that the pool node is back up and the NIB monitor 1950 updates the RE input tables 1910 and thesecond representation 2715 of the VA output tables accordingly. Therules engine 1925 performs mapping operations on the RE input tables 1910 but the resulting desired data value would still not change because there was no change as to the existence of the pool node in the configuration of the system. However, the current data value in thesecond representation 2715 would indicate at this point that the pool node has come back up but not the bridges. Thedifference assessor 2705 detects the changes in the first and second representations and compares the desired and current data values regarding the pool node and its bridges. Thedifference assessor 2705 determines the difference, which is the existence of the two bridges in the pool node. Thedifference assessor 2705 notifies theNIB publisher 1955 of this difference. TheNIB publisher 1955 publishes this difference in theNIB 1960. TheNOS 1965 propagates this information to the pool node so that the pool node creates the root and patch bridges in it. - F. Code Based Examples
- 1. nLog and Datalog Declarations
- As discussed above, nLog in some embodiments is a variation of the datalog database language for declaring logic that controls how the
virtualization application 1900 will map input tables to the output tables by performing mapping operations on the information contained in the input tables. In some embodiments, the input tables contain information comprising logical data path sets and switching element attributes. In some embodiments, the output tables contain physical control plane data. In the Type I virtualized control system in some embodiments, declaring logic for governing how a control application requires extensive use cases and conditions in C++ or an equivalent programmatic language. In some embodiments, the nLog language expresses the same control logic as a programming language such as C++, but in high-level declarations that are easily modified and extended. In some embodiments of the invention, the nLog declarations are compiled into a code in a programming language for use by a run time process by the nLog compiler. - As discussed above, nLog is a variation of the Datalog language selected for its speed and applicability to distributing logical data path sets. The Datalog language is a query and rule language for deductive databases. The Datalog language is stated using rule declarations. In some embodiments, nLog uses the “JOIN”, “SELECT”, and “AND” operators from Datalog. “JOIN” performs an inner join of tables on a specified join-predicate. Inner join creates a new result table by combining column values of two tables based on the specified join-predicate. Inner join compares each row of the joined tables to find all pairs of rows that satisfy the join-predicate. When the join-predicate is satisfied, column values for each matched pair of rows of the joined table are combined into a result row. “SELECT” returns column or row entries from tables based on a specified result set. “AND” returns true where all inputs to the “AND” function are true. This set of operators is sufficient to implement the distribution of logical data path sets of some embodiments of the invention. Other operators, such as the “XOR” and “OR” operators, are not used for some embodiments of nLog because (1) their implementation may complicate the development of the nLog compiler, (2) their function can be emulated using only the “AND” operator, and/or (3) their performance is less than that of the “JOIN”, “SELECT”, and “AND” operators.
- In some embodiments nLog uses the syntactic structure of Datalog rule declarations. For instance, nLog rule declarations are of the form “<head>:-<body1>, <body2>.” The rule declaration “<head>:-<body1>, <body2>” can be understood as “<head> if it is known that <body1> and <body2>.” The “:-” symbol demarcates the head from the body of a rule declaration. The text prior to the “:-” symbol is the head of a rule declaration. The text following the “:-” symbol is the body of a rule declaration. The head of the rule declaration receives parameters and defines the action the rules engine will take when the conditions specified in the body clauses of the rule declaration are satisfied. One of the ordinary skill in the art will realize that the rule declarations do not have to be in this specific form. That is, any equivalent forms may be used to define these rule declarations.
- Similar to the head of a rule declaration, the body contains actions and parameters. In the previous example, clauses <body1> and <body2> comprised the body of the rule declaration. As shown in the previous example, a rule declaration may have more than one body clause. However, clauses in the body portion of a rule declaration are not used to create, modify, or destroy network constructs. Rather, in some embodiments, clauses in the body portion of a rule declaration are used as conditions for performing the action of the head portion of a rule declaration.
- The head and body clauses of rule declarations can accept parameters. Parameters are inputs to the actions contained in either the head or the body clauses of rules declarations. For example, the parameters of a rule declaration that creates a new network construct typically indicate the location and identity of the new network construct to be created. Parameters will be described in more detail in the example rule declaration described below.
- 2. Pool Node Rule Declaration
- In order to illustrate the structure of an nLog rule declaration of some embodiments of the invention, an example nLog rule declaration will be discussed in detail. This rule declaration will be referred to as the “pool_node” rule declaration.
-
pool_node(zone_id, phys_chassis_id) :- log_zone(_, zone_id, _), stt_connector(zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _), phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(phys_chassis_id), phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id); - In some embodiments, STT stands for stateless transport layer tunneling. Tunneling is encapsulating messages formatted in one communication protocol (i.e., messages having a header of one protocol) with a header of another communication protocol. The messages are encapsulated at one end of a communication link that uses the latter protocol and de-capsulated at another end of the communication link. This form of tunnel is described in U.S. Provisional Patent Applications 61/471,897, 61/479,680, and 61/501,433.
- The “pool_node” rule declaration specifies when the rules engine of a virtualization application should create a pool node. A rules engine can support multiple rule declarations indicating when to create a pool node, but this discussion will be limited to this specific example. The “pool_node” rule declaration can be understood as: “create a pool node in this zone and this chassis if it is known that this chassis in this zone supports STT connectors, has forwarding enabled, is in a valid logical zone, and is connected.” A pool node is a hierarchical switching structure that assists managed switching elements in forwarding packets. A zone is a logical zone containing logical switches, pool nodes, managed switching elements, and extenders. An extender is a hierarchical switching structure that assists pool nodes in forwarding packets to remote locations or unmanaged switching elements. A chassis is a node, an x86 box, a hypervisor, a pool node, or an extender. A node is switch that can forward packets. A pool node, a zone, an extender, a chassis, and a node are described in detail in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Hierarchical Managed Switch Architecture.”
- The head of the “pool_node” rule declaration above reads “pool_node(zone_id, phys_chassis_id)”. The head of the declaration is the action preceding the “:-” symbol. The head indicates that this rule, if it is known that all the clauses of the body are true, will call for the creation of a pool node. The head contains the parameters “zone_id” and “phys_chassis_id”. “Zone_id” corresponds to the logical zone of the pool node that will be created if the conditions of the body of the rule declaration are satisfied. “Chassis_id” corresponds to the machine that will host the pool node that will be created if the conditions of the body of the rule declaration are satisfied. The parameters for the head and the parameters for the body clauses are the same. For example, the “zone_id” parameter in the “pool_node” action in the head of the rule declaration is the same “zone_id” in the “stt_connector” clause in the body of the rule declaration.
- The body of the “pool_node” declaration above is all the clauses following the “:-” symbol. The “pool_node” declaration above contains four clauses: “log_zone”, “stt_connector”, “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled”, and “phys_chassis_connected”. The body clause “log_zone(_, zone_id, _)” tests whether the zone indicated by “zone_id” is a valid logical zone. The underscores before and after “zone_id,” indicate masked parameters that are not relevant to the “pool_node” declaration. The body clause “stt_connector(zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)” tests whether the zone indicated by “zone_id” and the physical chassis indicated by “phys_chassis_id” supports STT tunnels. The underscore after “phys_chassis_id,” indicates a masked parameter that is not relevant to the “pool_node” declaration. The body clause “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(phys_chassis_id)” tests whether the physical chassis indicated by “phys_chassis_id” has forwarding enabled. The body clause “phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id)” tests whether the physical chassis indicated by “phys_chassis_id” is connected to the network. Once compiled, the “pool_node” declaration above will define how the rules engine will react to events corresponding to “log_zone”, “stt_connector”, “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled”, and “phys_chassis_connected”. Based on the C++ code compiled from the “pool_node” rule declaration, the rules engine may order the creation of a new pool node.
- 3. Compiling Rule Declarations
- As discussed above, in some embodiments
nLog rule declarations 1940 are compiled into C++ code using thenLog compiler 1935. ThenLog compiler 1935 produces C++ code that may be executed by therules engine 1925. Therules engine 1925 executes C++ code to map input tables containing logical data path sets and switching element attributes to the output tables containing physical control plane data by performing mapping operations on logical data path sets. Compilation of rule declarations by the nLog compiler takes place at developer time. Execution of compiled rule declarations by the rules engine takes place at run time when the network controller instance is managing the managed switching elements. The nLog compiler reduces the complexity of writing code to define how therules engine 1925 will distribute logical data path sets by allowing the distribution logic to be declared in the higher-level nLog language instead of C++. - In some embodiments, four sets of rule declarations of the form <head>:-<body1>, <body2>, <body3>, <body4> can produce hundreds of lines (e.g., 700 lines) of C++ code once compiled. Each <bodyX> clause is compiled into a query plan defining how the rules engine will handle an event associated with the body clause. The “pool_node” rule declaration above will compile into four query plans, one query plan for each clause in the body of the “pool_node” rule declaration. Each body clause action will serve as an event that is associated with one of the compiled query plans.
- In some embodiments, a query plan defines the operations the rules engine will perform when the rules engine detects an event associated with the query plan. When the rules engine receives an event, the rules engine queries the input tables 1910 based on the query plan or query plans associated with the received event.
- As discussed above, events are network occurrences that have a corresponding query plan in the rules engine in some embodiments. Events indicate that one of the body clauses of the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled is true. Examples of events include a dispatch port being enabled, a physical chassis being connected to the network, or STT tunnel being enabled on a chassis. When such an event occurs, the rules engine computes how logical data path sets and switching element attributes in the input tables will be distributed as physical control plane data in the output tables.
- One event may trigger multiple query plans compiled from multiple rule declarations. For example, the “dispatch_port_req” rule declaration includes a body clause “phys_chassis_connected” and the “pool_node” rule declaration includes a body clause “phys_chassis_connected”. If a rules engine contains the compiled query plans for both the “dispatch_port_req” and “pool_node” rule declarations, and if the rules engine receives an event associated with “phys_chassis_connected”, then the rules engine will execute the query plans for “phys_chassis_connected” compiled from both the “dispatch_port_req” and “pool_node” rule declarations.
- In some embodiments, a query plan consists of N−1 JOIN operations and one SELECTION operation, where N is equal to the number of body clauses in the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled. If a rules engine receives an event associated with a query plan, the query plan will join the input tables 1910 of the N−1 body clauses of the rule declaration from which the query plan was compiled. Then the query plan will select the head action parameters from the joined tables. If the JOIN operations pass an AND test, and the SELECTION operation yields valid values, then the rules engine will execute the head action.
- 4. Compiled “Pool_Node” Query Plan
- The query plans compiled from the “pool_node” rule declaration above will now be discussed as a specific example of a set of query plans. In the discussion below, the rules engine has the query plans compiled from the “pool_node” rule declaration.
- The “pool_node” rule declaration will compile to four query plans. Each of the four query plans consists of three JOIN operations and one SELECTION operation. If the rules engine receives an event corresponding to “log_zone (_, zone_id, _)”, “stt_connector (zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)”, “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled (phys_chassis_id)”, or “phys_chassis_connected (phys_chassis_id)”, then the rules engine will run the associated query plan. A “log_zone (_, zone_id, _)” event occurs when a logical zone is instantiated. An “stt_connector (zone_id, phys_chassis_id, _)” event occurs when STT tunneling is enabled on a physical chassis for a specific zone. A “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled (phys_chassis_id)” event occurs when a physical chassis enables forwarding. A “phys_chassis_connected (phys_chassis_id)” event occurs when a physical chassis is connected to the network. The compiled “phys_chassis_connected (phys_chassis_id)” query plan will now be shown:
-
static void get_plan12(Runner& runner, Runner::Queries* queries) { // global_plan_id: 0x846fd20b1488481b // head: pool_node(V(zone_id), V(phys_chassis_id)) // rank: 2 // event: phys_chassis_connected(V(phys_chassis_id)) // query_plan: // 0) 100000, phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(V(phys_chassis_id)), // Join, mapping: [(0, 0)] new columns: [ ] new mappings: [ ], // drop_columns: [ ], index: phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(0) // 1) 100001, stt_connector(V(zone_id), V(phys_chassis_id), // V(_)), Join, mapping: [(1, 0)] new columns: [u‘zone_id’] new mappings: // [0], drop_columns: [ ], index: stt_connector(1) // 2) 100000, log_zone(V(_), V(zone_id), V(_)), Join, mapping: // [(1, 1)] new columns: [ ] new mappings: [ ], drop_columns: [ ], index: // log_zone(1) // 3) 100000, pool_node(V(zone_id), V(phys_chassis_id)), // Selection, mapping: [(0, 1), (1, 0)] new columns: [ ] new mappings: [ ], // drop_columns: [ ], index: None Operators operators; append_operator(runner, JOIN, 1, ((const int[ ][2]) {{0, 0}}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ][2]) {{−1,−1}}), “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled”, runner.index(“phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled_0”), &operators); append_operator(runner, JOIN, 1, ((const int[ ][2]) {{1, 0}}), 1, ((const int[ ]) {0}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ][2]) {{−1,−1}}), “stt_connector”, runner.index(“stt_connector_1”), &operators); append_operator(runner, JOIN, 1, ((const int[ ][2]) {{1, 1}}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ][2]) {{−1,−1}}), “log_zone”, runner.index(“log_zone_1”), &operators); append_operator(runner, SELECTION, 2, ((const int[ ][2]) {{0, 1},{1, 0}}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ]) {−1}), 0, ((const int[ ][2]) {{−1,−1}}), “pool_node”, NULL, &operators); queries−>push_back(new Query( runner.table(“pool_node”), runner.table(“phys_chassis_connected”), operators, 0x846fd20b1488481b)); } - If a “phys_chassis_connected” event occurs, then the rules engine will access the query plan for “phys_chassis_connected” shown above. The access occurs on the first line where the code says “static void get_plan12(Runner& runner, Runner::Queries* queries)”. In this case, a “phys_chassis_connected” event is associated with “plan12”. The fifth line, “//event: phys_chassis_connected(V(phys_chassis_id))” is a comment that indicates that this plan is associated with the “phys_chassis_connected” event.
- Below the commented portion, the section starting with “Operators operators;” indicates that three JOIN operations and one SELECTION operation will be appended to a runner object. The runner object is indicated to the left of each JOIN or SELECTION operator where the code says “append_operator(runner, JOIN,” or “append_operator(runner, SELECTION,”. After all operations have been appended, the runner object executes the JOIN operations and the SELECTION operation. The lines “queries->push_back(newQuery(runner.table(“pool_node”), runner.table(“phys_chassis_connected”), operators” indicate that the runner object will be pushed as a new query. Execution of the JOIN and SELECTION operations occurs after the runner object has been pushed as a new query.
- The first three operators are JOIN operations on various columns and indices. The fourth operator is a SELECTION operation. The first JOIN operator joins columns [0,0] on the index “phys_chassis_forwarding_enabled(0)”. The second JOIN operator joins columns [1,0] on the index “stt_connector(1)”. The third JOIN operator joins columns [1,1] on the index “log_zone(1)”. The SELECTION operator selects columns [01],[1,0] on no index. This query plan will be executed in the rules engine of the virtualization application processes notification from a network operating system. During execution the rules engine will access the input tables 1910 to retrieve the information necessary to perform the JOIN and SELECTION operations as described above.
- 5. Rules Engine Execution Of “Pool_Node” Query Plan
- In order to illustrate the operation of the rules engine, a specific example of an execution of a query plan will now be discussed using the “phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id)” query plan shown above. The execution process begins when the
event processor 1922 receives notification of a physical chassis being connected. Upon notification of a physical chassis being connected, theevent processor 1922 looks up the query plans 1927 associated with a physical chassis being connected. In some embodiments, multiple query plans may exist for a single event and those multiple query plans would all be executed. In this case, only a single query plan “phys_chassis_connected(phys_chassis_id)” will be found. Theevent processor 1922 then executes the query plan. The process begins with appending JOIN operators and SELECT operators to a runner object. This can be seen in the code above where the code has 3 “append_operator(runner, JOIN,” blocks followed by a “append_operator(runner,SELECTION” block. Theevent processor 1922 executes each operation in the order in which it was appended to the runner object. The JOIN operations will perform inner join operations on the input tables 1910 associated with the body clauses on predicates based on the values shown in each “append_operator(runner, JOIN,” code block. The SELECTION operator will select on columns to retrieve a result set, if any, based on the values shown in the “append_operator(runner,SELECTION” code block. - Once all operators of a query plan are appended to the runner object, the
event processor 1922 sends the runner object to thetable processor 1930 to execute the operations appended to the runner object. The JOIN and SELECTION operations take place on data tuples in the input tables 1910, and in some embodiments, on function and constant tables 1915 that are not contained in the input tables 1910. If the JOIN and SELECTION operations are successful, then thetable processor 1930 will return a “phys_chassis_id” and a “zone_id” to theevent processor 1922 to be used in creating a new pool node. If any of the JOIN and SELECTION operations fail, then a NULL result will be returned in all parameters and the operations terminated in some embodiments. A NULL result in any parameter will result in a failure of the query plan. Upon successful return of parameters “phys_chassis_id” and “zone_id”, theevent processor 1922 will submit the parameters to the input tables 1910 as output entries. - 6. Input Tables
- As discussed above, input tables 1910 contain information that the rules engine maps to the output tables as physical control plane data. In some embodiments, the information contained in the input tables 1910 includes: logical data path sets, data corresponding to external events, and supplemental network data used by the rules engine during computation of the distribution of logical data path sets. The input tables 1910 receive notifications from the network operating system regarding state changes in the network. The input tables 1910 also translate those notifications from the network operating system into data tuples and events to be used by the rules engine to compute how to distribute input table information across the output tables.
- In some embodiments, input tables 1910 share a basic set of methods and attributes. The basic set of attributes includes: an entity input table, an export interface, and an export registry for the export interface. The basic set of methods includes: methods for accessing the export registry through the export interface, input table instantiation functions, and registration and un-registration methods for the namesake entity of the input table class. E.g., the physical forwarding engine input table class has methods for registering and un-registering physical forwarding engines.
- In some embodiments, input tables 1910 are programmatic objects stored as a database in computer memory that correspond to types of logical and physical network elements. Examples of input table classes include: physical forwarding engine input tables, logical forwarding engine input tables, logical port input tables, and physical port input tables.
- 7. Physical Forwarding Engine Input Table
- The physical forwarding engine input table class stores data tuples regarding physical forwarding engines that the rules engine uses in performing mapping operations. In some embodiments, physical forwarding engine input tables store data tuples corresponding to physical switches, software switches, and virtual switches. To illustrate the operation of the input tables 1910, the physical forwarding engine input table class will be discussed in detail as an example. The physical forwarding engine input table class contains the following member classes: entity input table and forwarding engine export interface. The physical forwarding engine input table class contains the following attributes: a name, an export registry for the export interface, and a network ID. The entity input table receives entity data from the NIB and uses the export interface to load the export registry with data received from the NIB through the
NIB monitor 1950. The entity input table also alerts the rules engine of changes to the data tuples in the input tables 1910. The export registry contains data tuples to be used by the rules engine. The entity input table is defined as an attribute of the class PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable: -
class PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable : public EntityInputTable, public ForwardingEngineExportInterface { public:PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable( const std::string& name, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* fe_reg, const NetworkId& physical_network); void start( ); ... - The entity input table is implemented in physical_forwarding_engine_input_table.cc:
-
PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable:: PhysicalForwardingEngineInputTable( const std::string& name, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* fe_registry, const NetworkId& physical_network) : EntityInputTable(name), fe_registry_(fe_registry), physical_network_id_(physical_network) { } ... - The entity input table receives notifications and data tuples from the
NIB monitor 1950. The entity input table uses the export interface to load the export registry with data tuples received from the NIB monitor as shown above. For example, if the NIB monitor 1950 sends a notification that a forwarding engine has a new port, then the entity input table will use the “PortAdd” export interface method to add a port to the export registry. - The export interface defines the methods of changing the values of the data in the export registry. These methods include: register forwarding engine, un-register forwarding engine, change in connection state of forwarding engine, data path change, address add, address remove, port add, port remove, forwarding table add, forwarding table remove, forwarding engine bind, forwarding engine unbind, transmit buffer, transmit packet, receive buffer, and receive packet. The export registry contains the data associated with the export interface.
- The forwarding engine input table class further includes functions to instantiate a physical forwarding input table object's export registry, start a physical forwarding input table object, register a forwarding engine, and unregister a forwarding engine.
- Returning to the “PortAdd” example above, after the entity input table has used the export interface to load the export registry with a new port, the entity input table notifies the rules engine of the new port. The rules engine handles this notification by looking up a query plan to handle a “PortAdd” event. If a rule declaration has been compiled into a query plan to handle “PortAdd”, then the rules engine will execute the associated query plan or plans. However, in some embodiments, not all changes to the input table export registry will have an associated query plan in the rules engine. For example, if the rules engine developer did not provide a rule declaration for handling “PortAdd”, then the rules engine would not respond to notification of a “PortAdd” event.
- 8. Physical Forwarding Engine Output Table
- As discussed above, the output tables 1945 store data tuples to be distributed across the NIB. In some embodiments, the output tables 1945 also reconcile differences between the output tables 1945 and the NIB by re-pushing state information to the NIB when the NIB does not match data in the output tables 1945. For example, if a pool node creation was pushed to the NIB by the output tables 1945, and the pool node creation failed, then the output tables 1945 would push the pool node creation again. In some embodiments, the output tables 1945 also register the input tables 1910 and the output tables 1945 for notification of state changes in the NIB.
- To illustrate the operation of the output tables 1945, the physical forwarding engine output table class will be discussed in detail as an example. The physical forwarding engine output table class stores data tuples regarding physical forwarding engines to be distributed across the NIB. The physical forwarding engine output table class “PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable” can export data tuples for the following forwarding engines: forwarding engine chassis, forwarding nodes, and forwarding engines. The physical forwarding engine output table class contains the following member classes: external output table (“public ExternalOutputTable”), chassis export interface (“public ChassisExportInterface”), node export interface (“public NodeExportInterface”), Forwarding Engine export interface (“ForwardingEngineExportInterface”), and attribute reference manager (“AttributeRefManager”). The physical forwarding engine output table class contains the following attributes: table name (“table_name”), engine name (“engine_name”), NIB (“NIB* nib”), chassis export registry (“ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry”), node export registry (“NodeExportRegistry* node_registry”), Forwarding Engine export registry (“ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry”), network ID (“const NetworkId& physical_network”), controller ID (“const UUID& controller_id”), and an OpenFlow configuration exporter to Open Virtual Switch databases (“OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter”).
- In order to elucidate the member classes and attributes of the physical forwarding engine output table class, an example of a physical forwarding engine output table object will be described below in conjunction with its code:
-
class PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable : public ExternalOutputTable<EntityId, ForwardingEngine>, public ChassisExportInterface, public NodeExportInterface, public ForwardingEngineExportInterface, public AttributeRefManager<ForwardingEngine> { public: PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable(const std::string& table_name, const std::string& engine_name, NIB* nib, ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry, NodeExportRegistry* node_registry, ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry, const NetworkId& physical_network, const UUID& controller_id, OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter); void start( ); - The attributes of the physical forwarding engine output table class define a physical forwarding engine output table object. The physical forwarding engine output table object pushes state changes to objects in the NIB according to the output of the rules engine. The physical forwarding engine output table object is further for monitoring the NIB for inconsistencies with the output of the rules engine.
- The attributes that define a physical forwarding engine output table object can be seen above below “PhysicalForwardingEngineOutputTable”. The table name (“table_name”) defines the name of the object in order to identify the table. The engine name (“engine_name”) defines which physical forwarding engine in the output table object is to be populated by the object. The NIB pointer (“NIB* nib”) defines what NIB the object will export data tuples to. In some embodiments, there are multiple NIBs.
- The export registry pointers are pointers to registry objects to the NIB identified by the NIB pointer. The pointers serve as a means to pass NIB state data back to the physical forwarding engine output table object. When the output of the rules engine does not match the NIB state data in the export registries, the physical forwarding engine output table object will push the output of the rules engine down to the NIB to correct the inconsistency. The physical forwarding engine output table object is notified of changes to NIB state using events as described above. In this manner, the physical forwarding engine output table object enforces the physical network configuration defined by the output of the rules engine.
- The chassis export registry pointer (“ChassisExportRegistry* chassis_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains data tuples for physical chassis. In some embodiments, changes in the operational status of a chassis constitute an event for the chassis export registry. The node export registry pointer (“NodeExportRegistry* node_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains data tuples for nodes. The Forwarding Engine export registry pointer (“ForwardingEngineExportRegistry* engine_registry”) points to a NIB object that contains the data tuples the object stores for forwarding engines. In some embodiments, changes in the state of the forwarding engines constitute events for the Forwarding Engine export registry.
- The network ID (“const NetworkId& physical_network”) defines the identity of a group of physical network items in the NIB that is relevant to the physical forwarding engine output table object. In some embodiments, the group of items relevant to the physical forwarding engine output table object is the entirety of the physical forwarding elements of the network. In some embodiments of the NIB, the NIB stores network IDs that identify groups of logical forwarding elements.
- The controller ID (“const UUID& controller_id”) defines what controller instance the object is exporting from. In some embodiments, controller instances are grouped into clusters to pool processing power. In those embodiments, the controller ID identifies which controller in the controller cluster has made changes to NIB data. The OpenFlow configuration exporter pointer (“OFConfigExportOVSDB* exporter”) points to the OVS database exporter object in the NIB that the exports NIB state data to network elements.
- The object's member classes serve as the object's means of receiving information from the NIB, storing the information in the object's registries, and sending data tuples to the output tables. The attribute reference manager (“AttributeRefManager”) receives information from the NIB and writes data tuples to the export registries using the export interfaces. The export interfaces (“ChassisExportInterface”, “NodeExportInterface”, and “ForwardingEngineExportInterface”) provide interfaces to allow the registries to be written to by the attribute reference manager. The external output table (“ExternalOutputTable”) sends data tuples to the output tables from the export registries using the exporter handle described above. The export interfaces are shown in this code sample:
-
// ChassisExportInterface implementation. void Register(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&) { } void Unregister(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&) { } void ConnectionStateChange(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&, const Chassis::ConnectionState&) { } void AddressAdd(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&, const Address&) { } void AddressRemove(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&, const Address&) { } void ForwardingEngineAdd(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&, const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&); void ForwardingEngineRemove(const EntityPtr<Chassis>&, const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&); // NodeExportInterface implementation. void Register(const EntityPtr<Node>&) { } void Unregister(const EntityPtr<Node>&) { } void AddressAdd(const EntityPtr<Node>&, const Address&) { } void AddressRemove(const EntityPtr<Node>&, const Address&) { } void PortAdd(const EntityPtr<Node>&, const EntityPtr<Port>&) { } void PortRemove(const EntityPtr<Node>&, const EntityPtr<Port>&) { } void UpdateStatistics(const EntityPtr<Node>&) { } void StatisticsUpdated(const EntityPtr<Node>&) { } void NameChange(const EntityPtr<Node>&, const std::string&); // ForwardingEngineExportInterface implementation void Register(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&); void Unregister(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&); void SubtypeChange(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&, const NetEntity::TypeIdParamType) { } void NameChange(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&,const std::string&) { } void NetworkUUIDsChange(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&, const std::string&) { } void BridgeIDChange(const EntityPtr<ForwardingEngine>&, const std::string&) { } - There are three types of export interfaces. The export interfaces types include a physical forwarding chassis interface, a physical forwarding nodes interface, and a Forwarding Engine interface. The physical forwarding chassis interface consists of functions for changing the state of forwarding chassis in the output tables. The physical forwarding nodes interface consists of functions for changing the state of physical forwarding nodes in the output tables. In some embodiments, physical forwarding chassis and physical forwarding nodes include: x86 boxes, hypervisor boxes, hosts, pool nodes, extenders, and transport nodes. The Forwarding Engine interface consists of functions for changing the state of forwarding engines in the output tables. In some embodiments, forwarding engines (i.e., forwarding elements) include: physical switches, software switches, and virtual switches. The export interfaces provide a means of setting export registry data. The export interfaces support methods such as “register”, “unregister”, “AddressAdd” and “NameChange”. After data tuples are added to the export registries through the export interfaces, the external output table brings in said data tuples. The external output table's implementation can be seen in this code snippet:
-
// Implementations for the abstract methods of the ExternalOutputTable. Tuple key(const Tuple& tuple); key_type create(const Tuple& value, bool& error); key_type modify(const key_type& id, const Tuple& value, bool& error); bool destroy(const key_type& id); void check_validity(const key_type& id); - As shown above, the external output table entries can be created, modified, destroyed, or checked the validity of. The output tables receive information from the NIB through the attribute reference manager. The attribute reference manager stores that information as data tuples in the export registries using the export interfaces, and the data tuples from the NIB is pushed to the external output table.
- As mentioned above, the control application of some embodiments converts control data records (also called data tuples) to forwarding plane data records (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) by performing conversion operations. Specifically, in some embodiments, the control application populates the logical data path tables (e.g., the logical forwarding tables) that are created by the virtualization application with logical data path sets.
-
FIG. 28 conceptually illustrates an example of such conversion operations that an instance of a control application of some embodiments performs. This figure conceptually illustrates aprocess 2800 that the control application performs to generate logical forwarding plane data based on input event data that specifies the logical control plane data. As described above, the generated logical forwarding plane data is transmitted to the virtualization application, which subsequently generate physical control plane data from the logical forwarding plane data. The physical control plane data is propagated to the managed switching elements, which in turn will produce forwarding plane data (e.g., flow entries) for defining forwarding behaviors of the switches. - As shown in
FIG. 28 , theprocess 2800 initially receives (at 2805) data regarding an input event. The input event data may be logical data supplied by the user in some embodiments. As described in the above-identified U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, entitled “Network Control Apparatus and Method,” some embodiments provide the user with an interface that the user can use to specify input event data. An example of user-supplied data could be logical control plane data including access control list data for a logical switch that the user manages. The input event data may also be logical forwarding plane data that the control application generates in some embodiments from the logical control plane data. The input event data in some embodiments may also be physical forwarding plane data or physical control plane data received from the NIB. In some embodiments, theprocess 2800 receives the physical forwarding data from a NIB monitor that monitors the NIB to detect a change in the NIB that reflects a change in one or more managed switching elements. - At 2810, the
process 2800 then performs a filtering operation to determine whether this instance of the control application is responsible for the input event data. As described above, several instances of the control application may operate in parallel to control multiple sets of logical data paths in some embodiments. In these embodiments, each control application uses the filtering operation to filter out input data that does not relate to the control application's logical data path set. To perform this filtering operation, the control application of some embodiments includes a filter module. This module in some embodiments is a standalone module, while in other embodiments it is implemented by a table mapping engine (e.g., implemented by the join operations performed by the table mapping engine) that maps records between input tables and output tables of the virtualization application, as further described below. - Next, at 2815, the process determines whether the filtering operation has filtered out the input event data. The filtering operation filters out the input event data in some embodiments when the input event data does not fall within one of the logical data path sets that are the responsibility of the control application. When the process determines (at 2815) that the filtering operation has filtered out the input event data, the process ends. Otherwise, the
process 2800 transitions to 2820. - At 2820, a converter of the virtualization application generates one or more sets of data tuples based on the received input event data. In some embodiments, the converter is a table mapping engine that performs a series of table mapping operations on the input event data to map the input event data to other data tuples. As mentioned above, this table mapping engine also performs the filtering operation in some embodiments. One example of such a table mapping engine is an nLog table-mapping engine which will be described bellow.
- In some embodiments, the data tuples that the
process 2800 generates may include data (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) that the process has to push down to the NIB. Accordingly, at 2825, the process publishes to the NIB any data tuples that it has generated if such publication is necessary. After 2825, the process ends. - The control application in some embodiments performs its mapping operations by using the nLog table mapping engine, which, as described above, is a variation of the datalog table mapping technique.
FIG. 29 illustrates acontrol application 2900 of some embodiments of the invention. Thisapplication 2900 uses an nLog table mapping engine to map input tables that contain input data tuples to LDPS data tuples. This application resides on top of a virtualization application 2905 that receives the LDPS data tuples from thecontrol application 2900. The virtualization application 2905 maps the LDPS data tuples to data tuples for defining managed switching elements, attributes of the managed switching elements, and flow entries for the managed switching elements. The virtual application 2905 resides on top of aNOS 2965 that contains aNIB 2960 that stores the data tuples generated by the virtualization application 2905. - More specifically, the
control application 2900 allows different users to define different logical data path sets (LDPS), which specify the desired switching configurations of the users. Thecontrol application 2900 also reacts to changes in the NIB to modify the LDPS′. The virtualization application 2905 through its mapping operations converts each of the LDPS of each user into a set of data tuples to populate to the NIB. The virtualization application 2905 then populates theNIB 2960 with the generated sets of data tuples. When theNOS 2965 subsequently propagates the NIB data tuples for a particular user to the switching element(s), the NOS completes the deployment of the user's switching configuration to one or more switching elements. In some embodiments, the control application is executed on the same machine with the virtualization application and the NOS. However, the control application, the virtualization application, and the NOS do not have to run on the same machine in other embodiments. That is, one of these applications or each of these applications may run on a different computer. - As shown in
FIG. 29 , thecontrol application 2900 includes a set of rule-engine input tables 2910, a set of function and constant tables 2915, aquery manager 2920, arules engine 2925, a set of rule-engine output tables 2945, aNIB monitor 2950, apublisher 2955, and acompiler 2935. Thecompiler 2935 is one component of the application that operates at a different instance in time than the application's other components. The compiler operates when a developer needs to specify the rules engine for a particular control application and/or virtualized environment, whereas the rest of the application's modules operate at run time when the application interfaces with the control application and the NOS to deploy and monitor logical data path sets specified by one or more users. - In some embodiments, the
compiler 2935 takes a relatively small set (e.g., few hundred lines) ofdeclarative instructions 2940 that are specified in a declarative language and converts these into a large set (e.g., thousands of lines) of code that specify the operation of therules engine 2925, which performs the application's table mapping. As such, the compiler greatly simplifies the control application developer's process of defining and updating the control application. This is because the compiler allows the developer to use a high level programming language that allows a compact definition of the control application's complex mapping operation and to subsequently update this mapping operation in response to any number of changes (e.g., changes in the logical networking functions supported by the control application, changes to desired behavior of the control application, etc.). - In some embodiments, the rule-engine (RE) input tables 2910 include tables with logical data and/or switching configurations (e.g., access control list configurations, private virtual network configurations, port security configurations, etc.) specified by the user and/or the control application. They also include in some embodiments tables that contain physical data (i.e., non-logical data) from the switching elements managed by the virtualized control system. In some embodiments, such physical data includes data regarding the managed switching elements (e.g., physical control plane data) and other data regarding network configuration employed by the virtualized control system to deploy the different LDPS′ of the different users.
- The RE input tables 2910 are partially populated by the LDPS data (e.g., logical control plane data) provided by the user. It also generates part of the LDPS data (e.g., logical forwarding plane data) and physical (i.e., non-logical) data (e.g., physical control plane data) by monitoring the NIB to identify changes in the managed switching element infrastructure that would require modification to the LDPS data and/or the physical data.
- In addition to the RE input tables 2910, the
control application 2900 includes other miscellaneous tables 2915 that therules engine 2925 uses to gather inputs for its table mapping operations. These tables 2915 include constant tables that store defined values for constants that therules engine 2925 needs to perform its table mapping operations. - When the
rules engine 2925 references constants, the corresponding value defined for the constants are actually retrieved and used. In addition, the values defined for constants in the constant table 2915 may be modified and/or updated. In this manner, the constant table 2915 provides the ability to modify the value defined for constants that therules engine 2925 references without the need to rewrite or recompile code that specifies the operation of therules engine 2925. - The tables 2915 further include function tables that store functions that the
rules engine 2925 needs to use to calculate values needed to populate the output tables 2945. One example of such a function is a hash function that the rules engine uses to compute hash values for distributing distributed hash table (DHT) operations as well as load balancing traffic between lower level switches and higher level switches in a hierarchical switching architecture. - The
rules engine 2925 performs table mapping operations that specify one manner for converting any logical data path set within the logical control plane to a logical data path set in the logical forwarding plane. Whenever one of the rule-engine (RE) input tables is modified, the rules engine performs a set of table mapping operations that may result in the modification of one or more data tuples in one or more RE output tables. The modification of the output table data tuples, in turn, through the virtualization application 2905, may cause the NIB to be modified in order to establish and/or modify the implementation of a particular user's LDPS in the managed switching element infrastructure. - As shown in
FIG. 29 , therules engine 2925 includes anevent processor 2922, several query plans 2927, and atable processor 2930. Each query plan is a set of rules that specify a set of join operations that are to be performed upon the occurrence of a modification to one of the RE input table. Such a modification is referred to below as an input table event. As described above, each query plan is generated by thecompiler 2935 from one declaratory rule in the set ofdeclarations 2940. In some embodiments, the query plans are defined by using the nLog declaratory language. - In some embodiments, the
compiler 2935 does not just statically generate query plans but rather dynamically generates query plans based on performance data it gathers. Thecomplier 2935 in these embodiments generates an initial set of query plans and let the rules engine operate with the initial set of query plans. The control application gathers the performance data or receives performance feedbacks (e.g., from the rules engine). Based on this data, the compiler is modified so that the control application or a user of this application can have the modified compiler modify the query plans while the rules engine is not operating or during the operation of the rules engine. - For instance, the order of the join operations in a query plan may result in different execution times depending on the number of tables the rules engine has to select to perform each join operation. The compiler in these embodiments can be re-specified in order to re-order the join operations in a particular query plan when a certain order of the join operations in the particular query plan has resulted in a long execution time to perform the join operations.
- The
event processor 2922 of therules engine 2925 detects the occurrence of each input table event. The event processor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of an input table event differently. In some embodiments, the event processor registers for callbacks with the RE input tables for notification of changes to the records of the RE input tables. In such embodiments, theevent processor 2922 detects an input table event when it receives notification from a RE input table that one of its records has changed. - In response to a detected input table event, the event processor 2922 (1) selects the appropriate query plan for the detected table event, and (2) directs the
table processor 2930 to execute the query plan. To execute the query plan, thetable processor 2930 in some embodiments performs the join operations specified by the query plan to produce one or more records that represent one or more sets of data values from one or more input and miscellaneous tables 2910 and 2915. Thetable processor 2930 of some embodiments then (1) performs a select operation to select a subset of the data values from the record(s) produced by the join operations, and (2) writes the selected subset of data values in one or more RE output tables 2945. - In some embodiments, the RE output tables 2945 store both logical and physical network element data attributes. The tables 2945 are called RE output tables as they store the output of the table mapping operations of the
rules engine 2925. In some embodiments, the RE output tables can be grouped in several different categories. For instance, in some embodiments, these tables can be RE input tables and/or control-application (CA) output tables. A table is a RE input table when a change in the table causes the rules engine to detect an input event that requires the execution of a query plan. A RE output table 2945 can also be a RE input table 2910 that generates an event that causes the rules engine to perform another query plan. Such an event is referred to as an internal input event, and it is to be contrasted with an external input event, which is an event that is caused by a RE input table modification made by thecontrol application 2900 or theNIB monitor 2950. - A table is a control-application output table when a change in the table causes the
publisher 2955 to publish a change to the virtualization application 2905 and/or to the NIB, as further described below. A table in the RE output tables 2945 can be a RE input table, a CA output table, or both a RE input table and a CA output table. - The
publisher 2955 detects changes to the CA output tables of the RE output tables 2945. The publisher of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a CA output table event differently. In some embodiments, the publisher registers for callbacks with the CA output tables for notification of changes to the records of the CA output tables. In such embodiments, thepublisher 2955 detects an output table event when it receives notification from a CA output table that one of its records has changed. - In response to a detected output table event, the
publisher 2955 takes some or all of modified data tuples in the modified CA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple(s) to the input tables (not shown) of the virtualization application 2905. In some embodiments, instead of thepublisher 2955 pushing the data tuples to the virtualization application, the virtualization application 2905 pulls the data tuples from the CA output tables 2945 into the input tables of the virtualization application. Alternatively, in some embodiments, thepublisher 2955 publishes changes to the modified CA output tables to the NIB, and the virtualization application 2905 retrieves these changes from the NIB and based on them, modifies its input tables. In some embodiments, the CA output tables 2945 of thecontrol application 2900 and the input tables of the virtualization 2905 may be identical. In yet other embodiments, the control and virtualization applications use one set of tables, so that the CA output tables are essentially VA input tables. - Moreover, the
publisher 2955 in some embodiments takes some or all of modified data tuples in the modified CA output tables and propagates this modified data tuple into theNIB 2960 through the APIs provided by theNOS 2965. Also, the publisher may push down logical data (e.g., logical control plane data, logical forwarding plane data, etc.) processed and maintained by thecontrol application 2900 to theNIB 2960. This is because, in some embodiments, theNIB 2960 serves as a medium for all communications between the control application, the virtualization application, and the NOS of different controller instances as described above. - As the CA output tables store both logical and physical network element data attributes in some embodiments, the
NIB 2960 in some embodiments stores both logical and physical network element attributes that are identical or derived by the virtualization application 2905 from the logical and physical network element data attributes in the output tables 2945. In other embodiments, however, the NIB only stores physical network element attributes that are identical or derived by the virtualization application 2905 from the physical network element data attributes in the output tables 2945. - The NIB monitor 2950 interfaces with the
NIB 2960 to receive notifications regarding changes to the NIB. The NIB monitor of different embodiments detects the occurrence of a change in the NIB differently. In some embodiments, the NIB monitor registers for callbacks with the NIB for notification of changes to one or more records in the NIB. In such embodiments, the NIB monitor 2950 detects NIB change event when it receives notification from the NIB that one of its records has changed. In response to a detected NIB change event, the NIB monitor 2950 may modify one or more RE input tables 2910, which, in turn, may cause one or more RE input table event to occur that then initiates the execution of one or more query plans by the rules engine. In other words, the NIB monitor writes some or all of the information that it receives from the NIB into the input tables 2910, so that the state and configuration of the managed switching elements can be accounted for while generating the NIB data tuples through the mapping operations. Each time the managed switching configuration or underlying managed switching element state changes, the NIB monitor 2950 may update theinput table records 2910 so that the generated NIB data tuples can be updated to reflect the modified switching configuration or underlying switching element state. - In some embodiments, the NIB monitor 2950 is a collection of input objects (or functions) associated with the RE input tables. Each input object in some embodiments is associated with one RE input table and is responsible for modifying its associated RE input table in response to a change in the NIB. Each input object in some embodiments registers with one or more NIB objects for callback notifications upon the occurrence of changes to the NIB object(s). Similarly, in some embodiments, the
publisher 2955 is a collection of output objects (or functions) associated with the CA output tables. Each output object in some embodiments is associated with one CA output table and is responsible for propagating changes in its associated output table to the virtualization application 2905. As such, in some embodiments, the NIB monitor is a conceptual representation of the input and output objects that register with the NIB for callbacks. - The
query manager 2920 interfaces with thecontrol application 2900 to receive queries regarding LDPS data. As shown inFIG. 29 , thequery manager 2920 of some embodiments also interfaces with theNIB 2960 in order to query the NIB to provide the control application state information regarding the network elements in the LDPS′ for the different user. In other embodiments, however, thequery manager 2920 queries the output tables 2945 to obtain LDPS data for the control application. -
FIG. 30 illustrates a simplified view of the table mapping operations of the control and virtualization applications of some embodiments of the invention. As indicated in the top half of this figure, thecontrol application 3005 maps logical control plane data to logical forwarding plane data, which thevirtualization application 3010 then maps to physical control plane data. The bottom half of this figure illustrates the table mapping operations of the control application and the virtualization application. As shown in this half, the control application's input tables 3015 store logical control plane (LCP) data, logical forwarding plane (LFP) data and physical control plane (PCP) data, as the collection of all these data along with data in the constant and function tables (not shown) is used by the control application'snLog engine 3020 in some embodiments to generate logical forwarding plane data from the input logical control plane data. - This figure further shows the
NIB publisher 3030 receiving some or all of the input table records and publishing these records to theNIB 3040. As further shown, the NIB monitor 3050 receives NIB change notifications (e.g., notifications of managed switch changes detected by the NOS or notification of NIB changes pushed by the other controller instances) in some embodiments and in response to such notifications it may update input and output tables 3015 and 3025 of the control application. In some embodiments, the NIB monitor 3050 may write LCP, LFP, or PCP data to the input tables 3015 in response to NIB modification notifications. - The bottom half of
FIG. 30 also illustrates the table mapping operations of thevirtualization application 3010. As shown, the virtualization application's input tables 3055 store logical forwarding plane data and physical control plane data, as the collection of all these data along with data in the constant and function tables (not shown) is used by the virtualization application'snLog engine 3060 in some embodiments to generate physical control plane data from the input logical forwarding plane data. - This figure further shows the
NIB publisher 3070 receiving some or all of the input table records and publishing these records to theNIB 3040. As further shown, the NIB monitor 3075 receives NIB change notifications in some embodiments and in response to such notifications it may update input and output tables 3055 and 3065 of the virtualization application. In some embodiments, the NIB monitor 3075 may write LFP or PCP data to the input tables 3055 in response to NIB modification notifications. - As mentioned above, some of the logical or physical data that a NIB monitor pushes to the input tables of the control or virtualization application relates to data that is generated by other controller instances and passed to the NIB monitor's particular NIB (e.g., through the secondary storage layer). For instance, in some embodiments, the logical data regarding logical constructs that relates to multiple LDPS′ might change, and the NIB monitor may write this change to the input tables. Another example of such logical data that is produced by another controller instance in a multi controller instance environment occurs when a user provides logical control plane data for a LDPS on a first controller instance that is not responsible for the LDPS. This change requests is added to the NIB request list (such as the
NIB request list 1560 described above by reference toFIG. 15 ) of the first controller instance. This request list is then propagated across the NIBs of other controller instances by replication processes described above. The NOS of a second controller instance, which is the master of the LDPS, eventually makes the change to the NIB of the second controller instance based on the propagated request list. The NIB monitor of the second controller instance then writes the change to the one of the application's input tables (e.g., the control application's input table). Accordingly, in such cases, the logical data that the NIB monitor writes to the input tables in some cases may originate from the NIB of another controller instance. - As mentioned above, the
control application 3005 and thevirtualization application 3010 are two separate applications that operate on the same machine or different machines in some embodiments. Other embodiments, however, implement these two applications as two modules of one integrated application, with thecontrol application module 3005 generating LDPS in the logical forwarding plane and the virtualization application generating physical data path sets in the physical control plane. - Still other embodiments integrate the control and virtualization operations of these two applications within one integrated application, without separating these operations into two separate modules.
FIG. 31 illustrates an example of such anintegrated application 3105. Thisapplication 3105 uses an nLogtable mapping engine 3110 to map data from an input set of tables 3115 to an output set of tables 3120, which like the above described embodiments, may include one or more tables in the input set of tables. The input set of tables in this integrated application may include LCP data that need to be mapped to LFP data, or it may include LFP data that need to be mapped to PCP data. - In this integrated control and
virtualization application 3105, aNIB publisher 3125 publishes input table records and output table records to theNIB 3135. A NIB monitor 3130 then receives notification of changes from the NIB 3135 (e.g., managed switch changes detected by the NOS or NIB changes pushed by the other controller instances), and for some notifications (e.g., those relating to the LDPS′ for which the application is the master), pushes changes to the input and/or tables 3115 and 3120. - Many of the above-described features and applications are implemented as software processes that are specified as a set of instructions recorded on a computer readable storage medium (also referred to as computer readable medium). When these instructions are executed by one or more processing unit(s) (e.g., one or more processors, cores of processors, or other processing units), they cause the processing unit(s) to perform the actions indicated in the instructions. Examples of computer readable media include, but are not limited to, CD-ROMs, flash drives, RAM chips, hard drives, EPROMs, etc. The computer readable media does not include carrier waves and electronic signals passing wirelessly or over wired connections.
- In this specification, the term “software” is meant to include firmware residing in read-only memory or applications stored in magnetic storage, which can be read into memory for processing by a processor. Also, in some embodiments, multiple software inventions can be implemented as sub-parts of a larger program while remaining distinct software inventions. In some embodiments, multiple software inventions can also be implemented as separate programs. Finally, any combination of separate programs that together implement a software invention described here is within the scope of the invention. In some embodiments, the software programs, when installed to operate on one or more electronic systems, define one or more specific machine implementations that execute and perform the operations of the software programs.
-
FIG. 32 conceptually illustrates anelectronic system 3200 with which some embodiments of the invention are implemented. Theelectronic system 3200 can be used to execute any of the control, virtualization, or operating system applications described above. Theelectronic system 3200 may be a computer (e.g., a desktop computer, personal computer, tablet computer, server computer, mainframe, a blade computer etc.), phone, PDA, or any other sort of electronic device. Such an electronic system includes various types of computer readable media and interfaces for various other types of computer readable media.Electronic system 3200 includes abus 3205, processing unit(s) 3210, asystem memory 3225, a read-only memory 3230, apermanent storage device 3235,input devices 3240, andoutput devices 3245. - The
bus 3205 collectively represents all system, peripheral, and chipset buses that communicatively connect the numerous internal devices of theelectronic system 3200. For instance, thebus 3205 communicatively connects the processing unit(s) 3210 with the read-only memory 3230, thesystem memory 3225, and thepermanent storage device 3235. - From these various memory units, the processing unit(s) 3210 retrieve instructions to execute and data to process in order to execute the processes of the invention. The processing unit(s) may be a single processor or a multi-core processor in different embodiments.
- The read-only-memory (ROM) 3230 stores static data and instructions that are needed by the processing unit(s) 3210 and other modules of the electronic system. The
permanent storage device 3235, on the other hand, is a read-and-write memory device. This device is a non-volatile memory unit that stores instructions and data even when theelectronic system 3200 is off. Some embodiments of the invention use a mass-storage device (such as a magnetic or optical disk and its corresponding disk drive) as thepermanent storage device 3235. - Other embodiments use a removable storage device (such as a floppy disk, flash drive, etc.) as the permanent storage device. Like the
permanent storage device 3235, thesystem memory 3225 is a read-and-write memory device. However, unlikestorage device 3235, the system memory is a volatile read-and-write memory, such a random access memory. The system memory stores some of the instructions and data that the processor needs at runtime. In some embodiments, the invention's processes are stored in thesystem memory 3225, thepermanent storage device 3235, and/or the read-only memory 3230. For example, the various memory units include instructions for implementing the processes in accordance with some embodiments. From these various memory units, the processing unit(s) 3210 retrieve instructions to execute and data to process in order to execute the processes of some embodiments. - The
bus 3205 also connects to the input andoutput devices input devices 3240 include alphanumeric keyboards and pointing devices (also called “cursor control devices”). Theoutput devices 3245 display images generated by the electronic system. The output devices include printers and display devices, such as cathode ray tubes (CRT) or liquid crystal displays (LCD). Some embodiments include devices such as a touchscreen that function as both input and output devices. - Finally, as shown in
FIG. 32 ,bus 3205 also coupleselectronic system 3200 to anetwork 3265 through a network adapter (not shown). In this manner, the computer can be a part of a network of computers (such as a local area network (“LAN”), a wide area network (“WAN”), or an Intranet, or a network of networks, such as the Internet. Any or all components ofelectronic system 3200 may be used in conjunction with the invention. - Some embodiments include electronic components, such as microprocessors, storage and memory that store computer program instructions in a machine-readable or computer-readable medium (alternatively referred to as computer-readable storage media, machine-readable media, or machine-readable storage media). Some examples of such computer-readable media include RAM, ROM, read-only compact discs (CD-ROM), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), read-only digital versatile discs (e.g., DVD-ROM, dual-layer DVD-ROM), a variety of recordable/rewritable DVDs (e.g., DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, etc.), flash memory (e.g., SD cards, mini-SD cards, micro-SD cards, etc.), magnetic and/or solid state hard drives, read-only and recordable Blu-Ray® discs, ultra density optical discs, any other optical or magnetic media, and floppy disks. The computer-readable media may store a computer program that is executable by at least one processing unit and includes sets of instructions for performing various operations. Examples of computer programs or computer code include machine code, such as is produced by a compiler, and files including higher-level code that are executed by a computer, an electronic component, or a microprocessor using an interpreter.
- While the above discussion primarily refers to microprocessor or multi-core processors that execute software, some embodiments are performed by one or more integrated circuits, such as application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) or field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs). In some embodiments, such integrated circuits execute instructions that are stored on the circuit itself.
- As used in this specification, the terms “computer”, “server”, “processor”, and “memory” all refer to electronic or other technological devices. These terms exclude people or groups of people. For the purposes of the specification, the terms display or displaying means displaying on an electronic device. As used in this specification, the terms “computer readable medium,” “computer readable media,” and “machine readable medium” are entirely restricted to tangible, physical objects that store information in a form that is readable by a computer. These terms exclude any wireless signals, wired download signals, and any other ephemeral signals.
- While the invention has been described with reference to numerous specific details, one of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the invention can be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the spirit of the invention. For instance, a number of the figures (including
FIGS. 18 , 23 and 28) conceptually illustrate processes. The specific operations of these processes may not be performed in the exact order shown and described. The specific operations may not be performed in one continuous series of operations, and different specific operations may be performed in different embodiments. Furthermore, the process could be implemented using several sub-processes, or as part of a larger macro process. - Also, several embodiments were described above in which a user provides logical data path sets in terms of logical control plane data. In other embodiments, however, a user may provide logical data path sets in terms of logical forwarding plane data. In addition, several embodiments were described above in which a controller instance provides physical control plane data to a switching element in order to manage the switching element. In other embodiments, however, the controller instance may provide the switching element with physical forwarding plane data. In such embodiments, the NIB would store physical forwarding plane data and the virtualization application would generate such data.
- Furthermore, in several examples above, a user specifies one or more logic switches. In some embodiments, the user can provide physical switch configurations along with such logic switch configurations. Also, even though controller instances are described that in some embodiments are individually formed by several application layers that execute on one computing device, one of ordinary skill will realize that such instances are formed by dedicated computing devices or other machines in some embodiments that perform one or more layers of their operations.
- Also, several examples described above show that a logical data path set is associated with one user. One of the ordinary skill in the art will recognize that then a user may be associated with one or more sets of logical data paths in some embodiments. That is, the relationship between a logical data path set is not always a one-to-one relationship as a user may be associated with multiple logical data path sets. Thus, one of ordinary skill in the art would understand that the invention is not to be limited by the foregoing illustrative details.
Claims (15)
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,533 US8817620B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US13/219,578 US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US15/173,611 US10326660B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-03 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US16/435,519 US11539591B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2019-06-09 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US18/088,763 US12028215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-12-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
Applications Claiming Priority (11)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US36191210P | 2010-07-06 | 2010-07-06 | |
US36191310P | 2010-07-06 | 2010-07-06 | |
US201161429754P | 2011-01-04 | 2011-01-04 | |
US201161429753P | 2011-01-04 | 2011-01-04 | |
US201161466453P | 2011-03-22 | 2011-03-22 | |
US201161482205P | 2011-05-03 | 2011-05-03 | |
US201161482616P | 2011-05-04 | 2011-05-04 | |
US201161482615P | 2011-05-04 | 2011-05-04 | |
US201161501743P | 2011-06-27 | 2011-06-27 | |
US201161501785P | 2011-06-28 | 2011-06-28 | |
US13/177,533 US8817620B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,536 Continuation-In-Part US8959215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization |
Related Child Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,536 Continuation US8959215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization |
US13/219,578 Continuation US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US13/219,578 Continuation-In-Part US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20130058228A1 true US20130058228A1 (en) | 2013-03-07 |
US8817620B2 US8817620B2 (en) | 2014-08-26 |
Family
ID=47753128
Family Applications (43)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,530 Active 2031-10-20 US8717895B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus and method with a table mapping engine |
US13/177,540 Active 2031-11-27 US8750119B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with table mapping engine |
US13/177,534 Active 2031-10-14 US8837493B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed network control apparatus and method |
US13/177,539 Active 2031-12-22 US8817621B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus |
US13/177,537 Active US8880468B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Secondary storage architecture for a network control system that utilizes a primary network information base |
US13/177,538 Active 2031-08-02 US8830823B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed control platform for large-scale production networks |
US13/177,532 Active 2031-11-26 US8743888B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method |
US13/177,536 Active 2032-11-27 US8959215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization |
US13/177,543 Active 2031-11-11 US8842679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Control system that elects a master controller instance for switching elements |
US13/177,533 Active 2031-12-15 US8817620B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US13/177,535 Active US8750164B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Hierarchical managed switch architecture |
US13/177,541 Active 2033-11-17 US8966040B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Use of network information base structure to establish communication between applications |
US13/177,529 Active 2031-08-08 US8743889B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Method and apparatus for using a network information base to control a plurality of shared network infrastructure switching elements |
US13/177,546 Active 2033-10-22 US8958292B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with port security controls |
US13/177,531 Active 2031-09-13 US8718070B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed network virtualization apparatus and method |
US13/177,545 Active 2031-08-02 US8761036B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with quality of service controls |
US13/218,427 Active 2033-11-30 US9106587B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per managed switching element |
US13/218,431 Active 2034-05-30 US9172663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/218,433 Active 2031-11-23 US8775594B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Distributed network control system with a distributed hash table |
US13/219,557 Active 2033-05-22 US9391928B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/218,471 Active 2032-03-27 US9112811B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managed switching elements used as extenders |
US13/218,464 Active 2032-06-30 US9049153B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Logical packet processing pipeline that retains state information to effectuate efficient processing of packets |
US13/219,533 Active 2032-07-19 US8964598B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US13/218,472 Active 2033-07-21 US9007903B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managing a network by controlling edge and non-edge switching elements |
US13/218,468 Active 2032-01-10 US8913483B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Fault tolerant managed switching element architecture |
US13/218,477 Active 2034-10-06 US9306875B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managed switch architectures for implementing logical datapath sets |
US13/218,467 Active 2034-08-03 US9300603B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Use of rich context tags in logical data processing |
US13/219,578 Active 2034-06-19 US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US13/219,562 Active 2033-11-22 US9008087B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Processing requests in a network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/225,554 Active 2034-02-12 US9077664B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-09-06 | One-hop packet processing in a network with managed switching elements |
US13/225,553 Active 2035-09-09 US9692655B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-09-06 | Packet processing in a network with hierarchical managed switching elements |
US13/288,023 Active 2034-04-24 US9231891B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-11-02 | Deployment of hierarchical managed switching elements |
US14/923,426 Active 2032-02-11 US11509564B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-10-26 | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US15/076,634 Active 2031-11-08 US10038597B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-03-21 | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US15/173,611 Active 2031-11-27 US10326660B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-03 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US15/181,685 Active 2033-02-10 US11223531B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-14 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US16/034,035 Active US10686663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-07-12 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US16/435,519 Active 2032-02-18 US11539591B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2019-06-09 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US16/902,251 Active US11743123B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2020-06-15 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US17/548,529 Active 2031-08-08 US11876679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2021-12-11 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US17/989,864 Pending US20230164032A1 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-11-18 | Method and apparatus for using a network information base to control a plurality of shared network infrastructure switching elements |
US18/088,763 Active 2031-07-07 US12028215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-12-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US18/239,084 Pending US20240039791A1 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2023-08-28 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
Family Applications Before (9)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,530 Active 2031-10-20 US8717895B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus and method with a table mapping engine |
US13/177,540 Active 2031-11-27 US8750119B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with table mapping engine |
US13/177,534 Active 2031-10-14 US8837493B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed network control apparatus and method |
US13/177,539 Active 2031-12-22 US8817621B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization apparatus |
US13/177,537 Active US8880468B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Secondary storage architecture for a network control system that utilizes a primary network information base |
US13/177,538 Active 2031-08-02 US8830823B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed control platform for large-scale production networks |
US13/177,532 Active 2031-11-26 US8743888B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method |
US13/177,536 Active 2032-11-27 US8959215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network virtualization |
US13/177,543 Active 2031-11-11 US8842679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Control system that elects a master controller instance for switching elements |
Family Applications After (33)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/177,535 Active US8750164B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Hierarchical managed switch architecture |
US13/177,541 Active 2033-11-17 US8966040B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Use of network information base structure to establish communication between applications |
US13/177,529 Active 2031-08-08 US8743889B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Method and apparatus for using a network information base to control a plurality of shared network infrastructure switching elements |
US13/177,546 Active 2033-10-22 US8958292B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with port security controls |
US13/177,531 Active 2031-09-13 US8718070B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Distributed network virtualization apparatus and method |
US13/177,545 Active 2031-08-02 US8761036B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-07-06 | Network control apparatus and method with quality of service controls |
US13/218,427 Active 2033-11-30 US9106587B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per managed switching element |
US13/218,431 Active 2034-05-30 US9172663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/218,433 Active 2031-11-23 US8775594B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-25 | Distributed network control system with a distributed hash table |
US13/219,557 Active 2033-05-22 US9391928B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/218,471 Active 2032-03-27 US9112811B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managed switching elements used as extenders |
US13/218,464 Active 2032-06-30 US9049153B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Logical packet processing pipeline that retains state information to effectuate efficient processing of packets |
US13/219,533 Active 2032-07-19 US8964598B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US13/218,472 Active 2033-07-21 US9007903B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managing a network by controlling edge and non-edge switching elements |
US13/218,468 Active 2032-01-10 US8913483B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Fault tolerant managed switching element architecture |
US13/218,477 Active 2034-10-06 US9306875B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Managed switch architectures for implementing logical datapath sets |
US13/218,467 Active 2034-08-03 US9300603B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Use of rich context tags in logical data processing |
US13/219,578 Active 2034-06-19 US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US13/219,562 Active 2033-11-22 US9008087B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-08-26 | Processing requests in a network control system with multiple controller instances |
US13/225,554 Active 2034-02-12 US9077664B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-09-06 | One-hop packet processing in a network with managed switching elements |
US13/225,553 Active 2035-09-09 US9692655B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-09-06 | Packet processing in a network with hierarchical managed switching elements |
US13/288,023 Active 2034-04-24 US9231891B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2011-11-02 | Deployment of hierarchical managed switching elements |
US14/923,426 Active 2032-02-11 US11509564B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-10-26 | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US15/076,634 Active 2031-11-08 US10038597B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-03-21 | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US15/173,611 Active 2031-11-27 US10326660B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-03 | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US15/181,685 Active 2033-02-10 US11223531B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-14 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US16/034,035 Active US10686663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-07-12 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US16/435,519 Active 2032-02-18 US11539591B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2019-06-09 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US16/902,251 Active US11743123B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2020-06-15 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US17/548,529 Active 2031-08-08 US11876679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2021-12-11 | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US17/989,864 Pending US20230164032A1 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-11-18 | Method and apparatus for using a network information base to control a plurality of shared network infrastructure switching elements |
US18/088,763 Active 2031-07-07 US12028215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-12-26 | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US18/239,084 Pending US20240039791A1 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2023-08-28 | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (43) | US8717895B2 (en) |
Cited By (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8717895B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-05-06 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization apparatus and method with a table mapping engine |
WO2015006143A1 (en) | 2013-07-08 | 2015-01-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Unified replication mechanism for fault-tolerance of state |
WO2015006243A2 (en) | 2013-07-08 | 2015-01-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Storing network state at a network controller |
US8964528B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for robust packet distribution among hierarchical managed switching elements |
US9043452B2 (en) | 2011-05-04 | 2015-05-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for port isolation |
WO2015126430A1 (en) * | 2014-02-24 | 2015-08-27 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Virtual network function management with deactivated virtual machines |
WO2015138043A2 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2015-09-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Route advertisement by managed gateways |
US9525647B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-12-20 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements |
US20160380874A1 (en) * | 2014-03-27 | 2016-12-29 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet tracing in a software-defined networking environment |
US9588947B1 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2017-03-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Integrated administrative interface for open network programming applications |
US9680750B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2017-06-13 | Nicira, Inc. | Use of tunnels to hide network addresses |
CN107222324A (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2017-09-29 | 华为技术有限公司 | The business collocation method and device of network service |
EP3355534A1 (en) | 2013-07-12 | 2018-08-01 | Nicira Inc. | Tracing network packets at a managed forwarding element |
US10103939B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-10-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets |
Families Citing this family (736)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2005091136A1 (en) | 2004-03-13 | 2005-09-29 | Cluster Resources, Inc. | System and method for a self-optimizing reservation in time of compute resources |
US8782654B2 (en) | 2004-03-13 | 2014-07-15 | Adaptive Computing Enterprises, Inc. | Co-allocating a reservation spanning different compute resources types |
US20070266388A1 (en) | 2004-06-18 | 2007-11-15 | Cluster Resources, Inc. | System and method for providing advanced reservations in a compute environment |
US8176490B1 (en) | 2004-08-20 | 2012-05-08 | Adaptive Computing Enterprises, Inc. | System and method of interfacing a workload manager and scheduler with an identity manager |
CA2586763C (en) | 2004-11-08 | 2013-12-17 | Cluster Resources, Inc. | System and method of providing system jobs within a compute environment |
US20060167838A1 (en) * | 2005-01-21 | 2006-07-27 | Z-Force Communications, Inc. | File-based hybrid file storage scheme supporting multiple file switches |
US8863143B2 (en) | 2006-03-16 | 2014-10-14 | Adaptive Computing Enterprises, Inc. | System and method for managing a hybrid compute environment |
US9231886B2 (en) | 2005-03-16 | 2016-01-05 | Adaptive Computing Enterprises, Inc. | Simple integration of an on-demand compute environment |
WO2006108187A2 (en) | 2005-04-07 | 2006-10-12 | Cluster Resources, Inc. | On-demand access to compute resources |
US8811431B2 (en) | 2008-11-20 | 2014-08-19 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Systems and methods for compressing packet data |
US8489562B1 (en) * | 2007-11-30 | 2013-07-16 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Deferred data storage |
US7675854B2 (en) | 2006-02-21 | 2010-03-09 | A10 Networks, Inc. | System and method for an adaptive TCP SYN cookie with time validation |
US8885632B2 (en) | 2006-08-02 | 2014-11-11 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Communications scheduler |
US8312507B2 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2012-11-13 | A10 Networks, Inc. | System and method to apply network traffic policy to an application session |
WO2008147973A2 (en) | 2007-05-25 | 2008-12-04 | Attune Systems, Inc. | Remote file virtualization in a switched file system |
US8041773B2 (en) | 2007-09-24 | 2011-10-18 | The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York | Automatic clustering for self-organizing grids |
US8307115B1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2012-11-06 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Network memory mirroring |
US8837491B2 (en) | 2008-05-27 | 2014-09-16 | Glue Networks | Regional virtual VPN |
US10805840B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2020-10-13 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Data transmission via a virtual wide area network overlay |
US10164861B2 (en) | 2015-12-28 | 2018-12-25 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Dynamic monitoring and visualization for network health characteristics |
US9717021B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2017-07-25 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Virtual network overlay |
US8364636B2 (en) * | 2009-09-14 | 2013-01-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Real time data replication |
US9465771B2 (en) | 2009-09-24 | 2016-10-11 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Server on a chip and node cards comprising one or more of same |
US9077654B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2015-07-07 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | System and method for data center security enhancements leveraging managed server SOCs |
US20110103391A1 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Smooth-Stone, Inc. C/O Barry Evans | System and method for high-performance, low-power data center interconnect fabric |
US9876735B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2018-01-23 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Performance and power optimized computer system architectures and methods leveraging power optimized tree fabric interconnect |
US8599863B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2013-12-03 | Calxeda, Inc. | System and method for using a multi-protocol fabric module across a distributed server interconnect fabric |
US9054990B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2015-06-09 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | System and method for data center security enhancements leveraging server SOCs or server fabrics |
US20130107444A1 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2013-05-02 | Calxeda, Inc. | System and method for flexible storage and networking provisioning in large scalable processor installations |
US9960967B2 (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2018-05-01 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Determining an application delivery server based on geo-location information |
US10877695B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2020-12-29 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Memcached server functionality in a cluster of data processing nodes |
US9311269B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2016-04-12 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Network proxy for high-performance, low-power data center interconnect fabric |
US9680770B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2017-06-13 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | System and method for using a multi-protocol fabric module across a distributed server interconnect fabric |
US9648102B1 (en) | 2012-12-27 | 2017-05-09 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Memcached server functionality in a cluster of data processing nodes |
US11720290B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2023-08-08 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Memcached server functionality in a cluster of data processing nodes |
US10721269B1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2020-07-21 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods and system for returning requests with javascript for clients before passing a request to a server |
US9019962B1 (en) * | 2009-12-03 | 2015-04-28 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Tunneling from a provider edge routing device to a remote customer edge network device |
US9195500B1 (en) | 2010-02-09 | 2015-11-24 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for seamless storage importing and devices thereof |
US8867552B2 (en) | 2010-05-03 | 2014-10-21 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Virtual cluster switching |
US9270486B2 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2016-02-23 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Name services for virtual cluster switching |
US9769016B2 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2017-09-19 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Advanced link tracking for virtual cluster switching |
US9716672B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2017-07-25 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Distributed configuration management for virtual cluster switching |
US9806906B2 (en) | 2010-06-08 | 2017-10-31 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Flooding packets on a per-virtual-network basis |
US9628293B2 (en) | 2010-06-08 | 2017-04-18 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Network layer multicasting in trill networks |
US9355109B2 (en) * | 2010-06-11 | 2016-05-31 | The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York | Multi-tier caching |
US9503375B1 (en) | 2010-06-30 | 2016-11-22 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for managing traffic in a multi-service environment and devices thereof |
US9420049B1 (en) | 2010-06-30 | 2016-08-16 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Client side human user indicator |
US9807031B2 (en) | 2010-07-16 | 2017-10-31 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | System and method for network configuration |
US8677004B2 (en) | 2010-09-10 | 2014-03-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Migration of logical partitions between two devices |
US9215275B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2015-12-15 | A10 Networks, Inc. | System and method to balance servers based on server load status |
US9286298B1 (en) | 2010-10-14 | 2016-03-15 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for enhancing management of backup data sets and devices thereof |
US9609052B2 (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2017-03-28 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Distributing application traffic to servers based on dynamic service response time |
ES2609521T3 (en) * | 2010-12-13 | 2017-04-20 | Nec Corporation | Communication route control system, route control device, communication route control method, and route control program |
JP5534033B2 (en) * | 2010-12-17 | 2014-06-25 | 日本電気株式会社 | Communication system, node, packet transfer method and program |
WO2012092262A1 (en) * | 2010-12-28 | 2012-07-05 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Systems and methods for vlan tagging via cloud bridge |
RU2576473C2 (en) * | 2011-01-13 | 2016-03-10 | Нек Корпорейшн | Network system and routing method |
WO2012103515A1 (en) | 2011-01-28 | 2012-08-02 | Level 3 Communications, Llc | Content delivery network with deep caching infrastructure |
US9161080B2 (en) * | 2011-01-28 | 2015-10-13 | Level 3 Communications, Llc | Content delivery network with deep caching infrastructure |
US8582422B2 (en) * | 2011-04-05 | 2013-11-12 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Access point configuration propagation |
US8879431B2 (en) | 2011-05-16 | 2014-11-04 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Method for load balancing of requests' processing of diameter servers |
JP5987841B2 (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2016-09-07 | 日本電気株式会社 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, TRANSFER NODE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM |
ES2565628T3 (en) * | 2011-07-06 | 2016-04-06 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Message processing procedure and related device |
JP6088509B2 (en) * | 2011-07-11 | 2017-03-01 | オラクル・インターナショナル・コーポレイション | System and method using at least one of a multicast group and a packet processing proxy for supporting a flooding mechanism in a middleware machine environment |
EP2555129B1 (en) * | 2011-08-03 | 2019-02-06 | Amadeus S.A.S. | Method and system to maintain strong consistency of distributed replicated contents in a client/server system |
US20130034015A1 (en) * | 2011-08-05 | 2013-02-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Automated network configuration in a dynamic virtual environment |
US20130039367A1 (en) * | 2011-08-12 | 2013-02-14 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Peer-to-Peer Packet Switching |
AU2012296330B2 (en) * | 2011-08-17 | 2016-03-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Hierarchical controller clusters for interconnecting different logical domains |
CN107071087B (en) * | 2011-08-17 | 2021-01-26 | Nicira股份有限公司 | Logical L3 routing |
EP2745475B1 (en) * | 2011-08-18 | 2015-10-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (publ) | Centralized control of data plane applications |
JP4964354B1 (en) * | 2011-08-24 | 2012-06-27 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Network system |
WO2013031175A1 (en) * | 2011-08-29 | 2013-03-07 | Nec Corporation | Communication system, control device, node, node control method, and program |
US9736085B2 (en) | 2011-08-29 | 2017-08-15 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | End-to end lossless Ethernet in Ethernet fabric |
JP5712870B2 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2015-05-07 | 富士通株式会社 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM |
US9590820B1 (en) * | 2011-09-02 | 2017-03-07 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for improving load balancing in overlay networks |
US9185056B2 (en) * | 2011-09-20 | 2015-11-10 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | System and methods for controlling network traffic through virtual switches |
US20140233392A1 (en) * | 2011-09-21 | 2014-08-21 | Nec Corporation | Communication apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and program |
WO2013042374A1 (en) * | 2011-09-21 | 2013-03-28 | Nec Corporation | Communication apparatus, control apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and program |
WO2013042598A1 (en) * | 2011-09-22 | 2013-03-28 | Nec Corporation | Communication terminal, communication method, and program |
US9250941B2 (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2016-02-02 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Apparatus and method for segregating tenant specific data when using MPLS in openflow-enabled cloud computing |
US8625462B2 (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2014-01-07 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Ownership requests for access points |
US8844013B2 (en) * | 2011-10-04 | 2014-09-23 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Providing third party authentication in an on-demand service environment |
EP2764455B1 (en) | 2011-10-05 | 2022-04-20 | Opteon Corporation | System and method for monitoring and/or controlling dynamic environments |
US8964601B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2015-02-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Network switching domains with a virtualized control plane |
US8830820B2 (en) * | 2011-10-14 | 2014-09-09 | Google Inc. | Semi-centralized routing |
US9130991B2 (en) | 2011-10-14 | 2015-09-08 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Processing data packets in performance enhancing proxy (PEP) environment |
US8897154B2 (en) | 2011-10-24 | 2014-11-25 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Combining stateless and stateful server load balancing |
US9178833B2 (en) | 2011-10-25 | 2015-11-03 | Nicira, Inc. | Chassis controller |
WO2013062070A1 (en) * | 2011-10-28 | 2013-05-02 | 日本電気株式会社 | Control apparatus, communication system, virtual network management method, and program |
US9092594B2 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2015-07-28 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Node card management in a modular and large scalable server system |
US9626224B2 (en) | 2011-11-03 | 2017-04-18 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Optimizing available computing resources within a virtual environment |
US9699117B2 (en) | 2011-11-08 | 2017-07-04 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Integrated fibre channel support in an ethernet fabric switch |
US9450870B2 (en) | 2011-11-10 | 2016-09-20 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | System and method for flow management in software-defined networks |
US8966024B2 (en) | 2011-11-15 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Architecture of networks with middleboxes |
FR2982961B1 (en) * | 2011-11-22 | 2014-09-05 | Schneider Electric Usa Inc | ARBITRATION OF PRIORITY CONTROL DEVICE |
FR2983018B1 (en) * | 2011-11-22 | 2014-01-10 | Thales Sa | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION NETWORK AND PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK NUTS |
US8954492B1 (en) | 2011-11-30 | 2015-02-10 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for inlining content externally referenced in a web page prior to providing the web page to a requestor and devices thereof |
US8738756B2 (en) | 2011-12-01 | 2014-05-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Enabling co-existence of hosts or virtual machines with identical addresses |
WO2013081620A1 (en) * | 2011-12-01 | 2013-06-06 | Intel Corporation | Server including switch circuitry |
US9094364B2 (en) | 2011-12-23 | 2015-07-28 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Methods to manage services over a service gateway |
US9565132B2 (en) * | 2011-12-27 | 2017-02-07 | Intel Corporation | Multi-protocol I/O interconnect including a switching fabric |
KR101907932B1 (en) * | 2011-12-27 | 2018-10-17 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Device and method of packet forwarding with in-network content caching for aggregate contents |
EP2798874B1 (en) * | 2011-12-29 | 2017-03-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Son automatic transport capacity control |
US8787154B1 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2014-07-22 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Multi-topology resource scheduling within a computer network |
US9935901B2 (en) * | 2011-12-30 | 2018-04-03 | Dell Products, Lp | System and method of enabling a multi-chassis virtual switch for virtual server network provisioning |
US9705704B2 (en) * | 2012-01-13 | 2017-07-11 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Method and system of forming a mobile virtual network |
US20130182605A1 (en) * | 2012-01-13 | 2013-07-18 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Method and system for providing a mobile virtual router |
US9444611B2 (en) * | 2012-01-16 | 2016-09-13 | Nec Corporation | Network system and method of synchronizing path information |
US10050824B2 (en) * | 2012-01-20 | 2018-08-14 | Arris Enterprises Llc | Managing a cluster of switches using multiple controllers |
US9935781B2 (en) * | 2012-01-20 | 2018-04-03 | Arris Enterprises Llc | Managing a large network using a single point of configuration |
US10560283B2 (en) | 2012-01-23 | 2020-02-11 | The Faction Group Llc | System and method for a multi-tenant datacenter with layer 2 interconnection and cloud storage |
US8995272B2 (en) | 2012-01-26 | 2015-03-31 | Brocade Communication Systems, Inc. | Link aggregation in software-defined networks |
US9203780B2 (en) * | 2012-01-27 | 2015-12-01 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Techniques to distribute messages using communication pipelines |
US10044582B2 (en) | 2012-01-28 | 2018-08-07 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Generating secure name records |
US20130195113A1 (en) * | 2012-01-30 | 2013-08-01 | Dell Products, Lp | System and Method for Network Switch Data Plane Virtualization |
US9088477B2 (en) | 2012-02-02 | 2015-07-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Distributed fabric management protocol |
US9036636B1 (en) * | 2012-02-06 | 2015-05-19 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | System and methods for managing network packet broadcasting |
US8879563B2 (en) * | 2012-02-10 | 2014-11-04 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Content-based forwarding of network traffic |
WO2013118687A1 (en) * | 2012-02-10 | 2013-08-15 | 日本電気株式会社 | Computer system and method for visualizing virtual network |
EP2814204B1 (en) | 2012-02-10 | 2016-05-25 | Nec Corporation | Computer system and method for visualizing a virtual network |
US10230566B1 (en) | 2012-02-17 | 2019-03-12 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for dynamically constructing a service principal name and devices thereof |
US9020912B1 (en) | 2012-02-20 | 2015-04-28 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for accessing data in a compressed file system and devices thereof |
US9742693B2 (en) | 2012-02-27 | 2017-08-22 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Dynamic service insertion in a fabric switch |
WO2013128915A1 (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2013-09-06 | Nec Corporation | Communication apparatus, communication method, communication system and program |
US9264295B1 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2016-02-16 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for forwarding broadcast network packets with a controller |
US9077624B2 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2015-07-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Diagnostics in a distributed fabric system |
US9077651B2 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2015-07-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Management of a distributed fabric system |
US9350671B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2016-05-24 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Supporting software defined networking with application layer traffic optimization |
US9154416B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2015-10-06 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Overlay tunnel in a fabric switch |
US9313048B2 (en) * | 2012-04-04 | 2016-04-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Location aware virtual service provisioning in a hybrid cloud environment |
US9386085B2 (en) | 2012-04-04 | 2016-07-05 | Radware, Ltd. | Techniques for providing scalable application delivery controller services |
US10375158B2 (en) * | 2012-04-04 | 2019-08-06 | Radware, Ltd. | Techniques for adaptive traffic direction via scalable application delivery controller services |
US9225635B2 (en) | 2012-04-10 | 2015-12-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Switch routing table utilizing software defined network (SDN) controller programmed route segregation and prioritization |
JP6094051B2 (en) * | 2012-04-13 | 2017-03-15 | 日本電気株式会社 | Display device, display method, and display program |
US9331938B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2016-05-03 | Nicira, Inc. | Extension of logical networks across layer 3 virtual private networks |
CN104081734B (en) | 2012-04-18 | 2018-01-30 | Nicira股份有限公司 | Minimize the fluctuation in distributed network control system using affairs |
US9515920B2 (en) * | 2012-04-20 | 2016-12-06 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Name-based neighbor discovery and multi-hop service discovery in information-centric networks |
WO2013163648A2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2013-10-31 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for optimizing service of content requests and devices thereof |
US9374301B2 (en) | 2012-05-18 | 2016-06-21 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Network feedback in software-defined networks |
US10277464B2 (en) | 2012-05-22 | 2019-04-30 | Arris Enterprises Llc | Client auto-configuration in a multi-switch link aggregation |
US9325676B2 (en) | 2012-05-24 | 2016-04-26 | Ip Ghoster, Inc. | Systems and methods for protecting communications between nodes |
US10778659B2 (en) | 2012-05-24 | 2020-09-15 | Smart Security Systems Llc | System and method for protecting communications |
WO2015116768A2 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-08-06 | Sipn, Llc | Systems and methods for protecting communications |
US9647938B2 (en) | 2012-06-11 | 2017-05-09 | Radware, Ltd. | Techniques for providing value-added services in SDN-based networks |
US9304801B2 (en) * | 2012-06-12 | 2016-04-05 | TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET L M ERRICSSON (publ) | Elastic enforcement layer for cloud security using SDN |
CN103490967B (en) * | 2012-06-13 | 2018-04-27 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Alias, transparent interconnection of lots of links interconnection TRILL message processing methods and device |
US8891364B2 (en) * | 2012-06-15 | 2014-11-18 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Systems and methods for distributing traffic across cluster nodes |
JP5974665B2 (en) * | 2012-06-22 | 2016-08-23 | 富士通株式会社 | Information processing system, relay device, information processing device, and information processing method |
US10031782B2 (en) | 2012-06-26 | 2018-07-24 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Distributed processing of network device tasks |
US8782221B2 (en) | 2012-07-05 | 2014-07-15 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Method to allocate buffer for TCP proxy session based on dynamic network conditions |
US9231892B2 (en) | 2012-07-09 | 2016-01-05 | Vmware, Inc. | Distributed virtual switch configuration and state management |
US9451393B1 (en) * | 2012-07-23 | 2016-09-20 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Automated multi-party cloud connectivity provisioning |
US9049200B2 (en) * | 2012-07-27 | 2015-06-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for improving hardware utilization for a bidirectional access controls list in a low latency high-throughput network |
CN104247350A (en) * | 2012-07-31 | 2014-12-24 | 惠普发展公司,有限责任合伙企业 | Implementing a transition protocol in which a first rule set for routing packets received by a group of switches during a first time period is updated to a second rule set |
JP5958164B2 (en) * | 2012-08-07 | 2016-07-27 | 富士通株式会社 | Control apparatus, method and program, system, and information processing method |
US20140044129A1 (en) * | 2012-08-10 | 2014-02-13 | Duane Edward MENTZE | Multicast packet forwarding in a network |
US10430406B2 (en) * | 2012-08-13 | 2019-10-01 | Aria Solutions, Inc. | Enhanced high performance real-time relational database system and methods for using same |
US8942258B2 (en) | 2012-09-14 | 2015-01-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Segmentation and reassembly of network packets for switched fabric networks |
US9276877B1 (en) | 2012-09-20 | 2016-03-01 | Wiretap Ventures, LLC | Data model for software defined networks |
US10002141B2 (en) | 2012-09-25 | 2018-06-19 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Distributed database in software driven networks |
US10021174B2 (en) | 2012-09-25 | 2018-07-10 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Distributing service sessions |
US9843484B2 (en) | 2012-09-25 | 2017-12-12 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Graceful scaling in software driven networks |
KR101692751B1 (en) | 2012-09-25 | 2017-01-04 | 에이10 네트워크스, 인코포레이티드 | Load distribution in data networks |
US9710352B2 (en) * | 2012-09-28 | 2017-07-18 | Atmel Corporation | Microcontroller with integrated monitoring capabilities for network applications |
US10033837B1 (en) | 2012-09-29 | 2018-07-24 | F5 Networks, Inc. | System and method for utilizing a data reducing module for dictionary compression of encoded data |
US9519501B1 (en) | 2012-09-30 | 2016-12-13 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Hardware assisted flow acceleration and L2 SMAC management in a heterogeneous distributed multi-tenant virtualized clustered system |
FR2997521B1 (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2016-01-01 | European Aeronautic Defence & Space Co Eads France | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERACTING VIRTUAL MACHINES HOSTED BY HETEROGENEOUS VIRTUALIZATION SOLUTIONS |
US9578090B1 (en) | 2012-11-07 | 2017-02-21 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for provisioning application delivery service and devices thereof |
US9401872B2 (en) | 2012-11-16 | 2016-07-26 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Virtual link aggregations across multiple fabric switches |
JP5935666B2 (en) * | 2012-11-22 | 2016-06-15 | 日立金属株式会社 | Communication system and network relay device |
CN107977255B (en) * | 2012-11-27 | 2021-12-28 | 瑞典爱立信有限公司 | Apparatus and method for separating tenant-specific data |
CA2893108A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-06-05 | Nec Corporation | Switch apparatus, vlan setting management method and program |
US9729425B2 (en) * | 2012-11-29 | 2017-08-08 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Transformation and unified control of hybrid networks composed of OpenFlow switches and other programmable switches |
US9218237B1 (en) * | 2012-11-29 | 2015-12-22 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Network of interconnected circuit protection devices |
US9338225B2 (en) | 2012-12-06 | 2016-05-10 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Forwarding policies on a virtual service network |
US9087085B2 (en) * | 2012-12-10 | 2015-07-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Pre-assimilation values and post-assimilation values in hardware instance identifiers |
US8989194B1 (en) * | 2012-12-18 | 2015-03-24 | Google Inc. | Systems and methods for improving network redundancy and for facile initialization in a centrally-controlled network |
US9253117B1 (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2016-02-02 | Google Inc. | Systems and methods for reducing network hardware of a centrally-controlled network using in-band network connections |
US9450874B2 (en) * | 2013-01-04 | 2016-09-20 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Method for internet traffic management using a central traffic controller |
US9350680B2 (en) | 2013-01-11 | 2016-05-24 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Protection switching over a virtual link aggregation |
US9413691B2 (en) | 2013-01-11 | 2016-08-09 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | MAC address synchronization in a fabric switch |
US9548926B2 (en) | 2013-01-11 | 2017-01-17 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Multicast traffic load balancing over virtual link aggregation |
US9531846B2 (en) | 2013-01-23 | 2016-12-27 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Reducing buffer usage for TCP proxy session based on delayed acknowledgement |
US8966586B2 (en) * | 2013-01-27 | 2015-02-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Authentication within OpenFlow network |
US9787567B1 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2017-10-10 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for network traffic monitoring |
FR3001849B1 (en) * | 2013-02-05 | 2016-06-24 | Byo Networks | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA, COMPUTER PROGRAM, NETWORK CONTROLLER AND ASSOCIATED NETWORKS |
US10375155B1 (en) | 2013-02-19 | 2019-08-06 | F5 Networks, Inc. | System and method for achieving hardware acceleration for asymmetric flow connections |
US9569310B2 (en) * | 2013-02-27 | 2017-02-14 | Netapp, Inc. | System and method for a scalable crash-consistent snapshot operation |
US9554418B1 (en) | 2013-02-28 | 2017-01-24 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Device for topology hiding of a visited network |
US9497614B1 (en) | 2013-02-28 | 2016-11-15 | F5 Networks, Inc. | National traffic steering device for a better control of a specific wireless/LTE network |
US9565099B2 (en) | 2013-03-01 | 2017-02-07 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Spanning tree in fabric switches |
US9178815B2 (en) | 2013-03-05 | 2015-11-03 | Intel Corporation | NIC flow switching |
US9900252B2 (en) | 2013-03-08 | 2018-02-20 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Application delivery controller and global server load balancer |
EP2974180B1 (en) * | 2013-03-12 | 2018-11-07 | Nec Corporation | A packet data network, a method for operating a packet data network and a flow-based programmable network device |
US9584369B2 (en) * | 2013-03-13 | 2017-02-28 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Methods of representing software defined networking-based multiple layer network topology views |
EP2974133B1 (en) * | 2013-03-13 | 2019-10-23 | Nec Corporation | Method and system for controlling an underlying physical network by a software defined network |
US9680968B2 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2017-06-13 | Patent Capital Group | Establishing translation for virtual machines in a network environment |
US9112796B2 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2015-08-18 | Lenovo Enterprise Solutions (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | System guided surrogating control in broadcast and multicast |
US9760528B1 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2017-09-12 | Glue Networks, Inc. | Methods and systems for creating a network |
US9450981B2 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2016-09-20 | Radware, Ltd. | System and method thereof for mitigating denial of service attacks in virtual networks |
US9430259B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-08-30 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Virtualization congestion control framework for modifying execution of applications on virtual machine based on mass congestion indicator in host computing system |
US9483286B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-11-01 | Avi Networks | Distributed network services |
WO2014143030A1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-18 | Mcafee, Inc. | Creating and managing a network security tag |
US9501363B1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-11-22 | Nuodb, Inc. | Distributed database management system with node failure detection |
US9509549B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2016-11-29 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Extending routing rules from external services |
WO2014144837A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-18 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Processing data packets using a policy based network path |
US10740323B1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2020-08-11 | Nuodb, Inc. | Global uniqueness checking in distributed databases |
US9141416B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-09-22 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Virtualization congestion control framework for modifying execution of applications on virtual machine based on mass congestion indicator in host computing system |
US9450817B1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2016-09-20 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Software defined network controller |
US9401818B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-07-26 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Scalable gateways for a fabric switch |
US11176111B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2021-11-16 | Nuodb, Inc. | Distributed database management system with dynamically split B-tree indexes |
US9928082B1 (en) | 2013-03-19 | 2018-03-27 | Gluware, Inc. | Methods and systems for remote device configuration |
WO2014147197A1 (en) | 2013-03-20 | 2014-09-25 | Wolting Holding B.V. | Compiler for and method for software defined networks |
EP2782291A1 (en) * | 2013-03-20 | 2014-09-24 | Wolting Holding B.V. | Compiler for and method of software defined networking |
US9720852B2 (en) * | 2013-03-29 | 2017-08-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Universal serial bus (USB) key functioning as multiple USB keys so as to efficiently configure different types of hardware |
US9009359B2 (en) | 2013-03-29 | 2015-04-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Emulating multiple universal serial bus (USB) keys so as to efficiently configure different types of hardware |
US9245130B2 (en) | 2013-03-29 | 2016-01-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multi-user universal serial bus (USB) key with customizable file sharing permissions |
WO2014168913A1 (en) | 2013-04-08 | 2014-10-16 | Nuodb, Inc. | Database management system with database hibernation and bursting |
US9363204B2 (en) * | 2013-04-22 | 2016-06-07 | Nant Holdings Ip, Llc | Harmonized control planes, systems and methods |
FI20135413L (en) | 2013-04-23 | 2014-10-24 | Tellabs Oy | Method and device for optimizing a configuration system of a network element of a software-defined network |
US9374302B2 (en) | 2013-04-26 | 2016-06-21 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Distributed methodology for peer-to-peer transmission of stateful packet flows |
US10038693B2 (en) | 2013-05-03 | 2018-07-31 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Facilitating secure network traffic by an application delivery controller |
US9154414B2 (en) * | 2013-05-30 | 2015-10-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Reverse path forwarding router system |
US9350681B1 (en) * | 2013-05-31 | 2016-05-24 | Gogrid, LLC | System and method for distributed management of cloud resources in a hosting environment |
US9532266B2 (en) | 2013-06-05 | 2016-12-27 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Systems and methods for managing a wireless network |
US20140365634A1 (en) * | 2013-06-05 | 2014-12-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Programmable Network Analytics Processing via an Inspect/Apply-Action Applied to Physical and Virtual Entities |
US10034222B2 (en) | 2013-06-06 | 2018-07-24 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | System and method for mapping a service-level topology to a service-specific data plane logical topology |
US9699001B2 (en) | 2013-06-10 | 2017-07-04 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Scalable and segregated network virtualization |
EP2996292B1 (en) | 2013-06-14 | 2020-08-05 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method for processing message and forwarder |
KR102065075B1 (en) * | 2013-06-24 | 2020-01-10 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method for controlling software defined networking network and apparatus for performing the same |
CN104521201B (en) * | 2013-06-25 | 2018-09-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Processing method, forward node and the control node of forward node |
CN104253767B (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2017-11-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of implementation method of virtual burst network and a kind of interchanger |
CN104253770B (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2017-07-14 | 新华三技术有限公司 | Realize the method and apparatus of the distributed virtual switch system |
EP3001609B1 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2017-08-09 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method and device for processing multicast message in nvo3 network, and nvo3 network |
US9515924B2 (en) * | 2013-07-03 | 2016-12-06 | Avaya Inc. | Method and apparatus providing single-tier routing in a shortest path bridging (SPB) network |
US9467366B2 (en) | 2013-07-03 | 2016-10-11 | Avaya Inc. | Method and apparatus providing single-tier routing in a shortest path bridging (SPB) network |
JP2015015640A (en) * | 2013-07-05 | 2015-01-22 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Communication system, protocol processing computer, and communication method |
US9755963B2 (en) | 2013-07-09 | 2017-09-05 | Nicira, Inc. | Using headerspace analysis to identify flow entry reachability |
US10009285B2 (en) | 2013-07-30 | 2018-06-26 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Resource allocator |
US9674193B1 (en) | 2013-07-30 | 2017-06-06 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Aggregation and disbursement of licenses in distributed networks |
US10356037B2 (en) | 2013-08-01 | 2019-07-16 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Address resolution rewriting |
EP3014819B1 (en) * | 2013-08-05 | 2018-03-14 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method for packet tunneling through software defined network method of intelligently controlling flow of a packet through software defined network and system |
US9426060B2 (en) * | 2013-08-07 | 2016-08-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Software defined network (SDN) switch clusters having layer-3 distributed router functionality |
CN103428094B (en) | 2013-08-12 | 2016-08-17 | 杭州华三通信技术有限公司 | Message forwarding method in open flows OpenFlow system and device |
US10389577B2 (en) | 2013-08-14 | 2019-08-20 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Ethernet carrier group alarm (CGA) |
US9973382B2 (en) | 2013-08-15 | 2018-05-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Hitless upgrade for network control applications |
WO2015023537A2 (en) * | 2013-08-16 | 2015-02-19 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for hash routing in software defined networking |
CN103401721A (en) * | 2013-08-22 | 2013-11-20 | 盛科网络(苏州)有限公司 | Network virtualization based TOR (top of rack) switch configuration method and device |
US9531676B2 (en) * | 2013-08-26 | 2016-12-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Proxy methods for suppressing broadcast traffic in a network |
US9806949B2 (en) | 2013-09-06 | 2017-10-31 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Transparent interconnection of Ethernet fabric switches |
CN104468358B (en) * | 2013-09-25 | 2018-05-11 | 新华三技术有限公司 | The message forwarding method and equipment of the distributed virtual switch system |
US9350607B2 (en) | 2013-09-25 | 2016-05-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Scalable network configuration with consistent updates in software defined networks |
US9699070B2 (en) | 2013-10-04 | 2017-07-04 | Nicira, Inc. | Database protocol for exchanging forwarding state with hardware switches |
US9344336B2 (en) | 2013-10-15 | 2016-05-17 | Dell Products L.P. | System and method for managing virtual link state |
US8719462B1 (en) | 2013-10-16 | 2014-05-06 | Google Inc. | Systems and methods for distributed log file processing |
US9722954B2 (en) * | 2013-10-21 | 2017-08-01 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Dynamically tunable heterogeneous latencies in switch or router chips |
JP6111974B2 (en) * | 2013-10-22 | 2017-04-12 | 富士通株式会社 | Transfer device, control device, and transfer method |
CN104572243B (en) | 2013-10-25 | 2017-09-29 | 国际商业机器公司 | Method and system for sharing Java Virtual Machine |
US9912612B2 (en) | 2013-10-28 | 2018-03-06 | Brocade Communications Systems LLC | Extended ethernet fabric switches |
US10212083B2 (en) * | 2013-10-30 | 2019-02-19 | Lenovo Enterprise Solutions (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Openflow data channel and control channel separation |
US9112794B2 (en) | 2013-11-05 | 2015-08-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Dynamic multipath forwarding in software defined data center networks |
US10187317B1 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2019-01-22 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for traffic rate control and devices thereof |
US9864623B2 (en) | 2013-11-21 | 2018-01-09 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Physical to virtual network transport function abstraction |
US10063432B2 (en) * | 2013-11-26 | 2018-08-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and system of supporting service chaining in a data network |
WO2015080512A1 (en) * | 2013-11-28 | 2015-06-04 | 주식회사 케이티 | Method for processing event between controller and network device |
US9253043B2 (en) * | 2013-11-30 | 2016-02-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus to convert router configuration data |
US10230770B2 (en) | 2013-12-02 | 2019-03-12 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Network proxy layer for policy-based application proxies |
US9608932B2 (en) * | 2013-12-10 | 2017-03-28 | International Business Machines Corporation | Software-defined networking single-source enterprise workload manager |
US20150172192A1 (en) * | 2013-12-12 | 2015-06-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Software-defined networking physical controller |
US9270612B2 (en) | 2013-12-13 | 2016-02-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Software-defined networking interface between multiple platform managers |
CN104717150B (en) * | 2013-12-13 | 2019-06-11 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Switch and packet discarding method |
US20150180769A1 (en) * | 2013-12-20 | 2015-06-25 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Scale-up of sdn control plane using virtual switch based overlay |
US9336245B2 (en) * | 2013-12-24 | 2016-05-10 | Sap Se | Systems and methods providing master data management statistics |
US10608926B2 (en) | 2014-01-10 | 2020-03-31 | Fox Broadcasting Company, Llc | Method and apparatus for precisely source-timed network flow switching |
US9444723B1 (en) | 2014-01-15 | 2016-09-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Passing data over virtual links |
US9350677B2 (en) | 2014-01-16 | 2016-05-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Controller based network resource management |
CN104981779A (en) * | 2014-01-16 | 2015-10-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for loading code and network apparatus |
EP3097669B1 (en) * | 2014-01-20 | 2019-04-24 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Method, nodes and computer program for enabling of data traffic separation |
US9438435B2 (en) | 2014-01-31 | 2016-09-06 | Intenational Business Machines Corporation | Secure, multi-tenancy aware and bandwidth-efficient data center multicast |
WO2015119591A1 (en) * | 2014-02-04 | 2015-08-13 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Network switch extension |
US9705740B2 (en) | 2014-02-10 | 2017-07-11 | Google Inc. | Using unified API to program both servers and fabric for forwarding for fine-grained network optimizations |
US9548873B2 (en) | 2014-02-10 | 2017-01-17 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Virtual extensible LAN tunnel keepalives |
JP2015156168A (en) | 2014-02-21 | 2015-08-27 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Data center resource distribution system and data center resource distribution method |
US10432518B2 (en) * | 2014-02-21 | 2019-10-01 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Packet flow optimization in a network |
US20150249572A1 (en) * | 2014-03-03 | 2015-09-03 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Software-Defined Network Control Using Functional Objects |
CN106063202B (en) * | 2014-03-04 | 2019-10-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data forwarding method, controller and storage medium depending on state |
US9419855B2 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2016-08-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Static routes for logical routers |
US9817721B1 (en) * | 2014-03-14 | 2017-11-14 | Sanmina Corporation | High availability management techniques for cluster resources |
US10581758B2 (en) | 2014-03-19 | 2020-03-03 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Distributed hot standby links for vLAG |
US10476698B2 (en) | 2014-03-20 | 2019-11-12 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Redundent virtual link aggregation group |
EP3624407B1 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2023-05-17 | Nicira Inc. | Dynamic routing for logical routers |
US9647883B2 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2017-05-09 | Nicria, Inc. | Multiple levels of logical routers |
US9503321B2 (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2016-11-22 | Nicira, Inc. | Dynamic routing for logical routers |
PT3123790T (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2018-06-12 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | System and method for activating and deactivating multiple secondary cells |
US9942152B2 (en) | 2014-03-25 | 2018-04-10 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Forwarding data packets using a service-based forwarding policy |
WO2015147859A1 (en) * | 2014-03-28 | 2015-10-01 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Reconciling information in a controller and a node |
US9942162B2 (en) | 2014-03-31 | 2018-04-10 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Active application response delay time |
CN103905337B (en) * | 2014-03-31 | 2018-01-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of processing unit of Internet resources, method and system |
WO2015152435A1 (en) * | 2014-03-31 | 2015-10-08 | 쿨클라우드㈜ | Sdn-based division layer network system |
US9742678B2 (en) * | 2014-04-01 | 2017-08-22 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | E-tree service with optimal forwarding in EVPN |
US10356225B2 (en) | 2014-04-03 | 2019-07-16 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | System and method for implementing isolated service overlays between provider network service point and customer premises |
US9998320B2 (en) | 2014-04-03 | 2018-06-12 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Customer environment network functions virtualization (NFV) |
US10084669B2 (en) | 2014-04-09 | 2018-09-25 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | System and method for cloud computing adaptive cloud services |
US10235333B1 (en) | 2014-04-11 | 2019-03-19 | Twitter, Inc. | Managing consistency models in a distributed database |
US20150295852A1 (en) * | 2014-04-15 | 2015-10-15 | Ntt Innovation Institute, Inc. | Protecting and tracking network state updates in software-defined networks from side-channel access |
US10142220B2 (en) | 2014-04-29 | 2018-11-27 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Efficient routing in software defined networks |
US10063473B2 (en) | 2014-04-30 | 2018-08-28 | Brocade Communications Systems LLC | Method and system for facilitating switch virtualization in a network of interconnected switches |
US9740527B2 (en) * | 2014-05-06 | 2017-08-22 | Lenovo Enterprise Solutions (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Load distribution of logical switch routers in a distributed system |
US10291553B2 (en) | 2014-05-06 | 2019-05-14 | Lenovo Enterprise Solutions (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Logical switch architecture for network virtualization |
US9800471B2 (en) | 2014-05-13 | 2017-10-24 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Network extension groups of global VLANs in a fabric switch |
WO2015174989A1 (en) | 2014-05-15 | 2015-11-19 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Network traffic tuning |
WO2015174988A1 (en) | 2014-05-15 | 2015-11-19 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Network scheduling |
US10193769B2 (en) * | 2014-05-16 | 2019-01-29 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Network services API |
US9906422B2 (en) | 2014-05-16 | 2018-02-27 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Distributed system to determine a server's health |
US9417896B2 (en) * | 2014-05-19 | 2016-08-16 | International Business Machines Corporation | Allocating hypervisor resources |
US20150350077A1 (en) * | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Techniques For Transforming Legacy Networks Into SDN-Enabled Networks |
US9986061B2 (en) | 2014-06-03 | 2018-05-29 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Programming a data network device using user defined scripts |
US10129122B2 (en) | 2014-06-03 | 2018-11-13 | A10 Networks, Inc. | User defined objects for network devices |
US9992229B2 (en) | 2014-06-03 | 2018-06-05 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Programming a data network device using user defined scripts with licenses |
US9887878B2 (en) | 2014-06-06 | 2018-02-06 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Dynamic scheduling of network updates |
US9491054B2 (en) * | 2014-06-06 | 2016-11-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Network-state management service |
US9602351B2 (en) | 2014-06-06 | 2017-03-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Proactive handling of network faults |
CN105379219B (en) * | 2014-06-06 | 2019-02-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | Access information interacting method, the apparatus and system in network |
CN105474587B (en) | 2014-06-19 | 2019-02-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of method and device sending data packet |
US9774502B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-09-26 | Ciena Corporation | Systems and methods for combined software defined networking and distributed network control |
BR112016030581B1 (en) * | 2014-06-26 | 2023-02-28 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd | CONTROL PLANE DEVICE, FORWARDING PLAN DEVICE AND SERVICE QUALITY CONTROL METHOD FOR SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK |
WO2015199737A1 (en) * | 2014-06-27 | 2015-12-30 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Message receipt through firewall |
CN105337866B (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2019-09-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of flow switching method and device |
US9667494B2 (en) | 2014-06-30 | 2017-05-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Abstraction layer and distribution scope for a logical switch router architecture |
US10333814B2 (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2019-06-25 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method for estimating traffic rate between virtual machine pair, and related device |
US9577927B2 (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2017-02-21 | Nicira, Inc. | Encoding control plane information in transport protocol source port field and applications thereof in network virtualization |
US11838851B1 (en) | 2014-07-15 | 2023-12-05 | F5, Inc. | Methods for managing L7 traffic classification and devices thereof |
US9690675B2 (en) * | 2014-07-17 | 2017-06-27 | Cohesity, Inc. | Dynamically changing members of a consensus group in a distributed self-healing coordination service |
US10270645B2 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2019-04-23 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for handling link aggregation failover with a controller |
US10616108B2 (en) | 2014-07-29 | 2020-04-07 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Scalable MAC address virtualization |
US9282054B2 (en) * | 2014-07-30 | 2016-03-08 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Determining an active management uplink |
US9948496B1 (en) | 2014-07-30 | 2018-04-17 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Determining a transit appliance for data traffic to a software service |
US9807007B2 (en) | 2014-08-11 | 2017-10-31 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Progressive MAC address learning |
US10367678B2 (en) * | 2014-08-12 | 2019-07-30 | Dell Products Lp | Mechanism for rapid network failure detection for faster switch-over in server-to-server applications |
US10225327B2 (en) | 2014-08-13 | 2019-03-05 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Remoting application servers |
US9898318B2 (en) | 2014-08-15 | 2018-02-20 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Multi-line/multi-state virtualized OAM transponder |
US9547516B2 (en) | 2014-08-22 | 2017-01-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and system for migrating virtual machines in virtual infrastructure |
US10129100B2 (en) * | 2014-08-22 | 2018-11-13 | Vmware, Inc. | Policy management system for heterogeneous cloud services |
US9906632B2 (en) * | 2014-09-02 | 2018-02-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and system for implementing logical port classifications |
US9875344B1 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2018-01-23 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Dynamic monitoring and authorization of an optimization device |
EP3198799B1 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2019-04-24 | Wolting Holding B.V. | Compiler for and method of software defined networking, storage and compute performing operations |
US10411989B2 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2019-09-10 | Wolting Holding B.V. | Compiler for and method of software defined networking, storage and compute determining physical and virtual resources |
US9432380B2 (en) * | 2014-09-22 | 2016-08-30 | Empire Technology Development Llc | Network control security |
US9904647B2 (en) | 2014-10-03 | 2018-02-27 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Data flow circuits for intervention in data communication |
US9699029B2 (en) * | 2014-10-10 | 2017-07-04 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Distributed configuration management in a switch group |
US9876738B2 (en) * | 2014-10-10 | 2018-01-23 | Dell Products L.P. | System and method for extending ports |
US9781004B2 (en) | 2014-10-16 | 2017-10-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Discovering and grouping application endpoints in a network environment |
US9854028B2 (en) * | 2014-10-23 | 2017-12-26 | Bloomberg Finance L.P. | Apparatus and method for efficient, coordinated, distributed execution |
US10257089B2 (en) | 2014-10-30 | 2019-04-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Distributed customer premises equipment |
US10348621B2 (en) * | 2014-10-30 | 2019-07-09 | AT&T Intellectual Property I. L. P. | Universal customer premise equipment |
US10992520B2 (en) | 2014-11-06 | 2021-04-27 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Network policy graphs |
US9762479B2 (en) | 2014-11-10 | 2017-09-12 | Maged E. Beshai | Distributed routing control in a vast communication network |
CA2911730C (en) | 2014-11-10 | 2019-10-01 | Maged E. Beshai | Distributed determination of routes in a vast communication network |
KR102233645B1 (en) * | 2014-11-11 | 2021-03-30 | 한국전자통신연구원 | System and method for virtual network-based distributed multi-domain routing |
US10389573B2 (en) * | 2014-11-14 | 2019-08-20 | Apstra, Inc. | Configuring a network |
JP2016100739A (en) | 2014-11-21 | 2016-05-30 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Network system, network system management method, and gateway device |
US10182013B1 (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2019-01-15 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for managing progressive image delivery and devices thereof |
US10004408B2 (en) | 2014-12-03 | 2018-06-26 | Rethink Medical, Inc. | Methods and systems for detecting physiology for monitoring cardiac health |
CN107078956B (en) * | 2014-12-11 | 2020-10-02 | At&T知识产权一部有限合伙公司 | Multi-tier distributed router architecture and related methods, systems, and media |
US9946614B2 (en) | 2014-12-16 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods, systems, and computer readable storage devices for managing faults in a virtual machine network |
CN105791141B (en) * | 2014-12-23 | 2019-02-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of flow table method of replacing and device |
US10015048B2 (en) | 2014-12-27 | 2018-07-03 | Intel Corporation | Programmable protocol parser for NIC classification and queue assignments |
WO2016106480A1 (en) | 2014-12-29 | 2016-07-07 | Empire Technology Development Llc | Network controller security monitor |
US9628407B2 (en) | 2014-12-31 | 2017-04-18 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Multiple software versions in a switch group |
US9626255B2 (en) | 2014-12-31 | 2017-04-18 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Online restoration of a switch snapshot |
US10003552B2 (en) | 2015-01-05 | 2018-06-19 | Brocade Communications Systems, Llc. | Distributed bidirectional forwarding detection protocol (D-BFD) for cluster of interconnected switches |
US9942097B2 (en) | 2015-01-05 | 2018-04-10 | Brocade Communications Systems LLC | Power management in a network of interconnected switches |
US9614789B2 (en) * | 2015-01-08 | 2017-04-04 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Supporting multiple virtual switches on a single host |
US11924018B2 (en) | 2015-01-27 | 2024-03-05 | Dell Products L.P. | System for decomposing events and unstructured data |
US10979304B2 (en) * | 2015-01-27 | 2021-04-13 | Moogsoft Inc. | Agent technology system with monitoring policy |
US11817993B2 (en) | 2015-01-27 | 2023-11-14 | Dell Products L.P. | System for decomposing events and unstructured data |
US9787605B2 (en) | 2015-01-30 | 2017-10-10 | Nicira, Inc. | Logical router with multiple routing components |
US11895138B1 (en) | 2015-02-02 | 2024-02-06 | F5, Inc. | Methods for improving web scanner accuracy and devices thereof |
CN105991435B (en) * | 2015-02-05 | 2019-08-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | For obtaining the method and device of port path |
US10601698B2 (en) * | 2015-02-06 | 2020-03-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Techniques for managing telemetry data for content delivery and/or data transfer networks |
US9813323B2 (en) | 2015-02-10 | 2017-11-07 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling switches to capture and monitor network traffic |
CN105991389B (en) * | 2015-02-11 | 2019-04-12 | 新华三技术有限公司 | A kind of retransmission method and device of virtual expansible local network packet |
US11792872B2 (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2023-10-17 | Intel Corporation | Methods and apparatuses associated with reestablishment of a network connection with a child node |
US9785412B1 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2017-10-10 | Glue Networks, Inc. | Methods and systems for object-oriented modeling of networks |
US10009270B1 (en) * | 2015-03-01 | 2018-06-26 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Modular and partitioned SDN switch |
US9998374B1 (en) * | 2015-03-01 | 2018-06-12 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Method of handling SDN protocol messages in a modular and partitioned SDN switch |
US9503372B1 (en) | 2015-03-01 | 2016-11-22 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | SDN protocol message handling within a modular and partitioned SDN switch |
US9467378B1 (en) | 2015-03-01 | 2016-10-11 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Method of generating subflow entries in an SDN switch |
US9729442B1 (en) | 2015-03-01 | 2017-08-08 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Method of detecting large flows within a switch fabric of an SDN switch |
US9699084B1 (en) | 2015-03-01 | 2017-07-04 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Forwarding messages within a switch fabric of an SDN switch |
US10257268B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2019-04-09 | Vapor IO Inc. | Distributed peer-to-peer data center management |
US10404523B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2019-09-03 | Vapor IO Inc. | Data center management with rack-controllers |
US9532488B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2016-12-27 | Vapor IO Inc. | Rack for computing equipment |
US11349701B2 (en) * | 2015-03-09 | 2022-05-31 | Vapor IO Inc. | Data center management with rack-controllers |
US10833940B2 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2020-11-10 | Vapor IO Inc. | Autonomous distributed workload and infrastructure scheduling |
US9807005B2 (en) | 2015-03-17 | 2017-10-31 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Multi-fabric manager |
US10038592B2 (en) | 2015-03-17 | 2018-07-31 | Brocade Communications Systems LLC | Identifier assignment to a new switch in a switch group |
CN106161333B (en) * | 2015-03-24 | 2021-01-15 | 华为技术有限公司 | SDN-based DDOS attack protection method, device and system |
US10834065B1 (en) | 2015-03-31 | 2020-11-10 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for SSL protected NTLM re-authentication and devices thereof |
CN104754053B (en) * | 2015-04-01 | 2017-12-19 | 清华大学深圳研究生院 | A kind of distributed software defines network and the wherein method of dynamic control controller |
US10747564B2 (en) * | 2015-04-02 | 2020-08-18 | Vmware, Inc. | Spanned distributed virtual switch |
US10044676B2 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2018-08-07 | Nicira, Inc. | Using headerspace analysis to identify unneeded distributed firewall rules |
US9967134B2 (en) | 2015-04-06 | 2018-05-08 | Nicira, Inc. | Reduction of network churn based on differences in input state |
US20160301575A1 (en) * | 2015-04-07 | 2016-10-13 | Quanta Computer Inc. | Set up and verification of cabling connections in a network |
US10579406B2 (en) | 2015-04-08 | 2020-03-03 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Dynamic orchestration of overlay tunnels |
US10756984B2 (en) | 2015-04-13 | 2020-08-25 | Wirepath Home Systems, Llc | Method and apparatus for creating and managing network device port VLAN configurations |
KR101658824B1 (en) * | 2015-04-15 | 2016-09-22 | 아토리서치(주) | Method, apparatus and computer program for updating flow rules of software defined network |
US10884869B2 (en) | 2015-04-16 | 2021-01-05 | Nuodb, Inc. | Backup and restore in a distributed database utilizing consistent database snapshots |
US9942058B2 (en) | 2015-04-17 | 2018-04-10 | Nicira, Inc. | Managing tunnel endpoints for facilitating creation of logical networks |
US10412157B2 (en) * | 2015-04-23 | 2019-09-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Adaptive load balancing |
US20160316011A1 (en) * | 2015-04-27 | 2016-10-27 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Sdn network element affinity based data partition and flexible migration schemes |
US10069941B2 (en) | 2015-04-28 | 2018-09-04 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Scalable event-based notifications |
US10505818B1 (en) | 2015-05-05 | 2019-12-10 | F5 Networks. Inc. | Methods for analyzing and load balancing based on server health and devices thereof |
US11350254B1 (en) | 2015-05-05 | 2022-05-31 | F5, Inc. | Methods for enforcing compliance policies and devices thereof |
US10673978B2 (en) | 2015-05-06 | 2020-06-02 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Method and system for implementing network experience shifting using shared objects |
US10481938B2 (en) | 2015-05-06 | 2019-11-19 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | System and method for implementing network experience shifting |
EP3288224B1 (en) | 2015-05-15 | 2019-11-06 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Data packet forwarding method and network device |
US10033638B1 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2018-07-24 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Executing a selected sequence of instructions depending on packet type in an exact-match flow switch |
US9641436B1 (en) | 2015-05-29 | 2017-05-02 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Generating a flow ID by passing packet data serially through two CCT circuits |
US10067969B2 (en) | 2015-05-29 | 2018-09-04 | Nuodb, Inc. | Table partitioning within distributed database systems |
US9807006B1 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2017-10-31 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Crossbar and an egress packet modifier in an exact-match flow switch |
US9912591B1 (en) | 2015-05-29 | 2018-03-06 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Flow switch IC that uses flow IDs and an exact-match flow table |
US9819585B1 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2017-11-14 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Making a flow ID for an exact-match flow table using a programmable reduce table circuit |
US10180954B2 (en) | 2015-05-29 | 2019-01-15 | Nuodb, Inc. | Disconnected operation within distributed database systems |
US9756152B1 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2017-09-05 | Netronome Systems, Inc. | Making a flow ID for an exact-match flow table using a byte-wide multiplexer circuit |
US9819577B2 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2017-11-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Adjusting control-plane allocation of packet processing resources |
US10015115B2 (en) | 2015-06-01 | 2018-07-03 | Ciena Corporation | Software defined networking service control systems and methods of remote services |
CN104869058B (en) * | 2015-06-04 | 2018-10-19 | 北京京东尚科信息技术有限公司 | A kind of data message forwarding method and device |
US9734000B2 (en) * | 2015-06-18 | 2017-08-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Seamless transitions between applications and devices |
US10554484B2 (en) | 2015-06-26 | 2020-02-04 | Nicira, Inc. | Control plane integration with hardware switches |
US9825851B2 (en) * | 2015-06-27 | 2017-11-21 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributing routing information in a multi-datacenter environment |
US9992113B2 (en) * | 2015-06-30 | 2018-06-05 | Vmware, Inc. | Virtual network interface controller performance using physical network interface controller receive side scaling offloads |
US10063428B1 (en) | 2015-06-30 | 2018-08-28 | Apstra, Inc. | Selectable declarative requirement levels |
US10541966B1 (en) * | 2015-07-02 | 2020-01-21 | Aviatrix Systems, Inc. | System and method for enabling communication between networks with overlapping IP address ranges |
US9912604B2 (en) * | 2015-07-29 | 2018-03-06 | Nxp Usa, Inc. | Reduction of silicon area for ethernet PFC protocol implementation in queue based network processors |
US10439929B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2019-10-08 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Graceful recovery of a multicast-enabled switch |
US9967182B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2018-05-08 | Nicira, Inc. | Enabling hardware switches to perform logical routing functionalities |
US10091056B1 (en) * | 2015-08-06 | 2018-10-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Distribution of modular router configuration |
US10230629B2 (en) | 2015-08-11 | 2019-03-12 | Nicira, Inc. | Static route configuration for logical router |
US10581976B2 (en) | 2015-08-12 | 2020-03-03 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Transmission control of protocol state exchange for dynamic stateful service insertion |
US10243791B2 (en) | 2015-08-13 | 2019-03-26 | A10 Networks, Inc. | Automated adjustment of subscriber policies |
CN106712988B (en) * | 2015-08-25 | 2019-11-12 | 新华三技术有限公司 | A kind of virtual network management method and device |
US9825862B2 (en) | 2015-08-26 | 2017-11-21 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Packet header field extraction |
IL240909A (en) * | 2015-08-27 | 2017-04-30 | Syber 2 0 (2015) Ltd | Port scrambling for computer networks |
US10057157B2 (en) | 2015-08-31 | 2018-08-21 | Nicira, Inc. | Automatically advertising NAT routes between logical routers |
US10313186B2 (en) | 2015-08-31 | 2019-06-04 | Nicira, Inc. | Scalable controller for hardware VTEPS |
ES2678950T3 (en) * | 2015-09-14 | 2018-08-21 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Procedure for the configuration of a modular control device of an industrial automation system and modular control device |
US10171303B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-01-01 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | IP-based interconnection of switches with a logical chassis |
US9760513B2 (en) * | 2015-09-22 | 2017-09-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Low latency efficient sharing of resources in multi-server ecosystems |
US10129082B2 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-11-13 | Dell Products, L.P. | System and method for determining a master remote access controller in an information handling system |
US10419282B1 (en) | 2015-09-24 | 2019-09-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Self-configuring network devices |
US9923816B2 (en) | 2015-09-24 | 2018-03-20 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Data-plane stateful processing units in packet processing pipelines |
US10523764B2 (en) * | 2015-09-24 | 2019-12-31 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Data-plane stateful processing units in packet processing pipelines |
US9882833B2 (en) | 2015-09-28 | 2018-01-30 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Intent-based services orchestration |
US9998324B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2018-06-12 | Nicira, Inc. | Logical L3 processing for L2 hardware switches |
US10204122B2 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2019-02-12 | Nicira, Inc. | Implementing an interface between tuple and message-driven control entities |
US9948577B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2018-04-17 | Nicira, Inc. | IP aliases in logical networks with hardware switches |
US10263828B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2019-04-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Preventing concurrent distribution of network data to a hardware switch by multiple controllers |
US10652112B2 (en) * | 2015-10-02 | 2020-05-12 | Keysight Technologies Singapore (Sales) Pte. Ltd. | Network traffic pre-classification within VM platforms in virtual processing environments |
US10078528B2 (en) | 2015-10-06 | 2018-09-18 | Centurylink Intellectual Property Llc | Virtual machine-to-port peripheral device driver for implementing communications between virtual machines and client devices |
JP6733147B2 (en) * | 2015-10-07 | 2020-07-29 | 富士通株式会社 | Communication system, relay method, and relay program |
CN106572051A (en) * | 2015-10-09 | 2017-04-19 | 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 | Distributed lock service realizing method and device for distributed system |
US10333897B2 (en) | 2015-10-23 | 2019-06-25 | Attala Systems Corporation | Distributed firewalls and virtual network services using network packets with security tags |
US10069904B2 (en) | 2015-10-26 | 2018-09-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | IP routing pool distribution among forwarding elements in SDN service core deployment |
US9774526B2 (en) | 2015-10-29 | 2017-09-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Operating a port shared by multiple controllers in a software defined network |
US10095535B2 (en) | 2015-10-31 | 2018-10-09 | Nicira, Inc. | Static route types for logical routers |
US10250553B2 (en) | 2015-11-03 | 2019-04-02 | Nicira, Inc. | ARP offloading for managed hardware forwarding elements |
US9961033B2 (en) | 2015-11-09 | 2018-05-01 | Red Hat Israel, Ltd. | Memory-mapped input/output (I/O) channel |
JP6494787B2 (en) * | 2015-11-10 | 2019-04-03 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Distributed storage system |
US10860520B2 (en) * | 2015-11-18 | 2020-12-08 | Oracle International Corporation | Integration of a virtualized input/output device in a computer system |
EP3176213B1 (en) | 2015-12-03 | 2019-04-24 | Scg Chemicals Co. Ltd. | Ethylene copolymer composition |
US9912614B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2018-03-06 | Brocade Communications Systems LLC | Interconnection of switches based on hierarchical overlay tunneling |
US9998375B2 (en) * | 2015-12-15 | 2018-06-12 | Nicira, Inc. | Transactional controls for supplying control plane data to managed hardware forwarding elements |
US10225149B2 (en) * | 2015-12-15 | 2019-03-05 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and tool for diagnosing logical networks |
US11757946B1 (en) | 2015-12-22 | 2023-09-12 | F5, Inc. | Methods for analyzing network traffic and enforcing network policies and devices thereof |
US9912774B2 (en) | 2015-12-22 | 2018-03-06 | Intel Corporation | Accelerated network packet processing |
US10313206B1 (en) | 2015-12-23 | 2019-06-04 | Apstra, Inc. | Verifying service status |
US9372881B1 (en) * | 2015-12-29 | 2016-06-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for identifying a correspondence between a COBOL copybook or PL/1 include file and a VSAM or sequential dataset |
US10341135B2 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2019-07-02 | Nova-Tron Controls Corp. | Zone control system for conveyor system |
US10397196B2 (en) | 2017-02-28 | 2019-08-27 | Cyber 2.0 (2015) Ltd. | Port-scrambling-based networks |
AU2016381499A1 (en) | 2015-12-31 | 2018-08-09 | Cyber 2.0 (2015) Ltd. | Monitoring traffic in a computer network |
US9396248B1 (en) * | 2016-01-04 | 2016-07-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Modified data query function instantiations |
KR101729944B1 (en) | 2016-01-12 | 2017-04-25 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Method for supplying ip address by multi tunant network system based on sdn |
KR101729939B1 (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2017-04-25 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Multi tunant network system based on sdn |
KR101729945B1 (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2017-04-25 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Method for supporting multi tunant by network system based on sdn |
WO2017122847A1 (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2017-07-20 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Method for sdn-based network system supporting multi-tenants and system for same |
WO2017122848A1 (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2017-07-20 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Sdn-based network system for supporting multi-tenants and method for supporting multi-tenants |
US10404698B1 (en) | 2016-01-15 | 2019-09-03 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for adaptive organization of web application access points in webtops and devices thereof |
US11178150B1 (en) | 2016-01-20 | 2021-11-16 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for enforcing access control list based on managed application and devices thereof |
US10148538B2 (en) | 2016-01-21 | 2018-12-04 | Fujitsu Limited | Distributed controllers |
KR101797112B1 (en) | 2016-01-25 | 2017-11-15 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Manegement system for container network |
WO2017131285A1 (en) * | 2016-01-25 | 2017-08-03 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Container network management system and container networking method |
KR101797115B1 (en) | 2016-01-25 | 2017-11-15 | 쿨클라우드(주) | Method for container networking of container network |
US9848061B1 (en) * | 2016-10-28 | 2017-12-19 | Vignet Incorporated | System and method for rules engine that dynamically adapts application behavior |
US9928230B1 (en) | 2016-09-29 | 2018-03-27 | Vignet Incorporated | Variable and dynamic adjustments to electronic forms |
WO2017138952A1 (en) * | 2016-02-12 | 2017-08-17 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Generating protocol-specific instructions for ambiguous forwarding behavior |
US10241820B2 (en) | 2016-03-14 | 2019-03-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Determining the realization status of logical entities in logical networks |
US10243797B2 (en) | 2016-03-14 | 2019-03-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Identifying the realization status of logical entities based on a global realization number |
JP6650049B2 (en) * | 2016-03-31 | 2020-02-19 | エヌイーシー ラボラトリーズ ヨーロッパ ゲーエムベーハー | Software Improved Stateful Switching Architecture |
US10009218B2 (en) * | 2016-04-01 | 2018-06-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Automatic setup of failure detection sessions |
US10523598B2 (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2019-12-31 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Multi-path virtual switching |
CN107302443B (en) * | 2016-04-15 | 2020-10-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Equipment configuration method and device based on network configuration protocol |
US11019167B2 (en) | 2016-04-29 | 2021-05-25 | Nicira, Inc. | Management of update queues for network controller |
US10756945B2 (en) | 2016-05-11 | 2020-08-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Virtualized network management protocols |
US10374872B2 (en) | 2016-05-24 | 2019-08-06 | Apstra, Inc. | Configuring system resources for different reference architectures |
CN106101031B (en) * | 2016-06-02 | 2019-03-26 | 浙江工商大学 | It is a kind of to forward and packet fragmentation method for parallel processing in control separation system |
US10432484B2 (en) | 2016-06-13 | 2019-10-01 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Aggregating select network traffic statistics |
US10182035B2 (en) | 2016-06-29 | 2019-01-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Implementing logical network security on a hardware switch |
US10153973B2 (en) | 2016-06-29 | 2018-12-11 | Nicira, Inc. | Installation of routing tables for logical router in route server mode |
WO2018020290A1 (en) * | 2016-07-25 | 2018-02-01 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Fast control path and data path convergence in layer 2 overlay networks |
US10277528B2 (en) | 2016-08-11 | 2019-04-30 | Fujitsu Limited | Resource management for distributed software defined network controller |
US11223537B1 (en) * | 2016-08-17 | 2022-01-11 | Veritas Technologies Llc | Executing custom scripts from the host during disaster recovery |
US9967056B1 (en) | 2016-08-19 | 2018-05-08 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Forward packet recovery with constrained overhead |
US10075373B2 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2018-09-11 | Viasat, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing traffic forwarder via dynamic overlay network |
US10397136B2 (en) * | 2016-08-27 | 2019-08-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Managed forwarding element executing in separate namespace of public cloud data compute node than workload application |
US10341371B2 (en) | 2016-08-31 | 2019-07-02 | Nicira, Inc. | Identifying and handling threats to data compute nodes in public cloud |
US10404593B2 (en) | 2016-08-29 | 2019-09-03 | Vmware, Inc. | Stateful connection optimization over stretched networks with temporary tromboning |
US10454758B2 (en) | 2016-08-31 | 2019-10-22 | Nicira, Inc. | Edge node cluster network redundancy and fast convergence using an underlay anycast VTEP IP |
US9762661B1 (en) | 2016-09-22 | 2017-09-12 | Red Hat Israel, Ltd. | Managing networks in a virtualization system |
EP3516829B1 (en) | 2016-09-26 | 2021-07-07 | Nant Holdings IP, LLC | Virtual circuits in cloud networks |
US10341236B2 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2019-07-02 | Nicira, Inc. | Anycast edge service gateways |
US10439932B2 (en) * | 2016-10-05 | 2019-10-08 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | System and method for flow rule management in software-defined networks |
US10275298B2 (en) | 2016-10-12 | 2019-04-30 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Alerting system having a network of stateful transformation nodes |
US10412198B1 (en) | 2016-10-27 | 2019-09-10 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for improved transmission control protocol (TCP) performance visibility and devices thereof |
US10237090B2 (en) | 2016-10-28 | 2019-03-19 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | Rule-based network identifier mapping |
US10341255B2 (en) | 2016-10-28 | 2019-07-02 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Switch resource manager |
US11063758B1 (en) | 2016-11-01 | 2021-07-13 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for facilitating cipher selection and devices thereof |
US10366103B2 (en) * | 2016-11-01 | 2019-07-30 | Sap Se | Load balancing for elastic query service system |
US10505792B1 (en) | 2016-11-02 | 2019-12-10 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for facilitating network traffic analytics and devices thereof |
CN106603409B (en) * | 2016-11-30 | 2020-02-14 | 中国科学院计算技术研究所 | Data processing system, method and equipment |
US10528599B1 (en) * | 2016-12-16 | 2020-01-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Tiered data processing for distributed data |
US11074261B1 (en) | 2016-12-16 | 2021-07-27 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Format independent processing for distributed data |
US10004097B1 (en) * | 2016-12-20 | 2018-06-19 | Intel Corporation | Reestablishment of a network connection with an end device node methods and apparatuses |
CN110741610B (en) | 2017-01-09 | 2021-11-12 | 马维尔亚洲私人有限公司 | Port expander with local switching |
US10616337B1 (en) * | 2017-01-17 | 2020-04-07 | Allscripts Software, Llc | Graphical user interface (GUI) that facilitates database migration |
US11567994B2 (en) | 2017-01-24 | 2023-01-31 | Apstra, Inc. | Configuration, telemetry, and analytics of a computer infrastructure using a graph model |
US10419366B1 (en) | 2017-01-31 | 2019-09-17 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Mechanism for communicating to remote control plane from forwarding element |
US10673706B2 (en) * | 2017-01-31 | 2020-06-02 | Ca Technologies, Inc. | Integrated infrastructure and application performance monitoring |
US10257082B2 (en) | 2017-02-06 | 2019-04-09 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Multi-level learning for classifying traffic flows |
US10892978B2 (en) | 2017-02-06 | 2021-01-12 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Multi-level learning for classifying traffic flows from first packet data |
US11044202B2 (en) | 2017-02-06 | 2021-06-22 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Multi-level learning for predicting and classifying traffic flows from first packet data |
US10771394B2 (en) | 2017-02-06 | 2020-09-08 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Multi-level learning for classifying traffic flows on a first packet from DNS data |
US10831470B2 (en) * | 2017-02-28 | 2020-11-10 | Arista Networks, Inc. | Simulating a topology of network elements |
US10812266B1 (en) | 2017-03-17 | 2020-10-20 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for managing security tokens based on security violations and devices thereof |
CN108632122B (en) * | 2017-03-20 | 2022-01-07 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method and device for realizing double control planes |
US10587479B2 (en) | 2017-04-02 | 2020-03-10 | Nicira, Inc. | GUI for analysis of logical network modifications |
US10826788B2 (en) | 2017-04-20 | 2020-11-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Assurance of quality-of-service configurations in a network |
US10560328B2 (en) | 2017-04-20 | 2020-02-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Static network policy analysis for networks |
US10623264B2 (en) | 2017-04-20 | 2020-04-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Policy assurance for service chaining |
US10694006B1 (en) | 2017-04-23 | 2020-06-23 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Generation of descriptive data for packet fields |
US10812342B2 (en) | 2017-04-28 | 2020-10-20 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Generating composite network policy |
US10536348B2 (en) | 2017-04-28 | 2020-01-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Operational micro-services design, development, deployment |
US11343237B1 (en) | 2017-05-12 | 2022-05-24 | F5, Inc. | Methods for managing a federated identity environment using security and access control data and devices thereof |
US11122042B1 (en) | 2017-05-12 | 2021-09-14 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for dynamically managing user access control and devices thereof |
CN108880969B (en) * | 2017-05-16 | 2021-02-02 | 上海层峰网络科技有限公司 | Method and device for establishing link in SDN network |
US10812318B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2020-10-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Associating network policy objects with specific faults corresponding to fault localizations in large-scale network deployment |
US10505816B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2019-12-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Semantic analysis to detect shadowing of rules in a model of network intents |
US10693738B2 (en) * | 2017-05-31 | 2020-06-23 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Generating device-level logical models for a network |
US10623271B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2020-04-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Intra-priority class ordering of rules corresponding to a model of network intents |
US20180351788A1 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2018-12-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Fault localization in large-scale network policy deployment |
US10439875B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2019-10-08 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Identification of conflict rules in a network intent formal equivalence failure |
US10554483B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2020-02-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network policy analysis for networks |
US10581694B2 (en) | 2017-05-31 | 2020-03-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Generation of counter examples for network intent formal equivalence failures |
US11095529B2 (en) | 2017-06-05 | 2021-08-17 | Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. | Systems and methods for disaggregated software defined networking control |
US11150973B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2021-10-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Self diagnosing distributed appliance |
US10904101B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2021-01-26 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Shim layer for extracting and prioritizing underlying rules for modeling network intents |
US10547715B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2020-01-28 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Event generation in response to network intent formal equivalence failures |
US10587621B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2020-03-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for migrating to and maintaining a white-list network security model |
US10574513B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2020-02-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Handling controller and node failure scenarios during data collection |
US11645131B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2023-05-09 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Distributed fault code aggregation across application centric dimensions |
US10686669B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2020-06-16 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Collecting network models and node information from a network |
US10498608B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2019-12-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Topology explorer |
US11469986B2 (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2022-10-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Controlled micro fault injection on a distributed appliance |
US10812336B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-10-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of bridge domain-L3out association for communication outside a network |
US10567228B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-02-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of cross logical groups in a network |
US11283680B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2022-03-22 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Identifying components for removal in a network configuration |
US10528444B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-01-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Event generation in response to validation between logical level and hardware level |
US10805160B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-10-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Endpoint bridge domain subnet validation |
US10644946B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-05-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Detection of overlapping subnets in a network |
US10652102B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-05-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network node memory utilization analysis |
US10536337B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-01-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of layer 2 interface and VLAN in a networked environment |
US10554493B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-02-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Identifying mismatches between a logical model and node implementation |
US10432467B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-10-01 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network validation between the logical level and the hardware level of a network |
US10547509B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-01-28 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of a virtual port channel (VPC) endpoint in the network fabric |
US10673702B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-06-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of layer 3 using virtual routing forwarding containers in a network |
US11343150B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2022-05-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of learned routes in a network |
US10411996B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-09-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of routing information in a network fabric |
US10437641B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-10-08 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | On-demand processing pipeline interleaved with temporal processing pipeline |
US10333787B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-06-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of L3OUT configuration for communications outside a network |
US10623259B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-04-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of layer 1 interface in a network |
US10505817B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-12-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Automatically determining an optimal amount of time for analyzing a distributed network environment |
US10341184B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-07-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of layer 3 bridge domain subnets in in a network |
US10700933B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-06-30 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validating tunnel endpoint addresses in a network fabric |
US10348564B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-07-09 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validation of routing information base-forwarding information base equivalence in a network |
US10560355B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-02-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Static endpoint validation |
US10218572B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2019-02-26 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Multiprotocol border gateway protocol routing validation |
US10567229B2 (en) | 2017-06-19 | 2020-02-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Validating endpoint configurations between nodes |
US10873473B2 (en) | 2017-07-17 | 2020-12-22 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed multicast logical router |
US10601732B1 (en) | 2017-07-23 | 2020-03-24 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Configurable packet processing pipeline for handling non-packet data |
US10530740B2 (en) * | 2017-07-26 | 2020-01-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Systems and methods for facilitating closed loop processing using machine learning |
KR102600366B1 (en) | 2017-08-15 | 2023-11-08 | 누오디비 인코포레이티드 | Index partitioning in distributed databases |
US10567482B2 (en) | 2017-08-24 | 2020-02-18 | Nicira, Inc. | Accessing endpoints in logical networks and public cloud service providers native networks using a single network interface and a single routing table |
US10491516B2 (en) | 2017-08-24 | 2019-11-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet communication between logical networks and public cloud service providers native networks using a single network interface and a single routing table |
WO2019046071A1 (en) | 2017-08-27 | 2019-03-07 | Nicira, Inc. | Performing in-line service in public cloud |
US10592153B1 (en) * | 2017-09-05 | 2020-03-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Redistributing a data set amongst partitions according to a secondary hashing scheme |
US10587456B2 (en) | 2017-09-12 | 2020-03-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Event clustering for a network assurance platform |
US10587484B2 (en) | 2017-09-12 | 2020-03-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Anomaly detection and reporting in a network assurance appliance |
US10554477B2 (en) | 2017-09-13 | 2020-02-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network assurance event aggregator |
US10614028B2 (en) * | 2017-09-14 | 2020-04-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Network traffic routing in distributed computing systems |
US11212210B2 (en) | 2017-09-21 | 2021-12-28 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Selective route exporting using source type |
US10333833B2 (en) | 2017-09-25 | 2019-06-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Endpoint path assurance |
US10771387B1 (en) | 2017-09-28 | 2020-09-08 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Multiple packet data container types for a processing pipeline |
US11038887B2 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2021-06-15 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. | Enhanced smart process control switch port lockdown |
US10965586B2 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2021-03-30 | Fungible, Inc. | Resilient network communication using selective multipath packet flow spraying |
GB2567556B (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2022-07-13 | Fisher Rosemount Systems Inc | Enhanced smart process control switch port lockdown |
US11188355B2 (en) * | 2017-10-11 | 2021-11-30 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Data plane program verification |
US10419327B2 (en) | 2017-10-12 | 2019-09-17 | Big Switch Networks, Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling switches to record network packets using a traffic monitoring network |
US11153156B2 (en) | 2017-11-03 | 2021-10-19 | Vignet Incorporated | Achieving personalized outcomes with digital therapeutic applications |
US11082398B2 (en) | 2017-11-16 | 2021-08-03 | Nicira, Inc. | Method for securing a DHCP server from unauthorized client attacks in a software defined network |
US10862753B2 (en) | 2017-12-04 | 2020-12-08 | Nicira, Inc. | High availability for stateful services in public cloud logical networks |
US10601705B2 (en) | 2017-12-04 | 2020-03-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Failover of centralized routers in public cloud logical networks |
US11102053B2 (en) | 2017-12-05 | 2021-08-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Cross-domain assurance |
US10756983B2 (en) | 2017-12-08 | 2020-08-25 | Apstra, Inc. | Intent-based analytics |
CN108228393A (en) * | 2017-12-14 | 2018-06-29 | 浙江航天恒嘉数据科技有限公司 | A kind of implementation method of expansible big data High Availabitity |
CN108108463B (en) * | 2017-12-29 | 2021-08-24 | 北京奇虎科技有限公司 | Synchronous task processing method and device based on time slice scheduling |
US10719533B2 (en) * | 2018-01-03 | 2020-07-21 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Multi-tenant tables of a distributed database |
US11223689B1 (en) | 2018-01-05 | 2022-01-11 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Methods for multipath transmission control protocol (MPTCP) based session migration and devices thereof |
US10873509B2 (en) | 2018-01-17 | 2020-12-22 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Check-pointing ACI network state and re-execution from a check-pointed state |
CN108183862B (en) * | 2018-01-24 | 2021-02-09 | 上海宽带技术及应用工程研究中心 | Communication method/system of software-defined switching network, readable storage medium and device |
US10848461B2 (en) * | 2018-01-26 | 2020-11-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Unified security policies across virtual private clouds with overlapping IP address blocks |
US10572495B2 (en) | 2018-02-06 | 2020-02-25 | Cisco Technology Inc. | Network assurance database version compatibility |
US10637721B2 (en) | 2018-03-12 | 2020-04-28 | Silver Peak Systems, Inc. | Detecting path break conditions while minimizing network overhead |
US10635428B2 (en) | 2018-03-30 | 2020-04-28 | Arista Networks, Inc. | System and method for in-service update of software |
US10694500B2 (en) * | 2018-04-04 | 2020-06-23 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Communication channels between access points and network zones |
US10938751B2 (en) | 2018-04-18 | 2021-03-02 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Hierarchical switching devices |
US11194930B2 (en) | 2018-04-27 | 2021-12-07 | Datatrendz, Llc | Unobtrusive systems and methods for collecting, processing and securing information transmitted over a network |
US10931547B2 (en) | 2018-05-21 | 2021-02-23 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Data plane with heavy hitter detector |
US10812315B2 (en) | 2018-06-07 | 2020-10-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Cross-domain network assurance |
US11632332B2 (en) * | 2018-06-07 | 2023-04-18 | Vmware, Inc. | Packet classification with multiple classifiers |
US11258760B1 (en) | 2018-06-22 | 2022-02-22 | Vmware, Inc. | Stateful distributed web application firewall |
US10700957B1 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2020-06-30 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Network devices using probes to test forwarding rules |
US10812364B1 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2020-10-20 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Testing forwarding states of a network device using probe detection and reflection |
US10805199B1 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2020-10-13 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Testing forwarding information in a network switch |
US10911495B2 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2021-02-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Assurance of security rules in a network |
US10785139B1 (en) * | 2018-06-27 | 2020-09-22 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Network devices using probes to test forwarding rules |
US11563668B1 (en) * | 2018-06-27 | 2023-01-24 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Network devices using probes to test forwarding rules |
US10659298B1 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2020-05-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Epoch comparison for network events |
US11019027B2 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2021-05-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Address translation for external network appliance |
US11044273B2 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2021-06-22 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Assurance of security rules in a network |
US11218508B2 (en) | 2018-06-27 | 2022-01-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Assurance of security rules in a network |
US11343229B2 (en) | 2018-06-28 | 2022-05-24 | Vmware, Inc. | Managed forwarding element detecting invalid packet addresses |
EP3821338A4 (en) * | 2018-07-10 | 2022-02-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Mechanism for hitless resynchronization during sdn controller upgrades between incompatible versions |
US10904070B2 (en) | 2018-07-11 | 2021-01-26 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Techniques and interfaces for troubleshooting datacenter networks |
US11398968B2 (en) | 2018-07-17 | 2022-07-26 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for testing virtualized network functions and related infrastructure |
US11936562B2 (en) * | 2018-07-19 | 2024-03-19 | Vmware, Inc. | Virtual machine packet processing offload |
US10826770B2 (en) | 2018-07-26 | 2020-11-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Synthesis of models for networks using automated boolean learning |
US10616072B1 (en) | 2018-07-27 | 2020-04-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Epoch data interface |
US10771401B2 (en) | 2018-08-13 | 2020-09-08 | Barefoot Networks, Inc. | Forwarding element data plane with computing parameter distributor |
US10868728B2 (en) | 2018-08-22 | 2020-12-15 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Graph-based network management |
US11196591B2 (en) | 2018-08-24 | 2021-12-07 | Vmware, Inc. | Centralized overlay gateway in public cloud |
US10491466B1 (en) | 2018-08-24 | 2019-11-26 | Vmware, Inc. | Intelligent use of peering in public cloud |
US11374794B2 (en) | 2018-08-24 | 2022-06-28 | Vmware, Inc. | Transitive routing in public cloud |
US10868748B1 (en) | 2018-09-27 | 2020-12-15 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Testing forwarding states on multiple pipelines of a network device |
US12003422B1 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2024-06-04 | F5, Inc. | Methods for switching network packets based on packet data and devices |
US20200125664A1 (en) * | 2018-10-19 | 2020-04-23 | Sap Se | Network virtualization for web application traffic flows |
US10771318B1 (en) | 2018-10-24 | 2020-09-08 | Vmware, Inc | High availability on a distributed networking platform |
US11855913B2 (en) | 2018-10-31 | 2023-12-26 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Hierarchical switching device with deadlockable storage and storage partitions |
US10846179B2 (en) | 2018-11-05 | 2020-11-24 | Arista Networks, Inc. | Hitless repair for network device components |
US10931560B2 (en) | 2018-11-23 | 2021-02-23 | Vmware, Inc. | Using route type to determine routing protocol behavior |
EP3888309A4 (en) | 2018-11-26 | 2022-08-10 | Arrcus Inc. | Logical router comprising disaggregated network elements |
CN109728992B (en) * | 2018-11-27 | 2021-09-28 | 苏州盛科通信股份有限公司 | Method, device, storage medium and electronic device for distributing forwarding domain |
US10735541B2 (en) | 2018-11-30 | 2020-08-04 | Vmware, Inc. | Distributed inline proxy |
US10797998B2 (en) | 2018-12-05 | 2020-10-06 | Vmware, Inc. | Route server for distributed routers using hierarchical routing protocol |
US10938788B2 (en) | 2018-12-12 | 2021-03-02 | Vmware, Inc. | Static routes for policy-based VPN |
US10873476B2 (en) * | 2018-12-31 | 2020-12-22 | Big Switch Networks Llc | Networks with multiple tiers of switches |
US10848345B2 (en) * | 2018-12-31 | 2020-11-24 | Hughes Network Systems, Llc | Multi-protocol encapsulation traffic acceleration and optimization |
EP3678033A1 (en) * | 2019-01-07 | 2020-07-08 | QlikTech International AB | A computer implemented method for indexlet based aggregation |
WO2020150648A1 (en) * | 2019-01-18 | 2020-07-23 | GalaxE.Solutions, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing an interactive visualization of an enterprise it environment |
US20200304368A1 (en) * | 2019-03-20 | 2020-09-24 | Arista Networks, Inc. | Accessing processing devices of a network device |
US10992543B1 (en) | 2019-03-21 | 2021-04-27 | Apstra, Inc. | Automatically generating an intent-based network model of an existing computer network |
US11301231B2 (en) | 2019-04-05 | 2022-04-12 | Arista Networks, Inc. | Dynamic run time programming of hardware tables |
US11075805B1 (en) | 2019-04-24 | 2021-07-27 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Business policy management for self-driving network |
US11418399B2 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2022-08-16 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Multi-fabric deployment and management platform |
CN110113261B (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2022-04-01 | 广东易臣信息技术有限公司 | Processing method and device for cross-system data exchange hierarchical packet routing |
WO2020240706A1 (en) * | 2019-05-28 | 2020-12-03 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | Network management device and method |
US10812576B1 (en) * | 2019-05-31 | 2020-10-20 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Hardware load balancer gateway on commodity switch hardware |
US10992515B1 (en) | 2019-06-10 | 2021-04-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Link state tracking for virtual interfaces |
US11140081B2 (en) * | 2019-10-01 | 2021-10-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Extending distributed hash table-based software network functions to switching hardware |
US11394733B2 (en) | 2019-11-12 | 2022-07-19 | Bank Of America Corporation | System for generation and implementation of resiliency controls for securing technology resources |
US11290475B2 (en) | 2019-11-12 | 2022-03-29 | Bank Of America Corporation | System for technology resource centric rapid resiliency modeling |
US11316713B2 (en) * | 2019-11-25 | 2022-04-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Virtual drawers in a server |
EP4078370A1 (en) * | 2019-12-17 | 2022-10-26 | Abb Schweiz Ag | Updating a digital object representing a real-world object |
US11726788B2 (en) * | 2019-12-18 | 2023-08-15 | International Business Machines Corporation | Tuple checkout with notify in coordination namespace system |
CN113326108A (en) * | 2020-02-28 | 2021-08-31 | 北京沃东天骏信息技术有限公司 | Method and device for managing application service |
EP3879782A1 (en) * | 2020-03-13 | 2021-09-15 | Deutsche Telekom AG | Methods and systems for message relay in a distributed architecture |
US11693644B2 (en) | 2020-03-17 | 2023-07-04 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | High performance computing node configuration mechanism |
US11258668B2 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2022-02-22 | Vmware, Inc. | Network controller for multi-site logical network |
US11777793B2 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2023-10-03 | Vmware, Inc. | Location criteria for security groups |
US11496437B2 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2022-11-08 | Vmware, Inc. | Selective ARP proxy |
US11394634B2 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2022-07-19 | Vmware, Inc. | Architecture for stretching logical switches between multiple datacenters |
US11799726B2 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2023-10-24 | Vmware, Inc. | Multi-site security groups |
US11088902B1 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2021-08-10 | Vmware, Inc. | Synchronization of logical network state between global and local managers |
US11586608B1 (en) | 2020-06-23 | 2023-02-21 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Handling requests to access separately stored items in a non-relational database |
US11949595B2 (en) * | 2020-06-26 | 2024-04-02 | Intel Corporation | Reflection routing as a framework for adaptive modular load balancing for multi-hierarchy network on chips |
US11056242B1 (en) | 2020-08-05 | 2021-07-06 | Vignet Incorporated | Predictive analysis and interventions to limit disease exposure |
US11504011B1 (en) | 2020-08-05 | 2022-11-22 | Vignet Incorporated | Early detection and prevention of infectious disease transmission using location data and geofencing |
US11456080B1 (en) | 2020-08-05 | 2022-09-27 | Vignet Incorporated | Adjusting disease data collection to provide high-quality health data to meet needs of different communities |
US11127506B1 (en) | 2020-08-05 | 2021-09-21 | Vignet Incorporated | Digital health tools to predict and prevent disease transmission |
CN111970199A (en) * | 2020-08-24 | 2020-11-20 | 浪潮云信息技术股份公司 | Implementation method for improving virtual machine network performance in openstack dvr mode |
US11343227B2 (en) | 2020-09-28 | 2022-05-24 | Vmware, Inc. | Application deployment in multi-site virtualization infrastructure |
US11323354B1 (en) | 2020-10-09 | 2022-05-03 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for network testing using switch emulation |
US11483227B2 (en) | 2020-10-13 | 2022-10-25 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems and computer readable media for active queue management |
US11763919B1 (en) | 2020-10-13 | 2023-09-19 | Vignet Incorporated | Platform to increase patient engagement in clinical trials through surveys presented on mobile devices |
US11283691B1 (en) | 2020-10-21 | 2022-03-22 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Model driven intent policy conflict detection and resolution through graph analysis |
WO2022085013A1 (en) * | 2020-10-22 | 2022-04-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | System and method to resync flow rules |
WO2022093241A1 (en) * | 2020-10-29 | 2022-05-05 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Generating statements |
US11570055B2 (en) | 2020-11-25 | 2023-01-31 | Apstra, Inc. | Connectivity templates |
US11782623B2 (en) * | 2020-12-15 | 2023-10-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Transferring an operating image into a multi-tenant environment |
US11483228B2 (en) | 2021-01-29 | 2022-10-25 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for network testing using an emulated data center environment |
US11281553B1 (en) | 2021-04-16 | 2022-03-22 | Vignet Incorporated | Digital systems for enrolling participants in health research and decentralized clinical trials |
US11586524B1 (en) | 2021-04-16 | 2023-02-21 | Vignet Incorporated | Assisting researchers to identify opportunities for new sub-studies in digital health research and decentralized clinical trials |
US11789837B1 (en) | 2021-02-03 | 2023-10-17 | Vignet Incorporated | Adaptive data collection in clinical trials to increase the likelihood of on-time completion of a trial |
US11934377B2 (en) | 2021-02-25 | 2024-03-19 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Consistency checking for distributed analytical database systems |
US11405302B1 (en) | 2021-03-11 | 2022-08-02 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for network testing using configurable test infrastructure |
US11388081B1 (en) | 2021-03-30 | 2022-07-12 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for impairment testing using an impairment device |
US11805101B2 (en) | 2021-04-06 | 2023-10-31 | Vmware, Inc. | Secured suppression of address discovery messages |
US11678250B2 (en) * | 2021-04-26 | 2023-06-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Mobility for wireless networks with multipath support |
US11595296B2 (en) | 2021-06-29 | 2023-02-28 | Vmware, Inc. | Active-active support of multicast streams in virtualized environment |
US11895010B2 (en) | 2021-06-29 | 2024-02-06 | VMware LLC | Active-active support of multicast streams in virtualized environment |
CN113630301B (en) * | 2021-08-19 | 2022-11-08 | 平安科技(深圳)有限公司 | Data transmission method, device and equipment based on intelligent decision and storage medium |
DE102021127285A1 (en) | 2021-10-21 | 2023-04-27 | Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft | NETWORK |
US11784926B2 (en) | 2021-11-22 | 2023-10-10 | Vmware, Inc. | Optimized processing of multicast data messages in a host |
US11901083B1 (en) | 2021-11-30 | 2024-02-13 | Vignet Incorporated | Using genetic and phenotypic data sets for drug discovery clinical trials |
US11705230B1 (en) | 2021-11-30 | 2023-07-18 | Vignet Incorporated | Assessing health risks using genetic, epigenetic, and phenotypic data sources |
US11729087B2 (en) | 2021-12-03 | 2023-08-15 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing adaptive background test traffic in a test environment |
US11765068B2 (en) | 2021-12-22 | 2023-09-19 | Keysight Technologies, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for programmable data plane processor based traffic impairment |
US20230327988A1 (en) * | 2022-04-08 | 2023-10-12 | Arista Networks, Inc. | Media access control address rewrite using egress header editing in traffic aggregation mode |
Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7263290B2 (en) * | 2002-06-06 | 2007-08-28 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Network operating system with distributed data architecture |
Family Cites Families (583)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3059532A (en) | 1959-01-12 | 1962-10-23 | Bell & Howell Co | Optical system |
US3004998A (en) | 1959-12-08 | 1961-10-17 | Ethyl Corp | Stable lead alkyl compositions and a method for preparing the same |
US4750113A (en) | 1985-02-28 | 1988-06-07 | Unisys Corporation | Dual function I/O controller |
US5049873A (en) | 1988-01-29 | 1991-09-17 | Network Equipment Technologies, Inc. | Communications network state and topology monitor |
US4961139A (en) * | 1988-06-30 | 1990-10-02 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Data base management system for real-time applications |
EP0737921B1 (en) | 1990-09-17 | 2000-06-28 | Cabletron Systems, Inc. | System and method for modelling a computer network |
US5245609A (en) | 1991-01-30 | 1993-09-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Communication network and a method of regulating the transmission of data packets in a communication network |
US5224100A (en) * | 1991-05-09 | 1993-06-29 | David Sarnoff Research Center, Inc. | Routing technique for a hierarchical interprocessor-communication network between massively-parallel processors |
US5774640A (en) * | 1991-10-21 | 1998-06-30 | Tandem Computers Incorporated | Method and apparatus for providing a fault tolerant network interface controller |
US5265092A (en) | 1992-03-18 | 1993-11-23 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Synchronization mechanism for link state packet routing |
US5742760A (en) | 1992-05-12 | 1998-04-21 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Network packet switch using shared memory for repeating and bridging packets at media rate |
JPH06250869A (en) | 1993-03-01 | 1994-09-09 | Hitachi Ltd | Distributed control system |
JPH0779233A (en) | 1993-06-29 | 1995-03-20 | Synoptics Commun Inc | Apparatus for establishing topology, method and apparatus for communicating topology information |
AU675362B2 (en) | 1993-09-01 | 1997-01-30 | Cabletron Systems, Inc. | Determination of network topology |
SE9402059D0 (en) | 1994-06-13 | 1994-06-13 | Ellemtel Utvecklings Ab | Methods and apparatus for telecommunications |
US5751967A (en) | 1994-07-25 | 1998-05-12 | Bay Networks Group, Inc. | Method and apparatus for automatically configuring a network device to support a virtual network |
US5550816A (en) | 1994-12-29 | 1996-08-27 | Storage Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for virtual switching |
US5903731A (en) | 1995-06-14 | 1999-05-11 | Us West Technologies, Inc. | System and associated method for re-engineering a telecommunications network support system with object-oriented translators |
EP0752666A3 (en) * | 1995-07-06 | 2004-04-28 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Method and apparatus for fast-forwarding slave requests in a packet-switched computer system |
US6035105A (en) | 1996-01-02 | 2000-03-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Multiple VLAN architecture system |
US6108304A (en) * | 1996-03-08 | 2000-08-22 | Abe; Hajime | Packet switching network, packet switching equipment, and network management equipment |
US5831975A (en) | 1996-04-04 | 1998-11-03 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for hierarchical multicast routing in ATM networks |
US5805791A (en) * | 1996-04-22 | 1998-09-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Method and system for detection of and graceful recovery from a peripheral device fault |
JPH09307587A (en) * | 1996-05-09 | 1997-11-28 | Fujitsu Ltd | Exchange |
KR20000015912A (en) | 1996-05-23 | 2000-03-15 | 존스 웨인 에이. | System and method for total telecommunications service commissioning |
IT1288076B1 (en) * | 1996-05-30 | 1998-09-10 | Antonio Esposito | ELECTRONIC NUMERICAL MULTIPROCESSOR PARALLEL MULTIPROCESSOR WITH REDUNDANCY OF COUPLED PROCESSORS |
US5832222A (en) | 1996-06-19 | 1998-11-03 | Ncr Corporation | Apparatus for providing a single image of an I/O subsystem in a geographically dispersed computer system |
JP3460773B2 (en) * | 1996-09-10 | 2003-10-27 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Communication control method in network system using double loop transmission system and network system using double loop transmission system |
US6208616B1 (en) * | 1997-05-13 | 2001-03-27 | 3Com Corporation | System for detecting errors in a network |
US6377998B2 (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2002-04-23 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and apparatus for performing frame processing for a network |
US6295299B1 (en) | 1997-08-29 | 2001-09-25 | Extreme Networks, Inc. | Data path architecture for a LAN switch |
US6104700A (en) | 1997-08-29 | 2000-08-15 | Extreme Networks | Policy based quality of service |
EP0910224B1 (en) | 1997-09-19 | 2007-06-06 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Apparatus and method for connection switching and control |
US5926463A (en) | 1997-10-06 | 1999-07-20 | 3Com Corporation | Method and apparatus for viewing and managing a configuration of a computer network |
US6456624B1 (en) | 1997-10-29 | 2002-09-24 | Enterasys Networks, Inc. | Network address resolve blocker |
US6092121A (en) * | 1997-12-18 | 2000-07-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for electronically integrating data captured in heterogeneous information systems |
US6741552B1 (en) | 1998-02-12 | 2004-05-25 | Pmc Sierra Inertnational, Inc. | Fault-tolerant, highly-scalable cell switching architecture |
US6181697B1 (en) | 1998-03-31 | 2001-01-30 | At&T Corp. | Method for a unicast endpoint client to access a multicast internet protocol (IP) session and to serve as a redistributor of such session |
US6088694A (en) * | 1998-03-31 | 2000-07-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | Continuous availability and efficient backup for externally referenced objects |
JP3609256B2 (en) | 1998-05-19 | 2005-01-12 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Network management device, node device, and network management system |
JP3469120B2 (en) * | 1998-06-12 | 2003-11-25 | 矢崎総業株式会社 | Communication network and communication device |
IL134612A (en) * | 1998-06-19 | 2004-06-01 | Juniper Networks Inc | System for encapsulating/decapsulating data in hardware |
US6513108B1 (en) * | 1998-06-29 | 2003-01-28 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Programmable processing engine for efficiently processing transient data |
US6119215A (en) | 1998-06-29 | 2000-09-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Synchronization and control system for an arrayed processing engine |
US6658002B1 (en) | 1998-06-30 | 2003-12-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Logical operation unit for packet processing |
US6141738A (en) * | 1998-07-08 | 2000-10-31 | Nortel Networks Corporation | Address translation method and system having a forwarding table data structure |
US6862622B2 (en) | 1998-07-10 | 2005-03-01 | Van Drebbel Mariner Llc | Transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) packet-centric wireless point to multi-point (PTMP) transmission system architecture |
US6424659B2 (en) | 1998-07-17 | 2002-07-23 | Network Equipment Technologies, Inc. | Multi-layer switching apparatus and method |
US6628661B1 (en) | 1998-08-27 | 2003-09-30 | Intel Corporation | Spanning tree recovery in computer networks |
US6414958B1 (en) | 1998-11-30 | 2002-07-02 | Electronic Data Systems Corporation | Four-port secure ethernet VLAN switch supporting SNMP and RMON |
US6510135B1 (en) * | 1998-12-18 | 2003-01-21 | Nortel Networks Limited | Flow-level demultiplexing within routers |
US6574230B1 (en) * | 1998-12-18 | 2003-06-03 | Nortel Networks Limited | Scheduling technique for delayed queue service |
US6584102B1 (en) | 1998-12-21 | 2003-06-24 | At&T Corp. | Communication network apparatus and method |
US6721759B1 (en) * | 1998-12-24 | 2004-04-13 | Sony Corporation | Techniques for spatial representation of data and browsing based on similarity |
US6597658B1 (en) | 1998-12-28 | 2003-07-22 | At&T Corp. | Hierarchical telecommunications network with fault recovery |
US6950428B1 (en) | 1998-12-30 | 2005-09-27 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | System and method for configuring adaptive sets of links between routers in a system area network (SAN) |
US6912221B1 (en) | 1999-01-15 | 2005-06-28 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method of providing network services |
US6363495B1 (en) * | 1999-01-19 | 2002-03-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for partition resolution in clustered computer systems |
US7778259B1 (en) | 1999-05-14 | 2010-08-17 | Dunti Llc | Network packet transmission mechanism |
US6728777B1 (en) | 1999-06-02 | 2004-04-27 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method for engineering paths for multicast traffic |
US6385197B1 (en) | 1999-07-09 | 2002-05-07 | Allied Telesyn International Corp. | Virtual port trunking method and apparatus |
JP2001119410A (en) * | 1999-10-21 | 2001-04-27 | Sony Corp | Processing method in self-identification phase |
US6963585B1 (en) | 1999-10-21 | 2005-11-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for establishing a virtual path capability in a frame relay network |
US6697338B1 (en) | 1999-10-28 | 2004-02-24 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Determination of physical topology of a communication network |
US6717944B1 (en) | 1999-11-10 | 2004-04-06 | Nortel Networks Corporation | System, device, and method for allocating virtual circuits in a communication network |
US6680934B1 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2004-01-20 | Nortel Networks Limited | System, device and method for expediting control flow in a communication system |
US7031266B1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2006-04-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and system for configuring wireless routers and networks |
US6615223B1 (en) | 2000-02-29 | 2003-09-02 | Oracle International Corporation | Method and system for data replication |
EP1133101A1 (en) | 2000-03-07 | 2001-09-12 | BRITISH TELECOMMUNICATIONS public limited company | Data distribution |
US6917985B2 (en) | 2000-03-10 | 2005-07-12 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Core assisted mesh protocol for multicast routing in ad-hoc Networks |
US7089240B2 (en) * | 2000-04-06 | 2006-08-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Longest prefix match lookup using hash function |
WO2001086380A2 (en) | 2000-05-05 | 2001-11-15 | Aprisma Management Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for isolating faults in computer networks |
US7055171B1 (en) | 2000-05-31 | 2006-05-30 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Highly secure computer system architecture for a heterogeneous client environment |
US20020093952A1 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2002-07-18 | Gonda Rumi Sheryar | Method for managing circuits in a multistage cross connect |
US7113986B2 (en) * | 2000-07-14 | 2006-09-26 | Business Signatures Corporation | System and method for modeling information system capacity and accepting sessions in an information system |
US6768740B1 (en) | 2000-08-08 | 2004-07-27 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Coordinating loop-free forwarding table updates |
US6894983B1 (en) | 2000-08-11 | 2005-05-17 | Orckit Communicatioins Ltd. | Automatic implementation of network configuration changes |
US7149216B1 (en) * | 2000-09-05 | 2006-12-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | M-trie based packet processing |
US7389358B1 (en) | 2000-09-13 | 2008-06-17 | Fortinet, Inc. | Distributed virtual system to support managed, network-based services |
US7061896B2 (en) | 2000-09-20 | 2006-06-13 | George Mason Intellectual Properties, Inc. | Wireless label switched packet transfer network |
US6947433B2 (en) * | 2000-09-21 | 2005-09-20 | Avici Systems, Inc. | System and method for implementing source based and egress based virtual networks in an interconnection network |
US6985447B2 (en) * | 2000-10-20 | 2006-01-10 | Nortel Networks Limited | Label switched traffic routing and signaling in a label switched communication packet network |
EP2273388A1 (en) * | 2000-10-20 | 2011-01-12 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Dynamic image content search information managing apparatus |
JP2002141905A (en) | 2000-10-31 | 2002-05-17 | Pfu Ltd | Node supervisory method, node supervisory system, and recording medium |
US6792423B1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2004-09-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Hybrid longest prefix match and fixed match searches |
US6888792B2 (en) | 2000-12-07 | 2005-05-03 | Intel Corporation | Technique to provide automatic failover for channel-based communications |
US7266556B1 (en) | 2000-12-29 | 2007-09-04 | Intel Corporation | Failover architecture for a distributed storage system |
US6973023B1 (en) | 2000-12-30 | 2005-12-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method for routing information over a network employing centralized control |
US6999454B1 (en) | 2001-02-09 | 2006-02-14 | Nortel Networks Limited | Information routing system and apparatus |
US6785843B1 (en) * | 2001-02-23 | 2004-08-31 | Mcrae Andrew | Data plane restart without state change in a control plane of an intermediate network node |
US7145866B1 (en) | 2001-03-01 | 2006-12-05 | Emc Corporation | Virtual network devices |
US7130303B2 (en) | 2001-03-15 | 2006-10-31 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Ethernet packet encapsulation for metropolitan area ethernet networks |
US7069337B2 (en) | 2001-03-20 | 2006-06-27 | Mci, Inc. | Policy-based synchronization of per-class resources between routers in a data network |
US7209439B2 (en) | 2001-03-20 | 2007-04-24 | Mci, Llc | Pool-based resource management in a data network |
US7197561B1 (en) | 2001-03-28 | 2007-03-27 | Shoregroup, Inc. | Method and apparatus for maintaining the status of objects in computer networks using virtual state machines |
US7240106B2 (en) | 2001-04-25 | 2007-07-03 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | System and method for remote discovery and configuration of a network device |
US7068667B2 (en) | 2001-04-27 | 2006-06-27 | The Boeing Company | Method and system for path building in a communications network |
JP4340400B2 (en) * | 2001-04-27 | 2009-10-07 | 富士通株式会社 | Packet transfer method in layered packet network, layered packet communication system, edge node and mobile terminal used in the system, and packet transfer method in layered packet network |
US6959002B2 (en) * | 2001-05-01 | 2005-10-25 | Integrated Device Technology, Inc. | Traffic manager for network switch port |
US7102996B1 (en) | 2001-05-24 | 2006-09-05 | F5 Networks, Inc. | Method and system for scaling network traffic managers |
US7483411B2 (en) * | 2001-06-04 | 2009-01-27 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus for public access mobility LAN and method of operation thereof |
EP1267529B1 (en) | 2001-06-14 | 2007-11-14 | Hitachi Ltd. | Data packets acknowledgment system |
US7343410B2 (en) | 2001-06-28 | 2008-03-11 | Finisar Corporation | Automated creation of application data paths in storage area networks |
US20030009552A1 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2003-01-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for network management with topology system providing historical topological views |
US7126944B2 (en) | 2001-07-05 | 2006-10-24 | Intel Corporation | Routing packets across multiple forwarding elements |
US7630358B1 (en) * | 2001-07-09 | 2009-12-08 | Sable Networks, Inc. | Mechanism for implementing multiple logical routers within a single physical router |
US7333487B2 (en) | 2001-07-16 | 2008-02-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Methods and apparatus for updating subsource addressing multicast routing records in a communications network |
US7333486B2 (en) | 2001-07-16 | 2008-02-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Methods and arrangements for monitoring subsource addressing multicast distribution trees |
US7382787B1 (en) | 2001-07-30 | 2008-06-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Packet routing and switching device |
JP2003069609A (en) | 2001-08-23 | 2003-03-07 | Fujitsu Ltd | System for providing virtual private network service |
US7151744B2 (en) | 2001-09-21 | 2006-12-19 | Slt Logic Llc | Multi-service queuing method and apparatus that provides exhaustive arbitration, load balancing, and support for rapid port failover |
US7120690B1 (en) * | 2001-09-27 | 2006-10-10 | Emc Corporation | Managing a distributed directory database |
CA2357939A1 (en) | 2001-09-27 | 2003-03-27 | Alcatel Canada Inc. | Master-slave communications system and method for a network element |
JP3674569B2 (en) * | 2001-10-04 | 2005-07-20 | オムロン株式会社 | SENSOR MANAGEMENT DEVICE, SENSOR MANAGEMENT DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM, COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM CONTAINING THE PROGRAM, AND SENSOR MANAGEMENT DEVICE CONTROL METHOD |
JP3879471B2 (en) | 2001-10-10 | 2007-02-14 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Computer resource allocation method |
US7200144B2 (en) | 2001-10-18 | 2007-04-03 | Qlogic, Corp. | Router and methods using network addresses for virtualization |
US6735602B2 (en) | 2001-10-18 | 2004-05-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for integration of event monitoring systems |
US7133365B2 (en) * | 2001-11-02 | 2006-11-07 | Internap Network Services Corporation | System and method to provide routing control of information over networks |
US7213065B2 (en) | 2001-11-08 | 2007-05-01 | Racemi, Inc. | System and method for dynamic server allocation and provisioning |
US7120819B1 (en) | 2001-11-15 | 2006-10-10 | 3Com Corporation | Method and system for fault diagnosis in a data network |
US7318095B2 (en) | 2001-11-21 | 2008-01-08 | Clearcube Technology, Inc. | Data fail-over for a multi-computer system |
US7013342B2 (en) | 2001-12-10 | 2006-03-14 | Packeteer, Inc. | Dynamic tunnel probing in a communications network |
US7158972B2 (en) | 2001-12-11 | 2007-01-02 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for managing multiple user systems |
US7042912B2 (en) | 2001-12-18 | 2006-05-09 | Nortel Networks Limited | Resynchronization of control and data path state for networks |
US7177943B1 (en) | 2001-12-27 | 2007-02-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for processing packets in a multi-processor environment |
US6895429B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-05-17 | Network Appliance, Inc. | Technique for enabling multiple virtual filers on a single filer to participate in multiple address spaces with overlapping network addresses |
US20030145086A1 (en) * | 2002-01-29 | 2003-07-31 | O'reilly James | Scalable network-attached storage system |
US7801155B2 (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2010-09-21 | Verizon Business Global Llc | Resource allocation in virtual routers |
US6941487B1 (en) | 2002-03-07 | 2005-09-06 | Riverstone Networks, Inc. | Method, system, and computer program product for providing failure protection in a network node |
US7480283B1 (en) * | 2002-03-26 | 2009-01-20 | Nortel Networks Limited | Virtual trunking over packet networks |
US7096228B2 (en) | 2002-03-27 | 2006-08-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and system for managing data records on a computer network |
US7184434B2 (en) * | 2002-03-28 | 2007-02-27 | Tropic Networks Inc. | Label distribution protocol supporting multiple classes of service in a multi protocol label switching (MPLS) network, methods and MPLS network using thereof |
US7289456B2 (en) * | 2002-04-08 | 2007-10-30 | Telcordia Technologies, Inc. | Determining and provisioning paths within a network of communication elements |
JP3904968B2 (en) | 2002-04-19 | 2007-04-11 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | VPN system and router |
US6963995B2 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2005-11-08 | Mci, Inc. | Network restoration using refreshed switch state tables |
JP4704659B2 (en) | 2002-04-26 | 2011-06-15 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Storage system control method and storage control device |
TW569575B (en) | 2002-04-30 | 2004-01-01 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp | Transmission setup method and device for multicast packet |
US7197572B2 (en) | 2002-05-06 | 2007-03-27 | Qlogic, Corporation | System and method for implementing logical switches in a network system |
US20030223379A1 (en) | 2002-05-28 | 2003-12-04 | Xuguang Yang | Method and system for inter-domain loop protection using a hierarchy of loop resolving protocols |
WO2003107190A1 (en) | 2002-06-13 | 2003-12-24 | Netscout Systems, Inc. | Real-time network performance monitoring system |
US7925661B2 (en) | 2002-06-27 | 2011-04-12 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for information processing using meta-archives |
US6907039B2 (en) | 2002-07-20 | 2005-06-14 | Redback Networks Inc. | Method and apparatus for routing and forwarding between virtual routers within a single network element |
US7292575B2 (en) * | 2002-07-24 | 2007-11-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and system for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) based data flow aggregation in a third generation (3G) cellular telecommunication system |
US7120728B2 (en) | 2002-07-31 | 2006-10-10 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Hardware-based translating virtualization switch |
US7349382B2 (en) * | 2002-08-10 | 2008-03-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Reverse path forwarding protection of packets using automated population of access control lists based on a forwarding information base |
JP3729265B2 (en) * | 2002-08-22 | 2005-12-21 | 日本電気株式会社 | Network system, spanning tree configuration method, spanning tree configuration node, and spanning tree configuration program |
US7339929B2 (en) | 2002-08-23 | 2008-03-04 | Corrigent Systems Ltd. | Virtual private LAN service using a multicast protocol |
US7395337B2 (en) | 2002-08-29 | 2008-07-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method, system, and program for establishing and requesting status on a computational resource |
US7796503B2 (en) | 2002-09-03 | 2010-09-14 | Fujitsu Limited | Fault tolerant network routing |
US7304940B2 (en) | 2002-09-05 | 2007-12-04 | World Wide Packets, Inc. | Network switch assembly, network switching device, and method |
FI114840B (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2004-12-31 | Nokia Corp | Change of Responsibility |
US20040054793A1 (en) | 2002-09-16 | 2004-03-18 | Richard Coleman | System and method for high performance shared web hosting |
US6934252B2 (en) | 2002-09-16 | 2005-08-23 | North Carolina State University | Methods and systems for fast binary network address lookups using parent node information stored in routing table entries |
US7778996B2 (en) * | 2002-09-25 | 2010-08-17 | Teradata Us, Inc. | Sampling statistics in a database system |
CN100459534C (en) * | 2002-10-07 | 2009-02-04 | 日本电信电话株式会社 | Layer network node and network constituted throuth said nodes, the node and layer network thereof |
US20040073659A1 (en) | 2002-10-15 | 2004-04-15 | Carl Rajsic | Method and apparatus for managing nodes in a network |
US20080008202A1 (en) * | 2002-10-31 | 2008-01-10 | Terrell William C | Router with routing processors and methods for virtualization |
US7606229B1 (en) | 2002-11-08 | 2009-10-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Generic bridge packet tunneling |
US20040098505A1 (en) | 2002-11-20 | 2004-05-20 | Clemmensen Daniel G. | Forwarding system with multiple logical sub-system functionality |
US7283465B2 (en) | 2003-01-07 | 2007-10-16 | Corrigent Systems Ltd. | Hierarchical virtual private LAN service protection scheme |
JP4567293B2 (en) | 2003-01-21 | 2010-10-20 | 株式会社日立製作所 | file server |
EP1443423A1 (en) | 2003-01-28 | 2004-08-04 | Bombardier Transportation (Technology) Germany GmbH | Apparatus and method for data replication in a data network |
EP1592183A4 (en) | 2003-02-07 | 2010-02-24 | Nippon Telegraph & Telephone | Multicast transfer route setting method, and multicast label switching method for implementing former method |
US7619966B2 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2009-11-17 | Alcatel Lucent | Hybrid virtual private LAN extensions |
US20040165600A1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2004-08-26 | Alcatel | Customer site bridged emulated LAN services via provider provisioned connections |
DE10308954A1 (en) | 2003-02-28 | 2004-09-09 | Siemens Ag | Transmission of data in a switchable data network |
US7292542B2 (en) | 2003-03-05 | 2007-11-06 | At&T Bls Intellectual Property, Inc. | Method for traffic engineering of connectionless virtual private network services |
CA2519378A1 (en) | 2003-03-18 | 2004-09-30 | Renesys Corporation | Methods and systems for monitoring network routing |
US20050169270A1 (en) | 2003-03-19 | 2005-08-04 | Ryoichi Mutou | Router, frame forwarding method, and lower layer frame virtual forwarding system |
JP2004287811A (en) | 2003-03-20 | 2004-10-14 | Fujitsu Ltd | Data processing circuit |
US20040193677A1 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2004-09-30 | Shaul Dar | Network service architecture |
US20050021683A1 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2005-01-27 | Chris Newton | Method and apparatus for correlating network activity through visualizing network data |
JP4157409B2 (en) | 2003-03-31 | 2008-10-01 | 富士通株式会社 | Virtual path construction apparatus and virtual path construction method |
US7283473B2 (en) | 2003-04-10 | 2007-10-16 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus, system and method for providing multiple logical channel adapters within a single physical channel adapter in a system area network |
US7529981B2 (en) | 2003-04-17 | 2009-05-05 | International Business Machines Corporation | System management infrastructure for corrective actions to servers with shared resources |
WO2004095255A2 (en) * | 2003-04-21 | 2004-11-04 | Netcell Corp. | Disk array controller with reconfigurable data path |
US7792987B1 (en) | 2003-04-21 | 2010-09-07 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Supporting virtual private networks using a first network topology for forwarding and a subset of the first network topology or a smaller topology for signaling |
US7415463B2 (en) | 2003-05-13 | 2008-08-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Programming tree data structures and handling collisions while performing lookup operations |
US7710874B2 (en) * | 2003-06-04 | 2010-05-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for automatic management of many computer data processing system pipes |
JP4278445B2 (en) | 2003-06-18 | 2009-06-17 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Network system and switch |
US7356818B2 (en) | 2003-06-24 | 2008-04-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Virtual machine communicating to external device without going through other virtual machines by using a list of IP addresses managed only by a single virtual machine monitor |
US20040267897A1 (en) | 2003-06-24 | 2004-12-30 | Sychron Inc. | Distributed System Providing Scalable Methodology for Real-Time Control of Server Pools and Data Centers |
US7916739B2 (en) * | 2003-06-24 | 2011-03-29 | Ntt Docomo, Inc. | Location privacy for internet protocol networks using cryptographically protected prefixes |
US7774597B2 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2010-08-10 | Ram Gopal Lakshmi Narayanan | System and method for nodes communicating in a shared network segment |
US7463579B2 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2008-12-09 | Nortel Networks Limited | Routed split multilink trunking |
US20050018669A1 (en) | 2003-07-25 | 2005-01-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Infiniband subnet management queue pair emulation for multiple logical ports on a single physical port |
US7447203B2 (en) * | 2003-07-29 | 2008-11-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Broadband access for virtual private networks |
US7697527B2 (en) | 2003-07-30 | 2010-04-13 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and apparatus for direct frame switching using frame contained destination information |
US7469279B1 (en) * | 2003-08-05 | 2008-12-23 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Automatic re-provisioning of network elements to adapt to failures |
US8776050B2 (en) | 2003-08-20 | 2014-07-08 | Oracle International Corporation | Distributed virtual machine monitor for managing multiple virtual resources across multiple physical nodes |
US7233991B2 (en) | 2003-08-22 | 2007-06-19 | Clearmesh Networks, Inc. | Self-healing tree network |
US7363528B2 (en) | 2003-08-25 | 2008-04-22 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Brink of failure and breach of security detection and recovery system |
US7366181B2 (en) | 2003-09-06 | 2008-04-29 | Fujitsu Limited | Virtual private network (VPN) with channelized ethernet over sonet (EoS) interface and method |
US7342916B2 (en) | 2003-09-10 | 2008-03-11 | Intel Corporation | Method, apparatus and system for optimizing routing of mobile IP packets |
EP1673683A4 (en) * | 2003-10-14 | 2010-06-02 | Raptor Networks Technology Inc | Switching system with distributed switching fabric |
US8009556B2 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2011-08-30 | Ip Infusion, Inc. | System and method for providing redundant routing capabilities for a network node |
US7958255B1 (en) * | 2003-11-04 | 2011-06-07 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Partial coalescing of transmit buffers |
US7555002B2 (en) | 2003-11-06 | 2009-06-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Infiniband general services queue pair virtualization for multiple logical ports on a single physical port |
US8146148B2 (en) | 2003-11-19 | 2012-03-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Tunneled security groups |
US7672302B2 (en) | 2003-11-21 | 2010-03-02 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Router using switching-before-routing packet processing and method of operation |
US8095640B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2012-01-10 | Alcatel Lucent | Distributed architecture for real-time flow measurement at the network domain level |
US7450598B2 (en) | 2003-12-15 | 2008-11-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method to provision MPLS/VPN network |
US7478173B1 (en) | 2003-12-18 | 2009-01-13 | Wmware, Inc. | Method and system for sharing a network connection in a virtual computer system |
US7844733B2 (en) * | 2003-12-19 | 2010-11-30 | Solace Systems, Inc. | Content router with multiple forwarding elements instantiated on hardware entities |
US7693158B1 (en) * | 2003-12-22 | 2010-04-06 | Extreme Networks, Inc. | Methods and systems for selectively processing virtual local area network (VLAN) traffic from different networks while allowing flexible VLAN identifier assignment |
US7483370B1 (en) | 2003-12-22 | 2009-01-27 | Extreme Networks, Inc. | Methods and systems for hitless switch management module failover and upgrade |
US7336675B2 (en) | 2003-12-22 | 2008-02-26 | Intel Corporation | Optimized back-to-back enqueue/dequeue via physical queue parallelism |
CN1898917B (en) | 2003-12-22 | 2011-06-08 | 艾利森电话股份有限公司 | Control of mobile packet streams |
US9032095B1 (en) * | 2004-01-06 | 2015-05-12 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Routing device having multiple logical routers |
US7391771B2 (en) | 2004-01-23 | 2008-06-24 | Metro Packet Systems Inc. | Method of sending information through a tree and ring topology of a network system |
US7707309B2 (en) | 2004-01-29 | 2010-04-27 | Brocade Communication Systems, Inc. | Isolation switch for fibre channel fabrics in storage area networks |
US7627692B2 (en) | 2004-01-30 | 2009-12-01 | Nokia Corporation | Multiplexing of compressed control and user-plane messages |
KR100600862B1 (en) * | 2004-01-30 | 2006-07-14 | 김선권 | Method of collecting and searching for access route of infomation resource on internet and Computer readable medium stored thereon program for implementing the same |
WO2005091901A2 (en) | 2004-03-10 | 2005-10-06 | Enterasys Networks, Inc. | Dynamic network detection system and method |
US7436782B2 (en) * | 2004-03-25 | 2008-10-14 | Alcatel Lucent | Full mesh LSP and full mesh T-LDP provisioning between provider edge routers in support of Layer-2 and Layer-3 virtual private network services |
WO2005093576A1 (en) | 2004-03-28 | 2005-10-06 | Robert Iakobashvili | Visualization of packet network performance, analysis and optimization for design |
US7822032B1 (en) | 2004-03-30 | 2010-10-26 | Extreme Networks, Inc. | Data structures for supporting packet data modification operations |
US8161270B1 (en) | 2004-03-30 | 2012-04-17 | Extreme Networks, Inc. | Packet data modification processor |
US8923292B2 (en) | 2004-04-06 | 2014-12-30 | Rockstar Consortium Us Lp | Differential forwarding in address-based carrier networks |
US7590669B2 (en) | 2004-04-06 | 2009-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Managing client configuration data |
US7633961B2 (en) * | 2004-04-07 | 2009-12-15 | Alcatel Lucent | Edge-router scaling for BGP peering with virtual private routed networks (VPRN) |
US20050228971A1 (en) * | 2004-04-08 | 2005-10-13 | Samra Nicholas G | Buffer virtualization |
US20050228952A1 (en) * | 2004-04-13 | 2005-10-13 | David Mayhew | Cache coherency mechanism |
JP4530707B2 (en) | 2004-04-16 | 2010-08-25 | 株式会社クラウド・スコープ・テクノロジーズ | Network information presentation apparatus and method |
US20050238058A1 (en) * | 2004-04-26 | 2005-10-27 | Peirce Kenneth L Jr | Synchronization of upstream and downstream data transfer in wireless mesh topologies |
US8090698B2 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2012-01-03 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system to facilitate a search of an information resource |
CN101411156B (en) | 2004-05-12 | 2011-04-20 | 阿尔卡特朗讯 | Automated containment of network intruder |
US20060031432A1 (en) * | 2004-05-21 | 2006-02-09 | Bea Systens, Inc. | Service oriented architecture with message processing pipelines |
US8055745B2 (en) | 2004-06-01 | 2011-11-08 | Inmage Systems, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for accessing data from a primary data storage system for secondary storage |
US9209989B2 (en) * | 2004-06-01 | 2015-12-08 | Inmage Systems, Inc. | Causation of a data read operation against a first storage system by a server associated with a second storage system according to a host generated instruction |
US7873650B1 (en) | 2004-06-11 | 2011-01-18 | Seisint, Inc. | System and method for distributing data in a parallel processing system |
US7805407B1 (en) | 2004-06-16 | 2010-09-28 | Oracle America, Inc. | System and method for dynamic configuration of replicated database servers |
US7881281B1 (en) * | 2004-07-02 | 2011-02-01 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Border control system, method, and software |
US8422500B2 (en) | 2004-07-02 | 2013-04-16 | Rockstar Consortium Us Lp | VLAN support of differentiated services |
US7808983B2 (en) | 2004-07-08 | 2010-10-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network device architecture for centralized packet processing |
US7626979B1 (en) * | 2004-07-28 | 2009-12-01 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Packet voice network border control |
US7974272B2 (en) * | 2004-07-29 | 2011-07-05 | Conexant Systems, Inc. | Remote control of a switching node in a stack of switching nodes |
EP1624615B1 (en) | 2004-08-02 | 2008-02-20 | Alcatel Lucent | Shared resources in a multi manager environment |
US7706302B2 (en) | 2004-09-14 | 2010-04-27 | Alcatel Lucent | Optimization of routing forwarding database in a network processor |
US7649834B2 (en) * | 2004-09-15 | 2010-01-19 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | Method and apparatus for determining neighboring routing elements and rerouting traffic in a computer network |
GB2418326B (en) | 2004-09-17 | 2007-04-11 | Hewlett Packard Development Co | Network vitrualization |
US7593324B2 (en) | 2004-10-25 | 2009-09-22 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Graceful port shutdown protocol for fibre channel interfaces |
US7606187B2 (en) | 2004-10-28 | 2009-10-20 | Meshnetworks, Inc. | System and method to support multicast routing in large scale wireless mesh networks |
GB2419703A (en) | 2004-10-29 | 2006-05-03 | Hewlett Packard Development Co | Isolated virtual overlay infrastructures each having an interface to control interaction with others |
US8068408B2 (en) | 2004-11-01 | 2011-11-29 | Alcatel Lucent | Softrouter protocol disaggregation |
US9014181B2 (en) * | 2004-11-01 | 2015-04-21 | Alcatel Lucent | Softrouter separate control network |
US20060105764A1 (en) * | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-18 | Dilip Krishnaswamy | Adaptive wireless networks and methods for communicating multimedia in a proactive enterprise |
US8458467B2 (en) | 2005-06-21 | 2013-06-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for adaptive application message payload content transformation in a network infrastructure element |
FR2878673B1 (en) | 2004-11-26 | 2007-02-09 | Univ Picardie Jules Verne Etab | PERENNE DISTRIBUTED BACKUP SYSTEM AND METHOD |
JP2008524916A (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2008-07-10 | テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エル エム エリクソン(パブル) | Apparatus and method for packet flow in communication system |
MX2007008112A (en) | 2004-12-31 | 2007-10-19 | British Telecomm | Connection-oriented communications scheme for connection-less communications traffic. |
JP4733399B2 (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2011-07-27 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Computer system, computer, storage device and management terminal |
US20060178898A1 (en) | 2005-02-07 | 2006-08-10 | Babak Habibi | Unified event monitoring system |
US7428220B1 (en) * | 2005-02-10 | 2008-09-23 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Method and apparatus for data aggregation in a distributed system |
US20060184937A1 (en) | 2005-02-11 | 2006-08-17 | Timothy Abels | System and method for centralized software management in virtual machines |
US7660253B2 (en) * | 2005-02-14 | 2010-02-09 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Method and nodes for aggregating data traffic through unicast messages over an access domain using service bindings |
US20060182033A1 (en) | 2005-02-15 | 2006-08-17 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Fast multicast path switching |
US8583770B2 (en) | 2005-02-16 | 2013-11-12 | Red Hat, Inc. | System and method for creating and managing virtual services |
US20060187950A1 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2006-08-24 | Alcatel | Architecture and provisioning tools for managed multicast virtual private LAN trees |
US7769037B2 (en) * | 2005-02-19 | 2010-08-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Techniques for using first sign of life at edge nodes for a virtual private network |
CA2596719A1 (en) | 2005-02-24 | 2006-08-31 | Xeround Systems Ltd. | Method and apparatus for distributed data management in a switching network |
US7512589B2 (en) * | 2005-02-25 | 2009-03-31 | Trigeo Network Security, Inc. | Temporal knowledgebase |
US8254285B2 (en) | 2005-02-25 | 2012-08-28 | Ip Infusion, Inc. | Hardware abstraction layer |
US8565124B2 (en) * | 2005-03-04 | 2013-10-22 | Nec Corporation | Node, network, correspondence relationship generation method and frame transfer program |
US7936770B1 (en) | 2005-03-08 | 2011-05-03 | Enterasys Networks, Inc. | Method and apparatus of virtual class of service and logical queue representation through network traffic distribution over multiple port interfaces |
US20070064673A1 (en) * | 2005-03-10 | 2007-03-22 | Nehru Bhandaru | Flexible, scalable, wireless data forwarding and mobility for secure wireless networks |
FR2883437B1 (en) | 2005-03-16 | 2007-08-03 | Wavestorm Sarl | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A NETWORK |
US8599822B2 (en) | 2005-03-23 | 2013-12-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Slot-based transmission synchronization mechanism in wireless mesh networks |
US7899027B2 (en) | 2005-03-23 | 2011-03-01 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Automatic route configuration in hierarchical wireless mesh networks |
US8089871B2 (en) | 2005-03-25 | 2012-01-03 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | Method and apparatus for traffic control of dynamic denial of service attacks within a communications network |
US7995569B2 (en) * | 2005-04-01 | 2011-08-09 | Nortel Networks Limited | Virtual routers for GMPLS networks |
US7697536B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2010-04-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Network communications for operating system partitions |
US8089964B2 (en) | 2005-04-05 | 2012-01-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Transporting multicast over MPLS backbone using virtual interfaces to perform reverse-path forwarding checks |
JP4745387B2 (en) | 2005-04-25 | 2011-08-10 | トムソン ライセンシング | Multicast routing protocol in mesh networks |
US7369852B2 (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2008-05-06 | Motorola, Inc. | Methods for informing subscribers in a channelized network of adjacent sites |
US8194656B2 (en) | 2005-04-28 | 2012-06-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Metro ethernet network with scaled broadcast and service instance domains |
US20060248179A1 (en) | 2005-04-29 | 2006-11-02 | Short Michael E | Method and system for event-driven network management |
US7974202B2 (en) | 2005-05-06 | 2011-07-05 | Corrigent Systems, Ltd. | Tunnel provisioning with link aggregation |
WO2006120946A1 (en) | 2005-05-10 | 2006-11-16 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Tree-type network system, node device, broadcast system, broadcast method, etc. |
US7529199B1 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2009-05-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for resolving conflicts in proxy routing information associated with multicast distribution trees |
US7617535B2 (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2009-11-10 | Intel Corporation | Infected electronic system tracking |
DE602005002259T2 (en) * | 2005-06-30 | 2008-05-21 | Ntt Docomo Inc. | Apparatus and method for improved handoff in mesh networks |
US20070076709A1 (en) | 2005-07-01 | 2007-04-05 | Geoffrey Mattson | Apparatus and method for facilitating a virtual private local area network service with realm specific addresses |
US7587492B2 (en) | 2005-07-29 | 2009-09-08 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Dynamic performance management for virtual servers |
US7855950B2 (en) * | 2005-08-01 | 2010-12-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Congruent forwarding paths for unicast and multicast traffic |
CN1909501A (en) | 2005-08-05 | 2007-02-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for end to end service rapid convergence and route device |
US8149737B2 (en) | 2005-08-09 | 2012-04-03 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Method and system for data transmission in a wireless network |
CN100461755C (en) * | 2005-08-12 | 2009-02-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data message transmitting method and node equipment based on MPLS TE tunnel |
US8799431B2 (en) | 2005-08-15 | 2014-08-05 | Toutvirtual Inc. | Virtual systems management |
US8645964B2 (en) | 2005-08-23 | 2014-02-04 | Mellanox Technologies Ltd. | System and method for accelerating input/output access operation on a virtual machine |
US20070055789A1 (en) | 2005-09-08 | 2007-03-08 | Benoit Claise | Method and apparatus for managing routing of data elements |
US8683144B2 (en) * | 2005-09-16 | 2014-03-25 | Inmage Systems, Inc. | Causation of a data read against a first storage system to optionally store a data write to preserve the version to allow viewing and recovery |
US8204064B2 (en) * | 2005-09-16 | 2012-06-19 | Acme Packet, Inc. | Method and system of session media negotiation |
US8369330B2 (en) * | 2005-10-05 | 2013-02-05 | Rockstar Consortium LP | Provider backbone bridging—provider backbone transport internetworking |
US20070086448A1 (en) * | 2005-10-17 | 2007-04-19 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures Lp | Integrated pseudo-wire and virtual routing and forwarding on a single provider edge router |
US7697528B2 (en) | 2005-11-01 | 2010-04-13 | Nortel Networks Limited | Multilink trunking for encapsulated traffic |
US7802251B2 (en) | 2005-11-09 | 2010-09-21 | Hitachi, Ltd. | System for resource allocation to an active virtual machine using switch and controller to associate resource groups |
JP2007135109A (en) | 2005-11-11 | 2007-05-31 | Hitachi Ltd | Virtual network management method, virtual network management program, virtual network management system, and virtual network management means |
CN100563203C (en) | 2005-11-11 | 2009-11-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | The method that multicast tree leaf node network element signal transmits in the communication network |
US7945658B1 (en) | 2005-12-05 | 2011-05-17 | Narus, Inc. | Method for real-time visualization of BGP analysis and trouble-shooting |
US7710872B2 (en) | 2005-12-14 | 2010-05-04 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Technique for enabling traffic engineering on CE-CE paths across a provider network |
US8661216B2 (en) * | 2005-12-19 | 2014-02-25 | Commvault Systems, Inc. | Systems and methods for migrating components in a hierarchical storage network |
US20070140235A1 (en) * | 2005-12-21 | 2007-06-21 | Nortel Networks Limited | Network visible inter-logical router links |
US8130648B2 (en) | 2006-01-04 | 2012-03-06 | Broadcom Corporation | Hierarchical queue shaping |
US8441919B2 (en) | 2006-01-18 | 2013-05-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Dynamic protection against failure of a head-end node of one or more TE-LSPs |
US20070174429A1 (en) | 2006-01-24 | 2007-07-26 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Methods and servers for establishing a connection between a client system and a virtual machine hosting a requested computing environment |
JP4800046B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2011-10-26 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Storage system |
US7587450B2 (en) * | 2006-02-01 | 2009-09-08 | Swift Creek Systems, Llc | HTTP publish/subscribe communication protocol |
JP4740763B2 (en) * | 2006-02-15 | 2011-08-03 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Storage system and storage controller |
WO2007099276A1 (en) * | 2006-03-02 | 2007-09-07 | British Telecommunications Public Limited Company | Message processing methods and systems |
WO2007099507A2 (en) | 2006-03-02 | 2007-09-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Operating a network monitoring entity |
US20070266433A1 (en) | 2006-03-03 | 2007-11-15 | Hezi Moore | System and Method for Securing Information in a Virtual Computing Environment |
US7978725B2 (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2011-07-12 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Dynamic modification of contention-based transmission control parameters achieving load balancing scheme in wireless mesh networks |
US7898383B2 (en) | 2006-03-13 | 2011-03-01 | The Boeing Company | System and method for detecting security violation |
US8554949B2 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2013-10-08 | Ericsson Ab | Customer traffic forwarding continues while control plane is reset |
US8295275B2 (en) | 2006-03-20 | 2012-10-23 | Intel Corporation | Tagging network I/O transactions in a virtual machine run-time environment |
US20070220059A1 (en) | 2006-03-20 | 2007-09-20 | Manyi Lu | Data processing node |
US7801128B2 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2010-09-21 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Managing communications between computing nodes |
US8190682B2 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2012-05-29 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Managing execution of programs by multiple computing systems |
US9547485B2 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2017-01-17 | Prowess Consulting, Llc | System and method for deploying a virtual machine |
EP2158542B1 (en) | 2006-04-04 | 2019-06-05 | Red Hat, Inc. | Storage assignment and erasure coding technique for scalable and fault tolerant storage system |
US8838756B2 (en) | 2009-07-27 | 2014-09-16 | Vmware, Inc. | Management and implementation of enclosed local networks in a virtual lab |
US8619771B2 (en) | 2009-09-30 | 2013-12-31 | Vmware, Inc. | Private allocated networks over shared communications infrastructure |
US8909758B2 (en) | 2006-05-02 | 2014-12-09 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Physical server discovery and correlation |
US20070258447A1 (en) * | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-08 | Robert Raszuk | Inter-area summarization of edge-device addresses using RFC3107 |
US7839847B2 (en) | 2006-05-08 | 2010-11-23 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Methods and apparatus providing VPN traffic matrix construction |
US7953089B1 (en) | 2006-05-16 | 2011-05-31 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Systems and methods for multicast switching in a private VLAN |
US20070271362A1 (en) | 2006-05-18 | 2007-11-22 | Yehuda Bamnolker | Implementation of reflexive access control lists on distributed platforms |
US7715309B2 (en) * | 2006-05-24 | 2010-05-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for reliable communications in a packet network |
US8060875B1 (en) | 2006-05-26 | 2011-11-15 | Vmware, Inc. | System and method for multiple virtual teams |
JP4714081B2 (en) * | 2006-06-01 | 2011-06-29 | アラクサラネットワークス株式会社 | Network connection device |
US8010696B2 (en) * | 2006-06-06 | 2011-08-30 | Avaya Inc. | Passing information from a forwarding plane to a control plane |
US8199732B2 (en) | 2006-06-09 | 2012-06-12 | Aruba Networks, Inc. | Efficient multicast control processing for a wireless network |
US7522595B2 (en) * | 2006-06-16 | 2009-04-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Communicating packets between forwarding contexts using virtual interfaces |
US8327008B2 (en) * | 2006-06-20 | 2012-12-04 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Methods and apparatus for maintaining network addresses |
US7706303B2 (en) | 2006-06-26 | 2010-04-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Port pooling |
US7643482B2 (en) | 2006-06-30 | 2010-01-05 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | System and method for virtual switching in a host |
US8089904B2 (en) | 2006-08-01 | 2012-01-03 | Opnet Technologies, Inc. | Link inference in large networks based on incomplete data |
US7580417B2 (en) | 2006-08-07 | 2009-08-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for load balancing over virtual network links |
US8635315B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2014-01-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and system for dynamic loading of management information bases on network devices |
US20080052206A1 (en) | 2006-08-22 | 2008-02-28 | Edwards Stephen K | System and method for billing users for communicating over a communications network |
GB2443229B (en) | 2006-08-23 | 2009-10-14 | Cramer Systems Ltd | Capacity management for data networks |
US20080059556A1 (en) | 2006-08-31 | 2008-03-06 | Egenera, Inc. | Providing virtual machine technology as an embedded layer within a processing platform |
CN101518020A (en) | 2006-09-15 | 2009-08-26 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Automatic packet tagging |
CN100542122C (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2009-09-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of multiplexing method of VLAN switching tunnel and VLAN switching domain |
US7643488B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2010-01-05 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and apparatus for supporting multiple customer provisioned IPSec VPNs |
US7907595B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2011-03-15 | Avaya, Inc. | Method and apparatus for learning endpoint addresses of IPSec VPN tunnels |
US7847801B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2010-12-07 | Lsi Corporation | Method for reporting redundant controllers as independent storage entities |
US7693073B2 (en) * | 2006-10-13 | 2010-04-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for routing packet traffic |
US8032899B2 (en) | 2006-10-26 | 2011-10-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | Providing policy-based operating system services in a hypervisor on a computing system |
JP5244332B2 (en) | 2006-10-30 | 2013-07-24 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Information system, data transfer method, and data protection method |
US20100061231A1 (en) | 2006-11-06 | 2010-03-11 | Janos Harmatos | Multi-domain network and method for multi-domain network |
US20080112400A1 (en) * | 2006-11-15 | 2008-05-15 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System for Providing Both Traditional and Traffic Engineering Enabled Services |
US7826482B1 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2010-11-02 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Service-specific forwarding in an LDP-RSVP hybrid network |
US7830882B2 (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2010-11-09 | Intel Corporation | Switch scaling for virtualized network interface controllers |
EP2087667A4 (en) | 2006-11-27 | 2015-03-04 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | A method and system for providing arouting architecture for overlay networks |
US8223668B2 (en) | 2006-12-14 | 2012-07-17 | Rockstar Bidco Lp | Method and apparatus for exchanging routing information and the establishment of connectivity across multiple network areas |
US8144630B1 (en) * | 2006-12-15 | 2012-03-27 | Marvell International Ltd. | Apparatus, systems, methods, algorithms and software for control of network switching devices |
US20080159301A1 (en) | 2006-12-29 | 2008-07-03 | De Heer Arjan Arie | Enabling virtual private local area network services |
US8381209B2 (en) | 2007-01-03 | 2013-02-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Moveable access control list (ACL) mechanisms for hypervisors and virtual machines and virtual port firewalls |
US8855020B2 (en) * | 2007-01-09 | 2014-10-07 | Sandvine Incorporated Ulc | Automatically maximizing network link utilization using virtual networks |
US7793148B2 (en) * | 2007-01-12 | 2010-09-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Using virtual copies in a failover and failback environment |
US7856549B2 (en) | 2007-01-24 | 2010-12-21 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Regulating power consumption |
US20080189769A1 (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2008-08-07 | Martin Casado | Secure network switching infrastructure |
US20080186962A1 (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2008-08-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Policy-Based Tunneling of Multicast Streams |
WO2008093174A1 (en) | 2007-02-02 | 2008-08-07 | Groupe Des Ecoles Des Telecommuinications (Get) Institut National Des Telecommunications (Int) | Autonomic network node system |
EP2109958B1 (en) * | 2007-02-08 | 2011-01-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Fault localisation in multiple spanning tree based architectures |
US8910275B2 (en) | 2007-02-14 | 2014-12-09 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Network monitoring |
US7796594B2 (en) * | 2007-02-14 | 2010-09-14 | Marvell Semiconductor, Inc. | Logical bridging system and method |
EP2122966B1 (en) | 2007-02-22 | 2010-10-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Consistent and fault tolerant distributed hash table (dht) overlay network |
US8045550B2 (en) | 2007-03-01 | 2011-10-25 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Packet tunneling |
US8340090B1 (en) * | 2007-03-08 | 2012-12-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Interconnecting forwarding contexts using u-turn ports |
MX2009009808A (en) * | 2007-03-12 | 2010-02-17 | Espre Solutions Inc | System and method for multicast transmission. |
US20080225780A1 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2008-09-18 | Nortel Networks Limited | Use of distributed hashtables for wireless access mobility management |
US8055789B2 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2011-11-08 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Configuring intercommunications between computing nodes |
US8111707B2 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2012-02-07 | Packeteer, Inc. | Compression mechanisms for control plane—data plane processing architectures |
US8151262B2 (en) * | 2007-03-30 | 2012-04-03 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | System and method for reporting the trusted state of a virtual machine |
US8059532B2 (en) * | 2007-06-21 | 2011-11-15 | Packeteer, Inc. | Data and control plane architecture including server-side triggered flow policy mechanism |
US8594085B2 (en) | 2007-04-11 | 2013-11-26 | Palo Alto Networks, Inc. | L2/L3 multi-mode switch including policy processing |
US8868626B2 (en) * | 2007-04-12 | 2014-10-21 | Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey | System and method for controlling a file system |
US7903655B2 (en) | 2007-04-19 | 2011-03-08 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Marked packet forwarding |
US7912955B1 (en) | 2007-04-24 | 2011-03-22 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Model-based provisioning of resources |
US7936695B2 (en) | 2007-05-14 | 2011-05-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Tunneling reports for real-time internet protocol media streams |
US8023419B2 (en) | 2007-05-14 | 2011-09-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Remote monitoring of real-time internet protocol media streams |
US7948874B2 (en) | 2007-05-24 | 2011-05-24 | World Wide Packets, Inc. | Transitioning a virtual interface from one tunnel to another tunnel |
EP2163055B1 (en) | 2007-05-28 | 2014-03-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (publ) | Mobility plane architecture for telecommunications system |
US8391185B2 (en) | 2007-05-29 | 2013-03-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method to transport bidir PIM over a multiprotocol label switched network |
JP4803116B2 (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2011-10-26 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Virtual network connection device and program |
US20080310437A1 (en) | 2007-06-15 | 2008-12-18 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Method and apparatus for carrying unknown traffic over a resilient packet ring (RPR) without flooding |
US8094659B1 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2012-01-10 | Marvell Israel (M.I.S.L) Ltd. | Policy-based virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) assignment |
US8121041B2 (en) * | 2007-07-30 | 2012-02-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Redundancy for point-to-multipoint and multipoint-to-multipoint ethernet virtual connections |
US8166205B2 (en) | 2007-07-31 | 2012-04-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Overlay transport virtualization |
US20110004913A1 (en) | 2007-07-31 | 2011-01-06 | Symbol Technologies, Inc. | Architecture for seamless enforcement of security policies when roaming across ip subnets in ieee 802.11 wireless networks |
WO2009018584A1 (en) | 2007-08-02 | 2009-02-05 | Fugen Solutions, Inc. | Method and apparatus for multi-domain identity interoperability and certification |
US8031633B2 (en) | 2007-08-13 | 2011-10-04 | Honeywell International Inc. | Virtual network architecture for space data processing |
EP2192729B1 (en) | 2007-08-22 | 2014-05-07 | Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation | Path management control method, path management control program, path management control device and path management control system |
US8854982B2 (en) * | 2007-08-30 | 2014-10-07 | Rockstar Consortium Us Lp | Method and apparatus for managing the interconnection between network domains |
US8077709B2 (en) | 2007-09-19 | 2011-12-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Redundancy at a virtual provider edge node that faces a tunneling protocol core network for virtual private local area network (LAN) service (VPLS) |
US8798056B2 (en) | 2007-09-24 | 2014-08-05 | Intel Corporation | Method and system for virtual port communications |
EP2193630B1 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2015-08-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Network operating system for managing and securing networks |
EP2201474B1 (en) | 2007-10-03 | 2020-05-06 | NTT Global Networks Incorporated | Virtualized application acceleration infrastructure |
US8036229B2 (en) * | 2007-10-08 | 2011-10-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Switch with virtual network identifier re-write capability |
US20090097495A1 (en) | 2007-10-11 | 2009-04-16 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Flexible virtual queues |
KR101498320B1 (en) * | 2007-10-12 | 2015-03-03 | 노오텔 네트웍스 리미티드 | Multi-point and rooted multi-point protection switching |
US8412809B2 (en) | 2007-10-24 | 2013-04-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method, apparatus and computer program product implementing multi-tenancy for network monitoring tools using virtualization technology |
US8054744B1 (en) * | 2007-10-25 | 2011-11-08 | Marvell International Ltd. | Methods and apparatus for flow classification and flow measurement |
US8279871B1 (en) * | 2007-10-29 | 2012-10-02 | Marvell Israel (M.I.S.L.) Ltd. | Methods and apparatus for processing multi-headed packets |
US8848544B2 (en) | 2007-11-08 | 2014-09-30 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Event correlation using network data flow simulation over unmanaged network segments |
US20090144220A1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2009-06-04 | Yahoo! Inc. | System for storing distributed hashtables |
US7984123B2 (en) | 2007-12-10 | 2011-07-19 | Oracle America, Inc. | Method and system for reconfiguring a virtual network path |
US7945647B2 (en) | 2007-12-10 | 2011-05-17 | Oracle America, Inc. | Method and system for creating a virtual network path |
JP4818249B2 (en) | 2007-12-14 | 2011-11-16 | アラクサラネットワークス株式会社 | Network relay system, network relay system control method, and management device in network relay system |
US8199750B1 (en) | 2007-12-18 | 2012-06-12 | World Wide Packets, Inc. | Communicating with a control plane using a forwarding information format and control plane processing of packets devoid of a virtual switch identifier |
US8208403B2 (en) | 2007-12-26 | 2012-06-26 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Defining an end-to-end path for a network service |
US7894450B2 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2011-02-22 | Nortel Network, Ltd. | Implementation of VPNs over a link state protocol controlled ethernet network |
US9432213B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2016-08-30 | Rpx Clearinghouse Llc | IP forwarding across a link state protocol controlled ethernet network |
US8285838B2 (en) * | 2008-01-02 | 2012-10-09 | Oracle International Corporation | Hierarchical management of realtime edge processor |
US9100268B2 (en) | 2008-02-27 | 2015-08-04 | Alcatel Lucent | Application-aware MPLS tunnel selection |
GB2458157B (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2012-04-25 | Hewlett Packard Development Co | Virtual machine liveness check |
GB2459433B (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2012-06-06 | Hewlett Packard Development Co | Distributed network connection policy management |
GB2458154B (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2012-06-27 | Hewlett Packard Development Co | Routing across a virtual network |
US7801137B2 (en) | 2008-03-11 | 2010-09-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Receiver-based construction of point-to-multipoint trees using path computation elements in a computer network |
US8155028B2 (en) | 2008-03-17 | 2012-04-10 | Alcatel Lucent | Method and apparatus for providing full logical connectivity in MPLS networks |
US7808919B2 (en) | 2008-03-18 | 2010-10-05 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network monitoring using a proxy |
US8429739B2 (en) | 2008-03-31 | 2013-04-23 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Authorizing communications between computing nodes |
WO2009124591A1 (en) * | 2008-04-10 | 2009-10-15 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Setting up a virtual private network using virtual lan identifiers |
US20090257420A1 (en) | 2008-04-10 | 2009-10-15 | Honeywell International Inc. | Process Control System With Enhanced Communication Throughput Using Frequency Agility |
US8473594B2 (en) * | 2008-05-02 | 2013-06-25 | Skytap | Multitenant hosted virtual machine infrastructure |
US8339959B1 (en) | 2008-05-20 | 2012-12-25 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Streamlined packet forwarding using dynamic filters for routing and security in a shared forwarding plane |
US8004998B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2011-08-23 | Solera Networks, Inc. | Capture and regeneration of a network data using a virtual software switch |
US8195774B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2012-06-05 | Vmware, Inc. | Distributed virtual switch for virtualized computer systems |
US20090296726A1 (en) | 2008-06-03 | 2009-12-03 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | ACCESS CONTROL LIST MANAGEMENT IN AN FCoE ENVIRONMENT |
US7792046B2 (en) * | 2008-06-05 | 2010-09-07 | Vss Monitoring, Inc. | Ethernet switch-based network monitoring system and methods |
US8270952B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2012-09-18 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Open development system for access service providers |
US8160063B2 (en) | 2008-06-09 | 2012-04-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Data center interconnect and traffic engineering |
US8031606B2 (en) | 2008-06-24 | 2011-10-04 | Intel Corporation | Packet switching |
US8102781B2 (en) * | 2008-07-31 | 2012-01-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Dynamic distribution of virtual machines in a communication network |
US8830845B2 (en) * | 2008-08-04 | 2014-09-09 | Ciena Corporation | Packet switch modeling and using a packet switch model to test a packet switch |
US9426095B2 (en) | 2008-08-28 | 2016-08-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus and method of switching packets between virtual ports |
US8265071B2 (en) | 2008-09-11 | 2012-09-11 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Methods and apparatus related to a flexible data center security architecture |
US8300532B1 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2012-10-30 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Forwarding plane configuration for separation of services and forwarding in an integrated services router |
US8590033B2 (en) * | 2008-09-25 | 2013-11-19 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. | One button security lockdown of a process control network |
US8326972B2 (en) | 2008-09-26 | 2012-12-04 | Red Hat, Inc. | Methods and systems for managing network connections in a software provisioning environment |
US7808929B2 (en) | 2008-09-30 | 2010-10-05 | Oracle America, Inc. | Efficient ACL lookup algorithms |
US7885276B1 (en) | 2008-09-30 | 2011-02-08 | Emc Corporation | Isolating network traffic in multi-tenant virtualization environments |
CN101729384B (en) * | 2008-10-15 | 2013-04-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for switching label |
WO2010056839A1 (en) * | 2008-11-12 | 2010-05-20 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Tool for visualizing configuration and status of a network appliance |
US7921197B2 (en) | 2008-11-19 | 2011-04-05 | Vmware, Inc. | Dynamic configuration of virtual machines |
US7962647B2 (en) | 2008-11-24 | 2011-06-14 | Vmware, Inc. | Application delivery control module for virtual network switch |
US8230050B1 (en) | 2008-12-10 | 2012-07-24 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Providing access to configurable private computer networks |
US8201237B1 (en) | 2008-12-10 | 2012-06-12 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Establishing secure remote access to private computer networks |
US8055770B2 (en) | 2008-12-15 | 2011-11-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for providing network virtualization |
US8271775B2 (en) | 2008-12-17 | 2012-09-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Layer two encryption for data center interconnectivity |
US20100157889A1 (en) | 2008-12-18 | 2010-06-24 | Motorola, Inc. | System and method for improving efficiency of broadcast communications in a multi-hop wireless mesh network |
US20100157888A1 (en) | 2008-12-18 | 2010-06-24 | Motorola, Inc. | System and method for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast communications in a multi-hop wireless mesh network |
US8316113B2 (en) | 2008-12-19 | 2012-11-20 | Watchguard Technologies, Inc. | Cluster architecture and configuration for network security devices |
TWI407810B (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2013-09-01 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp | Wireless network |
US8054832B1 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2011-11-08 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for routing between virtual resources based on a routing location policy |
US8331362B2 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2012-12-11 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for distributed dynamic network provisioning |
US8144582B2 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2012-03-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Differentiating blade destination and traffic types in a multi-root PCIe environment |
US8255496B2 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2012-08-28 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Method and apparatus for determining a network topology during network provisioning |
US9244838B2 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Teradata Us, Inc. | System, method, and computer-readable medium for grouping database level object access counts per processing module in a parallel processing system |
US8817596B2 (en) * | 2009-01-09 | 2014-08-26 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Protecting ingress and egress of a label switched path |
US7995483B1 (en) * | 2009-01-20 | 2011-08-09 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Simultaneously testing connectivity to multiple remote maintenance endpoints of the same maintenance association |
US20100185672A1 (en) * | 2009-01-21 | 2010-07-22 | Rising Iii Hawley K | Techniques for spatial representation of data and browsing based on similarity |
US20100192225A1 (en) * | 2009-01-28 | 2010-07-29 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Efficient application identification with network devices |
US8160069B2 (en) | 2009-01-30 | 2012-04-17 | Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated | System for forwarding a packet with a hierarchically structured variable-length identifier |
US7948986B1 (en) | 2009-02-02 | 2011-05-24 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Applying services within MPLS networks |
US8351418B2 (en) | 2009-02-19 | 2013-01-08 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System and method for point to multipoint inter-domain multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering path calculation |
US8213336B2 (en) | 2009-02-23 | 2012-07-03 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Distributed data center access switch |
EP2408155A4 (en) | 2009-03-09 | 2015-01-28 | Nec Corp | Openflow communication system and openflow communication method |
US8265075B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2012-09-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for managing, configuring, and controlling an I/O virtualization device through a network switch |
US20100250784A1 (en) | 2009-03-26 | 2010-09-30 | Terascale Supercomputing Inc. | Addressing Scheme and Message Routing for a Networked Device |
US8665886B2 (en) * | 2009-03-26 | 2014-03-04 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Redundant host connection in a routed network |
US7957400B2 (en) | 2009-03-26 | 2011-06-07 | Terascale Supercomputing Inc. | Hierarchical network topology |
US9043463B1 (en) * | 2009-03-30 | 2015-05-26 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Providing extendible network capabilities for managed computer networks |
CA3204215A1 (en) | 2009-04-01 | 2010-10-07 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for implementing and managing virtual switches |
US20100254385A1 (en) * | 2009-04-07 | 2010-10-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Service Insertion Architecture (SIA) in a Virtual Private Network (VPN) Aware Network |
WO2010121216A1 (en) | 2009-04-17 | 2010-10-21 | Viasat, Inc. | System, method and apparatus for providing end-to-end layer 2 connectivity |
US9049045B2 (en) * | 2009-04-24 | 2015-06-02 | Aruba Networks, Inc. | Peer-to-peer forwarding for packet-switched traffic |
US8589919B2 (en) | 2009-04-28 | 2013-11-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Traffic forwarding for virtual machines |
US8027354B1 (en) | 2009-04-29 | 2011-09-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Network consolidation for virtualized servers |
WO2010128905A1 (en) | 2009-05-05 | 2010-11-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | P2p for mobile providers |
US8538919B1 (en) | 2009-05-16 | 2013-09-17 | Eric H. Nielsen | System, method, and computer program for real time remote recovery of virtual computing machines |
US8867349B2 (en) | 2009-05-18 | 2014-10-21 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Regulation of network traffic in virtual private networks |
JP5355222B2 (en) | 2009-05-25 | 2013-11-27 | パナソニック株式会社 | Path setting device and path setting method |
US8477597B2 (en) * | 2009-05-27 | 2013-07-02 | Yin Zhang | Method and system for resilient routing reconfiguration |
US9497039B2 (en) | 2009-05-28 | 2016-11-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Agile data center network architecture |
EP2441005A2 (en) | 2009-06-09 | 2012-04-18 | Martin Vorbach | System and method for a cache in a multi-core processor |
US9014498B2 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2015-04-21 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Encoding a signal into a scalable bitstream and decoding such bitstream |
US9210065B2 (en) | 2009-06-22 | 2015-12-08 | Alcatel Lucent | Providing cloud-based services using dynamic network virtualization |
US8644188B1 (en) | 2009-06-25 | 2014-02-04 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Providing virtual networking functionality for managed computer networks |
US8098656B2 (en) * | 2009-06-26 | 2012-01-17 | Avaya, Inc. | Method and apparatus for implementing L2 VPNs on an IP network |
US8352941B1 (en) * | 2009-06-29 | 2013-01-08 | Emc Corporation | Scalable and secure high-level storage access for cloud computing platforms |
CN102656562B (en) * | 2009-06-30 | 2015-12-09 | 思杰系统有限公司 | For selecting the method and system of desktop executing location |
US8990433B2 (en) * | 2009-07-01 | 2015-03-24 | Riverbed Technology, Inc. | Defining network traffic processing flows between virtual machines |
US8634437B2 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2014-01-21 | Riverbed Technology, Inc. | Extended network protocols for communicating metadata with virtual machines |
US8954957B2 (en) * | 2009-07-01 | 2015-02-10 | Riverbed Technology, Inc. | Network traffic processing according to network traffic rule criteria and transferring network traffic metadata in a network device that includes hosted virtual machines |
BRPI0902339B1 (en) | 2009-07-01 | 2020-04-22 | Mahle Metal Leve S/A | piston ring |
US8572609B2 (en) * | 2009-07-01 | 2013-10-29 | Riverbed Technology, Inc. | Configuring bypass functionality of a network device based on the state of one or more hosted virtual machines |
US8650618B2 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2014-02-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Integrating service insertion architecture and virtual private network |
US9270542B2 (en) | 2009-07-31 | 2016-02-23 | Ixia | Apparatus and methods for forwarding data packets captured from a network |
US20110032830A1 (en) | 2009-08-06 | 2011-02-10 | Jacobus Van Der Merwe | Live Router Migration |
CN101640688B (en) | 2009-08-20 | 2014-03-12 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Content delivery network (CDN)-based switching method for main node controller and spare controller and CDN |
US8339994B2 (en) | 2009-08-27 | 2012-12-25 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Defining an optimal topology for a group of logical switches |
US9270580B1 (en) | 2009-08-28 | 2016-02-23 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Method and system for traffic isolation in a network |
US9876735B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2018-01-23 | Iii Holdings 2, Llc | Performance and power optimized computer system architectures and methods leveraging power optimized tree fabric interconnect |
US20110103391A1 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Smooth-Stone, Inc. C/O Barry Evans | System and method for high-performance, low-power data center interconnect fabric |
JP5560638B2 (en) | 2009-09-30 | 2014-07-30 | 富士通株式会社 | Communication apparatus and communication control method |
US8619779B2 (en) | 2009-09-30 | 2013-12-31 | Alcatel Lucent | Scalable architecture for enterprise extension in a cloud topology |
US8571031B2 (en) | 2009-10-07 | 2013-10-29 | Intel Corporation | Configurable frame processing pipeline in a packet switch |
US8599864B2 (en) | 2009-10-08 | 2013-12-03 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Transit switches in a network of logical switches |
US8780911B2 (en) | 2009-10-08 | 2014-07-15 | Force10 Networks, Inc. | Link aggregation based on port and protocol combination |
US20110085557A1 (en) | 2009-10-08 | 2011-04-14 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Partitioning of Switches and Fabrics into Logical Switches and Fabrics |
CN102474449B (en) * | 2009-11-02 | 2016-05-04 | 马维尔国际贸易有限公司 | Switch based on virtual interface and method |
US8537860B2 (en) | 2009-11-03 | 2013-09-17 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus for switching traffic between virtual machines |
US8442048B2 (en) | 2009-11-04 | 2013-05-14 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for configuring a virtual network switch |
US8625604B2 (en) * | 2009-12-01 | 2014-01-07 | Polytechnic Institute Of New York University | Hash-based prefix-compressed trie for IP route lookup |
US7937438B1 (en) | 2009-12-07 | 2011-05-03 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Using virtual networking devices to manage external connections |
US20110134931A1 (en) | 2009-12-08 | 2011-06-09 | Jacobus Van Der Merwe | Virtual router migration |
US8705513B2 (en) | 2009-12-15 | 2014-04-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus to communicatively couple virtual private networks to virtual machines within distributive computing networks |
US8224971B1 (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2012-07-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Using virtual networking devices and routing information to initiate external actions |
US7991859B1 (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2011-08-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Using virtual networking devices to connect managed computer networks |
US7953865B1 (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2011-05-31 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Using virtual networking devices to manage routing communications between connected computer networks |
US8239655B2 (en) * | 2010-01-18 | 2012-08-07 | Vmware, Inc. | Virtual target addressing during direct data access via VF of IO storage adapter |
US9826040B2 (en) * | 2010-01-28 | 2017-11-21 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | System and method for preventing collisions in a hierarchical network |
US8345558B2 (en) * | 2010-02-02 | 2013-01-01 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Packet-based memory test of a network device |
CN102148745B (en) * | 2010-02-08 | 2014-03-12 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method and system for increasing forwarding efficiency of virtual private LAN service network |
US8612627B1 (en) | 2010-03-03 | 2013-12-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Managing encoded multi-part communications for provided computer networks |
US8310957B1 (en) * | 2010-03-09 | 2012-11-13 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Minimum-cost spanning trees of unicast tunnels for multicast distribution |
US8458191B2 (en) * | 2010-03-15 | 2013-06-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system to store RDF data in a relational store |
US8537720B2 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2013-09-17 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Aggregating data traffic from access domains |
WO2011121664A1 (en) | 2010-03-31 | 2011-10-06 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Communication network control system and control method |
US8224931B1 (en) | 2010-03-31 | 2012-07-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Managing use of intermediate destination computing nodes for provided computer networks |
US8635375B2 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2014-01-21 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Remote F—ports |
US8611352B2 (en) * | 2010-04-20 | 2013-12-17 | Marvell World Trade Ltd. | System and method for adapting a packet processing pipeline |
US8472438B2 (en) | 2010-04-23 | 2013-06-25 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Efficient encapsulation of packets transmitted on a packet-pseudowire over a packet switched network |
US8345692B2 (en) | 2010-04-27 | 2013-01-01 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Virtual switching overlay for cloud computing |
US8504718B2 (en) | 2010-04-28 | 2013-08-06 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a context layer switch |
US8811398B2 (en) | 2010-04-30 | 2014-08-19 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Method for routing data packets using VLANs |
US9461840B2 (en) | 2010-06-02 | 2016-10-04 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Port profile management for virtual cluster switching |
US8989186B2 (en) * | 2010-06-08 | 2015-03-24 | Brocade Communication Systems, Inc. | Virtual port grouping for virtual cluster switching |
US8625616B2 (en) | 2010-05-11 | 2014-01-07 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Converged network extension |
US8407366B2 (en) | 2010-05-14 | 2013-03-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Interconnecting members of a virtual network |
US8767731B2 (en) * | 2010-05-19 | 2014-07-01 | Alcatel Lucent | Method and apparatus for MPLS label allocation for a BGP MAC-VPN |
US8667171B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2014-03-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual data center allocation with bandwidth guarantees |
CN102577331B (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2015-08-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Virtual 2nd layer and make its extendible mechanism |
US8989187B2 (en) | 2010-06-04 | 2015-03-24 | Coraid, Inc. | Method and system of scaling a cloud computing network |
US8374183B2 (en) | 2010-06-22 | 2013-02-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Distributed virtual network gateways |
US8260914B1 (en) * | 2010-06-22 | 2012-09-04 | Narus, Inc. | Detecting DNS fast-flux anomalies |
US8909053B2 (en) | 2010-06-24 | 2014-12-09 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Tenant isolation in a multi-tenant cloud system |
US8897134B2 (en) * | 2010-06-25 | 2014-11-25 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Notifying a controller of a change to a packet forwarding configuration of a network element over a communication channel |
US8897303B2 (en) | 2010-06-29 | 2014-11-25 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Delegate gateways and proxy for target hosts in large layer 2 and address resolution with duplicated internet protocol addresses |
US8239572B1 (en) | 2010-06-30 | 2012-08-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Custom routing decisions |
US9525647B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-12-20 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements |
US8964528B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for robust packet distribution among hierarchical managed switching elements |
US8717895B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-05-06 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization apparatus and method with a table mapping engine |
US9680750B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2017-06-13 | Nicira, Inc. | Use of tunnels to hide network addresses |
US10103939B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-10-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets |
US8456984B2 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2013-06-04 | Ciena Corporation | Virtualized shared protection capacity |
US9118591B2 (en) * | 2010-07-30 | 2015-08-25 | Broadcom Corporation | Distributed switch domain of heterogeneous components |
US8488608B2 (en) * | 2010-08-04 | 2013-07-16 | Alcatel Lucent | System and method for traffic distribution in a multi-chassis link aggregation |
US8472447B2 (en) * | 2010-08-04 | 2013-06-25 | Alcatel Lucent | IP multicast snooping and routing with multi-chassis link aggregation |
US8351325B2 (en) | 2010-08-18 | 2013-01-08 | Yr20 | Method and system for layer-2 pseudo-wire rapid-deployment service over unknown internet protocol networks |
US8565108B1 (en) | 2010-09-28 | 2013-10-22 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Network data transmission analysis |
WO2012053031A1 (en) | 2010-10-19 | 2012-04-26 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Storage apparatus and virtual port migration method for storage apparatus |
US20120099602A1 (en) | 2010-10-25 | 2012-04-26 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | End-to-end virtualization |
US8621058B2 (en) | 2010-10-28 | 2013-12-31 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Providing cloud-based computing services |
US8699499B2 (en) | 2010-12-08 | 2014-04-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus to provision cloud computing network elements |
EP2652906A4 (en) | 2010-12-15 | 2014-03-19 | Zanttz Inc | Network stimulation engine |
US8943221B2 (en) * | 2010-12-16 | 2015-01-27 | Openet Telecom Ltd. | Methods, systems and devices for pipeline processing |
US9379975B2 (en) | 2011-01-05 | 2016-06-28 | Nec Corporation | Communication control system, control server, forwarding node, communication control method, and communication control program |
US8560626B2 (en) | 2011-01-13 | 2013-10-15 | Vmware, Inc. | Selecting a master node using a suitability value |
US8570865B2 (en) | 2011-02-14 | 2013-10-29 | Mellanox Technologies Ltd. | Reducing power consumption in a fat-tree network |
US8665739B2 (en) | 2011-03-16 | 2014-03-04 | Juniper Networks, Inc. | Packet loss measurement at service endpoints of a virtual private LAN service |
US8676980B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2014-03-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Distributed load balancer in a virtual machine environment |
WO2012126488A1 (en) | 2011-03-24 | 2012-09-27 | Nec Europe Ltd. | Method for operating a flow-based switching system and switching system |
US8848716B2 (en) | 2011-04-11 | 2014-09-30 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Termination of a pseudowires on multiple line cards |
US9043452B2 (en) | 2011-05-04 | 2015-05-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for port isolation |
US8670450B2 (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2014-03-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | Efficient software-based private VLAN solution for distributed virtual switches |
US8793685B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2014-07-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Techniques for operating virtual switches in a virtualized computing environment |
US8873398B2 (en) | 2011-05-23 | 2014-10-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Implementing EPC in a cloud computer with openflow data plane |
US9319459B2 (en) | 2011-09-19 | 2016-04-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Services controlled session based flow interceptor |
-
2011
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,530 patent/US8717895B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,540 patent/US8750119B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,534 patent/US8837493B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,539 patent/US8817621B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,537 patent/US8880468B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,538 patent/US8830823B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,532 patent/US8743888B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,536 patent/US8959215B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,543 patent/US8842679B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,533 patent/US8817620B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,535 patent/US8750164B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,541 patent/US8966040B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,529 patent/US8743889B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,546 patent/US8958292B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,531 patent/US8718070B2/en active Active
- 2011-07-06 US US13/177,545 patent/US8761036B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-25 US US13/218,427 patent/US9106587B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-25 US US13/218,431 patent/US9172663B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-25 US US13/218,433 patent/US8775594B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/219,557 patent/US9391928B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,471 patent/US9112811B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,464 patent/US9049153B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/219,533 patent/US8964598B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,472 patent/US9007903B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,468 patent/US8913483B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,477 patent/US9306875B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/218,467 patent/US9300603B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/219,578 patent/US9363210B2/en active Active
- 2011-08-26 US US13/219,562 patent/US9008087B2/en active Active
- 2011-09-06 US US13/225,554 patent/US9077664B2/en active Active
- 2011-09-06 US US13/225,553 patent/US9692655B2/en active Active
- 2011-11-02 US US13/288,023 patent/US9231891B2/en active Active
-
2015
- 2015-10-26 US US14/923,426 patent/US11509564B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-03-21 US US15/076,634 patent/US10038597B2/en active Active
- 2016-06-03 US US15/173,611 patent/US10326660B2/en active Active
- 2016-06-14 US US15/181,685 patent/US11223531B2/en active Active
-
2018
- 2018-07-12 US US16/034,035 patent/US10686663B2/en active Active
-
2019
- 2019-06-09 US US16/435,519 patent/US11539591B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-06-15 US US16/902,251 patent/US11743123B2/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-12-11 US US17/548,529 patent/US11876679B2/en active Active
-
2022
- 2022-11-18 US US17/989,864 patent/US20230164032A1/en active Pending
- 2022-12-26 US US18/088,763 patent/US12028215B2/en active Active
-
2023
- 2023-08-28 US US18/239,084 patent/US20240039791A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7263290B2 (en) * | 2002-06-06 | 2007-08-28 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Network operating system with distributed data architecture |
Cited By (62)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10103939B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-10-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets |
US11677588B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2023-06-13 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements |
US9172663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-10-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US8743888B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-06-03 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method |
US9300603B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-03-29 | Nicira, Inc. | Use of rich context tags in logical data processing |
US8750119B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-06-10 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method with table mapping engine |
US8761036B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-06-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method with quality of service controls |
US8775594B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-07-08 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control system with a distributed hash table |
US8817621B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-08-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization apparatus |
US8830823B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-09-09 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed control platform for large-scale production networks |
US8837493B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-09-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control apparatus and method |
US8842679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-09-23 | Nicira, Inc. | Control system that elects a master controller instance for switching elements |
US8880468B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-11-04 | Nicira, Inc. | Secondary storage architecture for a network control system that utilizes a primary network information base |
US8913483B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-12-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Fault tolerant managed switching element architecture |
US12028215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2024-07-02 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US11979280B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2024-05-07 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets |
US8959215B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization |
US8958292B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method with port security controls |
US8964598B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US8964528B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for robust packet distribution among hierarchical managed switching elements |
US8966040B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-02-24 | Nicira, Inc. | Use of network information base structure to establish communication between applications |
US9007903B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-04-14 | Nicira, Inc. | Managing a network by controlling edge and non-edge switching elements |
US9008087B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-04-14 | Nicira, Inc. | Processing requests in a network control system with multiple controller instances |
US11876679B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2024-01-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US9049153B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-06-02 | Nicira, Inc. | Logical packet processing pipeline that retains state information to effectuate efficient processing of packets |
US9077664B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-07-07 | Nicira, Inc. | One-hop packet processing in a network with managed switching elements |
US9106587B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-08-11 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control system with one master controller per managed switching element |
US9112811B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2015-08-18 | Nicira, Inc. | Managed switching elements used as extenders |
US11743123B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2023-08-29 | Nicira, Inc. | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US9231891B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-01-05 | Nicira, Inc. | Deployment of hierarchical managed switching elements |
US8743889B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-06-03 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for using a network information base to control a plurality of shared network infrastructure switching elements |
US8718070B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-05-06 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network virtualization apparatus and method |
US8750164B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-06-10 | Nicira, Inc. | Hierarchical managed switch architecture |
US9306875B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-04-05 | Nicira, Inc. | Managed switch architectures for implementing logical datapath sets |
US9363210B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-06-07 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US9391928B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-07-12 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US9525647B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2016-12-20 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements |
US11641321B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2023-05-02 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet processing for logical datapath sets |
US11539591B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-12-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set |
US9680750B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2017-06-13 | Nicira, Inc. | Use of tunnels to hide network addresses |
US9692655B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2017-06-27 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet processing in a network with hierarchical managed switching elements |
US11509564B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-11-22 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for replicating network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US11223531B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2022-01-11 | Nicira, Inc. | Method and apparatus for interacting with a network information base in a distributed network control system with multiple controller instances |
US10021019B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-07-10 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet processing for logical datapath sets |
US10038597B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2018-07-31 | Nicira, Inc. | Mesh architectures for managed switching elements |
US10686663B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2020-06-16 | Nicira, Inc. | Managed switch architectures: software managed switches, hardware managed switches, and heterogeneous managed switches |
US8717895B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2014-05-06 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization apparatus and method with a table mapping engine |
US10326660B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2019-06-18 | Nicira, Inc. | Network virtualization apparatus and method |
US10320585B2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2019-06-11 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements |
US9043452B2 (en) | 2011-05-04 | 2015-05-26 | Nicira, Inc. | Network control apparatus and method for port isolation |
WO2015006243A2 (en) | 2013-07-08 | 2015-01-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Storing network state at a network controller |
WO2015006143A1 (en) | 2013-07-08 | 2015-01-15 | Nicira, Inc. | Unified replication mechanism for fault-tolerance of state |
EP3355534A1 (en) | 2013-07-12 | 2018-08-01 | Nicira Inc. | Tracing network packets at a managed forwarding element |
US9588947B1 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2017-03-07 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Integrated administrative interface for open network programming applications |
US10664297B2 (en) | 2014-02-24 | 2020-05-26 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Activating pre-created VNFCs when a monitored performance level of a VNF exceeds a maximum value attainable by the combined VNFCs that form a VNF |
WO2015126430A1 (en) * | 2014-02-24 | 2015-08-27 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Virtual network function management with deactivated virtual machines |
EP3435596A1 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2019-01-30 | Nicira Inc. | Route advertisement by managed gateways |
WO2015138043A2 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2015-09-17 | Nicira, Inc. | Route advertisement by managed gateways |
US9876704B2 (en) * | 2014-03-27 | 2018-01-23 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet tracing in a software-defined networking environment |
US20160380874A1 (en) * | 2014-03-27 | 2016-12-29 | Nicira, Inc. | Packet tracing in a software-defined networking environment |
US10911331B2 (en) | 2016-03-22 | 2021-02-02 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Service configuration method and apparatus for network service |
CN107222324A (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2017-09-29 | 华为技术有限公司 | The business collocation method and device of network service |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US12028215B2 (en) | Distributed network control system with one master controller per logical datapath set | |
US11677588B2 (en) | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements | |
US11979280B2 (en) | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets | |
US9043452B2 (en) | Network control apparatus and method for port isolation | |
US9288104B2 (en) | Chassis controllers for converting universal flows | |
US9137107B2 (en) | Physical controllers for converting universal flows | |
US20230412425A1 (en) | Network control apparatus and method for creating and modifying logical switching elements | |
US20240259265A1 (en) | Network control apparatus and method for populating logical datapath sets |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NICIRA NETWORKS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:KOPONEN, TEEMU;THAKKAR, PANKAJ;CASADO, MARTIN;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20111027 TO 20111130;REEL/FRAME:027987/0967 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NICIRA, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:NICIRA NETWORKS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:028381/0048 Effective date: 20120330 |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551) Year of fee payment: 4 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Year of fee payment: 8 |